You are on page 1of 3000

syngo MR Operator Manual

Magnetic Resonance
Operator Manual
Version syngo MR 2006T

0.0

medical

Manufacturers note:

0.0

Products, that are bearing a CE mark fulfill the provisions of the


Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices.
0.0
The CE mark applies exclusively to medical equipment and
products that are released under the relevant EU guidelines
mentioned above.
0.0
0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

2005 Siemens AG
All rights reserved

0.0

Siemens AG
Wittelsbacherplatz 2
80333 Mnchen
Germany

0.0

0.0

Contact Information:
Siemens AG, Medical Solutions
Magnetic Resonance
Henkestrae 127
91052 Erlangen
Germany

0.0

Telephone: +49 9131 84-0


www.SiemensMedical.com
DokuMR@med.siemens.de

0.0

Print No. MR-05000.621.04.01.24


Printed in Germany

0.0

AG 09.05

0.0

0.0

syngo MR

syngo MR 2006T

Summary of contents
Basics

Security Package

Managing and Adjusting the


System

Patient Browser

Patient Registration

Examination

Viewing

3D Evaluation

Storing and Data Exchange

Neuro 3D

Postprocessing Images

iii

Summary of contents

syngo MR

Vessel View

Composing

Filming

References

Index

0.0

iv

Operator Manual

syngo MR

Table of contents
A Basics
A.1

General Information

A.2

Basics for Beginners

A.3

Configuring the User Interface

A.4

Service Functions

B Security Package
B.1

Introduction

B.2

Information for Administrators

B.3

Information for Users

B.4

Information for Service Technicians

C Managing and Adjusting the System


C.1

System Manager

C.2

Adjusting the System

D Patient Browser
D.1

Introduction

D.2

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.3

Transferring Data to other Applications

D.4

Correcting Data

D.5

Storing, Sending and Filming Data

D.6

Maintaining your Data

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

Table of contents

syngo MR

D.7

Configuring the Patient Browser

D.8

Reporting

E Patient Registration
E.1

Introduction

E.2

Registering a New Patient

E.3

Registering a Known Patient

E.4

Configuring Patient Registration

F Examination
F.1

Introduction to the MR Examination

F.2

Loading the Scan Program

F.3

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

F.4

Positioning Slices

F.5

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.6

Performing a routine examination

F.7

Using a contrast agent

F.8

Positioning the Patient Table

F.9

Working with instruction areas

F.10

Inline Display

F.11

Patient instructions

F.12

Protocol and Pause Properties

F.13

Printing protocols

0.0

vi

Operator Manual

syngo MR

Table of contents

F.14

SAR and Stimulation Monitoring

F.15

Physiologically Controlled Scans

F.16

Organizing Scan Programs

F.17

Maestro Layout and Movie Display (Option)

F.18

Breast Biopsy

F.19

Automatic position correction

F.20

Quality measurement

G Viewing
G.1

Introduction

G.2

Loading and Displaying Images

G.3

Scrolling and Selecting Images

G.4

Processing Images

G.5

2D Evaluation

G.6

Position display

G.7

Saving and Documenting Images

G.8

Configuring the Viewing Task Card

H 3D Evaluation
H.1

Introduction

H.2

Transferring Images to 3D

H.3

Working in 3D

H.4

Multiplanar Reconstruction (MPR)

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

vii

Table of contents

syngo MR

H.5

Maximum and Minimum Intensity Projection

H.6

Reconstructing Surfaces (SSD)

H.7

Volume Rendering Technique (VRT)

H.8

Selecting and Processing Images

H.9

3D Editor

H.10 Fusion
H.11 Fly Through
H.12 Saving 3D Series and Images
H.13 Filming, Evaluating and Sending 3D Images
H.14 3D Configuration

J Storing and Data Exchange


J.1

Introduction

J.2

Storing Data on an External Medium

J.3

Sending Data via the Network

J.4

Exchanging Data via the Hard Disk

J.5

Automatic Storing and Sending

J.6

Checking Data Transfer

J.7

Configuring Data Transfer

0.0

viii

Operator Manual

syngo MR

Table of contents

K Neuro 3D
K.1

Introduction

K.2

Loading images

K.3

Changing the anatomical display

K.4

Displaying functional information

K.5

Neuro 3D Evaluation

K.6

Saving and filming images

L Postprocessing Images
L.1

Dynamic Analysis

L.2

Evaluating Images with Mean Curve

L.3

Image filtration and distortion correction

L.4

Viewing and Evaluating BOLD Images

L.5

Evaluating Perfusion-Weighted Images

L.6

Soft Tissue Evaluation MR

M Vessel View
M.1

Introduction

M.2

Loading and displaying images

M.3

Defining Vessels

M.4

Evaluating vessels

M.5

Saving and documenting evaluations

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

ix

Table of contents

syngo MR

N Composing
N.1

Introduction

N.2

Image selection and reconstruction

N.3

Viewing images

N.4

Evaluations

N.5

Saving and documenting images

O Filming
O.1

Introduction

O.2

Semi-automatic/Manual Filming

O.3

Viewing and Processing Film Sheets and Images

O.4

Changing Film Settings for a Film Job

O.5

Checking Film Jobs

O.6

Configuring Filming

P References
P.1

Scan Parameters

P.2

Text Annotations in Medical Images

Index

0.0

Operator Manual

syngo MR

Special Information

0.0

This manual is part of the multi-volume operating instructions


for the magnetic resonance tomograph of the MAGNETOM
family.
0.0
0.0

N OT E
The magnetic resonance tomographs of the Magnetom
family are not devices with measuring functions.
0.0
Measured values obtained are for information only and
cannot be used as the sole basis for diagnosis.

0.0

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

xi

Revision Info

syngo MR

Changes to previous version

0.0

In comparison to the previous version new coils are used for the
MAGNETOMS Symphony and Trio. The corresponding coil
abbreviations are listed in Chapter Text Annotations in Medical
Images.
Page P.28
0.0
0.0

0.0

xii

Operator Manual

syngo MR

Revision Info

New coordinate system

0.0

The syngo MR software and its predecessor Numaris (including Numaris 3.5) use different patient coordinate systems. 0.0
It is important to remember this when diagnosing MR images
acquired in Numaris under syngo MR .
0.0
If you have any questions about converting the different coordinate systems, please contact your applications specialist.
0.0

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

xiii

Revision Info

syngo MR

Coordinate system for Numaris 3 and


Numaris 3.5 (+FAL)

0.0

The slice positions are positive in the Feet, Anterior, and Left
directions as seen from the magnet isocenter.
0.0

MR images based on this patient-oriented coordinate system


are only converted when exporting them into a DICOM format.0.0

0.0

xiv

Operator Manual

syngo MR

Revision Info

Coordinate system for syngo MR (DICOM


standard, +LPH)

0.0

The slice positions are positive in the Left, Posterior, and Head
directions as seen from the magnet isocenter.
0.0

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

xv

Revision Info

syngo MR

The following overview shows how the direction of the slice


position changes as it moves from minus to plus.
0.0
0.0

Direction of slice position


Numaris 3 and Numaris 3.5

+FAL

syngo MR

+LPH

If the slice position ascends, the slices move toward the positive
coordinates:
0.0

Numaris 3 and
Numaris 3.5

0.0

syngo MR

0.0

The transverse slice moves in the (F) direction of the feet.


The coronal slice moves in the anterior (A) direction.
The sagittal slice moves in the left (L) direction.
The transverse slice moves in the (H) direction of the head.
The coronal slice moves in the posterior (P) direction.
The sagittal slice moves in the left (L) direction.
0.0

NOTE
Beginning with software version MRease VA12A, the
image text changes for the slice position. Instead of the sign
"+" or "-", directional abbreviations such as L, P or H, or R,
A or F are shown.
0.0

0.0

0.0

xvi

Operator Manual

PART

Basics

A.0

A.1 General Information


Safety-related information .............................................. A.14
Warning messages .................................................... A.15
Software installation and network .............................. A.16
Virus protection .......................................................... A.17

A.2 Basics for Beginners


The application program ................................................ A.22
Mouse and keyboard ..................................................... A.23
The mouse ................................................................. A.23
The mouse pointer ..................................................... A.24
Using the mouse ........................................................ A.25
The keyboard ............................................................. A.27
Using the keyboard .................................................... A.28
Entering commands and data ...................................... A.216
Selecting objects ..................................................... A.216
Moving or copying objects ....................................... A.218
Changing the image display .................................... A.221
Entering text ............................................................ A.222
Windows ...................................................................... A.223
Layout of windows ................................................... A.223
Resizing and moving a window ............................... A.225
Switching between windows .................................... A.229
Dialog boxes ............................................................ A.230
Operating elements in boxes and on tab cards ....... A.232
Using tab cards ............................................................ A.236
Task cards ............................................................... A.237
Subtask cards .......................................................... A.240

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A1

Contents

Basics

Using menus ................................................................ A.241


Application-specific menus....................................... A.241
Dropdown menus of the menu bar ........................... A.243
Popup menus ........................................................... A.246
Status bar ..................................................................... A.247
Resource check ............................................................ A.248
Text information in medical images .............................. A.250

A.3 Configuring the User Interface


Calling up configuration windows ................................... A.32
Defining the regional settings ......................................... A.35
Configuring image text ................................................... A.37
Exiting a configuration window ..................................... A.312

A.4 Service Functions


Displaying the maintenance status ................................. A.42
Local service .................................................................. A.44
Remote service access .................................................. A.45
Logbook .......................................................................... A.47
Configuring the MR system ............................................ A.48

0.0

A2

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

A.1

General Information

A.1

This chapter contains general information about syngo MR.

A.1

A.1

Operating system

A.1

The program syngo MR uses the operating system Windows


XP.
A.1
syngo MR is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.

A.1

C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Impermissible or faulty manipulations or
changes of the hardware or software can cause the system
to malfunction.
A.1
Consequence: This can cause injury and/or damage to the
equipment.
A.1
Remedy: You are therefore not permitted to open or remove
the cladding of the equipment, to install third-party software
or to connect the system to a network.
A.1

Depending on the operating system there may be slight variations in the color display of dialog boxes and windows.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.11

General Information

Security in syngo MR

Basics

A.1

Security in syngo MR" provides the whole functionality necessary for the protection of patient data.
A.1
Privileges allow an user to execute syngo MR functions, such
as sending data over network or invoking the patient registration.

Log on

A.1

After you have switched on the computer and before you start
working you must log on as a user.
Page B.35, Logging on and off
A.1
A.1

NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are lost
irretrievably.

A.1

Always check whether data still needs to be saved and save


any data you want to keep before you log off.
A.1

Program start

A.1

After log on the applications start automatically.

A.1

0.0

A.12

Operator Manual

Basics

Rebooting of main and


satellite consoles

General Information

A.1

During startup of your system the main console and the satellite
consoles are also automatically started up. If you reboot the
main console manually, make sure to reboot the satellite consoles as well.
A.1

System administration

A.1

You find more information on security and system administration in Part B, Security Package.
A.1

Audit trail

A.1

In a secure system, all actions on data are logged.


Page B.271, Audit trail and log files
A.1

Names and designations


used

A.1

All names and data of patients and institutions that are used in
this operator manual are entirely fictional.
A.1
Any resemblance to names of existing people or organizations
past or present is entirely coincidental.
A.1

Configuration-dependent designations, such as names of


drives, network nodes, and databases, that are used in this
operator manual are usually not the same as the designations
to be found on a particular installation of the system in a particular hospital.
A.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.13

General Information

Basics

Safety-related information

A.1

Safety instructions and other important information for cases


such instructions are part of general text are indicated as follows in this manual:
A.1
A.1

WA R N I N G
Indicates potential dangers that could cause injury or death
in extreme cases.
A.1

The syngo MR system was designed and built so that it cannot cause death if used properly.
A.1

C AU T I O N
Indicates potential (direct) dangers that could cause minor
injury or damage to the system.
A.1

A.1

N OT E
Notes regarding optimum use of the system and other
useful information.

A.1

0.0

A.14

Operator Manual

Basics

General Information

Warning messages

A.1

The systems informs you about problems that have occurred by


displaying message dialog boxes. There are three categories of
messages:
A.1
General Danger Warnings
(High Priority Error)

A.1

This type of warning message informs the user about serious


problems that require your immediate intervention and
response (e.g., danger for patient and system). The danger
message remains on the screen until you confirm it.
A.1

Task Specific Warnings


(Error Message Type 1)

A.1

This type of warning message is application and task card specific. The message occurs within the active workflow/task and
requires your decision, but not immediately. You can confirm the
message and continue work, but you can also switch to another
task card and confirm the message later.
A.1

Information Messages

A.1

This type of message only provides additional information (e.g.,


about the result of a performed task). Just confirm the message
by clicking OK.
A.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.15

General Information

Basics

Software installation and network

A.1

The syngo MR platform is shipped with precautions regarding


data security and prevention of external access with bad intent.
No additional protection (firewall) is included.
A.1
A.1

C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Impermissible or faulty manipulations/
changes of the software or connection of the system to a
network
A.1
Consequence: Unauthorized access.

A.1

Remedy: Make sure all necessary precautions with respect


to the existing level of security are considered when adding
a functionality or altering the shipped configuration. A.1

A.1

C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Reduced system performance due to
overload of the network environment.
A.1
Consequence: Unexpected system behavior.
Remedy: Only use syngo MR in a secure and loadadapted network.

A.1

A.1

0.0

A.16

Operator Manual

Basics

General Information

Virus protection

A.1

As a user of a networked PC you should be aware of the possibility of an infection with computer viruses or other damaging
software.
A.1
Prevention

A.1

The focus lies on prevention of such an infection:

A.1

All precautions have been taken to ensure data security and


to prevent access to your syngo MR system with negative
intent.
Data traffic through all unnecessary ports or "doors" is
blocked. Data exchange is restricted to defined paths only.
This includes the service interface and makes syngo MR
extremely secure.
Additional protection (such as a virus scanner, a local firewall,
etc.) is not installed.
A.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.17

General Information

Suitable topology

Basics

A.1

A good and secure network architecture is able to reject most


attacks from viruses, worms etc. The network architects and IT
administrators of a hospital use a suitable topology with the best
protection of the medical devices connected.
A.1
Medical devices shall always be connected within sub-networks that are separated from the rest of the office equipment by a firewall PC.
Mail programs that may receive virus infected attachments or
browser software with connection to the Internet are a potential risk for all systems connected to the same subnet.
We recommend to prohibit this type of data transfer into the
subnets of medical devices.
As far as queries are concerned the system should only be
queryable from remote nodes.

0.0

A.18

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

A.2

Basics for Beginners

A.2

This chapter is addressed to beginners with experience using


computers and Windows XP.
A.2
It is intended to enable you to use the applications and enter
data.
A.2
You are first given a short overview of the user interface of the
program. After that, an explanation is given of how to operate
the computer using the mouse and keyboard.
A.2
This chapter also explains the command and input elements on
the programs user interface.
A.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.21

Basics for Beginners

Basics

The application program

A.2

After start up, the user interface of the program will appear on
your screen, with the Exam task card in the foreground.
The user interface is subdivided into the following areas:
A.2

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Menu bar
Image and workspace of the task cards
Tabs of the task cards
Tabs of the subtask cards
Stack of subtask cards
Status bar

0.0

A.22

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

Mouse and keyboard

A.2

In order to execute commands on the computer or to input data


you can use the mouse and/or the keyboard.
A.2

The mouse
A.2

Your mouse has three buttons.

A.2

A.2

You can start actions of the program with the mouse buttons.
With the left button you select objects and start applications and
actions, with the right button you open popup menus and with
the center button you change the window values of images. A.2
With the mouse you can:

A.2

Move the mouse pointer


Select and mark objects
Copy and move objects
Start applications and actions
Edit images
Call up menus

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.23

Basics for Beginners

Basics

The mouse pointer


A.2

A.2

The mouse pointer follows every movement of the mouse on


the screen.
A.2

A.2

If you have lost sight of the mouse pointer, simply move the
mouse.
Depending on the application which is currently active and the
action you want to perform the appearance of the mouse
pointer can change.
A.2

Cursor
A.2

Position the mouse pointer in a field in which you want to


enter text.
The mouse pointer changes its shape and becomes a vertical
line. It is now a text cursor indicating where characters can be
typed in will appear.
A.2

0.0

A.24

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

Using the mouse

A.2

First place the mouse pointer on an object, for example an


image. You can then perform the following actions:
A.2

Single click

A.2

Press a mouse button briefly and release it again. Do not move


the mouse while doing this.
A.2
You select an object with the left mouse button,
with the right mouse button you call up popup menus.

A.2

Double-click

A.2

Double-clicking means pressing the mouse button twice in


quick succession and then releasing the button again.
A.2
Double-clicking is used to start programs (left mouse button),
for example, or for auto-windowing (center mouse button).

A.2

Dragging

A.2

Press the mouse button and move the mouse while holding the
button down. With this action you can draw graphics, for example (left mouse button), or set window levels (center mouse button).
A.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.25

Basics for Beginners

Drag & drop

Basics

A.2

Click an object with the left mouse button, move it while holding
the mouse button down and release the mouse button again. A.2

A.2

Calling up the
popup menu

A.2

With the key combination Shift + F10 and a single click of the
right mouse button you can call up a pop menu for the selected
object or active area of the screen (except Viewing).
Page A.25, Using the mouse
A.2

0.0

A.26

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

The keyboard

A.2

You use the keyboard to enter text and numbers. You can also
call up certain functions and start programs using key combinations and the keys of the numeric keypad.
A.2

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Function keys
Typewriter keyboard
Cursor keypad
Symbol keypad

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.27

Basics for Beginners

Basics

Using the keyboard

A.2

Practically all commands can be performed using either the


mouse or the keyboard.
A.2

Entering text and


numbers

A.2

The keys on the typewriter keyboard are normally used to enter


text and numbers as well as commands.
A.2

Deleting characters

A.2

Pressing the Backspace deletes the character in front of the


cursor; pressing the Del key deletes the character following the
cursor. If a text is marked you can use either of these keys to
delete it.
A.2

Moving the cursor

A.2

With the cursor keys you can move the text cursor
within a text entry field. With the keys Home and End you move
the cursor to the first and last position within the text.
A.2

Calling up help

A.2

Press the F1 key to call up the Online Help supplied with the
program.
A.2

Calling up task cards

A.2

Press the function keys F6 to F8, to call up the individual task


cards.
Page A.237, Task cards
A.2

0.0

A.28

Operator Manual

Basics

Setting the keyboard


focus

Basics for Beginners

A.2

The user interface of the Exam task card is divided into separate areas, e.g. image area or program control. If you want to
operate the program quickly via the keyboard you can activate
the input and operation tools of the interface separately, one
after the other. By doing this, you are placing a focus on a specific object on the user interface to enable input via keyboard.A.2
For this purpose, press the Tab key on your keyboard to jump
forwards.
Or

A.2

Press the keys Shift + Tab to jump backwards.


The keyboard focus jumps from object to object.

A.2

Press the Tab key until you reach the object that you want to
operate via the keyboard.
The object which currently has the keyboard focus is marked.A.2
Buttons are marked with a broken line border.
A.2

List entries have a blue background.


A.2

Entries in the program card are marked with a broken line border.
A.2

Entries in the program card are marked with a broken line border and have a blue background.
A.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.29

Basics for Beginners

Keyboard focus on the


image area

Basics

A.2

The keyboard focus can only be placed on an entire image area


i.e. on all two or three image segments. The image area is then
surrounded by a fine white border. You can still see the input
focus (dotted blue border) in the image area, showing you
which image segment your entries apply to.
A.2

Paging through
card stacks

A.2

If the keyboard focus is on a card stack, you can also move individual cards to the foreground via keyboard commands.
A.2
Press keys Ctrl + or Ctrl + to jump to the left or to the
right.
If the card in the foreground is itself subdivided into cards, such
as the System parameter card, you can also move these cards
to the foreground via the keyboard.
A.2
To do this, press the Shift + Ctrl keys + or the Shift + Ctrl
keys + to jump to the left or to the right.
The keyboard focus is then on the previously set input object
that is marked as such.
A.2

Jumping within objects

A.2

You can move the keyboard focus using the tab key within
objects, e.g. program control or parameter cards.
A.2

0.0

A.210

Operator Manual

Basics

Starting applications and


functions

Basics for Beginners

A.2

The symbol keypad of your system looks different from the


numeric keypad on a standard PC keyboard. These keys have
been assigned special functions on your system. The symbols
on each key help you to easily identify the respective functions.A.2
If your system is not equipped with the original Siemens keyboard, you can call up these functions and programs using
the corresponding keys on your standard numeric keypad.

Window Center - (Num. Num)


(Brightness -)

Window Center + (Num. /)


(Brightness +)

Window Width - (Num. *)


(Contrast -)

Window Width + (Num. -)


(Contrast +)

Auto Windowing (Num. 9)

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.211

Basics for Beginners

Basics

Scroll study back (Num. 7)

Scroll study forward (Num. 8)

Scroll series back (Num. 4)

Scroll series forward (Num. 5)

Scroll image back (Num. 1)

Scroll image forward (Num. 2)

Correct image text (Num. 6)


(not supported by this SW Version)

0.0

A.212

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

Call up Patient Registration (Num. 0)

Call up Patient Browser (Num.)

Copy to Film Sheet (Num. Return)

Mark (Num. 3)

Send To Node 1 (Num. +)

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.213

Basics for Beginners

Using shortcuts

Basics

A.2

With the key combinations Ctrl or Alt or Windows plus another


key you can give commands to your computer very quickly. A.2
You can execute all functions by pressing the Alt key together
with the key of the letter underlined in the menu item or on the
button. In this way, you can operate the program without using
the mouse.
Here is a table of the most important key combinations:

A.2

A.2

Alt + F4

Close Patient Browser

Alt + Tab

Switch to another active Windows application


A.2

Ctrl + Tab

Switch active task card / page through stack of cards

Ctrl + Shift +
Tab

Switch active task card backwards / page through stack of


cards backwards

Ctrl + C

Copy

Ctrl + I

Import data

Ctrl + P

Expose film task

Ctrl + S

Save (only 3D taskcard)

Ctrl + X

Cut (only Filming taskcard)

Ctrl + V

Paste

Ctrl + W

Save window values

0.0

A.214

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

A.2

Windows

Show start menu

Windows + D

Minimize or restore all windows

Windows + E

Open Windows Explorer

Windows + F

Open search dialog

Windows + Ctrl + F

Open search dialog for computer

Windows + F1

Show help

Windows + R

Show run dialog

Windows + Pause

Show system properties dialog

Windows + Shift +
M

Undo minimize all windows

Windows + L

Lock workstation

Windows + U

Open utility manager

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.215

Basics for Beginners

Basics

Entering commands and data

A.2

You always have several options for entering commands or data


on the computer. You can use the mouse and/or the keyboard.
A.2

Selecting objects

A.2

You can select an object (e.g. an image or a patient) by clicking


it with the left mouse button.
A.2
Selected objects are marked. Images are given a border,
graphic objects such as ROIs (region of interest) are displayed with grab handles, icons and text (e.g. in list entries)
are highlighted (e.g. white on black).
Examples:

A.2

The selected patient entry in the window of the Patient


Browser is displayed highlighted (left).
Resizing handles (small squares) are visible on the selected
border (right).

0.0

A.216

Operator Manual

Basics

Selecting several objects

Basics for Beginners

A.2

You select an object with the mouse and then press the Ctrl or
the Shift key.
A.2
With the Ctrl key you can select other individual objects.

A.2

Press the Ctrl key and keep it pressed.


Click all the objects that you want to select.
Click a selected object a second time to deselect it again.
With the Shift key you can select entire blocks of objects.

A.2

Press the Shift key and hold it pressed.


Click another object.
All the objects in between are selected as well.
A.2

Deselecting objects

A.2

You can deselect selected objects by selecting another object


or by clicking the background with the mouse.
A.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.217

Basics for Beginners

Basics

Moving or copying objects

A.2

You can move or copy objects from one application to another


(e.g. images) or from one location to another location on the
screen.
A.2

Drag & drop

A.2

This means picking up an object, dragging it and dropping it


again.
A.2
Click an object with the left mouse button, e.g. a series, and
hold the mouse button down.
Press the Ctrl key if you want to copy the object.
Drag the object to another location with the mouse (into another task card or window).
Release the mouse button.
The object will be moved or copied to the new location.
Page A.25, Using the mouse

A.2

0.0

A.218

Operator Manual

Basics

Cut/copy & paste

Basics for Beginners

A.2

Another way of moving objects is via the cut & paste or copy
& paste functions.
A.2
Select the object you want to move or copy.
Call up Edit > Cut or use the shortcut Ctrl + X if you want to
move the object (only Filming task card).
Or

A.2

Call up Edit > Copy or use the shortcut Ctrl + C if you want
to copy the object.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.219

Basics for Beginners

Basics

The object is moved or copied to the Windows clipboard. It


remains there until you cut or copy another object that will then
replace the previous one.
A.2
Click the new location.
Call up Edit > Paste or use the shortcut Ctrl + V to move or
copy the object to this new location.
Page A.214, Using shortcuts
Page A.241, Using menus
Double-clicking

A.2

If you double-click on an object with the left mouse button, the


standard function of the associated function menu, which also
depends on the object type, is executed. You can transfer a
selected object to another application with a double click.
A.2

Menus

A.2

You can also use the entries of the dropdown menus to pass
objects from one application to another.
A.2
Select the object(s) you want to pass onto another task card.
Call up the relevant menu item.
Page A.241, Using menus

0.0

A.220

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

Changing the image display

A.2

You can change the display of an image using the mouse:

A.2

Setting window levels (windowing)


Changing the image size (zooming)
Moving the image (panning)
For windowing you use the center mouse button. For zooming
and panning you first switch the mouse to zoom/pan mode and
then use the left mouse button to change the image display.
Page G.415, Zooming and panning images
A.2

Move the mouse pointer onto the image, press the center or
left mouse button and hold it pressed. If you now move the
mouse you change the way the image is displayed.
The mouse cursor changes shape for zooming (left cursor) and
panning (right cursor).
A.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.221

Basics for Beginners

Basics

Entering text

A.2

If you click a text entry field with the mouse, the mouse pointer
becomes a text cursor (vertical bar).
A.2

Enter the text via the keyboard.


You can also enter text into a combo box.
Page A.233, Combo box
Selecting text

A.2

Selecting words

A.2

Deleting text

A.2

You can mark text by moving the cursor across the text while
holding the left mouse button down. The text is displayed highlighted.
A.2

Double-click with the left mouse button while the cursor is


inside a word. The word is marked.
Use the mouse to select text. Press the Del or the Backspace key. The selected text is deleted.

0.0

A.222

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

Windows

A.2

In the Windows XP operating system programs are displayed


in windows. When you start an application it is called up in a
window.
A.2

Layout of windows

A.2

You will find the following graphic elements in a window:

A.2

(1) Title bar


The title bar displays the name of the program you are currently working in.
(2) Title bar icon
Icon for opening a menu for window commands.
(3) Menu bar
This contains the functions of the program in dropdown
menus.
(4) Toolbar
This contains the icons for starting functions and programs.
(5) Workspace
Here you can execute the functions of the program.
(6) Window buttons
Buttons for controlling the window display.
Here you minimize, maximize or close the window.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.223

Basics for Beginners

Basics

A.2

(7) Scroll bar


If the content of the window is too large to be displayed,
scroll bars are displayed on the right and lower edge of the
window.
(8) Border
Place the mouse on the border to resize the window.
(9) Status bar
This displays the instructions and feedback from the current program and contains the storage capacity icons.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

0.0

A.224

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

Resizing and moving a window

A.2

You can change the window display (window, full screen or


icon), the size of the window and the position of the window.
A.2

Changing the type of


window

A.2

In the top right-hand corner of the title bar you will find three buttons with which you can change the size and position of windows.
A.2
With these buttons you can change the active window as follows:
A.2

A.2

A.2

A.2

Click on the left-hand button with the left mouse button to


minimize the window.
Click the center button to toggle between full screen and window size. If you click the on button again you switch back to
the previous size.
Click on the right button to close the window and therefore
the application as well.
Or

A.2

Click on the Windows title button and select the corresponding entry in the menu.
Not all of these functions are available in all windows.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.225

Basics for Beginners

Resizing the window

Basics

A.2

Move the mouse pointer onto the border of the window and its
appearance changes. Depending on where you place the
mouse pointer it can take on one of the following shapes:
A.2
On the lower or upper edge it becomes a vertical double
arrow.
Now you can change the height of the window.
On the left or right edges it changes to a horizontal double
arrow.
Now you can change the width of the window.
On a corner of the border it becomes a diagonal double
arrow.
Now you can change the height and width of the window.
On the interior border line it becomes a broken double arrow
(if the window is subdivided).
You can change the height of the window sections.
Press the left mouse button and drag the border to the new
position while holding the mouse button down.

0.0

A.226

Operator Manual

Basics

Changing the position of


the window

Basics for Beginners

A.2

You can move the window to any position on the screen as long
as it is not maximized or minimized.
A.2
Click the title bar and drag the window to the new position
holding the mouse button down.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.227

Basics for Beginners

Moving the content of the


window

Basics

A.2

On the scroll bars you will find the arrow buttons and a scroll box
with which you can move the content of the window. Depending
on whether the window is too short or too narrow to display its
content the scroll bar will appear on the right or below the window.
A.2
Click an arrow button (1) with the left mouse button. The
screen content is shifted a small distance in the direction of
the arrow.
Click the scroll box (2) and drag it with the mouse. The
screen content is moved continuously in the corresponding
direction.
Click on any point on the scroll bar with the mouse. The
screen content is moved toward this point by a distance
which is proportional to the distance of this point from the
scroll box.

0.0

A.228

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

Switching between windows

A.2

Frequently, several windows or tab cards are open at the same


time, for example, if you are looking for a patient using the
Patient Browser before you start an examination.
A.2

Active window

A.2

The active window is in the foreground.


The title bar of the active window has a different color from that
of the inactive window.
A.2
You can move objects (e.g. images) from an active window to
a window in the background (drag & drop) as long as both
windows are visible.

Switching windows

A.2

If you want to switch from one window to another visible window


click on the corresponding window.
A.2
It moves to the foreground, and the color of the title bar
changes. It is now the active window in which you can work. A.2
Example: Patient Browser and Patient Registration.

A.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.229

Basics for Beginners

Basics

Dialog boxes

A.2

Dialog boxes are used to enter data or to select or confirm settings.


A.2
They are usually displayed after you have called up a function.A.2
Example

A.2

In a dialog box you will find entry fields, selection lists, radio buttons or checkboxes to select options and buttons with which you
can accept or reject inputs.
A.2

0.0

A.230

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

NOTE
A large window might be hiding smaller dialog or message
boxes.
In that case, move the large window until the small window
becomes visible.
A.2
Example:
The Patient Browser box is open. The system starts
burning a CD in multi-session mode. The dialog box
Enter label is hidden by the Patient Browser.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.231

Basics for Beginners

Basics

Operating elements in boxes and on tab


cards

A.2

Dialog boxes and tab cards contain various operating elements


you can use to enter data or make selections.
A.2

Radio buttons

A.2

You can select options by clicking on them with the left mouse
button. Only one option can be selected at a time.
A.2

Check box

A.2

Click inside the box using the left mouse button.


A cross or checkmark appears. The option is then selected.

A.2

Click on the box again to deselect the option.


More than one option can be selected this way.
A.2

Selection list

A.2

Click the arrow to the right of the selection list using the left
mouse button to open the selection menu.
Move the mouse pointer down the list.
The entries are highlighted one after the other.

A.2

Click on the entry you want to select.

0.0

A.232

Operator Manual

Basics

Entry field

Basics for Beginners

A.2

Here you can enter text or numbers.

A.2

Click into the entry field with the mouse pointer. Then enter
the text at the text cursor.

Spin box

A.2

In a spin box you can select values.

A.2

Click one of the arrows with the left mouse button to increase
the set value (up) or decrease it (down), or enter a value in
the entry field.

Combo box

A.2

This field is a combination of an entry field and a selection list.


You can either select entries from the list or type them in on the
keyboard.
A.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.233

Basics for Beginners

Slider

Basics

A.2

With the slider you can set a value range.

A.2

Drag the end boundaries of the slider with the mouse to


increase or decrease the value range.
Move the center mark of the slider to change the position of
the value range.
Double-click the center mark to cover the entire slider area.

Buttons for executing


commands

A.2

A.2

By clicking on a button you start an action. A dialog box contains several buttons, for instance:
A.2
All the settings in the window become valid and the window
is closed. In some dialog boxes OK triggers an action, for
example, filming.

A.2

Same as OK, except that the window is not closed.

A.2

The dialog box is exited without making any changes.

A.2

A help text about the dialog box is displayed.

0.0

A.234

Operator Manual

Basics

Buttons for calling up


functions

Basics for Beginners

A.2

You can start many functions in the program both via the menus
or via the icon buttons.
A.2
You find icon buttons on the toolbars, on the subtask cards, or
in the control area of the task cards. They allow fast and intuitive
execution of functions quickly and intuitively, simply by clicking
on the buttons.
A.2

Dimmed fields and


buttons

A.2

There are a number of functions which you can only execute if


you have selected an image, for example, or loaded data into
the task card. Buttons and input fields are dimmed (shown gray
or shaded), if you cannot execute the function assigned to
them.
A.2
Dimmed button, the function cannot be initiated.

The button is no longer dimmed, you can start the function.

The icon is active, for example, you can now draw a ROI on an
image.

Tool tips

A.2

If you place the mouse cursor over an icon, a short text about
this function is displayed. The tool tip disappears again after a
few seconds.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.235

Basics for Beginners

Basics

Using tab cards

A.2

Tab cards are arranged in stacks so that you can place them in
the foreground easily by clicking on a tab. When you activate a
tab card it is placed in the foreground. You can only start a function from an active tab card.
A.2

Activating a tab card

A.2

Click a tab to activate a card.

The active tab card has a different background color than the
inactive tab cards.
A.2
The settings and data that you have entered on the tab card
which was previously active are not changed when it moves into
the background. When you call up this tab card again you will
find all the data and settings unchanged.
A.2
There are two types of tab cards:

A.2

Task cards
Subtask cards

0.0

A.236

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

Task cards

A.2

The arrangement of the task cards reflects routine operation in


the hospital or practice and their layout supports the examination procedure, for example:
A.2
You can perform an examination in the Examination task
card.
You can view the results and process them in the Viewing
task card.
You edit your film sheet in Filming.
You postprocess images 3-dimensionally in 3D.
Calling up using the tabs

A.2

Click on the tab (1) on the right-hand side of the screen to


activate a task card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.237

Basics for Beginners

Calling up using the


function keys

Basics

You can also switch to each task card using the function keys.A.2
A.2

Press the F5 key to switch to the Examination task card.


Press the F6 key to switch to the Viewing task card.
Press the F7 key to switch to the Filming task card.
Press the F8 key to switch to the 3D task card.

Switching to another
task card

A.2

You can switch to another task card. You simply select the
appropriate tab.
A.2

0.0

A.238

Operator Manual

Basics

Too many applications


active

Basics for Beginners

A.2

Your system can only handle a certain number of open task


cards. If the permitted number is exceeded, the Too Many
Applications Active dialog box will be displayed. In this case,
please close one of the running applications.
A.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.239

Basics for Beginners

Basics

Subtask cards

A.2

On task cards you will find smaller cards, called subtask cards.A.2
They are used for the following purposes:

A.2

Tool boxes, e.g. for graphic evaluation


Setting parameters
Calling up functions and programs

0.0

A.240

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

Using menus

A.2

In order to keep the screen clearer, actions are grouped


together in dropdown menus.
A.2

Application-specific menus

A.2

The menu bar changes with the task card that is currently active
or the window that is currently open. This way only the functions
are accessible which are relevant for the respective application.A.2
A.2

Patient Browser
menu bar

A.2

Viewing menu bar

A.2

Filming menu bar

A.2

The menu bar of the Patient Browser window contains the following menu items:
A.2

The menu bar of the Viewing task card contains the following
menu items:
A.2

The menu bar of the Filming task card contains the following
menu items:
A.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.241

Basics for Beginners

3D menu bar

Basics

A.2

The menu bar of the 3D task card contains the following entries:A.2

A.2

Optional applications

A.2

If there are any optional applications integrated in your system


or licensed for your system you call them up via the additional
menu entry Applications.
A.2

0.0

A.242

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

Dropdown menus of the menu bar

A.2

The menu bar consists of a row of dropdown menus. Via these


menus a series of functions and settings is accessible.
A.2

Selecting a menu

A.2

Click on a menu item in the menu bar with the left mouse button.
The dropdown menu is opened. The menu item is highlighted.A.2
Move the mouse pointer down the menu bar and each dropdown menu opens and closes in turn.
Only the dropdown menu on which the mouse pointer is placed
remains open.
A.2

Closing the menu

A.2

If you do not want to select a function, click the menu title


again or click on the background outside the dropdown
menu.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.243

Basics for Beginners

Selecting an action

Basics

A.2

Move the mouse pointer down a dropdown menu.


The entries are highlighted one after the other.

A.2

Stop at the action you want to execute.


Click on it with the left mouse button.
The action is started and the menu closed.

A.2

Menu entries followed by an ellipses open dialog boxes


(e.g. Save As...).
Menu entries without an ellipses call up an action directly
(e.g. Close Patient).

Options

A.2

Some menu items when clicked do not seem to perform any


action. However, if you look at the dropdown menu again you
will see that the menu item has a checkmark next to it. The
associated option is now active.
A.2
Click the menu entry again to deactivate the option.

0.0

A.244

Operator Manual

Basics

Submenu

Basics for Beginners

A.2

Some lines in the dropdown menu have a small arrow on the


right-hand side. If you move down to one of these arrows with
the mouse pointer a submenu is displayed.
A.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.245

Basics for Beginners

Basics

Popup menus

A.2

Popup menus contain context-specific information. That means


a different popup menu will appear depending on the type of
object you have selected. These menus offer you actions that
can be performed on this object.
A.2

Calling up popup menus

A.2

First select an object with the left mouse button.


Call up the popup menu by pressing the right mouse button
or with Shift + F10.
The menu belonging to the current object type is displayed.
A.2

Selecting an action

A.2

Move the mouse pointer over the menu.


The entry on which the mouse pointer is placed will be highlighted. You can start the function with a single click (right or left
mouse button).
A.2

If you have not selected an object and click on the right


mouse button a context menu is also opened. This menu now
provides you with actions that are meaningful in the currently
active task card or window as long as nothing is selected.

0.0

A.246

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

Status bar

A.2

The status bar at the bottom edge of the window shows you
messages and instructions and contains the storage capacity
icons.
A.2
It is subdivided into three columns:

A.2

Examination-specific information is displayed in the first column.


Warnings and messages appear in the second column.
If functions are being executed in the background, the application will appear as an icon in the third column, next to the
storage capacity icons.

Action history

A.2

Actions executed by the program are automatically logged


together with information about whether each step was successfully terminated or whether an error occurred. You can
query a list of the last entries in the history at any time.
A.2
Click on the task bar with the left mouse button to list the last
commands and program actions.
You can determine the number of entries in the log in the History Size dialog box that you call up by clicking the status bar
with the right mouse button.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.247

Basics for Beginners

Basics

Resource check

A.2

Your system monitors the memory usage and the storage


capacity of the main database, the scheduler database and the
exchange board (virtual memory).
A.2

Main Database and


Scheduler

A.2

By the storage capacity icon you can see how much space has
already been taken up in the local database. If the filled capacity
rises above a configurable limit (default 95%), the icon changes
color from green to red.
A.2
If you move the mouse pointer to this icon, the percentage of
storage capacity already taken up is displayed.
A.2
Archive the patient and examination data in time and delete
them in the Patient Browser to ensure that sufficient capacity is always available.
Page J.21, Storing Data on an External Medium

0.0

A.248

Operator Manual

Basics

Virtual Memory

Basics for Beginners

A.2

By the blinking storage capacity icon in the status bar you can
see that the virtual memory is already filled.
A.2
The message Resource Monitor is displayed.

A.2

A.2

C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Insufficient memory or disk space may
lead to an instable or blocking system.
A.2
Consequence: System is not available in emergency
cases.

A.2

Remedy: Do not ignore the storage capacity warning icons.A.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.249

Basics for Beginners

Basics

Text information in medical images

A.2

In medical images various information is displayed as image


text. This text information identifies the patient and documents
examination and image parameters.
A.2
With the Image Text Editor you can define which text elements are to be displayed in the images.
Page A.37, Configuring image text

0.0

A.250

Operator Manual

Basics

Basics for Beginners

The image text is sorted by topic in the four corners of the


image.
A.2

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

Patient and examination data


Orientation label
System-specific information
Scale bar
Window values and image matrix
Comment lines
Examination and image parameters
Orientation label

You will find an overview of all image text components in the


appendix.
Page P.21, Text Annotations in Medical Images
A.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.251

Basics for Beginners

Basics

A.2

NOTE
Note the following changes to image text if you are using the
former Numaris software version to process images
acquired with syngo MR:
A.2
The image number is altered.
The sign for the slice position is reversed for the headfeet and anterior-posterior directions.
The scan time TA and the contrast agent/flow time are
not displayed.
"FS" appears instead of the scan option; "OTHER"
appears instead of the image type.
The image matrix is displayed instead of the acquisition
matrix.
The echo time and inversion time display is modified
(TE:TE 15.0/##, TI: 50).

A.2

NOTE
The image text for the slice position has changed in
software versions MRease VA12A and higher. The
designations for direction L, P or H, and R, A or F are now
displayed instead of the signs "+" and "-".
A.2

0.0

A.252

Operator Manual

Configuring the User


Interface

CHAPTER

A.3

A.3

You can configure task cards, windows, and individual functions


of the program, i.e. adapt them to your requirements.
A.3
To configure windows and task cards, first call up the
NUMARIS/4 - Configuration Panel where you will find icons
representing various applications. Then double-click on an icon
to open the corresponding configuration window.
A.3
For example, you can define which buttons the toolbar of the
Patient Browser window contains.
A.3

Calling up the
Configuration Panel

A.3

Call up Options > Configuration... to open the


NUMARIS/4 - Configuration Panel.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.31

Configuring the User Interface

Basics

Calling up configuration windows

A.3

Configured program parts are represented by icons in the


NUMARIS/4 - Configuration Panel.
A.3

A.3

A.3

A.3

A.3

Double-click on the icon to display the configuration window


for the Patient Browser.
Chapter D.7, Configuring the Patient Browser

Double-click on the icon to display the configuration window


for the saving and network functions.
Chapter J.7, Configuring Data Transfer

Double-click on the icon to display the configuration window


for assignment of study-specific film layouts (not supported
by syngo MR).
Chapter O.6, Configuring Filming

Double-click on the icon to configure film layouts or create


new film layouts.
Chapter O.6, Configuring Filming

0.0

A.32

Operator Manual

Basics

Configuring the User Interface

A.3

A.3

Double-click on the icon to configure the Patient Registration.


Chapter E.4, Configuring Patient Registration

Double-click on the icon to configure the Viewing task card.


Chapter G.8, Configuring the Viewing Task Card

Double-click on this icon of the NUMARIS/4 - Configuration


Panel to configure the image text.
Page A.37, Configuring image text

Double-click on the icon to configure the Voice Output.


Chapter F.11, Patient instructions

A.3

Double-click on this icon to configure the Patient Search.


Page D.244, Configuring Patient Search

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.33

Configuring the User Interface

Basics

Double-click on this icon to configure the 3D application.


Chapter H.14, 3D Configuration

Double-click on this icon to configure the screensaver settings.


Page B.270, Use of the Screen Saver

Double-click on this icon to configure the Audit Trail settings.


Page B.275, Opening the configuration for audit trail
storing

0.0

A.34

Operator Manual

Basics

Configuring the User Interface

Defining the regional settings

A.3

Under Regional and Language Options, you can define the


language of the user interface and other settings, such as the
date format.
A.3
A.3

Double-click on this icon.


The configuration for regional settings appears.

A.3

The user interface for the regional settings is always in


English whatever language is set.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.35

Configuring the User Interface

Setting the language

A.3

Basics

Select the language you require on the Regional Options


subtask card and confirm with OK.
The application is restarted with the new language.

A.3

NOTE
A restart of the system is necessary to apply the change of
the language.
A.3

A.3

Other regional settings

A.3

You can make further settings on the other subtask cards.

A.3

In particular, define the format for the Date and Time.


We recommend to select the short date style.

0.0

A.36

Operator Manual

Basics

Configuring the User Interface

Configuring image text

A.3

With the Image Text Editor you can define which text elements
will be displayed in the images.
A.3
A.3

Double-click on this icon of the NUMARIS/4-Configuration


Panel.
The configuration editor Image Text Configuration is displayed.
A.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.37

Configuring the User Interface

Image type

A.3

Basics

You can define individual settings for each modality.

A.3

The default setting is used if no other setting is specified for


the displayed image.

A.3

Select the type of image you require from the selection list
View Name.
The setting for this text selection is displayed.

A.3

0.0

A.38

Operator Manual

Basics

Number of texts

Configuring the User Interface

A.3

You can change the default text mode.

A.3

Click on the required option button.


A.3

All Text
All available text information is displayed in the images.
No Text
No texts will be displayed in the images.
Customized Text
You can make a selection from the available texts.

NOTE
If you select the setting No Text,
no orientation marks or scale will be displayed either!

A.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.39

Configuring the User Interface

Text selection

A.3

Basics

If you have selected the Customized Text option, you can put
together any text selection.
A.3
Activate or deactivate the required checkboxes.
Or

A.3

Click on Deselect All if you want to deselect all entries.


Or

A.3

Click on Select All if you want to select all entries.


The text selection is displayed (depending on modality).
A.3

A.3

0.0

A.310

Operator Manual

Basics

Emphasizing image
texts

Configuring the User Interface

A.3

If the Customized texts option is activated, you can emphasize


selected image texts. This can make sense if some texts would
be displayed too small in certain layouts (layout of 20 or 35
images).
A.3
Mark the required image text.
The selected text is highlighted grey and button B is activated.A.3
Click on button B.
The marked image text is displayed in bold.

A.3

You can de-emphasize the text again by selecting the bold


texts and clicking on button B again.
Depending on the configuration of your system it might not be
possible to display some texts.

NOTE
If orientation labels are deselected the patient name will not
be displayed.
A.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.311

Configuring the User Interface

Basics

Exiting a configuration window

A.3

As soon as you have changed settings in a configuration window, you can exit the configuration window with or without saving your changes.
A.3

A.3

A.3

Click on the OK button to save all your settings and exit the
configuration window.

Click on the Apply button to save your settings but leave the
window open.

Click on Vendor Default or Default Settings to restore the


original settings.

A.3

Click on Cancel to cancel configuration.


All settings are rejected and the window is closed.

A.3

0.0

A.312

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

A.4

Service Functions

A.4

The system provides a range of service functions for maintenance, checking, and configuring the system for authorized
users, i.e. system administrators.
A.4
For technical reasons, the user interface of the service functions is always in English independent of the national language selected.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.41

Service Functions

Basics

Displaying the maintenance status

A.4

To ensure smooth operation, your system must be maintained


at certain intervals.
A.4
The system contains a dialog box which shows you when your
system must be inspected again.
A.4
Call up Options > Maintenance....
The Maintenance Status dialog box is displayed.

A.4

On monochrome monitors, it might be difficult to see the


progress bar.

0.0

A.42

Operator Manual

Basics

Service Functions

The progress bar shows you when the next maintenance of


your system is due by means of a colored display.
A.4
As long as the display is in the green range, you can close the
window again with OK. If the bar moves into the red range, you
can only close this window again after maintenance has been
performed.
A.4
In that case, move the window to one side, finish off the examination, and contact Siemens Service.
For further information, please contact your Siemens Service
or your system administrator.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.43

Service Functions

Basics

Local service

A.4

In addition to the user-specific configuration, there is a configuration level for authorized users which is protected by a password.
A.4
Select Options > Service > Local Service... to call up the
Authentication window.

Depending on the configuration access rights in your system


several service levels are available.
A.4
For further information, please contact your Siemens Service
or your system administrator.

0.0

A.44

Operator Manual

Basics

Service Functions

Remote service access

A.4

Your system can also be serviced by Siemens Service via


modem.
A.4
In the Remote Service Access Control window, you can grant
access rights to service so that service personnel can perform
maintenance.
A.4
Call up Options > Service > Remote Service... to display
the Remote Service Access Control dialog box.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.45

Service Functions

Basics

A.4

NOTE
As long as you have assigned full access rights to service,
i.e. maintenance is in progress, you cannot continue
working with your system.
A.4
Select Limited Access or No Access and click OK or
Apply to continue.

When switched on, remote service access is only possible


from trusted systems (systems with which your syngo MR
system has exchanged proved certificates).
A.4

C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Terminating remote service without
consultation with the service engineers.
A.4
Consequence: Terminating the remote service ends all
service processes and causes system malfunctions. A.4
Remedy: Always consult with a service engineer before
terminating remote service.
A.4

For further information, please contact your Siemens Service


or your system administrator.

0.0

A.46

Operator Manual

Basics

Service Functions

Logbook

A.4

Your system has a logbook that records all system and application-relevant events, for example error messages.
A.4
Call up Options > Service > Event Log... to display the
Event Log dialog box.

You can select the type and date of the messages that you want
to display.
A.4
For further information, please contact your Siemens Service
or your system administrator.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

A.47

Service Functions

Basics

Configuring the MR system

A.4

As an authorized user or system administrator you can set


syngo MR to the exact configuration of your MAGNETOM. This
includes, for example, specifying the MAGNETOM type, the
optional system components and environmental conditions. A.4
Call up Options > Service > Local Service.
Enter a new password and click on the button OK in the
Authentication dialog window.

0.0

A.48

Operator Manual

PART

Security Package

B.0

B.1 Introduction
Terms and definitions in security ............................... B.15

B.2 Information for Administrators


Configuration of the security system .............................. B.22
Preparatory steps .................................................... B.212
Workflow for the configuration of
the security system .................................................. B.216
Configuration of user accounts ................................ B.225
Configuration of groups and roles ........................... B.235
Access control ......................................................... B.244
Audit trail and log files .................................................. B.271
Opening the configuration for audit trail storing ....... B.275
Configuring the storage of the audit trail .................. B.277
Opening the Audit Trail Filter and Viewer ................ B.286
Defining events to be recorded in the audit trail ...... B.288
Viewing log files ....................................................... B.291
Storing and deleting log files ................................... B.294
What to do when the audit trail blocks
the system ............................................................... B.297
Secure transfer of data ................................................ B.299

B.3 Information for Users


User management and access control .......................... B.32
Logging on and off ..................................................... B.35
Emergency access....................................................... B.311
Failed log on ................................................................ B.312
Protecting data from unauthorized access ................... B.313
Service access ............................................................. B.315
Generating a service password for local access ..... B.317
0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B1

Contents

Safety standards in syngo MR

Recorded user transactions (audit trail) ....................... B.320

B.4 Information for Service Technicians


Service access ............................................................... B.42
Local access .............................................................. B.43
Remote access .......................................................... B.45
Backup & restore ............................................................ B.47

0.0

B2

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

B.1
Data and Function
Security

Introduction
B.1

B.1

Based on diagnostic images and medical reports decisions are


made that affect the health of patients. Therefore, in modern
health care it is necessary to protect such sensitive documents
from unauthorized access and to record all actions on the
data.
B.1
The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act
(HIPAA) is a legal requirement to ensure the privacy, integrity
and consistency of patient data in health care.
B.1
In supporting HIPAA, syngo MR provides competent user management and highly configurable access control to implement
privacy, integrity and consistency of patient data in health care
which may be required by country specific regulatory.
B.1
Access to functions as well as to data is only permitted to
authenticated and authorized users. Each user is identifiable
at all times.
Logon and action on data such as creation, read, update and
deletion are recorded in an audit trail. The audit trail can only
be viewed by authorized users.
syngo MR only accepts DICOM Query/Retrieve requests
from trusted hosts. Requests from unknown hosts are
rejected.
Communication during secured remote service sessions is
encrypted.
If the computer is unused for a specific period of time, the
screen is automatically locked.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.11

Introduction

Safety standards in syngo MR

B.1

B.1

NOTE
Security has to be set up on every workstation except for
satellite consoles, which take the security settings from
their main console. Therefore, you cannot configure the
security system on satellite consoles.
B.1
Furthermore, if the computer is connected to a hospital
network, all partner workstations have to be set up for
security, otherwise a security gap will exist.
B.1

Scope

B.1

Security in syngo MR provides the infrastructure that is necessary to protect patient data from unauthorized access. Only
persons who need to see certain data will have access to it, and
only persons with the necessary data access rights will be able
to modify data.
B.1
The security system consists of the following parts:

B.1

Authentication of users who are working on the system


Access protection to patient data with user specific permissions
Protection for execution of application functionality with userspecific privileges
Logging the access to patient data in an AuditTrail

0.0

B.12

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Use Cases

B.1

Introduction

The following use cases show you some benefits of the syngo
MR user management and security system.
B.1
To ensure high throughput of patients, two assistants work
on one system at the same time. While one assistant prepares a patient for the next examination at the modality, the
other assistant sends the images from the previous examination to the store. The assistants can take over and log on
without a restart of the application or a significant delay being
caused due to a patient data unload.
A system can be shared between wards or hospitals, and
patient data is only visible to the staff of the ward/hospital
that has acquired the data.
A radiologist working in a radiology department of a hospital
can also have his or her own practice and use the hospitals
systems for examinations of own patients. For example,
depending on the current role (radiologist in hospital or
radiologist for private patients) he/she has access to a
wider or more restricted range of functions for post-processing images.
The presence of a VIP patient in the hospital is kept confidential. Data acquisition is carried out by the departmental
head and one assistant. The acquired images and even the
existence of the patients records is hidden from all other
users of the system.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.13

Introduction

Structure of the
Documentation

Safety standards in syngo MR

B.1

This documentation distinguishes between three types of


users.
B.1
Information for Administrators
In this part of the documentation, administrators find all the
information they need to manage the security system, from
activating the security package, through managing users
and access control to configuring the audit trail.
Chapter B.2, Information for Administrators
Information for Users
This part of the documentation shows the user how to log on
and off, how to work efficiently and what to do when he/she
forgot the password. It also shows how to enable access to
a service technician (local and remote access).
Chapter B.3, Information for Users
Information for Service Technicians
Service technicians can enter the system locally or remotely.
This documentation part is restricted to the most common
service issues.
A special source of information aimed at service technicians
is available in the Service Software Online Help.
Chapter B.4, Information for Service Technicians

0.0

B.14

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Terms and definitions in security


Access Rights

B.1

Introduction

B.1

In syngo MR security, rights protect the access to patient


health information (data) with group/user specific permissions.
B.1

Authentication

B.1

Authentication of users who are working with syngo MR is the


underlying basis of all security measures. A user account is created for every person who will be working with syngo MR. To
log on to the system, the user enters his/her user account and
password. By this, a user is identifiable.
B.1

Audit Trail

B.1

On a secure system, all actions on data are logged. syngo uses


auditing to track which user account was used to access files or
other objects, as well as logon attempts, system shutdowns or
restarts, and similar events.
B.1
Only authorized users can track auditing activity by viewing the
log files of the audit trail.
B.1
The log files of the audit trail need to be stored on a regular
schedule.
B.1

Authorization

B.1

Authorization means:

B.1

Data Access: Only users who need access to certain patient


data can view it (for example, all medical personnel on
Ward A).
Functional Privileges: Only users with the necessary authorization can modify the data (for example, only doctors would
have the right to change the work status).

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.15

Introduction

Data Access and Groups

Safety standards in syngo MR

B.1

The data access security check is based on groups and users:B.1


Users need to have access to patient data within their sphere
of influence (for example, their ward).
Users are assigned to groups that correspond with their
sphere of influence; these groups are allowed access to the
corresponding patient data.
It is easier to manage permissions for groups than for individual users.
Access to patient data is secured through the needed permissions: In order to reduce complexity, only the following permission levels are implemented:
B.1
NO ACCESS
FULL CONTROL

0.0

B.16

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Everyone (Group and


Role)

B.1

Introduction

syngo MR security makes use of the Everyone group and a


Everyone role.
B.1
The Everyone group is the default group for setting up
access to data. If the Everyone group is configured to have
access to all data within the hospital, all users will have
access to all data (regardless of any group or individual settings).
It is therefore essential that the Everyone group is restricted
to patient data that everyone must have access to (for example, emergency patients).
The Everyone role is the default level for granting privileges
to users. If all privileges are assigned to Everyone, the configuration of other roles or individuals will not have any actual
effect.
It is therefore essential to limit the privileges of the Everyone role to those that everyone must have.
All users potentially have full access to data and functions
because the default settings of the Everyone group and role
allow full access. The effective rights for a user depend on the
configuration of this group and role.
B.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.17

Introduction

Safety standards in syngo MR

B.1

NOTE
Because it is not possible to deny rights, the Everyone
group and role have but the user shall not, we recommend
to take special care when configuring the data access
permission and the functional privileges.
B.1

You can follow two different strategies for the Everyone


setup:
B.1
Following the Allow nothing strategy, you would withdraw
almost all rights from the Everyone group and role and then
set up the user groups and the roles. In this case, even common rights would have to be assigned to every group and
role.
Following the Common rights strategy, you would only withdraw critical rights that are not needed by all users.
A useful procedure could be to set up the desired permissions, and then check the effective permissions. When you
are finished, you can remove any unnecessary privileges
from the Everyone group. You must then re-check the effective permissions.

0.0

B.18

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Introduction

Please take care not to configure No Access for all groups,


because then even fall-back data objects are can no longer
be accessed.
We recommend to allow Full Control, for example, for the
STANDARD patient group at the Everyone configuration
level. This would allow all users access to the standard
patients (for example, any patients who have not yet been
assigned to a ward).
Groups

B.1

Groups are assigned to users which are members of a team or


a department. All members of a group receive the same data
access rights (permission, for example, to view or to process
data).
B.1
Establishing groups helps to efficiently assign data access
rights to users and reduces the time needed for configuration.
B.1

Permissions

B.1

Data access rights. The right to create, read, update, delete or


protect data is granted via permissions. The following permission levels are available:
B.1
NO ACCESS
FULL CONTROL

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.19

Introduction

Privileges

Safety standards in syngo MR

B.1

The right to execute functions is granted via privileges. The


functional security check is based on roles and users:
B.1
Users need to perform functions that correspond with their
role in the hospital, for example, nurse, physician, office
desk,
Privileges are managed by roles.
It is easier to manage privileges for roles than for individual
users.
Users are associated with roles and inherit the corresponding privileges.

Roles

B.1

Users having the same tasks are assigned a role (for example,
radiologists, administrators, or technicians). Then all users of a
role have the same right to execute functions, such as storing
data.
B.1
Establishing roles helps to efficiently assign execution rights to
users and reduces the time needed for configuration.
B.1

0.0

B.110

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Trusted Hosts

B.1

Introduction

Trusted hosts is a principle for a secure exchange of data


between systems in a network. The trusted host functionality
can be switched on in the Local Service Software. Switching
on has the following consequences:
B.1
Basically, all trusted systems must have knowledge about
each other.
At your local workstation, all systems you trust must be set
up as such.
Received data is only accepted from trusted systems.
Data will only be sent to trusted systems.
Queries on data are only allowed from other trusted systems.
Your trusted zone must contain only network nodes with the
security system installed so that you can receive and send data
without worrying about data security.
B.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.111

Introduction

Safety standards in syngo MR

0.0

B.112

Operator Manual

Information for
Administrators

CHAPTER

B.2
Administrators tasks

B.2

B.2

Once the syngo MR security system has been installed,


Administrators are responsible for establishing and maintaining
competent user management, and for ensuring that the system
remains secure. This includes the following main tasks:
B.2
Creation and maintenance of user and group accounts and
role definitions
Definition of data access rights (permissions)
Assignment of functional privileges
Handling of the audit trail
Regularly backing up the audit trail

NOTE
User management has to be set up on every computer,
except for satellite consoles, which take the security
settings from their main console.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.21

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Configuration of the security


system
Principles of the syngo MR
User Management
B.2

B.2

Patient data is sensitive information that has to be protected


from unauthorized access, modification, transfer or deletion.
B.2

User Authentication

B.2

A user account has to be created for every person who will be


working with syngo MR. To log on to the system, the user
enters his/her user account and password.
B.2

User Authorization

B.2

The syngo MR user management and security system provides a highly configurable access control and ensures that
users obtain access only to application functions and patient
data they are authorized to work with.
B.2
The right to execute functions is granted via privileges.
The right to create, read, update, delete or protect data is
granted via permissions.
Permissions can be set on at the patient or the study level.
Series and instances inherit their permissions from the study
they belong to.

0.0

B.22

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Example: Doctor Stern wants to send a study of the patient Mr.


Smith to the archive. To do so, he needs the permission to
access the study of Mr. Smith and he needs the privilege to
send data to the archive.
B.2

B.2

Grouping of Users: Roles


and Groups

B.2

Setting up the access rights for each user individually would


take a long time and would inevitably lead to inconsistent rights
for similar users.
B.2
Scenario: Every doctor in the hospital shall be allowed to invoke
the 3-D functions, but nurses shall not be allowed to do so. Also,
patient data shall only be visible in the ward where the patient
is being treated.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.23

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

As the scenario shows, users can be grouped under certain


aspects:
B.2
According to his/her profession or duties, a user may have
assigned one or several roles, such as radiologist, nurse, or
administrator.
Roles can be assigned certain function execution rights
(= privileges), such as sending data, correcting data or setting a work status. These rights extend to all users who
assume a certain role (or several roles).
B.2
According to the department(s) a user belongs to, a user
may also be assigned to one or several groups, such as the
radiology department or a ward.
For groups, you can configure data access rights (= permissions), which are granted to all group members.
B.2
You can also set up permissions and privileges for each user
individually.

0.0

B.24

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Typically, a user belongs to at least one group and has at least


one role. A user can also be assigned to more than one group
or role. See ( Page B.244) for more information about access
control and how conflicting permissions and privileges are handled if a user belongs to more than one group or role.
B.2

Special User Accounts

B.2

The syngo MR security system knows the following special


user accounts:
B.2
Administrator
By default, the security system is installed with a general
Administrator user account assigned to the groups Administrators and SecurityAdmins and having assigned a role
called SecurityAdmins.
B.2
Use this system account only to set up user management.
You then have to create a separate user account for every
administrator and assign these user accounts both to the
groups Administrators and SecurityAdmins. From now on,
log on to the system only under your personal administrator
user name.
B.2
By default, the system is delivered with a setup that allows all
administrators full access to the system as long as an administrator does not remove these settings, the system is accessible for him.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.25

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

LocalServiceUser
This account usually is set up to have restricted access to
patient data, but full functional privileges for checking and
maintaining the system.
B.2
To allow local service activities, an authorized user gets the
system to generate a temporary service password that automatically expires after a configurable number of days. The
user then gives the password to the service technician, so
that the technician has access to the system under the
LocalServiceUser account.
B.2
By default, this account is assigned both to the built-in group
and role called syngoServiceUsers. It also inherits rights
from the Everyone group and role (like all other accounts). B.2
In the default settings, the syngoServiceUsers group and
role have full access to all data. We therefore recommend
that you as administrator disable the rights for the syngoServiceUsers group and role that are not essential for service
activities.
B.2

0.0

B.26

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

RemoteServiceUser
This account is used for remote service sessions.

B.2

By default, the security system is installed with a RemoteServiceUser account assigned to the group syngoServiceUsers and the role syngoServiceUsers.
B.2
Depending on national and local regulations, remote access
to patient data is prohibited. Keep in mind that the RemoteServiceUserinherits the rights of the Everyone group and
role and the syngoServiceUsers group and role. It is therefore necessary that the data access rights for these groups
and roles do not allow the violation of remote data access.
B.2

Emergency Access
To ensure emergency access to the system at all times, you
should create at least one special user account for common
emergency logon.
B.2
Typically, the emergency user account(s) are assigned to an
Emergency_Access group and assigned the Emergency_Access role, which are already built in by the security
configuration.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.27

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Depending on national and local regulations and the hospitals security policies, the administrator has to define the correct permissions and privileges of the emergency access.
For example, emergency access should not allow modification, deletion or transfer of data. If this is in accordance with
the security policy, you may think about creating an emergency account without password.
B.2
To make this emergency logon information available for the
users, we suggest to give this information to the desk officer
or deposited in a safe place. Also, the users have to be
informed about the correct usage of this account and the
consequences of abuse.
B.2

Internal Users

B.2

Internal user accounts are essential for the system. They consist of built-in users of the Windows operating system and
syngo MR internal users.
B.2
The symbol user with exclamation mark indicates internal
users.
B.2

NOTE
Although it is possible to change the password of these
internal accounts, we strongly recommend not to modify
any of the internal users.
B.2

0.0

B.28

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

The internal user accounts are:

B.2

BRAdmin: This account is used to back up and restore files


on the computer, regardless of any permissions that protect
those files. Further functions are very restricted.
DICOM_USER: Account for processes using DICOM services.
Guest: Built-in Windows XP account, not to be deleted. For
syngo MR, this account is disabled.
HelpAssistant: Built-in Windows XP account for providing
remote desktop assistance. Usually, this account is disabled.
IUSR_nnn: Account to access the Internet Information Services.
IWAM_nnn: Account for starting the Internet Information Services from process applications.
meduser: Account created by syngo MR to keep system
services running.
PPP: Account created by syngo MR to enable point-to-point
communication used for remote service logon via modem.
SUPPORT_xxx: Built-in Windows XP account for the Help
and Support Service. Usually, this account is disabled.
HP ITO account: Account created by syngo when the System Management is enabled.
OPC_OP: Account created by syngo when the System Management is enabled.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.29

Information for Administrators

DICOM Nodes

B.2

Safety standards in syngo MR

For the security system, DICOM network nodes are treated as


virtual user accounts. They are not intended for local logon;
they are required for proper networking (transfer of data).
B.2

The network symbol indicates virtual DICOM users.

B.2

For each DICOM service (AET) that is configured in the Local


Service Software, automatically a corresponding entry is created in the special DICOM Nodes folder of the user management.
B.2
To set up the access rights for data being transferred from and
to the network workstation, you should put each DICOM node
into a user group and assign a role (this effectively assigns the
workstation a user group and role). The relationship between
user groups and patient groups define the permissions on the
data as well as the default patient group, the roles define the
functional privileges of the DICOM nodes.
B.2
Example: You may want to configure the system so that the
workstation AET_HOP01 may query for data of VIP patients,
but the workstation AET_WARD12 has no access. The Patient
Groups configuration in the Data Access Permissions section is the place to configure this.
B.2

0.0

B.210

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Tracking of User Activities B.2

Information for Administrators

In syngo MR, the activities of a user are recorded in the audit


trail - including the users identity. According to national regulations, it is not allowed to share user accounts.
B.2

TIP
Recommend the users to use the Log In Different User
function to switch the user quickly at the workstation. B.2

B.2

Multistage Security Setup

B.2

Security in syngo MR has a multistage security concept:

B.2

(1) The user management is the essential basis of all other


security building blocks. It makes user logon mandatory
and ensures user authentication.
(2) The audit trail records all (the defined) actions involving
patient data.
(3) The function execution check ensures that only authorized
users perform actions.
(4) The data access check defines the rights to access patient
data (assembled in patient groups).
Despite of the mandatory user management, any combination
of the options mentioned above is possible. Useful combinations of options are: 1., 1.+3., 1.+2.+3. for PACS or network,
1.+2.+3.+4. for full security management.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.211

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Preparatory steps

B.2

The following preparatory steps will help you to set up the security system from scratch. Depending on the options selected for
your security system, you do not have to perform all steps: B.2
Get a license for the security system.
Outline the intended user management system with the help
of a drawing similar to the one shown below.
As a basis, outline the intended daily workflow at the system.
For example, consider who can stand in as an acting physician and set up the necessary access rights accordingly. B.2
For basic user management you need user accounts and
groups. When using the functional check too, you also need
to think about the organization of roles.
B.2
For data access check, define data security levels in accordance with the security regulations of your hospital.
In the security configuration, you define patient groups and
assign them to users and groups. For example, Radiology
could be used for data that should only be visible to members
of the radiology department or VIP for patient data that
should only be visible to very few persons, such as the head
physician.

0.0

B.212

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

For each patient group you can later grant groups and
users the permission to have full control or no access to
data that is marked with that patient group. You can also
grant the right to modify the assigned patient group.
Whenever a real user or a virtual DICOM node user
creates new patient data on your system, a patient group
that defines the access rights to the data can be applied.
Registration of new patients or data received from a
DICOM node are the most common ways new data is created.
If studies of a patient are already stored in the local database, the existing patient group assignment is also used
for any additional studies.
After switching the data access check option of the security system on, you will find all of your patient studies in the
STANDARD patient group.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.213

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Develop a matrix that describes the permissions and privileges of the groups, roles and special user accounts.
Verify this model before activating the security system.

B.2

You are also responsible for establishing a proper procedure


for emergency access. Inform your users that they should
contact you or the system administrator in case of problems.

0.0

B.214

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

B.2

CAUTION
Source of danger: Behavior of secured systems.

B.2

Consequence: The hospital's security policy also affects


the behavior of the syngo MR system in certain cases (for
example, password requirements, enabled empty
passwords, or locking of an account after a specific number
of failed logins).
B.2
Remedy:

B.2

Establish a user model for your hospital and verify it


before the security system is activated.
Establish a proper procedure for emergency access.
Note that if you enable an empty password for the emergency account, this is enabled for all other users as well.
Nevertheless, instruct the users to use good passwords.
Always back up your system before enabling the security system and before any major changes.
Inform all your users about any changes and settings.
They should contact you or any other administrator
immediately in case of problems.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.215

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Workflow for the configuration of the security


system

B.2

B.2

NOTE
You have to set up the security system on every syngo MR
workstation in your hospital except for satellite consoles,
which take the security settings from their main console. B.2

B.2

NOTE
In any case, the security system should never be configured
during an acquisition
B.2

Once the security system has been enabled, access to the


computer is possible only after the user has logged on and has
been authorized. This requires that the security system must be
configured immediately after its activation. At least, the following must be done:
B.2
Proceed as follows:

B.2

Backup of the system.


Page B.47
Log on under the default Administrator account and open
the syngo MR Security Configuration console.
Page B.222

0.0

B.216

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Create user accounts for every user who will work with the
workstation. Do not forget to create at least one user account
that is intended to stand in as both an administrator and
security administrator.
Page B.225
Please check the personal administrator account(s) intensively to make sure they work properly. After finishing and
testing the security configuration, we recommend to disable
the built-in Administrator or to set an individual password
for it.
Page B.41
Create the groups and roles of your user model. Add the corresponding users to those groups and roles. Do not forget to
assign the user account(s) intended as administrator both to
the groups and roles Administrators and SecurityAdmins.
Page B.235
Create patient groups to define the various data access
rights (= permissions). Assign them the desired user groups
and set up the default patient group. If necessary, you can
also set individual permissions at user level.
Page B.248

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.217

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Restrict the permissions of the Everyone group according


to your strategy.
Page B.15
For all roles, define the privileges for the function execution
rights. If necessary, you can also set individual privileges at
user level.
Page B.263
Restrict the privileges of the Everyone role according to
your strategy and check for effective privileges that are
inherited from the various roles assigned and from the
Everyone role.
Page B.15
Make sure that there is at least one full privileged user
account (fall-back user).
Configure the audit trail.
Page B.271
To avoid loss of configuration data, the system must be
backed up again.
Page B.47
After setup, you must check the security configuration on
your real-world workflow carefully.
We recommend to log on as any user type defined and to
check the execution of all functions for inconsistencies.
B.2
Inform every user about their account, the emergency
account and any relevant passwords.

0.0

B.218

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Securing the System

B.2

Information for Administrators

By activating the syngo MR security system, the customer service technician turns your system into a system with high data
protection level. The service technician needs the appropriate
service key for service level 7.
B.2
Normally, the security system is not activated during the system
installation. To secure your system, you will have to instruct a
service technician as to which security options you want to be
enabled.
B.2
B.2

CAUTION
Source of danger: There is no undo!

B.2

Consequence: After activating the security system, access


is limited to only the defined users. Once the security
system is activated, it is not possible to deactivate it
(instead, you would have to re-install the complete syngo
MR system on the computer from scratch).
B.2
Remedy: Make sure you have read and completed all
preparatory steps. Back up your system before activating
the security system.
B.2

Log on under a service account and choose the Options >


Service > Local Service menu item from any task card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.219

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

After authorization, the Service Software window opens:

B.2

In the Configuration section, go to the Security settings


page.
Select the Local security features that you want to activate:

0.0

B.220

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

User management

Activates user management which is the basis for all other security options. When
activating any other security option, the user management will also be switched on
automatically.

Data access check

Access to data is always provided in accordance with the current permissions. If this
check box is not selected, you cannot restrict any data access rights.

Functional check

Access to functions is always provided in accordance with the privileges granted to a user
role. If this check box is not selected, you cannot restrict the use of functions.

Auditing

Access to the system and configured actions are recorded in an audit trail.
If the workstation is connected to a network, select the
Enable trusted host functionality check box to establish a
secure system to your network partners and services.
Only trusted hosts will answer queries or allow data transfer.

B.2

To enhance the security of the remote service access to your


computer, select the SSL encryption check box.
Selecting this option enables the secure HTTPS protocol, which
uses the SSL (Secure Socket Layer) protocol for authentication
and data encryption.
B.2
To confirm, click Save and Finish in the status bar of the window.
End the service session and log off.
After a restart of the system, only authenticated and authorized
persons can use the workstation.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.221

Information for Administrators

Opening the Security


Configuration Console

B.2

Safety standards in syngo MR

You need Administrator and SecurityAdmin rights to configure the security system.
B.2
Log on as administrator or as a user with administrative.
Page B.35
From any task card, choose the Options > Security Configuration menu item.
After authorization, the syngo MR Security Configuration
console is displayed.
B.2
By clicking an item in the tree view on the left-hand side, you
display the various pages for set-up.

0.0

B.222

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

B.2

TIP
Use the Show/Hide Console Tree icon if the tree view
does not appear after start-up.
B.2

Security Configuration is intended for one security administrator only.


User Management for managing user, groups and roles with
the following sub-folders:
Users for creating and setting up user accounts
Internal Users for checking built-in and internal system
accounts
DICOM Nodes for checking those accounts that are automatically created for all configured network partners
Groups for managing the user groups and the group
members
Roles for managing the roles and their owners

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.223

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Security Management with:


Data Access Permissions for defining the access rights
to any data
Functional Privileges for defining the function execution
rights based on the users/roles view
On the right-hand side, you see the settings page that has been
selected on the left-hand side.
B.2
B.2

TIP
The items to be recorded in the audit trail are configured in
the Audit Trail Viewer Console ( Page B.288) and
storing parameters are set up in the Audit Trail
Configuration dialog box ( Page B.277).
B.2

0.0

B.224

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Configuration of user accounts


User Accounts

B.2

B.2

For every user who will work with the system, create a user
account and assign a password.
B.2
A user account that is no longer required, can be disabled or
deleted (for example, if the user quits).
B.2
B.2

NOTE
Always work in the syngo MR Security Configuration,
never use the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) to
create or to manage user accounts. syngo MR expands the
Windows-related security system by a data security
management and distinguishes between groups and
roles.
B.2

Note that the syngo MR security system only makes use of


some fundamental levels of security granted to users by the
Windows operating system. Moreover, the syngo MR security
system has its own security concept.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.225

Information for Administrators

Special User Accounts

B.2

Safety standards in syngo MR

The security system comes with some default and some internal user accounts, and automatically generates DICOM Node
user accounts.
B.2
Default users are delivered with the software and contain, for
example, the Administrator, the LocalServiceUser and the
RemoteServiceUser.
All internal users are essential for the system and indicated
as such. We strongly recommend not changing the passwords of these users.
DICOM nodes are required for remote network functions.
They are created as soon as you configure the DICOM services (AET). You can only change the password and the
group assignment of these users.
For a detailed list of the internal user accounts see
Page B.22.

B.2

0.0

B.226

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Handling of Passwords

B.2

Information for Administrators

The password of a user in syngo MR never expires, but the


users are allowed to change their passwords on their own
(depending on your security policy).
B.2
You can assign a user a new password at any time.

B.2

B.2

CAUTION
Source of danger: User access may be prevented due to
forgotten or unknown accounts or passwords, or wrong
setup (for example, in case of an emergency).
B.2
Consequence: Inaccessible system.

B.2

Remedy: Do not forget to define a general user account for


emergency access and assign it to a group and a role both
called "EmergencyAccess".
B.2
Regardless as to whether you specify a password for the
emergency account or not, users shall be prohibited from
changing any passwords (especially for the emergency
account).
B.2
The users shall contact you immediately in case of
problems.

Creating a new User


Account

B.2

B.2

One basic task for configuration is the creation of the necessary


user accounts. A number of general user accounts come preinstalled with the system.
B.2
It is not possible to rename a user account. If you mistype it
here, delete the account and create a new one.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.227

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

B.2

NOTE
Misuse of the emergency account defeats the security
system!

B.2

Patient data acquired and processed during emergency


access is logged in the audit trail as belonging to the
emergency account. As a result, the identity of the user
involved cannot subsequently be determined. The
ownership of any data recorded this way must be altered
and the data newly assigned.
B.2
Ensure that all users have been properly informed about the
use of the emergency access account and the use of the
password. Misuse of the account is illegal!
B.2

Open the syngo MR Security Configuration console.


Page B.222
B.2

In the tree on the left-hand side, open the User Management folder.

0.0

B.228

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Right-click the Users folder and choose New > User from
the context menu.
Or

B.2

Select the Users folder and choose the Action > New >
User menu item.
The User tab card is displayed:

B.2

Enter the desired user information.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.229

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Name

Name of the user account (= logon name). Note, that the name has to be unique within
the system. The user name is not case sensitive. Only alphanumeric characters are
allowed.

Full name

Information that helps to identify the user, for example, first, second name and title of the
user.

Description

Further information about the user (for example, his/her department).

New Password

The password that has to be entered by the user in order to log on to a workstation. The
password is case sensitive.

Confirm Password

For validation purposes, the password has to be entered a second time.


According to the hospitals security policies, users in syngo may be allowed to change
passwords on their own.

Account is disabled

If selected, the user account is set up but the user cannot log onto the system. You may
use this option, for example, for users who are off-site for some time.

Password never
expires

This option is selected by default and cannot be changed: The users password does not
expire regularly (for example, this setting is important for the EmergencyAccess account).

User cannot change


password

If selected, the user cannot change the password on their own. For the
EmergencyAccess, we strongly recommend to disable the change of password.
To store, click Apply and continue to create other user
accounts.
Or

B.2

Click OK to store and close the dialog box.


After OK, the list of current users appears.

B.2

0.0

B.230

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Selecting a User Account


for Editing

Information for Administrators

To select a user account for editing:


B.2

B.2

Open the syngo MR Security Configuration console.


Page B.222
On the left-hand side, open the User Management folder.
Click the Users folder.
All available user accounts are displayed on the right-hand side.
You can identify the users by the information in the Name, Full
Name and Description columns.
B.2
To edit a user account, double-click the entry on the righthand side.

Modifying a User Account


and Passwords
B.2

You can change the account properties or enable/disable an


account. Also it is possible to change the password for normal
users and DICOM Nodes.
B.2
B.2

NOTE
We strongly recommend not to change passwords of any
internal user accounts, otherwise important system
services may no longer work properly.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.231

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

It is not possible to rename an account, because if a user has


already worked with this account, some data objects may exist
with the data security level inherited from this user. To correct
mistakes, delete and create the account instead.
B.2
Double-click the desired user account.
The User tab card is displayed with the current properties for
B.2
this user account.

0.0

B.232

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

On the User tab card, you can change the Full Name and
the Description of the user account.
To change a password, type the desired password into the
New Password field and repeat it in the Confirm Password
field.
To disable/enable the account, select/clear the Account is
disabled check box.
To prevent users from changing their password, select the
User cannot change password check box.
The Member of tab card lists all groups (for data access) this
user is assigned to.
B.2
The Owner of tab card lists all roles (for use cases or functional
privileges) this user owns.
B.2
Click Apply to save the settings.
Or

B.2

Click OK to save and close the dialog box.


To configure another account, you must close the dialog box.
B.2
This opens the list of all user accounts.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.233

Information for Administrators

Deleting a User Account

B.2

Safety standards in syngo MR

You can delete user accounts that are no longer needed.

B.2

B.2

NOTE
For reason of system integrity, it is not possible to delete
internal users, DICOM nodes, and special users.
B.2

Right-click the desired user account and choose Delete from


the context menu.
Or

B.2

Select the desired user account and choose the Action >
Delete menu item.
Confirm the security notice with Yes.
The user account is deleted.

B.2

0.0

B.234

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Configuration of groups and roles


About Groups and Roles

B.2

B.2

The syngo MR security system makes use of users, groups


and roles.
B.2
Groups are used to configure the same data access rights for
a group of people (for example, everyone who works in a particular ward).
We recommend that you create a user group for every team
or department of your user model. Then you assign the user
accounts that belong to that group.
Roles are used to configure the same function execution
privileges for people with similar tasks (for example, physicians, nurses, or assistants).
You then assign the user accounts that will own that role.

Built-in Groups and Roles B.2

By default, some general groups and roles are already


installed. They are created automatically when you install the
Windows operating system and syngo MR. These groups and
roles are named identically:
B.2
Emergency_Access
SecurityAdmins
syngoServiceUsers

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.235

Information for Administrators

No Group Hierarchies

B.2

Safety standards in syngo MR

Note that you cannot plan sub-groups (groups-in-groups), such


as Hospital for hospital-wide permissions and Neurology for
defining permissions for people working in the neurology
department of the hospital.
B.2

Configuration Levels

B.2

The security configuration provides you two different ways to


assign group members and owners of roles. Which one you
prefer depends on your interest; it is often useful to switch
between both:
B.2
Starting at the Users level easily provides a good overview
about the current memberships of the user and lets you easily pick the desired groups or roles for this user.
Starting at Groups or Roles level gives you a good overview
of which users have already been assigned to the group or
role under configuration.

Creating a new Group or


Role

B.2

Because groups and roles handled almost identically, their handling is described here together.
B.2
Take a look at your outline from the preparatory steps to create
the groups and roles.
B.2
It is not possible to create groups in groups or sub-roles to set
up a hierarchy of rules and rights.
B.2

0.0

B.236

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

To create a new group or role:

B.2

Open the syngo MR Security Configuration console.


Page B.222
On the left-hand side, open the User Management folder.
Right-click the Groups or the Roles folder and choose
New > Group or New > Role from the context menu.
Or

B.2

Select the Groups or the Roles folder and choose the


Action > New menu item.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.237

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

The Group respectively the Role tab card is displayed:

B.2

Enter a Name and a Description that helps to identify the


group or role.

0.0

B.238

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

B.2

NOTE
The name has to be unique within the system. The name is
case sensitive. Special characters such as " / \\\\\\\\
[ ] : ; | = , + * ? < > are not allowed.
B.2

Click Apply to save.


For group configuration, click the Members tab to add Users
to the group.
Or

B.2

For role configuration, click the Owners tab to assign Users


the role.
All available user accounts are displayed on the right-hand side,
all already assigned users are placed on the left-hand side. B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.239

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

This symbol indicates normal user accounts.


B.2

This symbol indicates internal users.


B.2

This symbol indicates accounts for DICOM nodes in the network. To restrict the remote data access to your workstation,
you should also assign these nodes to groups and roles.
B.2

0.0

B.240

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

At the Available list (on the right-hand side), double-click the


user, or select the user(s) you want to assign and click [ << ].
All already assigned users are listed in the Assigned list.
To resolve an assignment, select the user on the left-hand
side and click [ >> ] or double-click a user.
Click Apply to store.
Or

B.2

Click OK when you are finished.


After OK, the group or role is stored and the list of groups or
roles appears.
B.2
B.2

NOTE
Because you cannot rename groups or roles, you must
instead delete them and recreate them.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.241

Information for Administrators

Selecting a Group or Role


for Editing

Safety standards in syngo MR

To select a group or role for editing:


B.2

B.2

Open the syngo MR Security Configuration console.


Page B.222
In the tree on the left-hand side, open the User Management item.
Select the Groups or the Roles item.
All available groups or roles are listed on the right-hand side. B.2
Double-click an entry to edit it.

Adding or Removing Group


Members or Role Owners B.2

To add or remove group members or role owners:

B.2

Double-click the desired group or role in the tree on the righthand side.
The Group respectively the Role tab card is displayed.

B.2

If desired, you can modify the Description.


On the Members or Owners tab card, use the add [ << ] and
remove [ >> ] buttons to update the users group or role.
Page B.236

0.0

B.242

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Deleting a Group or Role

B.2

Information for Administrators

To delete a group/role:
B.2

Right-click the desired group or role and choose Delete from


the context menu.
Or

B.2

Select the desired group or role and choose the Action >
Delete menu item.
Confirm the security notice with OK.
The group account is deleted; all members lose the corresponding privileges/rights.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.243

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Access control

B.2

Access control in syngo MR security system consist of permissions (which users and user groups are allowed to access a
certain data set) and functional privileges (which user or roles
are allowed to execute a certain program module or function). B.2
B.2

NOTE
The different security levels applied to application functions
and patient data in the context of the clinical workflow are
normally defined in the hospitals security policy.
B.2

Privileges

B.2

A privilege is the right to use a specific syngo MR function, for


instance, sending data or invoking the Patient Registration.
B.2

Patient Group
Permissions

Patient group permissions regulate the access to data:


B.2

B.2

You define a list of patient groups according to the data security policy of your hospital. For example, create a patient
group Radiology for data that should only be visible to
members of the radiology department, or VIP for patient
data that should only be visible to very few persons, such as
the head physician.

0.0

B.244

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

For each patient group, you can grant users and groups the
permission to access data that is assigned to this group. B.2
You can set permissions for the following types of access:

B.2

No Access: The user will have absolutely no access to the


data of this patient group.
B.2
Full Control: The user has access to the data, and can work
with it according to his/her role. In general, the user can: B.2
create data objects, like studies or series
read data, for example, load it into the Viewer
update or modify data, for example, draw annotations on
images or correct the patients name
delete data
execute changes to the security levels applying to certain
data, for example, to hide the data of VIP patients from
some doctors on the ward
Permissions can be set at the patient or study level. Series
and images inherit their permissions from the study they
belong to.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.245

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

A newly created patient entry or study is automatically


assigned a patient group. Basically, this is the one that has
been assigned as default to the user (or to the group the user
belongs to). To be more precise:
If a user registers a new patient, this patient is first
assigned to the default patient group.
If a user registers a new study of a known patient, the previously assigned patient groups are taken over.
If your system receives studies from a DICOM node and
the patient is not known at your system, the default patient
group of the DICOM node is assigned.
If your system receives studies of a known patient, the
previously assigned patient groups are taken over.
During Patient Registration and in the Patient Browser you
can modify the assignment of patient groups.
B.2

NOTE
To reduce your configuration efforts, define permissions on
group level and privileges on role level whenever possible.B.2

0.0

B.246

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Example

B.2

Information for Administrators

Example: Doctor Stern wants to send a study of the patient Mr.


Smith to the archive. To do so, he needs the permission to
access Mr. Smith study and he needs the privilege to send data
to the archive.
B.2

B.2

Inheritance of Permissions
and Privileges
B.2

The Everyone group is the top level of inheritance. The permissions set for the Everyone group are transferred to all
groups of your security system. The same rule applies to the
Everyone role.
B.2
Typically, a user belongs to at least one group and one role. But
you can also assign a user to more than one group or role. B.2
B.2

NOTE
Keep in mind that user rights are inherited. It is not possible
to assign someone function execution rights for a specific
group.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.247

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

The security system follows an inheritance strategy: Any right


granted on group or role level is inherited by all members.
B.2
In the configuration user interface, this effect is indicated by the
display of Effective rights.
B.2
It is not possible to deny rights that the user inherited from a
group or role.
It is possible to grant additional permissions and privileges
for single users. This way you expand the permissions and
privileges that have been defined for the group or role.
Because of the heredity rules, it is very important to check
and restrict the rights of the Everyone group and role.
The final decision as to whether a user will be granted an execution privilege or a permission depends on the inheritance
hierarchy of roles and groups to which the user belongs.
B.2

Managing Patient Groups


for Data Protection

Data Protections
B.2

B.2

The permissions (data access rights) are configured on the


basis of patient groups. All data assigned to the same patient
group has the same protection attribute.
B.2

0.0

B.248

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

You can create patient groups as desired according to your


security concept and workflow, but syngo MR delivers some
patient groups for data protection by default:
B.2
The STANDARD patient group is a built-in group. It cannot
be deleted, because it is used as a fall-back protection for
otherwise unprotected data. The patient group is internally
assigned to any data object that has not been explicitly
assigned a protection (for example, a user without default
protection created a new patient entry). Also any data that
"loses" its patient group is also assigned to this group.
Any user concerned with the import of data from storage
disks should have Full Control access to the STANDARD
patient group.
The Emergency patient group can be used to protect data
from emergency acquisition.
The Service patient group is used to prohibit common
access to the internal Service Patient.
The LOST&FOUND patient group collects all studies that
had been assigned to unknown or to undefined patient
groups. Using this patient group, you can configure permission on this type of data. At least one user must have Full
Control access.
Whenever a user registers a new study, a default data security
level is applied to that data. You can configure the default data
security level either for groups or for individual users.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.249

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Different views on the Data Access Permissions are available


(based on the same configuration data):
B.2
The by User/Group View allows selecting a single user or
group and setting the rights on the various patient groups.
The by Patient Groups View allows selecting a single
patient group and setting the various user or group access
rights.
Special Configuration Issues

B.2

Before modifying any security settings, it is important to take


some special configurations into consideration:
B.2
Follow a strategy regarding the Everyone group. Check the
effective permissions. These are inherited from the various
groups, including the top level "Everyone" group.
Page B.15
We recommend to allow the administrator group or account
Full Control to the Lost&Found patient group.
Please ensure that at least one Administrator or user with
administrative rights has access to each patient group. (Do
not configure No Access for all patient groups.)
We recommend to allow the Everyone group Full Control
to the STANDARD patient group

0.0

B.250

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Creating and Managing


Patient Groups

Information for Administrators

To create a new patient group for data protection:


B.2

B.2

Open the syngo MR Security Configuration console.


Page B.222
In the tree on the left-hand side, open the Security Management and the Data Access Permissions item.
Right-click the Patient Groups item and choose New >
Patient Group from the context menu.
Or

B.2

Select the Patient Groups item and choose the Action >
New > Patient Group menu item.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.251

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

The properties page for patient groups is displayed:

B.2

Enter a Full name and a Description to identify the patient


group later easily.
Enter a text that describes the security level, for example:
used to control access to data of the radiology department.

0.0

B.252

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

To allow a service technician access to any patient data protected by this patient group, select the Grant read access
for syngoServiceUsers in service sessions check box.
Click Apply to save the settings.
Or

B.2

Click OK to save and return to the list of existing patient


groups.
You are able to create additional patient groups only after clicking OK.
B.2

To delete a patient group:

B.2

Right-click a patient group in the list and choose Delete from


the context menu.
The local database is checked for data objects that are
assigned to this patient group. If any are found, it is not possible
to delete this patient group. If it is allowed, a confirmation message appears.
B.2
Click Yes to confirm the deletion.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.253

Information for Administrators

Opening the Data


Permission Setup

Safety standards in syngo MR

To access the setup of data permissions on patient groups:


B.2

B.2

Open the syngo MR Security Configuration console.


Page B.222
In the tree on the left-hand side, open the Security Management and the Data Access Permissions item.
Click the by User/Groups item.
Or

B.2

Click the by Patient Groups item.


It depends on your preferred workflow which view you choose
to work in. For configuration, it is quite common to switch
between both views to identify all dependencies and set up the
permissions accordingly.
B.2
At the top of the configuration page, the selection list displays
the user/group respectively the patient group to be configured. B.2
In the by Users/Groups view, the table lists all available patient
groups and the permissions for the element selected at the top.B.2
In the by Patient Groups view, the table lists all users and
groups, and the permissions on the patient group selected at
the top of the page.
B.2

0.0

B.254

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Setting up Permissions in
the Users View

Information for Administrators

To set up the data access permissions for patient groups:


B.2

B.2

In the tree-view, click the by User/Groups item.

At the top of the dialog box, select the level you want to set
up for the available patient groups:

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.255

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Everyone

Shows the permissions for the special group Everyone. This is the top level for the rights
inheritance on all other groups and all users. This group is one reason that the effective
permissions often differ from the setup permission. The permissions in this group should
be the minimum permissions of all users.

Groups

Shows the permissions at the group level. This allows you to set up group access rights
one after the other.

Users

Shows the permissions at the user level. This allows you to set up individual access
rights. Note that users inherit their permissions from the Everyone group and from their
group memberships.

Select an item from the list according to the specified content


type (for example, a user group).
This symbol indicates that the list item represents a group.

B.2

This symbol indicates that the list item represents a single user
account.
B.2
This symbol indicates that the list item represents DICOM
Nodes (AETs for networked DICOM services, but handled like
users).
B.2

0.0

B.256

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

After your selection, each table row represents a patient group.


The columns show the current permissions for the selected
user or group onto the patient groups.
Page B.251
B.2
B.2

NOTE
To modify an existing configuration or to reduce the amount
of displayed groups and users, you can select the List only
objects with permissions assigned check box.
B.2

In the Permission column, double-click and select the


desired access rights for the corresponding patient group:

No Access

Prohibits any access to the data stored in this patient group. The data will not be visible
to the user or group.

Full Control

Allows all actions to the data assigned with this patient group: create, read, update,
delete, and execute change protection.
Check the Eff. Permission column to see which access
rights actually become valid.
The deviation may originate from a different configuration at
Everyone and normal user group level, or from a membership
in two or more different user groups, etc.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.257

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

To set the default data protection:

B.2

Whenever a user of the group under configuration creates a


new data object, by default the set of data protections configured here is applied to that data.
B.2
In the by User/Groups page, select an item from the top list.
You can configure the default protections for groups and users
here, so that it is possible to set up the default protection for
each user individually.
B.2
Select the Default check box for those patient groups you
want to assign by default to the user or group.
Check the Eff. Default column to see which default protection attributes are actually become true.
Again, the deviation may originate from a different configuration
on user and group level, or from a membership in different user
groups, etc.
B.2

To save the protection, click Apply.


Or

B.2

Click OK to save and close the page.

0.0

B.258

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Setting up Permissions in
the Patient Groups View

B.2

Information for Administrators

To define a new set of default data protections for a group or


user:
B.2
Display the by Patient Groups page.
Page B.251

From the Patient Groups list, select the patient group you
want to configure.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.259

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

The table shows the permission configuration for this patient


group. Each line represents a user or a user group.
B.2
B.2

TIP
To modify an existing configuration or to reduce the amount
of displayed groups and users, you can select the List only
objects with permissions assigned check box.
B.2

Below the Patient Groups list, select the type of objects you
want to set up for the selected patient group:

Everyone

Shows the permissions for the special group Everyone. This is the top level for the rights
inheritance on all other groups and all users. This group is one reason that the effective
permissions and the effective default differ from the permission set up for users or groups.

Groups

Shows the permissions at the user group level. This allows you to set up group access
rights one after the other.

Users

Shows the permissions at the user level, so that you can set up individual data access
rights.

0.0

B.260

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

After your selection, the table shows the permissions the various users or user groups have for the selected patient group.
Each table row represents a single user or user group:
B.2
This symbol indicates that the row belongs to a user group.

B.2

This symbol indicates that the row represents a single user


account.
B.2
This symbol indicates that the row belongs to an auto-generated user account for a DICOM AET service in the network.
B.2

In the Permission column, select the desired access rights:

No Access

Prohibits any access to the data stored in this patient group.

Full Control

Allows all actions to the data stored in the patient group: create, read, update, delete, and
execute change protection.

B.2

Check the Eff. Permission column to see which access


rights are actually become valid.
The deviation may originate from a different configuration on
Everyone, user and group level, or from a membership in two or
more different user groups, etc.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.261

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

To set the default data protection:

B.2

Whenever a user or group displayed in the permission table creates a new data object, by default the set of data protections
configured here is applied to that data.
B.2
You can configure the default protections for groups and users
here, so that it is possible to specify a default protection for each
user individually.
B.2
Select the check box Default for those user groups you want
to assign the selected patient group as default.
Check the Eff. Default column to see which default protection attributes are actually become true.
The deviation may originate from a different configuration on
user and group level, or from a membership in different user
groups, etc.
B.2

To save the protection settings, click Apply.


Or

B.2

Click OK to save the settings and close the page.

0.0

B.262

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Setting up the Privileges


for a Role or a User

B.2

Information for Administrators

Privileges allow a user to execute syngo MR functions, such as


sending data over network or invoking the patient registration. B.2
The privileges set for a role a user belongs to override the privileges explicitly set for the user.
B.2
B.2

NOTE
For the emergency role and user, we strongly recommend
not to grant any functional privileges that allow deletion or
export of patient data.
B.2

Open the syngo MR Security Configuration console.


Page B.222
In the tree on the left-hand side, open the Security Management and the Functional Privileges items.
Select the by User/Role item.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.263

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

The Privileges of... page is displayed, with the side tabs corresponding to the various syngo MR modules installed at your
system:
B.2

At the top of the dialog box, select the level of objects you
want to configure:

0.0

B.264

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Everyone

Shows the privileges at the Everyone level. This are the basic functional rights for all
roles and users.

Roles

Shows the privileges at the role level. This allows you to set up privileges for all members
of a role.

User

Shows the privileges at the user level. This allows you to set up the individual privileges.
B.2

Select the desired user or role from the Privileges of list.

This symbol indicates that the list item is a single user account.
B.2

This symbol indicates that the list item is an auto-generated


user account for a DICOM AET service in the network.
B.2

This symbol indicates that the list item is a role.


B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.265

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

The explicit privileges for the selected item are marked in the
selection table.
B.2
Every syngo MR application is represented by a separate side
tab, for example, PatBrowser for the Patient Browser. syngo
MR provides the tabs as described below, but during installation
at your modality site, further module tabs are added.
B.2
B.2

NOTE
Please remember that the configuration of a user is also
influenced by the configuration of the role a user is
assigned.
B.2

Click the application tab with the functions you want to allow
or restrict for users or roles.

0.0

B.266

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

B.2

NOTE
Use the double arrow at the bottom of the page to see
further application tabs.

B.2

Select the check boxes on the page to set the privileges as


desired.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.267

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Archnet

Archive allows to store data on storage disks or in the central network archive server.
Export allows to export data on disks or to the file system. Send allows to send data to
other network nodes. The Query/Retrieve functionality is not protected but restricted to
trusted hosts.

AuditTrail

Archive allows to invoke the Audit Trail Archiving dialog box and the Audit Trail Archiving
Settings. Only users with this privilege are able to use the according menu items.
SetFilter allows to open the audit trail management and configure (filter) the events to be
logged in the audit trail. View allows to view logs. The privileges are intended for
administrators or experienced and instructed users. We recommend not to assign these
privileges to the emergency role or user.

Correct&Rearrange

Correct allows to change any patient and study data. History allows to open a dialog box
for the history of changes on the data. Rearrange allows to drag data objects in the
Patient Browser.

Filming

Expose allows to expose film tasks or single film sheets on a camera or to print them.

PatientBrowser

Delete allows to delete data objects in the Patient Browser. ModifyPatientGroups allows
to change the patient group assigned to data (and change this way the permissions on
data access). SetStateComplete allows to set this work status on data objects.
SetStateRead allows to set this work status.SetStateVerified allows to set this work
status.

Patient
Registration

InvokeRegistration allows to open the registration form and perform registration.

0.0

B.268

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

SecuritySystem

All these privileges are important for security administrators. BypassBlockedSystem


allows logging on to a system even if the security system is blocked. At least one
administrator must have this privilege. It is also useful to grant the AuditTrail - Archive
and the SetMode privilege. Configuration_Read allows access to the security
configuration for viewing only.Configuration_ReadWrite: With this privilege, you are
able to change and store the security configuration. You also need the Configuration
privilege to do so. DesktopAccess allows to access the desktop of the Windows
operating system with the help of short cutkeys (Windows key or CTRL +ESC).
EnableServiceAccount allows to create a temporary password for the service
technician ServiceUser. InteractiveLogin allows to log on to the system to have
desktop access. We recommend to set this privilege on Everyone level for all users.
SetMode allows a user to change the security system mode. This privilege is needed for
activating security options in the Local Service Software and for bypassing a blocked
system. At least one SecurityAdmin must have this right.

UserAutoStart

AllUsers allows to automatically start processes or components for all users.


SecurityConfigurationConsole is an internal privilege.
A check mark indicates that this function is allowed to the role
or user selected on top of the page.
B.2
An asterisk * indicates that the changed setup on this page or
item is not saved yet.
B.2

To save the settings, click Apply.


Or

B.2

Click OK to save and close the page.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.269

Information for Administrators

Use of the Screen Saver

B.2

Screen Saver

Safety standards in syngo MR

B.2

You can configure a syngo MR screen saver. The screen saver


locks the workstation if there has been no mouse or keyboard
activity within a certain period.
B.2
To unlock the workstation, the user has to enter the account
name and the password in the Computer locked dialog box,
which will automatically appear when the mouse is moved. B.2
The screen saver has the same effect as the Lock Computer
function. If a user logs on to a workstation again, he finds the
workstation exactly as he/she has left it. If another user logs on,
depending on the permissions, the data is closed (and unsaved
changes are lost).
B.2

Configuration

B.2

The screen saver is automatically enabled during system installation.


B.2
Use the Screen Saver configuration in the syngo MR - Configuration Panel to configure the inactivity period (time-out)
before activation.
B.2

0.0

B.270

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Audit trail and log files


Audit Trail and Log Files

B.2

B.2

The syngo MR security system has an audit trail for recording


the following actions:
B.2
All user activities on sensitive data
All logins (and unsuccessful login attempts)
System shut downs, system restarts and similar events
By reviewing the audit trail, all security relevant transactions can
be reconstructed.
B.2
The audit trail consists of several log files, where only one log
file is open at any one time. A new log file is created whenever
the current log file is closed. This occurs, for example, at syngo
MR startup. A new log file is also created at system restart after
a power failure.
B.2
As soon as a log file reaches a certain size, it is closed. Closing
the file automatically creates a new one.
B.2

Naming of Log Files

B.2

To keep the files in the correct order, a number is appended to


the file name, which is incremented with each new file:
B.2
file name = <host name>_<date of creation>_<Time of creation>_<incremented number>
B.2
Example: csant42_2002-04-14_10-47-28_1.xml

B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.271

Information for Administrators

Administration

B.2

Safety standards in syngo MR

Authorized users (such as administrators) can set up the audit


trail and view, store and delete stored audit trail log files. The
files are protected against manual manipulation.
B.2

Configuration

B.2

To configure the audit trail, you need to define general security


parameters, such as the trail's location and size, as well as any
transactions that are to be recorded.
B.2
The setup of the audit trail consists of two different parts (and
two different configuration dialog boxes):
B.2
Parameters for location, size and warning level as well as
storage parameters are set up in the Audit Trail Settings
dialog box.
Events to be recorded in the audit trail are specified in the
Audit Trail Management console.
Because the size of the audit trail increases by time, syngo MR
provides the Audit Trail Archiving dialog box to store log files
and to delete them subsequently.
B.2

0.0

B.272

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

B.2

NOTE
You have to store the audit trail at regular intervals. Failure
to do this will cause the audit trail to fill up the disk partition,
causing the system to block until the audit trail has been
stored and removed.
B.2
Please ensure that stored audit files are kept according to
national and local regulations.
B.2

B.2

NOTE
The system informs the users when the size of the audit trail
exceeds the specified warning levels. It issues low level and
high level warnings by displaying colored icons in the status
bar. Any user recognizing the warning should inform the
system administrator immediately for storing the audit trail.B.2

Additionally, the resource monitor keeps track of storage capacity and memory size.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.273

Information for Administrators

Time synchronization

B.2

Safety standards in syngo MR

Time stamps for log file entries have to be consistent within all
log files in the audit trail. Therefore, time synchronization
between all system components is very important.
B.2
If you use a network of syngo MR systems, you can establish
a special NTP (Network Time Protocol) that ensures a synchronized time all over the network system. Ask the service technician to connect syngo MR to this.
B.2
B.2

NOTE
You carry the responsibility for maintaining the time server.
Ensure that you set the correct time, otherwise your service
licence may become outdated. This is because the license
manager only accepts a jitter of 24 hours. When the service
licence becomes invalid, the system must be completely
reinstalled.
B.2

0.0

B.274

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Opening the configuration for audit trail


storing

B.2

A user needs the Audit Trail > Archive privilege to configure


the storing and settings of the audit trail.
B.2
Log on as administrator.
Page B.35
From any task card, choose the Options > Configuration
menu item.
The Configuration Panel appears.

B.2

Double-click the Audit Trail Configuration icon.


The Audit Trail Settings dialog box appears for a guided configuration of the audit trail. Depending on the archive target
selection (on the second page) you are guided through. Configuration pages for non-selected storage options are omitted.
Nevertheless, all configuration pages are described in the following.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.275

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

At full, the dialog box provides the following setting pages:

B.2

Local Audit Trail Setup summarizes the current settings


and allows to start the guided configuration.
Select archive target for selecting the device or the location
where the audit trail is stored to. According to your selection
here you have to use the corresponding configuration tab
and the Audit Trail tab.
CD-R for setting up the CD write parameters (session type
and burn speed).
Network Share for defining the node and path for storing in
the network.
You need to know the user name and password of the person
intended to store the audit trail and the share name of the
network folder.
Audit Trail for setting up size and path parameters of the
audit trail, as well as warning levels.

0.0

B.276

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Configuring the storage of the audit trail

B.2

To define the parameters for the storing of the audit trail and the
common properties:
B.2
Open the Audit Trail Settings dialog box.
The Local Audit Trail Setup page appears. It summarizes the
B.2
current settings.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.277

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

You can check the settings:

B.2

B.2

Local Audit Trail

This section displays the current settings for storing the logs of the audit trail.

Disk quota checks

This section displays the warning levels.

Audit Trail archive


target

This section displays the current storage settings.

Click the Setup button to start the configuration.


The Select Target page appears. On this page, you only select
B.2
the type of drive or the (computer) node for storing.

0.0

B.278

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Select where the log files of the audit trail are to be stored:

CD-R drive

Selects the CD-R writer of your system for storing the audit trail. After clicking Next, you
will be guided to the CD-R page to set up the parameters.

Network Share

Defines that the audit trail is to be stored on a shared folder in the network. After clicking
Next, you will be guided to the Network Share page to set up the parameters.
B.2

B.2

Click the Next button to continue.


Or

B.2

B.2

Click Back to return to the previous page.


B.2

Depending on your selection, the according page for entering


the storage parameters appears.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.279

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

If you selected the CD-R option, the following page appears


for configuration:

0.0

B.280

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Select the Session Type:

Single Session

Specifies that a CD-R is written once and then closed. You cannot use it for further
storing.

Multi Session

Specifies that you can store on a CD-R several times (until its capacity is full).

Finalize

Select this check box to close a multi session CD-R.


B.2

Set up the drive and speed parameters.

Drive Letter

Select the drive letter of the CD Recorder. Use the same drive letter as for storing
patient data on CD-R.

Burning Speed

Select the speed the recorder is able to write data to CD-R. Example: Storing 200 MB
at 4x speed takes about 5 min.
Click Next to set up the common parameters of the audit trail.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.281

Information for Administrators

To set up the network


share for storing

B.2

Safety standards in syngo MR

You need the server share name (not letter) and path to set up
the Network Share option. We recommend to use the Windows Explorer to check the connection.
B.2
If you have enabled the Network Share option in the Select
archive target page, the following page appears for configuration.
B.2

0.0

B.282

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Enter the parameters:

User name

Enter the user name for logging to the network shared folder. This user must be
allowed to write the audit trail log files at the network node. Note that this user name
can derive from the local user name that is allowed to start the audit trail storing (and
has to have at least the AuditTrail > Archive privilege).

Domain

Enter either the workstation's domain or local computer name here.

Password

Enter the password for the logon.

Share name

Enter the server name and the path. Use the UNC convention to enter server name
and path (you cannot use drive letters).

Test

Click the Test button to check if the folder is available in the network.
B.2

NOTE
The syntax for a share name is:
\\servername\sharename\[folder]:

B.2

Example: \\deeparchive\archaudit_ws12\at2002

B.2

Make sure that the specified folder exists, and that it can be
written to.
B.2

Click Next to set up the common parameters of the audit trail.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.283

Information for Administrators

To set up the common


parameters of the
audit trail

B.2

Safety standards in syngo MR

After clicking the Next button on any of the configuration


pages of the Audit Trail Settings dialog box, you reach the
Audit Trail page.
B.2

Enter the parameters to set up the path and size of the audit
trail as well as the warning levels.

0.0

B.284

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

B.2

AuditTrail Directory

Enter the path for the folder in which the log files of the audit trail are stored. If the
path does not exist, the system creates it automatically. We recommend to use the
default path: %medhome%\log\Auditing. Keep in mind that the audit trail has to be
protected from normal users.

max. Size [KBytes]

Enter or select the size of the audit trail. Default size is 1024 kBytes (=1 MByte).
When a log file reaches this size, it is closed, and a new log file is created.

Zipped

Select this check box to have the audit trail automatically compressed in a ZIP file.
In the Disk quota checks area, specify the warning levels in
case the size of the audit trail uses too much of the hard
disks capacity.

Warning level %

As soon as the given percentage of the hard disks capacity is reached, an orange
warning icon appears in the status bar. 70-75% may be useful values (70% is the
minimum value).

Quota limit %

As soon as this percentage of the hard disks capacity is reached, a red warning icon
appears in the status bar and the Audit Trail Archiver opens. Storing should be started
immediately. If the current user has no privilege to store, there is a message box
which informs the user about the situation and gives a hint what to do. 80-85% may
be useful values (80% is the minimum value).
In addition to the disc space check, there is a cyclic check of the
security system state. A blocked system (even if no disc space
limit was exceeded) also forces the Audit Trail Archiver to be
popped up. For storing in a blocked system, the user needs the
Archive and the BypassBlockedSystem privileges.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.285

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

B.2

NOTE
Inform the system users about what to do if audit trail
storing should be started. If the current user does not have
storage rights, the End Session dialog box calls the Log in
different user function to switch to a user account with
storage rights.
B.2

Click Finish to finish the configuration.

Opening the Audit Trail Filter and Viewer

B.2

Event recording and the audit trail viewer are configured in the
syngo MR - Audit Trail Management console.
B.2
Only authorized users can handle the log files of the audit
trail. They need the AuditTrail > View and the AuditTrail >
SetFilter privilege to open and use the syngo MR - Audit
Trail Management console.
To open this management console, choose the Options >
Audit Trail > Viewing menu item from any task card.

0.0

B.286

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

The syngo MR - Audit Trail Management console appears. B.2

With the Audit Filter folder, you can define the events to be
recorded.
B.2
With the Audit Trail Viewer item, you can view the various log
files of the audit trail.
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.287

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Defining events to be recorded in the audit


trail

B.2

In syngo MR, applications generate audit events at internal


function points and transactions. As an administrator, you can
select for every application which audit events result in audit
trail entries.
B.2
B.2

NOTE
Note that very detailed recording can slow down system
performance.
B.2

Only authorized users can set up the events to be recorded in


the audit trail. They need the AuditTrail - SetFilter privilege. B.2

0.0

B.288

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

B.2

CAUTION
Source of danger: The system blocks when the audit trail
is filled (too many records, or too much drive space
covered).
B.2
Consequence: In this case, it is not possible to work with
the system. Emergency access is also not possible. B.2
Remedy: To prevent system blockage, someone must store
the log files and remove them from the audit trail on a
regular basis.
B.2
When the audit trail blocks the system, proceed as
described in Page B.294. Note that then the
SecuritySystem > BypassBlockedSystem and the
AuditTrail > Archive privileges are needed.

B.2

Open the syngo MR - Audit Trail Management console.


On the left-hand side, open the syngo MR and the Audit Filter folder.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.289

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

The system displays sub-folders one for every application


audited.
B.2
Click the desired application folder.
All Audit Events of that application are displayed on the rightB.2
hand side.
The actions to be recorded in the audit trail are marked.

B.2

Select or clear the Audit Events as desired.


To save the settings, click Save.

0.0

B.290

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

The changes come into effect immediately.

B.2

B.2

TIP
Click the Reset button to clear your changes.

B.2

B.2

Viewing log files

B.2

It is possible to view the log files at any time.

B.2

Only authorized users have access to the log files of the audit
trail. They need the AuditTrail - View privilege.
B.2
Open the syngo MR - Audit Trail Management console.
In the tree on the left-hand side, click the Audit Trail Viewer
item.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.291

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

The audit trail viewer is displayed on the right-hand side.

B.2

You must close the current log file before you can view it:
Click the New Audit Trail button.
The current log file is closed and a new log file is created immediately.
B.2

0.0

B.292

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Browse through by using the Files to view fields and doubleclick the log file (.xml or .xml.z) that you want to view.
The log files are formatted in XML. The contents of the selected
log file are displayed in the large area. The header gives general information about the institution and log file itself. This is followed by data recorded for every security-relevant transaction.
B.2

Filtering the Log Files for


Viewing

B.2

To further inspect a log file, you can apply different filters or


apply certain filter criteria.
B.2
Choose the desired filters from the lists above the display
area. For example, you can filter by Action types, Function
Point IDs, Applications and Users.
In the Argument Filter criteria field, you can copy a parameter from the log file and initiate an exact match search.
To apply the filter, click the Refresh button.
The display area shows only the data records that meet the filter
criteria.
B.2
To reset a filter, select All ... in the corresponding filter list
and click Refresh.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.293

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

Storing and deleting log files

B.2

The audit trail storing method defines whether the log files are
stored to a remote shared disk or CD-R.
See Page B.277 for more information.
B.2
You must close the current log file before you can store it and
you must have stored a log file before you can delete it.
B.2
To store or to delete audit trail log files:

B.2

Only authorized users are able to store or delete the log files of
the audit trail. They need the Audit Trail Archive and AuditTrail Delete privileges.
B.2
From any task card, choose the Options > Audit Trail >
Archiving menu item.

0.0

B.294

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

The Audit Trail Archiving dialog box appears. All audit trail log
files of your system are listed showing their current archive and
importance status. A green icon at the bottom left indicates that
the security system is running properly:
B.2

The icon of each file indicates the status:


B.2

These files are not stored.


B.2

These files are already stored.


B.2

These files are not stored but contain important information


about data manipulation (for example, deletions).
B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.295

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

These files are stored and contain important information about


data manipulation (for example, deletions). The storage files
must be kept according to national and local regulations (for
example, 6 years).
B.2

You can delete files which are already stored.

B.2

When storing to CD-R, insert a fresh CD-R, or a multi-session CD-R from previous audit trail archiving.
For storing on network shares, the connection must be established (use the Windows Explorer to check this).
Select the log files you want to store and click the Archive
button.
Multiple selections are possible.

B.2

B.2

NOTE
Stored log files obtain the status archived and are marked
with the archived icons.
B.2

The selected log files are saved to disk or to CD-R (as configured). The system issues a message upon completion.
B.2

0.0

B.296

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Deleting stored log files

B.2

Information for Administrators

You can only delete log files that have been stored.

B.2

Select the log file you want to delete and click the Delete button.
The log file is deleted from the disk partition containing the audit
trail. The list is automatically updated.
B.2

What to do when the audit trail blocks the


system

B.2

B.2

CAUTION
Source of danger: The system blocks when the audit trail
is filled (too many records, or too much drive space
covered).
B.2
Consequence: In this case, it is not possible to work with
the system. Emergency access is also not possible. B.2
Remedy: To prevent system blockage, someone must store
the log files and remove them from the audit trail on a
regular basis. Note that the archiver needs the AuditTrail >
Archive privilege.
B.2
When the audit trail blocks the system, proceed as
described in Page B.294. Note that for operating a
blocked system, additionally the SecuritySystem >
BypassBlockedSystem privilege is needed.

B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.297

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

A full audit trail blocks the entire system. Emergency access is


also not possible. You have to store the log files and empty the
audit trail before users can continue working.
B.2
Only authorized users are able to store the log files of the
audit trail. They need the AuditTrail Archive privilege.
Open the Audit Trail Archiver dialog box.
Page B.275
The Audit Trail Archiver dialog box opens and lists all log files
of the audit trail with their current archive status.
B.2
Store all log files and delete them from the audit trail.
Page B.294
Click the Restart button. This button is active only when the
system is blocked.
The system resumes operation.

B.2

0.0

B.298

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Administrators

Secure transfer of data

B.2

During the site-specific configuration of the local system, a service technician sets up the connection to network nodes, central archives, DICOM service providers and DICOM service
users.
B.2
To establish a secure system, all these network partners and
services have to be reliable.
B.2
One policy is to establish a trusted sites zone. A trusted zone
contains network nodes you trust-nodes that you believe you
can receive data from or send data to without worrying about
the security of computer or data.
B.2
To establish a trusted zone, you must assign nodes to this zone.
Then the syngo MR security features let the system:
B.2
Transfer and receive data, knowing that the computer and
confidential patient information are safe.
Only accept DICOM Query/Retrieve requests from trusted
hosts or applications. Requests from unknown workstations
or applications are rejected.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.299

Information for Administrators

Security of Protocols

B.2

Safety standards in syngo MR

For security reasons, syngo MR follows a restrictive policy concerning ports and IP addresses. Data traffic through all unnecessary ports and addresses is blocked. Data exchange is
restricted to defined paths only.
B.2
After installation all ports and addresses are blocked except
for a few basic services, such as ports for the DICOM services.
By configuring DICOM network nodes in the Local Service
Software, the IP addresses become valid and the necessary
ports are unlocked.
If you need additional IP addresses for other reasons, you
should define them also as network nodes in the Local Service Software to enable them.

0.0

B.2100

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Assigning Nodes to Your


Trusted Zone

B.2

Information for Administrators

To establish a trusted zone, you must assign nodes to this


zone.
B.2
From any task card, choose the Options > Service > Local
Service menu item to open the Service Software window.
Navigate to the Configuration > Security > Settings page.
In the Security properties, select the Enable trusted host
functionality for your computer.
B.2

NOTE
This function must be enabled on all syngo MR
workstations with which you want to exchange data.
Additionally, it is also possible to communicate with
secured legacy systems (Secured by means of
restricted physical access).

B.2

B.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.2101

Information for Administrators

Safety standards in syngo MR

0.0

B.2102

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

B.3
Security System

Information for Users


B.3

B.3

For security reasons, only authorized persons have access to


sensitive data, such as diagnostic images, results, or reports. B.3
syngo MR allows you to work only with the data and functions
that you have been authorized to use. All other patient data is
not visible to you and the prohibited functions are not available.
B.3
B.3

NOTE
The audit trail logs all activities you perform on sensitive
data in an audit trail. This also includes your identity. B.3
Except for emergency access, you are only allowed to work
with a syngo MR workstation if you are logged into your
personal user account.
B.3
The system administrator will notify you about your user
account and password.
B.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.31

Information for Users

Safety standards in syngo MR

User management and access


control
User Accounts,
Permissions and
Privileges

B.3

B.3

The syngo MR user model ensures that every user is allowed


to access only to the data he/she is authorized to work with
(data security) and to the functions he/she is authorized to use
(functional security).
B.3
How are you integrated in the syngo MR user model?

B.3

The administrator created a user account for you. To work


with syngo MR, you have to log on first (password protected).
Depending on your profession and duties, you are assigned
one or several roles, for example, nurse or doctor. Privileges that are associated with your roles give you the right
to access specific syngo MR functions.
Depending on the departments and/or teams you work in,
you are assigned to one or several groups. The rights on
data are granted to all members of a group by permissions.
Members of the same group have access permissions to the
same data. Users with the same roles have the same privileges for executing functions. The administrator can also set
up privileges and permissions for every user individually.
It is also possible to extend the data rights for someone
beyond a group, for example for a doctor who wants a second opinion from a colleague on another ward.
Depending on your permissions, you can manually grant
access to data that you have created to members of a group
who would otherwise not be able to access this data.

0.0

B.32

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Users

Example: If you want to send a study of the patient Mr. Smith to


the store, you need the privilege to send data to the archive and
you also need the permission to access the study of Mr. Smith.B.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.33

Information for Users

Safety standards in syngo MR

B.3

TIP
The user configuration depends on the security regulations
of your hospital. For questions about your rights, ask the
system administrator.
B.3
If you are asked to work temporarily in another department,
for example to take over from a sick colleague, the
administrator can temporarily assign you to this group. B.3

0.0

B.34

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Users

Logging on and off

B.3

To log on to a workstation, type your user name and password.


After the system has authenticated you, you get access to the
syngo MR application.
B.3
B.3

NOTE
Logging off or locking a workstation does not interrupt or
abort running or queued background jobs, such as filming
images. Every background job is protocolled under the
identity of the user who initiated it.
B.3

The described functions are provided in the End Session dialog box. To open the dialog box, use the System > End Session menu item or press CTRL+ALT+DEL:
B.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.35

Information for Users

Lock Computer

Safety standards in syngo MR

B.3

Click the Lock Computer button to lock your computer.


If you have to leave your workstation unattended for a longer
period without quitting your session, you should lock the workstation with this function.
B.3
To unlock the workstation, you have to log on again.

0.0

B.36

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Users

If you are the person who locked the workstation, you will find
your session as you left it.
B.3
If another user unlocks your computer and does not have the
appropriate access rights, a warning appears. Only after explicit
confirmation, any patient data is unloaded (without saving) and
the currently active application function is terminated.
B.3
B.3

NOTE
If a screen saver has been enabled on your workstation, it
is automatically activated whenever there has been no
mouse or keyboard activity for a certain period. The screen
saver has the same effect as Lock Computer.
B.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.37

Information for Users

Log off user

Safety standards in syngo MR

B.3

To log off, click the Log off [user name] button.


If you have finished your work, you can log off. This ends your
session at the computer. All patient data is closed. At a new log
on, syngo MR appears in a neutral state.
B.3
B.3

NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are lost
irretrievably.

B.3

Therefore always check whether data still needs to be


saved and save any data you want to keep before you log
off.
B.3

To ensure high throughput of patients, two assistants share


modality consoles. While one assistant prepares a patient for
the examination, the other assistant sends the images from the
previous examination to the archive. Both assistants have the
same privileges and permissions.
B.3
The switch user function allows them to efficiently work together
at the same console. In this way, they can alternately use the
consoles without suffering delays or losing the work of the other
user.
B.3

0.0

B.38

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Log different user

Information for Users

B.3

To switch the user at your workstation, click the Log in Different User button.
If you share the workstation with other users, you can hand over
the workstation quickly by using the switch user function.
B.3
The current user is logged off. The workstation can only be
used by the new user after logging on.
B.3
B.3

NOTE
If the new user has the same (or sufficient) access rights,
the current images are not unloaded.
B.3
If the new user does not have the appropriate access rights,
all patient data is unloaded and the currently active
application function is terminated. Unsaved data will be lost. B.3
If a measurement or an image calculation of a previous user
is still running in the background, the current user cannot
start his measurement until the previous users
measurement or image calculation is finished.
B.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.39

Information for Users

Change Password

Safety standards in syngo MR

B.3

To change your password, click the Change Password button.


Enter the old password for authentication, and type the new
password. Repeat the new password for verification.
The password is case sensitive.

B.3

0.0

B.310

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Users

Emergency access

B.3

The security policy influences the behavior in emergency


cases. Depending on the security configuration, you can log on
under the general emergency account in case of an emergency.
Ask your administrator. Account name and the necessary password are supplied by the administrator.
B.3
Emergency access is very restricted. Typically, it does not allow
the modification, deletion or transfer of data.
B.3
B.3

NOTE
Do not misuse the emergency access account to log on to
the system if you forget your password.
B.3
Patient data acquired and processed during emergency
access must be corrected and rearranged later. As a
consequence, the data will be assigned to the user who
carries out the alteration.
B.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.311

Information for Users

Safety standards in syngo MR

Failed log on

B.3

You cannot change your account name, but you can change
your own password. Only administrators are allowed to change
user accounts.
B.3
If you have been denied access to your workstation because
you have forgotten your user name or password proceed as follows:
B.3
Ask your administrator for your current account name. The
account name is not case sensitive.
Make sure that the Caps Lock key is not accidentally set.
Bear in mind that passwords are case sensitive: W56Xrad
and w56xrad are not the same.
Re-enter your account name and password.
If this does not lead to success, ask your administrator to
give you a new password.

0.0

B.312

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Users

Protecting data from unauthorized


access

B.3

Depending on your permissions, you can manually modify the


protections of data objects by using the Patient Groups. This
way, you can grant users access to data that they would otherwise not have had. Similarly, you can deny users access to data
who had previously had it.
Page B.212
B.3
Imagine, the patient Mr. Smith is transferred from the intensive
care unit to the cardiology department. As a consequence, Mr.
Smith's data is no longer available to the staff of the intensive
care unit, but it becomes available to the staff of the cardiology
department.
B.3
This is established by both removing the Patient Group intensive care and assigning the Patient Group cardiology.
B.3
B.3

NOTE
You can set data protections at patient or study level. Series
and images inherit protections from the patient or the study
they belong to.
B.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.313

Information for Users

Safety standards in syngo MR

Select the patient or the study in the Patient Browser.


Choose the Edit > Modify Patient Groups menu item.
All patient groups available are listed in the Patient Groups dialog box. The groups the selected patient or study is currently
applied to are marked.
B.3
Select or clear the patient groups as desired. Note that the
STANDARD patient group is a fall-back patient group. You
should not change it.
Take care that you do not unintentionally withdraw your own
access permissions.
B.3
The patient groups and the access permissions to them are
defined in the syngo MR Security Configuration console.
Most commonly, the names of the patient groups indicate the
protection level.
B.3
Click the Users button to view and set up the access permissions of individual users.
To confirm, click OK.
The dialog box closes. The new access permissions on data
take effect immediately.
B.3

0.0

B.314

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Service access

Information for Users

B.3

In order to allow service activities, users with the according privilege must grant the service technician access to the computer.
The procedure differs for the local and remote service access.
B.3

Local access

B.3

Usually, a user account with restricted rights is created for the


service technician for carrying out local service activities.
B.3
To allow local service activities if no account is available, you
have to get the system to generate a temporary password for
the general LocalServiceUser account. This password expires
after a predefined number of days. Using this password, a service technician can log on to the computer under the LocalServiceUser user account.
B.3
Usually the LocalServiceUser account is member of the syngoServiceUser group and role. This way, the service technician obtains permissions and privileges as determined by the
system administrator.
B.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.315

Information for Users

Remote access

Safety standards in syngo MR

B.3

Remote service access lets a service technician carry out


maintenance activities from a remote workstation.
B.3
You start a remote service session and wait for the response
from the remote workstation. Depending on the required service activities, you then grant the technician full or limited
access to your workstation.
B.3
Full Access
Allows the service technician to take control of your workstation (which blocks it to you).
Limited Access
This mode provides access to all service functions that do
not interfere with regular patient operations.
Access to Patient Data
The service technician has no access to patient data from a
remote system. If he needs one, he will explicitly have to
request it.
Remote Application Access
No Access
Unexpected closing can cause inconsistent or inoperable system.
B.3
If you close a remote service session while the service technician is still working, all currently running service programs will
be terminated. This may result in an inconsistent or inoperable
system.
B.3
The service technician will only be notified that the session is
going to be closed by you.
Ask the service technician before you close the session.

0.0

B.316

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Users

Generating a service password for local


access

B.3

Usually, a user account with restricted rights is created for the


service technician for carrying out local service activities.
B.3
If there is no personal account for the service technician available, you must get the system to generate a service password
for the general LocalServiceUser account when the service
technician needs access to your workstation.
B.3
The password expires after a configurable number of days.
After that time, the password becomes invalid. You will need to
generate a new service password.
B.3
As there is only one LocalServiceUser account, the system
holds just one service password at any one time. If you generate a new service password and an old one is still valid, the old
password gets overwritten.
B.3
You need the EnableServiceAccess privilege to use the
Service User menu item. Otherwise you wont see it.
From any task card, choose the Options > Service > Service User menu item.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.317

Information for Users

Safety standards in syngo MR

The Set Password for the account 'LocalServiceUser' dialog


box is displayed.
B.3

In the Comment field, enter the reason for a service access


and the name of the service technician.
Enter the expiry period in days.
Confirm with Apply to generate the password.
The generated password is displayed next to Assigned password.
B.3

0.0

B.318

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Users

Note the password.


To end, click Close.
Keep the password confidential and pass it only to the service technician.
B.3

NOTE
Transfer the password as securely as possible to the
service technician. Sending passwords via unencrypted email or mail is not secure!
B.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.319

Information for Users

Safety standards in syngo MR

Recorded user transactions


(audit trail)
Audit Trail

B.3

B.3

The syngo MR security system supports tracking of the following actions:


B.3
All activities you perform on sensitive data is logged in an
audit trail, with your identity.
Unsuccessful login attempts are recorded, too.
B.3

NOTE
Important! You carry the responsibility for all transactions
that have been performed under your user account. B.3
In your own interest, lock the computer or log off when you
have finished work or when leaving the workstation
unattended for a longer period.
B.3

The audit trail can be viewed by authorized personnel only.

B.3

0.0

B.320

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Audit Trail full?

B.3

Information for Users

A full audit trail blocks the entire system. You cannot proceed
working. Emergency access is also not possible.
B.3
When the storage space reaches the warning level, an yellow icon appears in the status bar of all task cards.
When the storage space reaches the quota limit, a red icon
appears in the status bar. Additionally, the system displays a
message when the audit trail exceeds a certain limit.
Clicking the red icon opens either a warning message box
if you dont have the storing privilege or the Audit Trail
Archiving dialog box provided you have the appropriate
privileges.
Do not ignore these warnings, inform your system administrator
immediately.
B.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.321

Information for Users

Safety standards in syngo MR

0.0

B.322

Operator Manual

Information for Service


Technicians

CHAPTER

B.4
Service Access Rights

B.4

B.4

For any service activities to take place, you must ask a user or
the system administrator to allow local access to the workstation.
B.4
Usually, a user account with restricted rights is created for
carrying out local service activities.
If there is no personal account for the service technician
available, you can only access syngo with the LocalServiceUser account, which provides the service account rights.
The service account is not deleted when the password
expires. For subsequent service activities, it is merely necessary to request a new password.

Audit Trail

B.4

All system activities affecting sensitive data are recorded in the


audit trail for later review. Each local and remote service session leads to an entry in the audit trail.
B.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.41

Information for Service Technicians

Safety standards in syngo MR

Service access
Different Types of Access

B.4

B.4

If service personnel needs access to patient data, or the configuration of the system has to be changed during a remote service session, this has to be enabled by the local user first.
B.4
Remote access to the syngo MR system for service purposes
is only possible from trusted systems (a system with a proved
certificate) There is only are very small number of systems set
up for remote access.
B.4
Trusted systems are systems with a certificate from a root
CA which is in the server certificate trust list (client authentication).
The use of SSL and HTTPS are mandatory for this connection.
To add certificates, the standard mechanism of the operating
system is used.
Together with the syngo MR installation, the certificate of the
root CA of the RDIAG (remote service server) is delivered.
syngo MR generates a self signed certificate, therefore, the
RDIAG is not able to identify a syngo MR system via the certificate (no server authentication).
The RDIAG server connects to syngo MR via HTTPS.

0.0

B.42

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Service Technicians

Local access

B.4

Usually, a user account with restricted rights is created for carrying out local service activities.
B.4
To log on to syngo MR for service activities when an individual
account is not available:
B.4
Ask a user or the system administrator to generate a password for the service account.
The password expires after a predefined number of days.

B.4

Log on to the computer under the default service account:


LocalServiceUser.
Enter the generated password and click OK.
To open the local service software, choose the Options >
Service > Local Service menu item from any task card.
The Service Software window appears.

B.4

Enter both parts of the service key necessary for the desired
service level.
The service key decides with which service level the Service
Software will open.
B.4
Enter the service password.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.43

Information for Service Technicians

Safety standards in syngo MR

The system will check the service password. If it is valid, the


service interface appears. Depending on security configuration,
the patient data access may be enabled.
B.4
B.4

NOTE
The detailed view of the Resource Monitor is only
available after you have logged on to the Service
Software.

B.4

0.0

B.44

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Service Technicians

Remote access

B.4

Remote access to the syngo MR system for service purposes


is only possible from trusted systems.
B.4
If the remote service access is configured to be based on
SSL encryption, remote access is only possible from hosts
believed to be trusted. Certificates are exchanged and
checked. The certificate for RDIAG server is stored locally.
The protocol used is HTTPS:\\
SSL may affect the performance of the connection.
If SSL is not used, the local system can configure to allow
remote access any remote server. The protocol used is
HTTP:\\
For remote service to take place, access must be enabled on
the local system by using the Remote Service Access Control
window.
B.4
To start a remote service session:

B.4

Phone or ask the user to allow you remote access in the


Remote Service Access Control window.
Start your remote service session.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.45

Information for Service Technicians

Safety standards in syngo MR

As long as you work without access to patient information, you


will only see anonymized patient information.
B.4
To execute particular service and test functions (File&Image
Tools), you need access to patient information.
The Service Software will remind you to request this access:

B.4

Enter your name and click the Request button.


The request appears in the Remote Service Access Control
window of the local system. The user concerned must explicitly
B.4
confirm it. This confirmation is logged into the audit trail.
B.4

NOTE
Because the Remote Service Access Control may be
closed on the local system at the time, you should call the
local user to get the confirmation.
B.4

0.0

B.46

Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR

Information for Service Technicians

Backup & restore

B.4

To avoid the loss of configuration data, ask the service technician to back up the system.
B.4
Backups and restores are done within the Service Software
package of syngo MR.
B.4
Update/Upgrade

B.4

An update is a patch within a version. A software upgrade


replaces a version with a newer one.
B.4
B.4

NOTE
Do not forget to store the audit trail before software update
or upgrade. The audit trail has to be saved separately. The
backup and restore functionality under Local Service does
not store the audit trail.
B.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

B.47

Information for Service Technicians

Safety standards in syngo MR

0.0

B.48

Operator Manual

PART

Managing and Adjusting


the System

C.0

C.1 System Manager


Using the image control system and syngo MR ............. C.12
Shutting down the entire system ............................... C.13
Shutting down and rebooting the
image control system ................................................. C.15
Closing syngo MR and rebooting .............................. C.16
Forced shutdown/reboot ............................................ C.18
Handling applications ................................................ C.19
Locking the computer .............................................. C.111
Logging off ............................................................... C.112
Logging on a new user ............................................ C.113
Changing your password ......................................... C.114
Monitoring the image reconstruction system ............... C.115
Rebooting the image reconstruction system ........... C.116
Shutting down and rebooting components .............. C.117
Controlling the MR scanner ......................................... C.119
Rebooting the operating system .............................. C.121
Switching the Power Supply to Standby .................. C.121
Tools ............................................................................ C.124
Gathering diagnostic information ............................. C.125
Displaying changed files .......................................... C.126
Displaying system information ..................................... C.127
General system information ..................................... C.127
Information about the system .................................. C.129
Drive and database information ............................... C.130
Network information ................................................. C.133
Displaying patents ................................................... C.135
Updating the display ................................................ C.136

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C1

Contents

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2 Adjusting the System


Configuring automatic adjustment .................................. C.22
Adapting the adjustment volume ................................ C.27
Automatic sequence of adjustment steps ..................... C.219
Manual adjustment ....................................................... C.221
Optimizing the frequency ......................................... C.223
Transmitter adjustment ............................................ C.233
3D Shim ................................................................... C.239
Interactive shim ........................................................ C.248
Manual water suppression ....................................... C.256
Undoing changes ..................................................... C.263
Completing adjustment ............................................ C.263
Starting protocol adjustments manually ................... C.264
Changing the resonance frequency
after inline adjustment .............................................. C.265
Displaying adjustment results ....................................... C.270
Selecting Parameters for Display ............................. C.272

0.0

C2

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

C.1

System Manager

C.1

Your MR system consists of various components: The main


component is the MR scanner located in the examination room.
Next to it are the image reconstruction system and the console
for operating syngo MR. As an option, you may also use a satellite console.
C.1
These components comprise your MR system. The syngo MR
System Manager is a module that allows you to monitor, as
well as start and stop the individual components of the scan
system.
C.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.11

System Manager

Managing and Adjusting the System

Using the image control system


and syngo MR

C.1

You control and operate your MR system from the console


using the syngo MR program which runs on the Windows XP
operating system. The syngo MR program consists of different
applications, such as image processing or 3D. You may sometimes find that one or more applications no longer respond, i.e.
your commands are not accepted. If this happens, you may
close these applications separately without having to shut down
syngo MR or the operating system.
C.1
Select System > Control from the main menu.
The System Manager dialog box opens.

C.1

Click the Host card.

0.0

C.12

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Shutting down the entire system

C.1

You can shut down the entire system at once (the console, the
MR scanner, and the image reconstruction system), for example, at the end of the day or to disconnect the system from the
power supply for service work or reinitialization of the hardware
and software.
C.1
Select System > End Session from the main menu.
The End Session dialog box opens.

C.1

Click the Shutdown System button.


Or

C.1

Click the Shutdown All button in the System Manager/


Host card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.13

System Manager

Managing and Adjusting the System

The Confirm Action dialog window opens.

C.1

Click the Yes button.


Or click No to cancel the operation. The system does not shut
down.
Once you have closed down all programs and the operating
system, you have to switch off the components of the scan
system from the alarm box. That is the only way to ensure that
the image reconstruction system will start when you restart
the system.
see System Manual

0.0

C.14

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Shutting down and rebooting the image


control system

C.1

An error in the operating system or in syngo MR may mean that


you have to shut down the console only. The other components
of the system such as the MR scanner are not affected.
C.1
Click the Reboot button in the System Manager.
Or

C.1

Select System > End Session from the main menu.


The End Session dialog box opens.

C.1

Click the Restart System button.


syngo MR and the operating system are shut down and then
C.1
automatically rebooted.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.15

System Manager

Managing and Adjusting the System

Closing syngo MR and rebooting

C.1

You may have to close syngo MR if it no longer responds. You


may then restart it automatically.
C.1
Just click the Restart syngo MR button in the System Manager.
Or

C.1

Select System > End Session from the main menu.


The End Session dialog box opens.

C.1

Click the Restart Application button.

0.0

C.16

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

The program syngo MR and the operating system were shut


down. In case Auto-Login is active, all processes will be started
again.
C.1
Without Auto-Login, the user has to register again prior to booting the system (e.g. as "user xy").
C.1
When the safety package is active, the user has to register
again prior to booting the system.
C.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.17

System Manager

Managing and Adjusting the System

Forced shutdown/reboot

C.1

If errors occur in the operating system or in the syngo MR application, you may respond either by properly shutting down the
software or forcing the system to shut down. Following a forced
shutdown, the system will be operational again in a short time.C.1
Select the Forced Mode option in the system manager.
Click the Reboot button on the System Manager/Host card.
Or

C.1

Click the Shutdown All button in the System Manager/Host


card.
Or

C.1

Click the Restart syngo MR button in the System Manager/


Host card.
The system shuts down.

C.1

C.1

C AU T I O N
After a forced system shut down, all unsaved data and
unfinished filming or storage jobs will be lost. All
background activities are forced to terminate.

C.1

0.0

C.18

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Handling applications

C.1

syngo MR includes a series of applications that may be started


and closed individually.
C.1
The syngo MR applications that run on your main console are
listed under Application Name in the System Manager.
C.1
The status of each application is also displayed:

C.1

running
The application is in progress.
not running
The application is not running.
undefined
The application status has not been received shortly after
starting the system manager.
not responding
It is not possible to communicate with this software component.
unknown name
Certain components of the application are not available.
stop in progress
The application is being shut down.
startup in progress
The application is being started up.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.19

System Manager

Stopping an application

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.1

You may stop an individual application (e.g. the 3D module) to


save memory space.
C.1
Select the application from the list.
Then click the Stop Application button.
Initially, the application shows the status stop in progress.
Then it changes to status not running.
The Activity Progress window shows you how far the selected
action has progressed. The progress bar allows you to monitor
the progress of actions that take a long time.
C.1

Starting an application

C.1

You may explicitly start applications that you have stopped or


that do not start automatically.
C.1
Select the application from the list.
Click the Start Application button.
Initially, the application shows the status start up in
progress, and then running, once the application is running.

Restarting an application

C.1

You can shut down and restart applications, e.g. if they are no
longer responding.
C.1
Select the application from the list.
Click the Restart Applications button.

0.0

C.110

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Locking the computer

C.1

If you have to leave the workstation for a short time, you can
protect the data on the computer from unauthorized access
without having to log off.
C.1
This function is available only if the syngo security system is
activated on your system.
Select System > End Session from the main menu.
The End Session dialog box opens.
C.1

Click the Lock Computer button.


A login window opens. It hides the user interface of the program.
C.1
When you want to resume work on the workstation, you only
need to log on again.
C.1
You will find detailed information about logging on and off in
syngo MR and about access rights in general in Part Safety
Standards.
Chapter B.3, Information for Users

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.111

System Manager

Managing and Adjusting the System

Logging off

C.1

When you have finished working with the system, you must log
off.
C.1
Select System > End Session from the main menu.
The End Session dialog box opens.
C.1

Click the [user name] Logoff button.

C.1

NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are irretrievably
lost.
C.1
Always check for unsaved data and save any data you want
to keep before logging off.
C.1

A logoff window opens. Opened patient data are unloaded. It


hides the user interface of the program.
C.1
Another user can now log onto the system.

C.1

You will find detailed information about logging on and off in


syngo MR and about access rights in general in the Safety
Standards part.
Chapter B.3, Information for Users

0.0

C.112

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Logging on a new user

C.1

A new user can log onto the system even if the current user has
not logged off.
C.1
This function is available only if the syngo security system is
activated on your system.
Select System > End Session from the main menu.
The End Session dialog box opens.
C.1

Click the Log on new user button.


A login window opens. It hides the user interface of the program.
C.1
Enter a new user name in the dialog box.
If you have the same user rights as the previous user, you can
work with the loaded data again. If you have fewer rights, the
data used by the previous user will be unloaded.
You will find detailed information about logging on and off in
syngo MR and about access rights in general in the Safety
Standards part.
Chapter B.3, Information for Users

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.113

System Manager

Managing and Adjusting the System

Changing your password

C.1

You can change your password in an input dialog box.

C.1

This function is available only if the syngo security system is


activated on your system.
Select System > End Session from the main menu.
The End Session dialog box opens.
C.1

Click the Change Password button.


An input dialog box is displayed.

C.1

Enter the old password in the first field for authentification.


Enter the new password in the next field. Repeat the new
password in the third input field for checking.
Upper and lower case letters are treated as different characters.C.1
You will find detailed information about logging on and off in
syngo MR and about access rights in general in the Safety
Standards part.
Chapter B.3, Information for Users

0.0

C.114

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Monitoring the image


reconstruction system

C.1

The raw data supplied by the scan system are reconstructed by


the image reconstruction system. Like the image control system, you can also close down and restart this system, for example, if a fault occurs.
C.1
Together with the MR Scanner the image processor can be
switched to standby.
Page C.121, Switching the Power Supply to Standby
Select System > Control from the main menu.
The System Manager dialog box opens.

C.1

Go to the Image Reconstr. System card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.115

System Manager

Displaying the status of the


image reconstruction
system
C.1

Managing and Adjusting the System

The status bar of the system contains an icon indicating the status of the image reconstruction system:
C.1

Status: The image reconstruction system is ready.


C.1

If the image reconstruction system is not ready, the icon has a


red line through it.
C.1
The image processor may be in the standby mode (not voltage supply).
Double-clicking on the icon opens a dialog box with an explanation.

Rebooting the image reconstruction system

C.1

In the event of a fault, you can shut down and reboot the entire
image reconstruction system.
C.1

Click the Reboot button.


The image reconstruction system will be shut down and rebooted. It is not possible to operate it again until the status of the
monitored applications switches from not running to running.C.1

0.0

C.116

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Shutting down and rebooting components

C.1

The Component Control window of the Image Reconstr. System card shows which software components of the image
reconstruction system are running and what status they have.C.1
If a software error occurs during scanning or image reconstruction, you may restart the components of the image reconstruction system separately.
C.1

Restarting software
components

C.1

If errors occur during image calculation, all software components running on the image reconstruction system, except the
Peripherie Server (peripheral server), will be shut down and
restarted.
C.1

Click the Restart Image Calculation button.


The Activity Progress window shows how long it will take to
shut down and restart the software components.
C.1
The system is ready for scanning again once the components
of the image reconstruction system have restarted.
C.1
The status of the Peripherie Server (peripheral server) component must be running while the software components
restart.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.117

System Manager

Restarting the Peripherie


Server (peripheral server)
component

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.1

The Peripherie Server (peripheral server) component establishes the connection with the MR scanner and is restarted separately.
C.1

Click the Restart Peripherie Server button.


The Peripherie Server (peripheral server) component is shut
down and restarted.
C.1
The status of the image calculation components stays running.C.1
Shutting down and restarting the Peripherie Server (peripheral server) component of the image reconstruction component takes longer than restarting the image calculation components.

0.0

C.118

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Controlling the MR scanner

C.1

The computer system of the MR scanner also has an operating


system. You can display the current status of individual components of the MR scanner and switch the power supply on and
off.
C.1
Select System > Control from the main menu.
The System Manager dialog box opens.

C.1

Go to the MR Scanner card and click it in foreground.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.119

System Manager

Operating status of the


individual components

OK

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.1

The current status of the components (ok or not ok) is shown


in the State column.
C.1

Not OK

Helium fill level

All the components of the MR scanner are listed under Component Name.
C.1

The list is updated automatically. The MR scanner is not


always online while it is rebooting. Therefore, it is not possible
to display the status of scanner components during booting.
During this time, the MR Scanner window shows the message "The Scanner is not online".

C.1

C.1

The helium fill level is shown below the list on the MR Scanner
card. The display is in % (percentages).
C.1

Status of the MR scanner

C.1

The status of the MR scanner is shown both on the


MR Scanner subtask card and on the status bar of the system.
C.1

Status: MR scanner is ready.


C.1

If the MR scanner is not online or is booting, the icon has a red


line through it.
C.1

0.0

C.120

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Rebooting the operating system

C.1

If an error occurs in the operating system of the MR scanner


during operation, you can eliminate the error by shutting down
and rebooting the operating system.
C.1

Click the Reboot button.

Switching the Power Supply to Standby


Switching the MR scanner
and image processor to
standby
C.1

C.1

If you do not intend to perform scans for a longer period of time


or only want to process or evaluate images on the console, you
can save energy by switching off the voltage supply to the MR
Scanners and image processor.
C.1

Click the Stand By button.


Or

C.1

Switch the scanner and image processor to standby via the


Alarm Box.
C.1

NOTE
After switch-over to standby, it is not possible to start a new
scan.
C.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.121

System Manager

Managing and Adjusting the System

If the image processor no longer contains jobs in the job list, it


is immediately switched to standby. Subsequently, the
MR Scanner is switched to standby as well.
C.1
However, if the image processor still has jobs in the job list, it
may not be possible to immediately end these jobs.
C.1
In this case, the dialog SystemManager - Scanner StandBy
appears:
C.1

This dialog allows you to determine whether and how the image
processor should be shut down.
C.1

0.0

C.122

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

C.1

Option

Consequences

Proceed

The image processor is shut down only after calculating the


current image processor jobs. This may take several
minutes. There is no associated loss in data. The dialog box
is closed and cannot be called up again.

Cancel

Shut-down of the image processor is stopped.

End Now

The image calculation in progress is ended immediately.


Data may be lost in this case.

Click the button for the desired option.


Shut-down of the image processor is displayed via various
status messages.
Switching the power
supply on again

C.1

If your MR scanner is in Stand By mode, you can switch on the


power supply again to resume scanning.
C.1

Click the System On button.


You can also switch the power supply of the MR scanner on
or off in the alarm box.
see System Manual

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.123

System Manager

Managing and Adjusting the System

Tools

C.1

The Tools card is used to acquire diagnostic information or


check important system files.
C.1
Select System > Control from the main menu.
The System Manager dialog box opens.

C.1

Go to the Tools card.

0.0

C.124

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Gathering diagnostic information

C.1

If a software error occurs during scanning, it is recommended


to create a "MrSaveLog" file immediately. It contains valuable
diagnostic information.
C.1

Click the Save System Log-Files button.


The "MrSaveLog" file is created. It contains all diagnostic information valid at the time the error occurred. It is stored in the
C:\MedCom\MriDiagnostic folder as a ZIP file. Siemens Service
will be able to use the ZIP file for subsequent analysis.
C.1
The diagnostic information it contains can be used to help
locate the error.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.125

System Manager

Managing and Adjusting the System

Displaying changed files

C.1

The most important system files are checked every time the
system boots.
C.1

Click the View Consistency Log button.


The "MrConsistency-Checker" checks the system files for
changes every time the system boots. The result is saved in a
log file. You can view the content of this file in the Support&Diagnostic Tools window by clicking the View Consistency Log button.
C.1
Never install additional software on the system. Installation
could replace existing system files and impair the scanning
capability of the system.
C.1

0.0

C.126

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Displaying system information

C.1

syngo MR also displays information about your scan system.


This includes information regarding memory capacity as well as
memory still available.
C.1

General system information

C.1

General system information is required, e.g. when you contact


Siemens Service regarding problems. Problems can be solved
more quickly if you specify the serial number of the system and
the software version.
C.1
Select Help > Info ... from the main menu.
The Info ... dialog window opens.

C.1

Go to the General card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.127

System Manager

Managing and Adjusting the System

(1)

(2)
(3)
(4)

(5)
(6)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Product name
Series number
Software used
Software version
Software name
Information about license holder; name, hospital or practice, and product identification number (product ID)

0.0

C.128

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Information about the system

C.1

The System card provides further information about your scan


system. Here, you will find information about hardware and software options (e.g. cameras and printers) as well as the coils
currently available.
C.1
Select Help > Info ... from the main menu.
Go to the System card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.129

System Manager

Managing and Adjusting the System

Drive and database information

C.1

The Disk/Database card displays the drives and hard disks


currently connected, including information about the capacity
and free space still available. It also displays how much space
is available in terms of images.
C.1
Select Help > Info ... from the main menu.
Go to the Disk/Database card.

0.0

C.130

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Displaying the drives

C.1

System Manager

The Disk list displays all physical (e.g. CD-ROM) and logical
(e.g. network drives) drives. The capacity and free space still
available is listed next to them.
C.1
The following information about these drives is displayed:

C.1

drive letter, e.g. diskette drive A


type of drive, e.g. CD-ROM
logical name of the hard disk
name of computer to which memory medium is connected
manufacturer of the memory medium
capacity of the memory medium (in MB)
free space available in MB

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.131

System Manager

Displaying the databases

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.1

The Database list contains all local databases that contain


header as well as pixel data.
C.1
You are also told how many images can still be stored for each
matrix.
C.1
The following information is displayed:

C.1

Name of the database


Number of images 256 256 matrix images that can still be
stored
Number of images 512 512 matrix images that can still be
stored
Free space in the database partition for header data (in kB)
Free space in the pixel data partition (in kB)

0.0

C.132

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Network information

C.1

If your console or satellite console is connected to a network,


you may view network-specific information on the Network
card.
C.1
Select Help > Info ... from the main menu.
Go to the Network card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.133

System Manager

Updating the network


display

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.1

If the dialog window has been open for a while, you may refresh
the network information display.
C.1

Click the Refresh Network State button.

0.0

C.134

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

System Manager

Displaying patents

C.1

The Patents card lists all the patents used by syngo MR.

C.1

Select Help > Info ... from the main menu.


Go to the Patents card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.135

System Manager

Managing and Adjusting the System

Updating the display

C.1

If the Info... dialog window has been open for a while, you may
refresh the data displayed.
C.1

Just click the Refresh button.

The button is only active if you have selected the System,


Disk/Database, or Network card.

0.0

C.136

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

C.2

Adjusting the System

C.2

To consistently obtain high-quality images, it is important to


adjust the scan protocol prior to each protocol. For this purpose,
individual settings are available which perform automatic
adjustments before each protocol.
C.2
However, manual adjustment of the scan system is sometimes
required for special scanning methods such as spectroscopy. C.2
With shimming you compensate for inhomogeneities of the
magnetic field.
C.2
An adjustment volume is defined for each protocol. Most adjustments refer to this volume, which you may display during
graphic slice positioning. You may change it there or on the
System parameter card, as required.
Page C.27, Adapting the adjustment volume
C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.21

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

Configuring automatic adjustment

C.2

Automatic adjustment of the system is performed prior to each


scan. In most cases, it is not necessary to change the settings
during routine operation. You can check these parameters, but
you should normally not modify them.
C.2

Opening a protocol

C.2

It is only possible to view the parameters of a protocol if it is


open.
C.2
Select a protocol in the program control.
Click the Open button or double-click the selected program.
The protocol opens and the specific parameters are displayed.
C.2

You may view and edit (if required) the automatic adjustment
parameters on the System parameter card.
C.2
Go to the System parameter card.
C.2

NOTE
All system adjustment settings made on the System
parameter card only apply to the protocol currently open. C.2

0.0

C.22

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Settings on the
Adjustments card

Adjusting the System

Go to the Adjustments card.


C.2

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Select shim mode


Perform adjustments with the body coil
Change the resonance frequency
Adjustment in silicone mode
Changing the reference amplitude
Geometry of the adjustment volume

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.23

Adjusting the System

Setting shim mode

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

For the 3D-shim, up to three settings are available per protocol


depending on the various scanning requirements:
C.2
Tune-up; neither adjustment scans nor evaluations are necessary. The system uses the values set during system tuneup by Siemens Service. This setting is sufficient for normal
imaging protocols without special requirements.
Standard; Adjustment scanning and evaluation are performed in standard mode. This mode is suitable for imaging
protocols with special requirements, for example, for fat saturation or EPI.
Advanced; Adjustment scans and evaluation are performed
in advanced mode. This mode is mainly used for spectroscopy protocols. Advanced mode is time consuming and is
only necessary for scans that place the greatest demands on
the homogeneity of the magnetic field.
Each protocol is preset to the mode required for optimum image
quality.
C.2
Select a shim mode from the list.
It is also possible to use the manual interactive shimming
method, independent of this protocol setting.
Page C.248, Interactive shim
C.2

0.0

C.24

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Performing adjustments
with the body coil

C.2

Adjusting the System

Normally, all adjustments are performed using the coil elements


defined in each protocol and used during subsequent imaging.
You may also perform the adjustment measurements using the
body coil only. This method saves time, since it is not necessary
to make readjustments after changing the selection of coil elements.
C.2

Click the Adjust with body coil option.


For spectroscopy protocols, it is not possible to perform
adjustments using the body coil.

Confirming or changing the


resonance frequency
C.2

After an inline adjustment, you may pause the system and


accept or change the resonant frequency.
C.2

Click the Confirm freq. adjustment checkbox.


Page C.265, Changing the resonance frequency after
inline adjustment

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.25

Adjusting the System

Adjustment in silicone
mode

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

The Assume Silicone option optimizes scanning for patients


with silicone implants.
C.2

Click the Assume Silicone checkbox.


Changing the reference
amplitude

C.2

The TxRef/Ref display field shows a list of reference amplitudes for the selected primary or secondary nucleus.
C.2

Enter new values for the reference amplitude.


All manually modified values are marked with an exclamation
point ("!") and will be ignored during the next optimization.
C.2
You can undo your manual settings at any time.

C.2

Click the Reset button on the Transmitter/Receiver parameter card.


The automatically calculated values are now displayed again.C.2

0.0

C.26

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

Adapting the adjustment volume

C.2

A localized volume, the adjustment volume, is defined for each


protocol for tuning the transmitter and receiver. The adjustment
volume defines the space in the magnet for which the parameters will be optimized. It is determined automatically but may
also be adjusted manually.
C.2

Imaging protocols

C.2

The default setting of the adjustment volume depends on the


slices and slabs. In most cases, an orthogonal cuboid completely encloses the slices or slabs to be measured.
C.2

Spectroscopy protocols

C.2

Here, the adjustment volume is equivalent to the VOI.


C.2
C.2

NOTE
Protocols that do not require shim adjustment
measurements (e.g. tune-up mode) or water suppression
adjustment use a fixed adjustment volume in the form of a
large central cuboid.
This saves time since readjustment is not necessary after
slice positioning.
Of course, you may also manually adapt the adjustment
volume at any time.
C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.27

Adjusting the System

Editing the adjustment


volume graphically

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

During graphic slice positioning, you may display the adjustment volume as an additional graphic object in the reference
images.
C.2
Click this button on the Position Toolbar.
The adjustment volume is shown as a green rectangle in each
C.2
reference image and may now be edited graphically.

0.0

C.28

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjustment volume
selecting

C.2

Adjusting the System

To enlarge/minimize you must first select the adjustment volume.


C.2
Click the contour line of the adjustment volume.
The adjustment volume turns bright green. The center and
C.2
resizing handles are displayed.

(1)
(2)

(3)

(1) Resizing handles/contour line


(2) Contour line
(3) Center for moving

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.29

Adjusting the System

Moving the adjustment


volume

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

Place the mouse pointer on the center of the adjustment volume.


The mouse pointer changes shape.

C.2

Press the left mouse button and drag the adjustment volume
to its new position.
Or

C.2

Place the mouse pointer on a contour line or a handle, press


the Shift key and left mouse button, and drag the adjustment
volume to its new position.

0.0

C.210

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Resizing the adjustment


volume

C.2

Adjusting the System

Click a contour line of the adjustment volume if the handles


of the adjustment volume are not yet visible.
Place the mouse pointer on one of the handles.
The mouse pointer changes shape.

C.2

Press and hold the left mouse button while dragging the handle in the desired direction.
The size of the adjustment volume is increased/decreased
symmetrically.
C.2
The center of the adjustment volume remains unchanged.
C.2

To change the size of the adjustment volume asymmetrically,


i.e. increase/decrease its size in only one direction:
C.2
Also press the Alt key while performing the steps described
above.
The center of the adjustment volume is moved accordingly.

C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.211

Adjusting the System

Rotating the adjustment


volume

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

The volume element may be rotated about its center point. The
rotational axis is now perpendicular to the reference image. C.2
Place the mouse pointer on the contour line of the adjustment volume, but not on a handle.
The mouse pointer changes shape.

C.2

Hold down the left mouse button and drag the contour line of
the volume element in the desired direction.
The adjustment volume may only be rotated about the center in
one spatial direction.
C.2

Tilting the adjustment


volume

C.2

The volume element can be tilted about an axis that runs parallel to the reference image and through the center point.
C.2
Press the Alt key and drag the contour line in the required
direction.
The tilting axis is perpendicular to the movement of the
mouse.
C.2

0.0

C.212

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjustment volume
rotating freely

C.2

Adjusting the System

Free rotation of the adjustment volume is a combination of rotation and tilting and is supported in all three spatial directions. C.2
Click a contour line of the adjustment volume if the adjustment volume handles are not yet visible.
Press the Ctrl key and drag a handle or a contour line.
Drag the adjustment volume tangentially towards the adjustment volume to rotate it.
Or

C.2

Perform a radial movement (radiating away from or toward


the center) to tilt the adjustment volume.

tangential movement

radial movement

The rotational axis runs through the center of the volume element and is perpendicular to the reference image.
C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.213

Adjusting the System

Adjustment volume
set numerically

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

To set the adjustment volume with millimeter precision, you may


also enter the parameters numerically. The respective input
fields are located on the Adjustment subtask card of the System parameter card.
C.2

To manually set the adjustment volume, first select an orientation.


Or

C.2

Enter an orientation in the Orientation dialog box.


The Position field displays the current position of the adjustment volume.
C.2
Enter a new position for the adjustment volume in the Position dialog box.
Page F.523, Geometry parameter card
Enter the angle for rotating the adjustment volume in the
Rotation spin box.
Enter the edge length of the adjustment volume in the A >> P
(anterior/posterior) direction.
Enter the edge length of the adjustment volume in the F >> H
direction (feet/head).

0.0

C.214

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

Finally, enter a translation of the edge length of the adjustment volume in the R >> L direction (right to left).

Applying the settings

C.2

To apply the settings simply press the Return key after


numeric input.
Or

C.2

Click the image area with the mouse to update the graphic
display.

Settings
the warning signal

C.2

Click Reset to reactivate automatic calculation of the adjustment volume.


The exclamation points are now hidden.

C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.215

Adjusting the System

Adjustment parameter
display in the protocol

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

The System Transmitter/Receiver parameter card shows the


results of the last successful automatic adjustment.
C.2
Click the tab of the System card to move it into foreground.
Click the Transmitter/Receiver card into foreground.

(1)

(5)

(2)
(3)
(6)
(4)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Display system frequency


Display reference amplitude
Display the correction factor for water suppression
Amplitude of the RF pulses used in the protocol
Receiver gain
FFT scale factors of the individual images from each coil
element

0.0

C.216

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

The left side of the parameter card displays the values of the
last successful transmitter tuning:
C.2
the MR system frequency under Frequency
the pulse amplitude calibration under Ref. amplitude
the factor for water suppression under Correction factor
All pulse amplitudes are calculated from the reference amplitude and, if necessary, the correction factor.
C.2
This parameter card also allows you to overwrite the automatically corrected pulse amplitudes by entering new values.
C.2

The right side of the Transmitter/Receiver parameter card


shows the values for the receiver gain automatically calculated
by the system:
C.2
the gain level of the receiver
the FFT scale factors for the individual images of each coil
element
Here too, you have the option of overwriting the automatically
calculated values by entering new values.
C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.217

Adjusting the System

Undoing changes

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

All manually changed values and settings are marked by an


exclamation point ("!").
C.2
You can undo your manual settings at any time.

C.2

Click the Reset button on the Transmitter/Receiver parameter card.


The automatically calculated values are now displayed again.C.2

0.0

C.218

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

Automatic sequence of adjustment


steps

C.2

Special adjustments are performed automatically for each protocol. To avoid having to perform a complete adjustment each
time, the system checks the adjustment status and uses adjustment results from a previously scanned protocol, if possible. C.2
The results can normally only be applied if the following parameters of the two protocols remain unchanged:
C.2

Dependencies between
adjustments

C.2

the table position


the coil elements used
the shim mode (standard/advanced/tune-up)
the adjustment volume

When adjusting the system, the sequence of adjustment operations is important since some adjustments may invalidate the
results of previously performed adjustments. After 3D-shim, for
example, frequency adjustment is automatically performed
again because changing the magnetic field causes the system
frequency to change.
These dependencies are always taken into account by automatic adjustments.
C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.219

Adjusting the System

Validity of the adjustment


parameters obtained

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

The adjustment parameters obtained after successful adjustment may be used for further protocols. They become invalid in
the following cases:
C.2
a new patient is registered
the parameters are invalidated explicitly
Page C.271, Rejecting all adjustment results
the coils on the patient table are changed
As already mentioned, dependency on the coil elements can be
avoided by selecting Adjust with body coil. The dependency
on the adjustment volume may be avoided via the shim mode
tune-up without water suppression.
Page C.23, Settings on the Adjustments card
C.2
This reduces the number of adjustment steps and saves time.C.2

0.0

C.220

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

Manual adjustment

C.2

Manual adjustments must only be performed by experienced


users and are mainly intended for test purposes, error analysis,
or for special applications such as spectroscopy.
C.2
The following adjustment options are available:

C.2

Optimizing the resonance frequency


3D shim and interactive shim
Tuning the transmitter
Optimizing water suppression

Interactive shimming may only be performed manually.


The number of adjustment options available depends on your
system.
C.2

NOTE
Manual adjustment of the system should only be performed
by experienced users and should not be performed during
routine operation.
C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.221

Adjusting the System

Opening a protocol

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

Open the protocol that requires manual adjustment.

C.2

Click the Open button in the program control or double-click


the entry.
The protocol-specific parameters are displayed on the parameter cards.
C.2

The individual steps of manual adjustment are described


below.
C.2

0.0

C.222

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

Optimizing the frequency

C.2

When optimizing the frequency, you may determine the exact


proton resonant frequency. For this purpose, you may enter various parameters and accept the frequency calculated for the
scan system following adjustment. The results are first transferred from the time domain into the frequency domain via Fourier transform. The resonance frequency of the water protons is
calculated from the peak position of the water.
C.2

Preparing for adjustment

C.2

Select Options > Adjustments and go to the Frequency


card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.223

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

(1)
(6)
(2)

(7)
(8)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(9)
(10)
(11)

(12)

(1) Numeric results


(2) Real part of the measurement signal in the time domain
(3) Imaginary part of the measurement signal in the time
domain
(4) Amplitude in the frequency domain
(5) Phase in the frequency domain
(6) Temporary transmit frequency
(7) Display of system transmit frequency
(8) Transmit amplitude
(9) Sequence and resolution
(10) Receiver gain
(11) Selection of the coil measurement signal for graphic display
(12) Specific display when entering frequency or amplitude

0.0

C.224

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

Certain parameters have to be entered prior to performing the


frequency adjustment.
C.2

Entering the frequency

C.2

A different transmit frequency may be used for each iteration. C.2

You can enter a new transmitter frequency in the Frequency


(temp) input field.
You can also determine the frequency graphically and transfer it to the input field.
Page C.230, Transferring the frequency

The frequency currently used is displayed in the field underneath for comparison.
C.2
The temporary frequency that you may enter yourself is only
used for adjustment scans. The system frequency is used for
examinations.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.225

Adjusting the System

Amplitude

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

You can enter the transmit amplitude to be used for the scan.

Range display

C.2

You can use the range display to verify whether your inputs for
the frequency and amplitude are correct. You have to correct
them if they are out of range.
C.2

When you enter the amplitude, the labeling of the range display is modified accordingly. It will then show the amplitude
values.

0.0

C.226

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Sequence and resolution

C.2

Adjusting the System

The following options are available:

C.2

Broadband not volume-selective (FID 400 Hz)


Narrowband not volume-selective (FID 10 Hz)
Narrowband volume-selective (STEAM 10 Hz)
If the frequency lies outside the narrowband standard range (no
resonance line in the spectrum), it is recommended to search a
wide frequency band first to limit the frequency. To subsequently adjust the transmit frequency, you will have to work with
a narrow frequency band.
C.2
Following each non-volume-selective adjustment scan, it is
necessary to perform at least one volume-selective adjustment.

Select a sequence and resolution from the list.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.227

Adjusting the System

Selecting the gain

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

You may set the receive gain to match the intensity of the measured signal.
C.2
Click the Low button if the receive signal is strong.
Or

C.2

Click the High button if the receive signal is weak.


If necessary, the system will adjust this setting automatically.

Starting to scan

C.2

After you have entered all parameters, you can start the adjustment.
C.2
Click the Go button.

Canceling the
measurement

C.2

Click the Abort button to cancel an adjustment scan in


progress.

0.0

C.228

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Results display

C.2

Adjusting the System

The results are displayed both numerically and graphically.


C.2

Numeric results

C.2

The results are listed below the running numbers. The following
parameters are displayed:
C.2
No.; running number of the measurement
Freq. [MHz]; transmit frequency in MHz
Ampl. [V]; transmit amplitude of the adjustment measurement
Pos.; position of the largest "peak" of the amplitude in the
frequency domain (in units of the signal graph)
Diff [Hz]; Difference between the transmit frequency and the
calculated "better" frequency
C.freq. [MHz]; calculated, "better" frequency
A.; transmit frequency successfully adjusted (Yes/No)

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.229

Adjusting the System

Graphic results

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

The results are displayed graphically in both the time and the
frequency domain. The maximum values of the raw data set are
displayed numerically in the graphics.
C.2
If available, the "resonance peak" is highlighted.
C.2

Vertical marker

C.2

A vertical marker is shown when you position the mouse pointer


inside the graphic display of the frequency domain. It indicates
the delta frequency of the calculated resonance frequency. If no
peak was detected during the adjustment, the absolute frequency is indicated instead.
C.2

The position of the resonance frequency is indicated by a


small line at the top of the graphic.
Transferring the
frequency

C.2

You may select a frequency graphically by moving the vertical


marker.
C.2
Just left-click the line.
The frequency is entered in the Frequency (temp) field.

C.2

0.0

C.230

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Inverting the frequency


axis and zooming the
graphic

Adjusting the System

A context menu is available when the mouse pointer is positioned inside the graphic display of the frequency domain.
C.2
C.2

You can invert the default display of all frequency axes (from left
to right) or zoom into the detected peak. If no peak is available,
the program zooms into the center of the graphic.
C.2
When you select a new patient, the default display of the frequency axes is restored. Any zoom applied is reset when you
perform a new measurement.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.231

Adjusting the System

Receive channel
selecting

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

The receive channel is used to select the signals of the local


coils. In addition to the receive channel (Ch.), the coil name
(Coil) and the connector (Con.) are displayed in the selection
list.
C.2
The Combined entry is used to select the combined signal of
all coils selected.
Select the receive channel whose signal you want displayed.

Accepting the frequency


for the measurement
system

C.2

After successful adjustment "Y" in the numeric result field), the


frequency is automatically loaded in the scan system. This may
require several iterations.
C.2

Manual acceptance
without successful
adjustment

C.2

You may correct the frequency manually if the system cannot


detect the correct frequency, e.g. due to the proximity of the resonance signals.
C.2

Enter a value in the Frequency spin box.


Or

C.2

Accept the frequency graphically using the vertical marker.


Click the Apply button in the Manual adjustments dialog
box.
This frequency is then used as the system frequency for subsequent scans.
C.2

0.0

C.232

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Transmitter adjustment

Adjusting the System

C.2

Transmitter adjustment is used for calibration of the transmitter.


The reference amplitude is continuously varied until the spins
are rotated 180 (flip angle) by the RF pulse. Two echoes are
generated, one normal echo and one stimulated echo. The
magnitude and the phase relation of both echoes is directly
related to the targeted flip angle.
C.2

Preparing for adjustment

C.2

Select Options > Adjustments and go to the Transmitter


card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.233

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

(1)
(2)

(7)
(8)

(3)

(9)
(4)

(10)

(5)

(11)

(6)

(12)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Displaying numeric results


Normal echo (Echo 1) and stimulated echo (Echo 2)
Real part of the measurement signal in the time domain
Imaginary part of the measurement signal in the time
domain
(5) Amplitude of the measurement signal in the frequency
domain
(6) Phase of the measurement signal in the frequency domain
(7) Enter the temporary reference amplitude
(8) System reference amplitude
(9) Start amplitude
(10) Receiver gain
(11) Selection of the coil measurement signal for graphic display
(12) Range display

0.0

C.234

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

Transmitter calibration involves performing scans, each with a


slightly different reference amplitude.
C.2

Entering the amplitude

C.2

For each scan, you can enter a new reference amplitude in


the Amplitude (temp) spin box.
For comparison, the amplitude currently used by the system is
displayed below.
C.2
The temporary amplitude that you enter is only used for
adjustment scans. The system amplitude is used for examinations.

Start amplitude

C.2

The Start amplitude text field shows the amplitude value (specific parameter of the transmitter coil) used for the first iteration.C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.235

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

Range display

C.2

Selecting the gain

C.2

The range displayed shows the range available for the reference amplitude. If your entry is outside the range, you have to
correct it accordingly.
C.2

You can set the receiver gain depending on the signal intensity.
Page C.228, Selecting the gain
C.2

Starting to scan

C.2

After you have entered all parameters, you can start the adjustment.
C.2
Click the Go button.

Canceling the
measurement

C.2

Click the Abort button to cancel an adjustment scan in


progress.

0.0

C.236

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Results display

C.2

Adjusting the System

The results are displayed both numerically and graphically.


C.2

Numeric results

C.2

The results are listed below the running number of the iteration.
The following parameters are displayed:
C.2

No.; running number of the adjustment measurement


Ch.; receive channel used to calculate the results
Amp.; transmitter amplitude of the adjustment scan
int1; integral data of the first echo
Ph1; phase of the first echo
int2; integral data of the second echo
Ph2; phase of the second echo
i2/i1; projection of the second echo on the first echo
Angle; measured flip angle
C. amp.; calculated "better amplitude"
A.; transmitter successfully adjusted (Yes/No)

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.237

Adjusting the System

Graphic results

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

The following results are displayed graphically:

C.2

Real and imaginary part of the echo in the time domain


Amplitude and phase of the respective echo in the frequency
domain
The graphics show the maximum value of each raw data set.
C.2

Receive channel
selecting

C.2

The receive channel is used to select the signals of the local


coils.
C.2

Select the receive channel whose signal you want displayed.

Accepting the frequency


for the measurement
system

After successful adjustment ("Y" in the numeric field), the


amplitude is automatically transferred to the scan system.
C.2

C.2

Manual acceptance
without successful
adjustment

C.2

Within a certain range, you can also enter a reference amplitude and manually transfer it to the system without adjustment
scanning.
C.2
Click the Apply button.
The amplitude is used as the reference amplitude for the following scans.
C.2

0.0

C.238

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

3D Shim

Adjusting the System

C.2

The 3D shim allows you to correct inhomogeneities of the magnetic field.


C.2
Scanning is performed in two steps:

C.2

(1) First, you generate a "field map" by accepting a 3D data


set. A "field map" is a three-dimensional description of the
magnetic field.
(2) Subsequently, the shim parameters are calculated.
After interactive shimming, you have to readjust the frequency. The frequency is automatically adjusted by the system if you do not do this yourself.
Preparing for adjustment

C.2

Select Options > Adjustments and go to the 3D Shim card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.239

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

(1)
(7)
(5)
(8)

(2)

(9)
(6)
(10)
(3)

(4)

(11)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Displaying numeric results


Image area for display of the field map (64 images)
Slider for windowing the images
Switchover between magnitude and phase display
Transmit amplitude
Selection of the coil measurement signal for graphic display
(7) Name of the field map (temporary and system)
(8) Mode selection for field map display (standard and
advanced)
(9) Receive gain
(10) Temporary shim parameter set
(11) System shim parameter set

0.0

C.240

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

Before you can perform the 3D shim, you first have to enter the
necessary parameters. The system suggests a default value.
C.2

Entering the transmit


amplitude

C.2

You can enter the transmit amplitude for the adjustment.

C.2

Entering the shim


parameters

C.2

The nine parameters are part of a parameter set that describes


the field correction.
C.2

You can enter the transmit frequency for the measurement in


spin box A00.
You can enter the components of the linear gradients in spin
boxes A11, B11 and A10.

Depending on the configuration of your system, you can


enter the second order shimming currents in input fields A20,
A21, B21, A22 and B22.

These shim parameters are used for field map acquisition.

C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.241

Adjusting the System

Loading from tune up

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

Alternatively, you can load the parameters from the last system
tune up as temporary parameters.
C.2
Click the Load Tune Up button.

Or
Loading system
parameters

C.2

C.2

Load the parameters currently used by the system as temporary parameters.


C.2
Click the Load System button.
The system parameters are loaded.
C.2

Mode selection

C.2

The shim mode used to perform the adjustment is defined with


the protocol.
Page C.24, Setting shim mode
C.2
The active button shows you which mode is active (tune-up,
standard, or advanced).
C.2

Switch modes by clicking the inactive button.

0.0

C.242

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Selecting the gain

C.2

Adjusting the System

You can set the receiver gain to match the intensity of the measured signal (low/high).
Page C.228, Selecting the gain
C.2

Starting to scan

C.2

After you have entered all parameters, you can start the adjustment. The scan takes approximately 20 seconds.
C.2

Click the Measure button.


Or

C.2

Click the Abort button to cancel an adjustment scan in


progress.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.243

Adjusting the System

Displaying the field map

Field map, magnitude display

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

The field map is displayed in the image area of the dialog box.
images are shown with a maximum resolution of
64 64 pixels.
C.2

Field map, phase display


The tomographic images are displayed row by row.

C.2

0.0

C.244

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Windowing images

C.2

Adjusting the System

If the window values of the images are not optimally set, you
may readjust them manually using the two sliders in the bottom
right-hand corner of the image area.
C.2
Move the vertical slider to adjust the contrast.
Move the horizontal slider to adjust the width.

Selecting magnitude or
phase image

You may display the images as magnitude or phase images.


C.2

C.2

Click the Magnitude button to display magnitude images.


Or

C.2

Click the Phase button to display phase images.

Selecting the receive


channel

C.2

The receive channel is used to select the signals of the local


coils. In addition to the receive channel (Ch.), the coil name
(Coil) and the connector (Con.) are displayed in the selection
list.
C.2
The Combined entry is used to select the combined signal of
all coils selected.

Select the receive channel whose signal you want displayed.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.245

Adjusting the System

Shim parameters
calculating

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

After scanning has been completed and the results are displayed, you may calculate the new shim parameters.
C.2

Click the Calculate button to start the calculation.


The parameters are recalculated and may be used as a basis
for the next field-map scan. They are displayed in the list of
numeric results.
C.2

Numeric results

C.2

The results are listed below the running number of the iteration.
The following parameters are displayed:
C.2

No.; running number of the adjustment measurement


A00; transmit frequency
A11, B11, A10; linear gradients
A20, A21, B21, A22, B22; second order shim currents
C.2

NOTE
The three-dimensional field-map scan always shows the
entire homogeneity volume of the magnet independent of
the adjustment volume.
The adjustment volume is taken into consideration and the
field homogeneity is optimized during the calculation of the
shim parameters. For this reason, changing the adjustment
volume also results in different shim parameter settings for
the same field map.
C.2

0.0

C.246

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Accepting the field map


for the scan system

C.2

Adjusting the System

The temporary field map (valid locally for the adjustment) may
be applied to the scan system.
C.2

Click the Apply button in the upper section of the dialog box.

Manual acceptance of the


calculated parameters

C.2

After you have calculated the new parameters with Calculate,


you may apply them directly to the scan system as temporary
parameters. At the same time the Field Map is transferred to the
scan system.
C.2

Click the Apply button in the lower part of the dialog box.

Manual acceptance
without successful
adjustment

You can also enter shim parameters and apply them to the scan
system without performing a scan or calculation.
C.2
C.2

Click the Apply button in the lower part of the dialog box.
The parameters will be applied to the scan system.

C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.247

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

Interactive shim

C.2

Similar to 3D shim adjustment, interactive shimming compensates for inhomogeneities of the magnetic field. You can enter
the shim parameters and monitor the measurement of the MR
signal on the screen in real time. If you enter new parameters,
the changes are reflected in the results of the following MR signal measurement. You may continue shimming the magnetic
field until it meets your requirements.
C.2
After interactive shimming, you have to readjust the frequency. The frequency is automatically adjusted by the system if you do not do this yourself.
Preparing for adjustment

C.2

Select Options > Adjustments from the menu and go to the


Interactive shim card.

0.0

C.248

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

(1)
(2)

(7)

(3)

(8)
(9)
(10)

(4)

(5)
(6)

(11)
(12)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Numeric results
Display of best shim Result
Amplitude of the measurement signal in the time domain
Real part of the measurement signal in the time domain
Amplitude of the measurement signal in the frequency
domain
(6) Phase of the measurement signal in the frequency domain
(7) Transmit amplitude
(8) Physiological parameters
(9) Selection of the coil measurement signal for graphic display
(10) Temporary shim parameters and shim parameters currently used by the system
(11) Sensitivity when changing shim parameters
(12) Range display for entering the amplitude or the shim
parameters
0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.249

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

As soon as you go to the Interactive Shim card, the start


parameters are displayed.
C.2

Physio selection

C.2

For the adjustment scan, you may apply physiological measurement parameters from the relevant parameter card of the protocol.
C.2

Change the selection by clicking the inactive button.


Entering the transmit
amplitude

C.2

You can enter the transmit amplitude for the adjustment.

Entering the shim


parameters

C.2

The nine parameters are part of a parameter set that describes


the field correction.
C.2

You can enter the transmit frequency for scanning in input


field A00.
You can enter the components of the linear gradients in the
A11, B11, and A10 input fields.

Depending on the configuration of your system, you can


enter the second order shimming currents in input fields A20,
A21, B21, A22 and B22.

0.0

C.250

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Using the plus and minus


buttons
C.2

Adjusting the System

Instead of entering shim parameters numerically, you can


increase or decrease their values using the plus or minus button.
C.2
The Sensitivity slider allows you to define the increments for
value adjustments.

Fine tuning of shim


parameters

C.2

Shimming normally begins with significant changes to the


parameter values and concludes with very small adjustments
using the plus and minus buttons.
C.2

Set the slider to high to change the shim parameters in


larger increments.
Set the slider to low to change the shim parameters in small
increments.
Range display

C.2

The range display indicates at what interval you can change the
transmit amplitude or shim parameters.
C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.251

Adjusting the System

Starting to scan

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

Start the adjustment by clicking the Measure button.


The measurement is performed continuously using the current
parameters. You can terminate continuous scanning with the
Stop button.
C.2

Display of
results

C.2

When the measurement is complete, the results for each measurement are displayed numerically and graphically.
C.2
The following parameters are displayed numerically:

C.2

No.; running number of the adjustment measurement


Rec. gain; gain setting used
FWHM (Hz), (Full Width Half Maximum)
Width of the received pulse (frequency domain) at half magnitude.
Int |P|; integral of the amplitude in the time domain
T2*; transverse relaxation time
Tendency; indicates whether the parameter changes result
in shim improvement (+++) or degradation (---).

0.0

C.252

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

The following results are displayed graphically:

C.2

The amplitude in the time domain


the real part of the measurement signal in the time domain
The amplitude of the measurement signal in the frequency
domain (Fourier-transformed measurement signal)
the phase of the measurement signal in the frequency
domain
Receive channel
selecting

C.2

The receive channel is used to select the signals of the local


coils. In addition to the receive channel (Ch.), the coil name
(Coil) and the connector (Con.) are displayed in the selection
list.
C.2
The Combined entry is used to select the combined signal of
all coils selected.
Select the receive channel whose signal you want displayed.

Changing parameters

C.2

Once the measurement results are displayed, you can make


changes while the measurement is in progress. The Tendency
column provides valuable information.
C.2
Change the parameters so that the full width at half maximum (FWHM) decreases and T2* increases.
In the numeric display, the line with the highest T2* value is
marked Best Shim.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.253

Adjusting the System

Undoing changes

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

To undo the last change to the parameters:


C.2

Click the Undo button.

Loading stored
parameters

C.2

You can load the system parameters currently stored in the


measurement system as temporary shim parameters and use
them, for example, as start parameters.
C.2
Click the Load System button.

Loading from tune up

C.2

As an alternative, you can also load parameters from the last


system tune-up as temporary parameters.
C.2
Click the Load Tune Up button.

0.0

C.254

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Loading best shim


parameters

C.2

Adjusting the System

The "best" shim parameters obtained in the current scan may


be imported as temporary shim parameters. They are then
used for the next adjustment scan.
C.2
This is especially useful if you have moved away from the most
optimal values while varying parameters. The most optimal
shim parameters are determined based on the maximum transverse relaxation time (T2*).
C.2
Click the Best Shim button.

Deleting the best shim


parameter

C.2

You may delete the "best" shim parameters obtained in the current scan, making them invalid. The corresponding display is
deleted.
C.2
Click the Reset Best button.

Applying parameters to
the scan system

C.2

You can transfer the optimal shim parameters for the measurement to the measurement system.
C.2

Click the Apply button.


They will be used in the next examination.
C.2

Stopping the
measurement

To stop the measurement:

C.2

C.2

Click the Stop button.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.255

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

Manual water suppression

C.2

There are special RF pulses that are used for water suppression during scans. With this adjustment, you determine a correction factor for the transmitter amplitude for these RF pulses.
Within the adjustment volume, the flip angles are set for optimal
suppression of the water signal.
C.2

Preparing for adjustment

C.2

Select Options > Adjustments and go to the Water suppr.


card.

0.0

C.256

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

(1)

(12)
(2)

(11)
(10)

(3)
(9)
(4)

(8)

(5)

(7)

(6)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Displaying numeric results


Amplitude of the measurement signal in the time domain
Phase of the measurement signal in the time domain
Amplitude of the measurement signal in the frequency
domain
(5) Phase of the measurement signal in the frequency domain
(6) Select signal graphs
(7) Range display for the correction factor and the transmitter
increment
(8) Selection of the coil measurement signal for graphic display
(9) Receiver gain
(10) Transmitter increment
(11) Display of the system correction factor
(12) Input field for the temporary correction factor

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.257

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

Certain parameters have to be entered prior to the measurement and checked after each measurement.
C.2

Entering the correction


factor

C.2

For the first iteration, the system suggests an amplitude correction factor of 1.0 which you may edit.
C.2

You can enter a correction factor in the Corr. factor (temp)


spin box.
For comparison, the correction factor currently used by the system is displayed below.
C.2

Entering the transmitter


increment (delta transmit
amplitude)

C.2

You can enter an increment to determine the correction factor.


A number of test measurements are performed followed by
eleven adjustment measurements. The adjustment measurements cover the range of the correction factor entered minus
five increments up to the correction factor entered plus five
increments.
C.2

You can enter an increment in the Delta transmitter spin


box.

0.0

C.258

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Selecting the gain

C.2

Adjusting the System

You can set the receiver gain depending on the signal intensity.
Page C.228, Selecting the gain
C.2

Starting to scan

C.2

After you have entered all parameters, you can start the adjustment.
C.2
Click the Go button.
The scan takes several seconds.
C.2

Canceling the
measurement

C.2

Click the Abort button to cancel an adjustment scan in


progress.
Repeat the measurements using different parameters until the
system has optimized the correction factor.
C.2
A will "Y" appear in the numeric field following successful
adjustment.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.259

Adjusting the System

Results display

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

The measurement results are displayed both numerically and


graphically.
C.2

Numeric results

C.2

The results are listed below the running number of the iteration.
The following parameters are displayed:
C.2
No.; running number of the adjustment measurement
CorrFac.; correction factor of the adjustment scan
Signal (CorrFac - Delta); signal strength for measurement
with correction factor minus transmitter increment
Signal (CorrFac); signal strength for scan with correction
factor
Signal (CorrFac + Delta); signal strength for scan with correction factor plus transmitter increment
NewCorrFac; calculated "better" correction factor

0.0

C.260

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Graphic results

C.2

Adjusting the System

The following results are displayed graphically:

C.2

The real and imaginary part of the measuring signal in the


time domain.
The amplitude and phase of the measuring signal in the frequency domain.
Three different signal graphs are available for display.
C.2

Click the CorrFac-Delta. button to display the signal graph of


the "correction factor minus increment" measurement.
Or

C.2

Click the CorrFac button to display the signal graph of the


measurement with the correction factor.
Or

C.2

Click the CorrFac + Delta button to display the signal graph


of the "correction factor plus increment" measurement.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.261

Adjusting the System

Selecting the receive


channel

Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2

The receive channel is used to select the signals of the local


coils. In addition to the receive channel (Ch.), the coil name
(Coil) and the connector (Con.) are displayed in the selection
list.
C.2
The Combined entry is used to select the combined signal of
all coils selected.
Select the receive channel whose signal you want displayed.

Accepting the correction


factor

C.2

After successful adjustment, the correction factor is automatically loaded into the measurement system.

C.2

Manual acceptance
without successful
adjustment

Within a certain range, you can enter a correction factor and


manually accept it without adjustment measurement.
C.2

C.2

Click the Apply button.


The correction factor is used for the following measurements. C.2

0.0

C.262

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

Undoing changes

C.2

You have performed all adjustments and now want to undo the
settings.
C.2
A Reset button is available for this purpose on every card
(except 3D Shim).
C.2
Click Reset.
The parameters displayed when the dialog box was opened are
re-loaded.
C.2
System parameters that were changed during the adjustment
cannot be restored to their initial settings before the adjustment.

Completing adjustment
Exit the adjustment platform with the Close button.

C.2

C.2

Click the Close button.


The dialog box closes.

C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.263

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

Starting protocol adjustments manually

C.2

All adjustments planned in the selected protocol may be manually started without starting the following protocol.
C.2
Open the protocol first.
Select Options > Adjustments.
Go to the Viewing card.
Then click the Adjust All button.
The adjustments are performed.

C.2

If an error occurs during scanning, the adjustment will be


aborted and an error message is displayed.

Aborting adjustment

C.2

You can cancel a scan in progress at any time.


C.2

Click the Abort button.

0.0

C.264

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

Changing the resonance frequency after


inline adjustment

C.2

Inline adjustment is performed automatically before each


scan.
C.2
You can pause the system after an inline adjustment to confirm
or change the calculated resonance frequency.
C.2
Settings on the
Adjustments card

Go to the Adjustments card.


C.2

Click the Confirm freq. adjustment option.


Page C.23, Settings on the Adjustments card
As soon as you click the card Adjustments followed by the
option Freq. Adjust, the dialog box Confirm Frequency Spectrum is shown after each inline adjustment. You may correct the
resonant frequency or accept it without changes.
C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.265

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

(1)

(2)
(3)
(4)

(5)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Amplitude in the adjustment scan


Temporary frequency
Display of the system frequency
Selection of the receive channel
Range display for entering the frequency

0.0

C.266

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Graphic display of the


adjustment scan

Adjusting the System

The graphic display of the last frequency scan is displayed.

C.2

C.2

You can modify the frequency graphically by moving the vertical


marker. Place the mouse pointer in the graphic display of the
frequency domain. A vertical marker is displayed.
C.2
Click on the line.
The newly selected frequency is transferred to the Frequency
(temp) field.
C.2
If no adjustment graphic is available, you will have to generate
the data for graphic display by performing manual frequency
adjustment.
C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.267

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

Before manual frequency adjustment, you first have to enter a


few parameters.
C.2

Entering the frequency

C.2

C.2

You can enter a new transmitter frequency in the Frequency


(temp) input field.

The frequency currently used is displayed in the field underneath for comparison.
C.2
The temporary frequency that you may enter yourself is only
used for adjustment scans. The system frequency is used for
examinations.

0.0

C.268

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Range display

C.2

Receive channel
selecting

C.2

Adjusting the System

Use the range display to verify the accuracy of the selected frequency. If it is out of range, correct it accordingly.
C.2

The receive channel is used to select the signals of the local


coils. In addition to the receive channel (Ch.), the coil name
(Coil) and the connector (Con.) are displayed in the selection
list.
C.2
The Combined entry is used to select the combined signal of
all coils selected.
Select the receive channel whose signal you want displayed.

Starting the measurement C.2

After you have corrected the resonance frequency, you may


start scanning.
C.2
Click the Continue button.

Canceling the
measurement

C.2

You may stop the examination if you are not satisfied with the
frequency spectrum.
C.2
Click the Cancel button.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.269

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

Displaying adjustment results

C.2

The Show card in the Manual adjustments dialog box displays


the results of all the adjustments performed. It provides an overview of the current status of your scan system.
C.2
Use the selection buttons to define the information to be displayed.
Displaying all adjustment
parameters

Select Options > Adjustments.


C.2

Go to the Show card.

0.0

C.270

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjusting the System

NOTE
This list is usually provided for diagnostic purposes
handled by Siemens Service.

Updating the display of


parameters

C.2

C.2

You can update the scan results displayed on the card after
each adjustment.
C.2

Just click the Update Information button.

Rejecting all adjustment


results

If you want to reject all the adjustments already performed:


C.2

C.2

Click the Invalidate All button.


The system is now in an unadjusted state.

C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.271

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

Selecting Parameters for Display


C.2

Detail of information for the


parameters displayed
C.2

You can define the scope of the information to be displayed. All


of the important parameters are displayed in "customer"
mode.
C.2

Adjustment vector

Select the parameter sets you want to display.

C.2

The following parameter sets may be selected:

C.2

C.2

System (SYS): Adjustment parameters applicable to the


system.
Temporary (ADJ): Parameters acquired via the current
adjustment process.
Last used (LOADED): Adjustment parameters used in the
last scan.
Saved: All saved adjustment parameters.

0.0

C.272

Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System

Adjustment type

C.2

Adjusting the System

Specify the adjustment types to be displayed.

C.2

The relevant adjustment parameters are displayed with the


selected adjustment type.
C.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

C.273

Adjusting the System

Managing and Adjusting the System

0.0

C.274

Operator Manual

PART

Patient Browser

D.0

D.1 Introduction
Databases and drives .................................................... D.12
Data levels ..................................................................... D.14
Calling up the Patient Browser ....................................... D.16
The Patient Browser window ......................................... D.17
Customizing the Patient Browser window ............... D.110
Image stamps .............................................................. D.116

D.2 Searching for and Displaying Patient Data


Displaying information levels ......................................... D.22
Scrolling through and selecting patient data .................. D.26
Filtering data ................................................................ D.211
Using standard filters ............................................... D.211
Creating a user-defined filter ................................... D.213
Sorting data .................................................................. D.219
Sorting patients ........................................................ D.220
Sorting examinations ............................................... D.221
Sorting series ........................................................... D.222
Sorting images ......................................................... D.223
Printing out a data list .................................................. D.228
Reading data from storing media ................................. D.231
Searching for and importing data in the network ......... D.234
Searching for data ................................................... D.236
Search Selected ...................................................... D.241
Importing data .......................................................... D.242
Configuring Patient Search ...................................... D.244
Calling up additional information about a patient ......... D.246

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D1

Contents

Patient Browser

D.3 Transferring Data to other Applications


Registering the patient again .......................................... D.32
Viewing and processing images ..................................... D.33
Splitting mosaic images into single images .................... D.37
Processing images in 3D .............................................. D.310
Private applications ...................................................... D.312

D.4 Correcting Data


Correcting patient or examination data .......................... D.42
Moving data .................................................................. D.410
Displaying a history of changes .................................... D.414

D.5 Storing, Sending and Filming Data


Storing data on an external medium .............................. D.52
Sending data via the network ......................................... D.53
Printing patient data from data media ............................ D.55
Exporting images to the file system ................................ D.56
Filming ............................................................................ D.57

D.6 Maintaining your Data


Defining the work status ................................................. D.62
Marking examination data .............................................. D.66
Procedure tracking with MPPS ....................................... D.68
Editing the performance documentation .................... D.68
Displaying actions, billing ......................................... D.612
Sending and concluding a report ............................. D.613
Closing the performance report without saving ........ D.615
Deleting data ................................................................ D.616

0.0

D2

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Contents

D.7 Configuring the Patient Browser


General settings ............................................................. D.72
Toolbar ...................................................................... D.73
Work status ................................................................ D.74
Delete confirmation .................................................... D.75
Hierarchical view in the navigation and content area ..... D.76
List entries ............................................................... D.710
Hiding data levels .................................................... D.713
List display / image stamp display ........................... D.714
Single View of the content area ................................... D.715
Configuring user-defined applications .......................... D.718

D.8 Reporting
Basics ............................................................................ D.83
Layout ........................................................................ D.84
Creating a report ............................................................ D.86
Editing a report............................................................... D.87
Opening a report ........................................................ D.88
Navigating in the report ........................................... D.810
Editing a report ........................................................ D.812
Saving a report ........................................................ D.822
Printing a report ........................................................... D.824
Opening the print preview ........................................ D.824
Close the print preview ............................................ D.826
Starting to print ........................................................ D.827
Sending a report .......................................................... D.829

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D3

Contents

Patient Browser

Configuration settings for the report ............................. D.831


Opening a configuration ........................................... D.832
Enter general settings .............................................. D.833
Create and edit diagnostic encoding schemes ........ D.836
Save and close configuration settings...................... D.842

0.0

D4

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

D.1

Introduction

D.1

The Patient Browser supports you with administration of the


patient and examination data that are stored in the databases
of your system.
D.1
With the Patient Browser you can search for data in a fast and
uncomplicated way and then process that data in the browser
or in the task cards.
D.1

When to access data with


the Patient Browser

D.1

To examine a patient who has already been examined once


before with your system.
To view the images of a patient from earlier examinations in
order to compare them with current results.
To comment or postprocess images after an examination.
To correct incorrect information for a patient stored in your
system.
To save patient and examination data or to send them to
another location in your hospital via the network.
To expose images of a patient onto film for reporting or documentation purposes.

Security-Privileges

D.1

When Security is activated, you can correct, rearrange and set


work states only if you are authorized to do so.
Page B.268, PatientBrowser
D.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.11

Introduction

Patient Browser

Databases and drives

D.1

In the Patient Browser you access patient and examination


data that are stored in the various databases of your system or
on external data media such as CDs.
D.1

Scheduler

D.1

The scheduler contains the data of all preregistered patients.


This database gives you an overview of all patients who have
been preregistered for examination. Here you can search for a
patient to register him or her for an examination.
The scheduler can be updated with data from an HIS/RIS system either automatically or manually if the system is connected
to one.
D.1
Local database

D.1

The local database is the area of your system in which the


patient data and results of current examinations are stored.
If the data volume in the local database increases, the access
times become longer and examinations are slowed down.
Therefore you should regularly move data from your local
database to storage media.

0.0

D.12

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Connected drives

Introduction

D.1

One ore more CD drives are connected to your system. The


icons with the drive names provide a quick way of accessing
these archiving media. As soon as an examination has been
completed and evaluated you should save the examination data
and then delete it from the local database.
D.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.13

Introduction

Patient Browser

Data levels

D.1

In the databases and on the external data media, the patient


and examination data are structured hierarchically. This structure helps you find examination results quickly.
D.1
The display of the data levels depends on the configuration.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Database
Patient
Study
Series
Instances

Depending on the database, the work status of each database entry is displayed as an abbreviation. You will find information about the processing status on
Page D.62, Defining the work status

0.0

D.14

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Patient

Introduction

D.1

The examination data of different patients are stored by the


names of the patients in your database.
D.1

Study / Procedure

D.1

A study is an examination which is conducted to find answers to


a particular question, usually as a result of a referral. A study
consists of one or more series. In the Scheduler, the planned
Procedure is stored at this level.
D.1

Series / Procedure Step

D.1

All the images of a measurement or of an image-processing


operation are designated to a series. In the Scheduler, the Procedure Steps for the examination are listed at this level.
D.1
Procedure Steps are not displayed for patients preregistered
locally (i.e. at this workstation).

Instances

D.1

D.1

On the lowest data level, the Instance Level, the individual


images are stored and depending on the modality, the data sets
from which images can be generated (e.g. raw data). All entries
on the Instance Level are generally referred to as images.
In the Scheduler, you will find the individual Action Items for
the Procedure Step in question at this point.
D.1
Action Items are not displayed for patients preregistered
locally (i.e. at this workstation).

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.15

Introduction

Patient Browser

Calling up the Patient Browser

D.1

You can call up the Patient Browser window either from the
main menu or by using the symbol keypad.
D.1

Main menu

D.1

D.1

Call up the Patient Browser in the main menu by selecting


the entry Patient > Browser....

Or
Symbol keypad

D.1

D.1

Press the Browser key on the symbol keypad (Num.).

D.1

NOTE
If a dialog box is open and active the button Patient
Browser might not function.

D.1

Click into the image area to deactivate the dialog box, or


close the dialog box.

D.1

NOTE
If you call up the Patient Browser on the satellite console,
it will not be updated automatically.
D.1
To update it, select View > Refresh.

0.0

D.16

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Introduction

The Patient Browser window

D.1

When you call up the Patient Browser, the Patient Browser


window is displayed and placed in the foreground.
D.1
The window is subdivided into various processing areas and
therefore provides you with access to your data in a clearly laid
out manner.
D.1

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Menu and tool bar


Navigation area
Information area
Content area
Status bar

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.17

Introduction

Tool bar

Patient Browser

D.1

You can work on the data you have selected using the menus
or the icon buttons on the tool bar.
D.1
In Browser Configuration you can define which buttons the
tool bar contains.
Page D.72, General settings
You can hide the toolbar by deselecting View > Toolbar.

Navigation area

D.1

The lower data levels for the selected databases, patients,


examinations, and series are displayed graphically in the navigation area.
D.1
Using the mouse you can select patient, study, series or image
data in order to edit it or to transfer it to other applications. Every
selection you make in the navigation area is automatically
shown in the content area.
D.1

Information area

D.1

In the information area you can see brief information about the
patient and study selected. When the navigation area is hidden,
you can also see which database is open and which data level
is displayed.
Page D.112, Showing and hiding window sections
D.1

0.0

D.18

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Content area

Introduction

D.1

In the content area you will see a list of the studies or procedures for the patient selected in the navigation area. If you
select the lower data levels, you can see which series or procedure steps are stored for a study and which images or action
items are stored for a series or procedure step.
D.1
In Browser Configuration you can define which information
is to be displayed for each entry.
Page D.72, General settings

In the content area you can also select patient and examination
data for further processing.
D.1
You can toggle between a list display or image stamp display.
Page D.113, Display of lists and image stamps in the content area

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.19

Introduction

Patient Browser

Customizing the Patient Browser window

D.1

You can alter the display of the Patient Browser window and in
this way optimize it for your way of working. For example, you
can have a certain area enlarged in order to view as much data
as possible at one time.
D.1

Changing the window


size

D.1

You can enlarge, reduce, and pan the Patient Browser window
on your screen as you require.
Page A.225, Resizing and moving a window
D.1

0.0

D.110

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Introduction

Enlarging and reducing the


navigation and content
areas
D.1

D.1

You can change the height of the navigation and content areas
with respect to one another using the mouse. The larger you
make the navigation area the smaller the content area will
become and vice versa.
D.1
Move the mouse cursor to the border of the navigation area.
The cursor changes shape to a small vertical double arrow.

D.1

Drag the line down to enlarge the navigation area and reduce
the content area.
Or

D.1

Drag the line up to reduce the navigation area and enlarge


the content area.
In the image stamp display, the content area can only be
enlarged or reduced in steps so that image stamps are not cut
off.
Page D.113, Display of lists and image stamps in the content area

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.111

Introduction

Showing and hiding


window sections

Patient Browser

D.1

You can have the tool bar, navigation area, and information area
either displayed or not, in order to create more room in the
Patient Browser window.
D.1

D.1

Click on View > Toolbar to hide or show the tool bar.


Click on View > Info Area to hide or show the information
area.
Click on View > Tree to hide or show the data structure in the
navigation area.
If the data structure is not displayed, the data level set in the
configuration is displayed in the content area. In the navigation
area, you can see which database these entries belong to.
Page D.715, Single View of the content area
D.1
When switching to tree/single view, the previous selection will
not be retained.
In order to switch between the databases in the navigation
area you must first display the tree structure.

0.0

D.112

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Display of lists and image


stamps in the content areaD.1

Introduction

If you have selected a study or series in the navigation area, all


the associated series and images are displayed in the content
area. With the View menu you can toggle between a list or
image stamp display.
D.1

Click on View > Image Stamps to have series and images


displayed as image stamps (menu entry has a checkmark) or
as a list in the content area (no checkmark next to menu
entry).
In Browser Configuration you can define what information
the list entries and the image stamps contain.
Page D.76, Hierarchical view in the navigation and content area

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.113

Introduction

Showing and hiding


databases and drives

Patient Browser

D.1

You can have individual databases and drives either displayed


or not in the navigation area depending on whether you need
them for your work.
D.1
Call up View > Source to open a submenu.
Select the databases and drives that you want to be displayed as an icon in the navigation area.

The names of the submenu entries depend on the configuration of your system.

0.0

D.114

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Customizing the table in


the content area

Introduction

D.1

The list display of patient and examination data in the content


area consists of a table. You can alter the preset column widths
for each column.
D.1
Click on the header of the table in the content area with the
mouse cursor.
Drag the right column boundary to the right to enlarge the
column.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.115

Introduction

Patient Browser

Image stamps

D.1

If View > Image Stamps is activated, all data objects are displayed as image stamps on the image/data level.
D.1
D.1

Data objects include series or images of a patient and data sets


from which images can be generated (e.g. raw data, 3D
objects) as well as curves (e.g. ECG curves) and texts.
D.1
If you click on an image stamp with the mouse the object will be
selected.
Double-click or drag & drop loads the data into the task card
that is at the top of the stack of cards, e.g. the Viewing card.
D.1

Data objects

D.1

This is a selection of possible data objects. (The range of possible objects is continuously expanded with each software version.)
D.1

Symbol

D.1

Object

D.1

Description

D.1

Image

An image is directly displayed smaller.

Raw data

The raw data on which the calculation of


images is based is represented symbolically.

Report

Parameters, images and results of an


examination and comments are stored in
the study report.

Result

Results of an evaluation of image data


(e.g., curves).

0.0

D.116

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Introduction

Symbol

D.1

Object

D.1

Description

D.1

Fusion
Registration
Matrix

Contains the coordinates for the alignment


of two image data sets.

Fly Path

Contains the coordinates of the threedimensional Fly path created and stored
during a Fly Through session.

3D Object Editor Object

3D objects of a volume data set created


with the 3D Object Editor.

Radiotherapy
Object

Data of radiotherapy objects like StructSets or Plan.

Broken Image

Image has been destroyed, e.g., loading of


the image has been interrupted.

Black Image

Black images are special images containing graphics, tables, histograms or reports.

Loading image

Image is currently loading.

Waveforms

Data of a curve, e.g. ECG curves and other


physiological data.

D.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.117

Introduction

Patient Browser

0.0

D.118

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

D.2

Searching for and


Displaying Patient Data

D.2

In the Patient Browser window you can view all the patient and
examination data stored in the databases of your system and
on external archiving media.
D.2
You can search for patient data to examine a patient again or to
review, film, or save his or her images.
D.2
You can search for patient data in the Patient Browser by navigating through the data levels of the window by mouse click or
using the keyboard.
D.2
You can speed up your search by sorting the data displayed,
e.g. alphabetically by the last name of the patient, or by filtering
the data displayed and only viewing a certain subset.
D.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.21

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Patient Browser

Displaying information levels

D.2

When searching for patient and examination data you move


through the navigation area with the mouse or you select Open
Subtree in the View menu to open lower data levels.
D.2

Displaying a data tree

D.2

D.2

Click on the icon of a patient entry in the navigation area of


the Patient Browser window to view that patients data levels.
Only the first subobject is displayed down to its lowest level.

D.2

In the content area you can see a list of all studies that are available for that patient.
D.2
Click on another patient to hide the first patients data tree
and view the information levels of the other patient instead.

0.0

D.22

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Opening a data tree

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.2

Select an entry in the navigation area.


Select the menu entry View > Open Subtree to view all the
entries of lower data levels (open up the data tree completely).
Or
D.2

D.2

Click on this button on the toolbar.

Or

D.2

Call up the popup menu with the right mouse button (or Shift
+ F10) and click on Open Subtree.
The function Open Subtree is especially useful if you have
selected several patients simultaneously.
If you select the icon for a database or drive the Open Subtree menu item and the button remain dimmed. At this level
you cannot open the data tree.
Closing a subtree

D.2

Call up View > Close Subtree in the main menu or Close


Subtree in the popup menu to close the lower information
levels again.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.23

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Updating the scheduler

D.2

Patient Browser

If your system is connected to an HIS/RIS system, the scheduler is automatically updated at regular intervals with information from the registration depending on the service configuration. You can also start this updating operation manually. In this
way you can ensure that you are always working with the latest
data.
D.2
Select View > Update Worklist to update the scheduler.
Or

D.2

Click on the icon for the scheduler to update it and then open
it.
Depending on the configuration, the Worklist Time Range
window is displayed in which you can limit the time frame for
your query.
Page E.33, Defining the worklist time range
In the Patient Browser, all patients who are preregistered for
examination on your system are now displayed.
D.2

Clearing the scheduler

D.2

You have the possibility to delete data from the Scheduler.

D.2

Call up Edit > Clear Scheduler in the menu of the Patient


Browser.
Page D.623, Clear Scheduler

0.0

D.24

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Updating the display


of the databases

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.2

Changes and additions to database entries that you make on


your workstation or are made via the network are automatically
displayed in the Patient Browser window. You can initiate this
updating manually, too, if the automatic process is delayed.
D.2

Call up View > Refresh to update the display of the navigation and content areas.
Or

D.2

Click on this button.

NOTE
If you are working on a satellite console, you must update
the database with Refresh key.
D.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.25

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Patient Browser

Scrolling through and selecting


patient data

D.2

You can search for a patients examination data in the databases in order to process it further.
D.2
After you have called up the Patient Browser window for the
first time the local database will open. All the patients stored in
it are listed in the navigation and content area.
D.2
The data levels of the first patient are displayed in the navigation area.
D.2
If you call up the Patient Browser again later, it appears in
the display last set.

0.0

D.26

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Now select a database in the navigation area and search for the
patient you require. You then open the lower levels of information until you have found the data you are looking for of the
patient concerned.
D.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.27

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Example

D.2

D.2

Patient Browser

For example, to select certain images of a patient for processing you can open the information levels patient, study, and
series one after the other until the images you require are listed
or displayed (as image stamps) in the content area.
D.2
Click on the icon for the database in which the patient is
stored in the navigation area.
If necessary, scroll through the list of patients using the scroll
bar until you have found the patient you require.
You will find the patient you are looking for even faster if you
press the key for the first letter of the patient's name on the
keyboard. The selection then jumps to the first patient entry
with this initial letter.

D.2

D.2

Click on the patient you are looking for in the navigation area
to view the information levels stored for this patient as icons.
All the studies of this patient are displayed in the content
area.
Click on a study in the navigation area to select it and to view
all the associated series.
Click on a series in the navigation area to select it and to
obtain an overview of all the images contained in it in the
content area.

D.2

Click on an image in the content area to select it.

0.0

D.28

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Depending on whether you have clicked on View > Image


Stamps or not, the series and images are displayed as image
stamps or listed in the content area.
Page D.110, Customizing the Patient Browser window
Data selection with the
keyboard

D.2

Using the keyboard you can reach various data entries in the
Patient Browser very quickly. The key assignment for the
selection options in the active area (navigation or content area)
is summarized in the following table.
D.2
D.2

Key

Selection

Key

Selection

Home

First entry

End

Last entry

Page up

First visible entry

Page down

Last visible entry

Entry one
line up (same
level)

Entry one
line down (same
level)

Entry left (level


up in navigation
area)

Entry right (level


down in
navigation area)

Tab
or
Shift + Tab

Toggle between
the navigation
and content area

Letter

1st entry with the


appropriate
starting letter

When you press and hold the Ctrl key and click the data input
with the mouse, you are selecting the inputs exclusively. However, when you press the Shift key and click data inputs with
the mouse, you are selecting the inputs inclusively (standard
Windows functionality).

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.29

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Multiple selection

D.2

Patient Browser

You can also select several patients at once, for example, to


save their data, or you can select several images of one patient
in order to review them.
D.2
Mark the patient entries or examination data you require in
the navigation or content area with the mouse keeping the
Ctrl key pressed.
Page A.217, Selecting several objects
Or

D.2

Select the first entry you require in the navigation or content


area. Hold the Shift key pressed and extend your selection
using the keyboard.
Page D.29, Data selection with the keyboard
The images are transferred to the task card in the same order
in which they were selected.
Multi-select is only possible on one data level in the tree display. Data selected must belong to the same entry at the next
highest data level (e.g. several series of one study but not
several series of different studies).

0.0

D.210

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Filtering data

D.2

If the volume of data in the navigation and content areas is very


large, you can simplify the search for patient data by filtering the
data. You then only view a certain selection of patients, studies,
series, and images.
D.2

Using standard filters

D.2

When filtering your data you can use filter criteria that are
offered by default by your system. These are available to you on
the menu bar or with the buttons on the toolbar.
D.2
In Browser Configuration, you can add standard filters to or
remove them from the menu bar or toolbar.
Page D.18, Tool bar
Filter menu

D.2

Select one of the filtering criteria in the Filter menu of the


Patient Browser.
These default filters evaluate the status or marking of data on
all data levels.
Page D.62, Defining the work status
Page D.66, Marking examination data
D.2

Or

D.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.211

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Filters on the toolbar

Patient Browser

D.2

Call up a standard filter using the toolbar.


In Browser Configuration (Options > Configure Browser)
you can configure the contents of the toolbar.
Page D.73, Toolbar
Depending on the filtering criteria selected these data are now
displayed:
D.2

Not Archived
Only the data which have not been saved are displayed.
Not Printed
Only the data which have not yet been printed are displayed.
Not Sent
Only the data which have not yet been sent in the network are
displayed.
Not Marked
Only the data which are not marked are displayed.
Marked
Only marked data are displayed.

0.0

D.212

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Deactivating the filter

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.2

A filter remains active until you replace it by another filter.

D.2

The status bar shows you which filter is currently in use.


If you exit the Patient Browser and call it up again later on,
the last filter that has been selected is still active.

D.2

Call up Filter > Off or click on the icon button to have all the
data displayed again (unfiltered).

Creating a user-defined filter

D.2

Using the Patient Browser you can also create your own filter
criteria in order to filter the database according to a combination
of target items.
D.2
If you keep self-defined filters general, you can use them more
frequently to have a certain subset of the data displayed in a
quick and uncomplicated manner.
D.2
If you define very specific filters, you can search for patient and
examination data in a direct and time-saving way.
D.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.213

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Creating a filter

D.2

Patient Browser

Call up Options > Filter Settings....


The Filter Specification dialog box is displayed with input
fields for the filter name and five filtering criteria.
D.2

Enter a suitable name in the Filter Name field by which your


filter is to be known.

0.0

D.214

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.2

Select one of the filtering criteria offered in the selection list.


Depending on which criteria you select, input fields combined
with and, or or From ... to appear or the criteria has no additional input field.
D.2

Enter target items in the input field combined with or of


which at least one must be fulfilled.

Enter target items in the input fields combined with and that
must all be fulfilled.

In the input fields combined with From - to enter the range


in which the data you are searching for must be contained.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.215

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Example of a userdefined filter

D.2

Patient Browser

The following user-defined filter was created to find a particular


series of a thorax examination in a database.
D.2

This filter only selects marked series that have already been
completed, filmed, and archived and that were acquired with a
slice position between 0 and 100.
D.2

0.0

D.216

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Saving a filter

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.2

Click on OK to save the filter. You will return to the Patient


Browser window.
Or

D.2

Click on Cancel to return to the Patient Browser window


without saving the new filter.

Using user-defined filters

D.2

D.2

User-defined filters are placed in the Filter menu as additional


menu entries.
D.2
Call up, for example, Filter > Thorax-Series-Marked, to filter all data to your criteria.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.217

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Removing user-defined
filters

D.2

Patient Browser

When you no longer require a user-defined filter, you can


remove it from the Filter menu again to keep the menu clear. D.2
Call up the Filter dialog box and select the filter you want to
delete in the selection list next to Filter Name.

Click on Delete to remove the filter from the list.


If necessary, select further filters from the selection list and
remove them in the same way.
D.2

D.2

Then click on OK to confirm deletion of the filter.


You return to the Patient Browser window.

D.2

Or

D.2

Click on Cancel to keep all filters as they were.

0.0

D.218

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Sorting data

D.2

You can sort the data displayed in the Patient Browser by various criteria. This enables you to output the data in a certain
sequence and makes it easier to find certain patient and examination data.
D.2
Depending on the selected data level, different sorting criteria
will be active in the Sort menu.
D.2
You can define your own sort schemes with up to three sort levels for sorting the images.
D.2
The selected sort criteria or sort scheme is marked by a checkmark next to the menu item. The checkmark remains until you
select another criteria.
D.2
You can reverse the sorting order for each selected sort criteria.D.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.219

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Patient Browser

Sorting patients

D.2

You may sort the list of patients in the local database or scheduler.
D.2
Select the Local database or the Scheduler.
D.2

Select a sort criteria under Sort in the menu.


Patient Name
The patients will be displayed in alphabetical order from
A to Z.
DB Date and Time
The patients will be displayed in order of registration starting
with the most recent patient.
Work Status (filmed, archived, sent)
You may select a work status. The patients will then be
sorted by progress in this work step, starting with the patient
who has progressed furthest.
Page D.62
You can reverse the sort order.

D.2

Select Sort > Reverse Order.

0.0

D.220

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Sorting examinations

D.2

You can sort the list of examinations of a patient in the local


database.
D.2
Select a Patient from the Local database.
D.2

Select a sort criteria from the Sort menu.


Study Description
The examinations will be displayed in alphabetical order by
name from A to Z.
Study Date and Time
The examinations will be displayed by time created starting
with the most recent examination.
Work Status (filmed, archived, sent, work sequence)
You may select a work status. The examinations will then be
sorted by progress in this work step, starting with the examination that has progressed furthest.
Page D.62
You can reverse the sort order.

D.2

Select Sort > Reverse Order.


In case the selected sort order cannot be applied, the following default order is automatically used:
Patient Name
Study Description
Series Number
Instance Number

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.221

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Patient Browser

Sorting series

D.2

You can sort the list of series of an examination.

D.2

Select a Patient and an Examination from the Local database.


D.2

Select a sort criteria from the Sort menu.


Series Number
The series will be sorted by their series number and displayed starting with the smallest.
Series Description
The series will be displayed in alphabetical order by name
from A to Z.
Series Date and Time
The series will be displayed by time created starting with the
most recent series.
Modality
Work Status (filmed, archived, sent, work sequence)
You may select a work status. The series will then be sorted
by progress in this work step, starting with the series that has
progressed furthest.
Page D.62
You can reverse the sort order.

D.2

Select Sort > Reverse Order.

0.0

D.222

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Sorting images

D.2

You can sort the list of images of a series.

D.2

Select a Patient, an Examination, and a Series from the


Local database.
D.2

Select a sort criteria from the Sort menu.


Instance Number
The images of a series are numbered on creation. This numbering is determined by the orientation and position of the
images.
Instance Date and Time
The images will be displayed by time created starting with
the most recent series.
Slice Position
The images will be sorted by their main orientation (tra - cor
- sag) and by slice position within the main orientation.
Modality Specific Data
Page D.224, MR-specific sort criteria
Work Status (filmed, archived, sent)
You may select a work status. The images will then be sorted
by progress in this work step, starting with the image that has
progressed furthest.
Page D.62
Multiple
Page D.226, Multiple sorting

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.223

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Sorting in the
content area

D.2

D.2

D.2

Patient Browser

You can also sort in the content area.

D.2

Example: Sorting the images by slice position:

D.2

Click on the Slice Position line in the content area.


The images are sorted and displayed in ascending order by
slice position. You can recognize the direction by the triangle. D.2
Click on the slice position line again.

D.2

The sort order will be reversed.

D.2

MR-specific sort criteria

D.2

MR images and data may also be sorted by further sorting criteria and schemes.
D.2
Selecting a sort criteria from the menu under Sort > Modality Specific Data > ....

D.2

Anatomical
Multiple standard sort scheme for localizer and anatomical
examinations.
Page F.316, Using a Siemens sort scheme
Triggered
Multiple Siemens sort scheme for triggered examinations.
Page F.316, Using a Siemens sort scheme
Chronological
Multiple Siemens sort scheme for sorting by time of creation
of the images.
Page F.316, Using a Siemens sort scheme

0.0

D.224

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Instance Oriented
Multiple Siemens sort scheme for sorting by image number.
Page F.316, Using a Siemens sort scheme
Echo Time (TE)
Series that have been acquired with multiple echo protocols,
contain images based on different contrasts (e.g. T2 images,
proton density images). You can use sorting to separate
these images by echo time.
Repetition Time (TR)
The images of a series are sorted by TR.
Inversion Time (TI)
The images of a series are sorted by TI.
Trigger Time (TT)
The images of a series are sorted by TT.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.225

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Multiple sorting

D.2

Patient Browser

You can define a separate sort scheme with up to three levels


for sorting within a series. You define a sort criteria for each of
the three levels.
D.2
The images are first ordered by the sort criteria of the first level.
The sort criteria of the second level is used if images are identical by the first sort criteria. The sort criteria of the third level is
only used if images are identical by the first and second sort criteria.
D.2

Select Sort > Multiple.


The Image Display Order dialog box opens.

D.2

The following sort criteria are available:

D.2

Main orientation (MO)


MR Slice position (SP)
Trigger time (TT)
Acquisition time (TA)
Echo time (TE)
Image number (NR)
B_Value (BV)

0.0

D.226

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.2

Select a criteria for the first level.

D.2

Select a criteria for the second level.

D.2

If necessary, select a criteria for the third level.


Example: Sorting of the images of a multi-slice protocol by slice
D.2
position and image number.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.227

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Patient Browser

Printing out a data list

D.2

If your system is connected to a printer, you can print out examination data in the form of a list. On printing out, the information
displayed in the content area is displayed.
D.2
Display the required patient and examination data in the content area.
Page D.26, Scrolling through and selecting patient data
To print out the content area, you can work both in the tree
display and in the single display.
Page D.112, Showing and hiding window sections
You can even print data lists of you have already stored the
patient data, for example, for archiving or transfer to a local
data medium.
Page D.55, Printing patient data from data media

Displaying the print


preview

D.2

Call up Patient > Print Preview... to have the printout displayed in a preview.
Click on Close window to close the print preview again.

0.0

D.228

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Printing out a list

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.2

Call up Patient > Print List to print out the data listed in the
content area.
In a list of patients, the content and date of creation of the list is
stated in the header of the printout. For all other data levels, the
content of the information area is also printed.
D.2

This list is always printed out in English.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.229

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Changing printer
settings

D.2

Patient Browser

You can change the printer settings (e.g. page margins) in the
Windows NT/Windows XP print dialog.
D.2
Call up Patient > Print... and make the required settings in
the dialog box shown.

D.2

Click on OK to apply the new settings.

0.0

D.230

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Reading data from storing media

D.2

You can import patient and examination data archived or


exported onto a data medium in DICOM format into your system (into the local database) if a drive has been installed and
configured appropriately.
D.2
With the current program version, you can only import
DICOM data.
Single images in DICOM format can also be imported by the
file system.
Chapter J.4, Exchanging Data via the Hard Disk

D.2

Data media

D.2

Click on the icon of a data medium in the navigation area to


display all the patient data stored there.

Depending on the drive setting of your system, you can read


data from the following media:
D.2
MOD (magneto optical disk) 3.5" and 5.25"
3.5" diskettes
CD or CD-R
Page J.26, Storing data on CD

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.231

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Changing data media

D.2

D.2

Patient Browser

Call up Transfer > Eject from... and select the appropriate


drive from the list which is then displayed.
Remove the data medium from the drive and insert the new
medium into the corresponding drive.
Or

D.2

Call up Transfer > Eject From <drive name>, or press the


eject button on the CD drive and change the medium.
Page J.22, Inserting and ejecting data media
MODs that are written by other systems should only be
inserted with write-protection. Maxpotics MODs written in SPI
format should be inserted only write protected.

D.2

Showing/hiding data
sources

D.2

With View > Source, you can hide or display archiving media
individually in the navigation area.
Page D.114, Showing and hiding databases and drives D.2

0.0

D.232

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Selecting data

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.2

You search and select patient and examination data from


archive media by clicking through the data levels in the navigation area.
D.2
You can speed up your search by filtering and/or sorting the
data.
Page D.211, Filtering data
Page D.219, Sorting data

Importing data

D.2

You can import the patient and examination data selected in the
archive medium into the local database, e.g. to evaluate it, to
send it through the network, or to store it on another data
medium.
D.2
Call up Transfer > Import to import the selected data from
the data medium or network node into your local database.
Or

D.2

D.2

Click on the icon button on the toolbar.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.233

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Patient Browser

Searching for and importing data in


the network

D.2

With Search and Search Selected, you can retrieve patient


and examination data from workstations and long-term archives
that are working with other DICOM program systems or older
syngo MR program versions and are therefore not displayed in
the navigation area.
D.2
You can import the required data into your local database via
the network and work on your workstation in the usual way, e.g.
loading the data into the Viewing task card for evaluation. D.2
You can retrieve patient and examination data only from workstations that are set up as a network node and support the
Search function.

Calling up standard
patient search

D.2

You can perform your data search in the Search window. There
you enter the search criteria, start the search, and select the
data to import.
D.2
Call up Patient > Search... in the main menu.
Or

D.2

Click the Search button in the toolbar of the Patient Browser


to display the Patient Search window.

0.0

D.234

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

Input fields for search criteria


Search details area
Information area
Series details list
Buttons
Status bar

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.235

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Patient Browser

Searching for data

D.2

You search for the patients, studies or series you want to import
into your local database by entering patient, study or series
details in the input fields of the Patient Search dialog.
D.2
Network node

D.2

D.2

Patient details

Select the network node on which the data searched for are
located.

D.2

Enter the last name, ID and date of birth of the patient you are
searching for.
The following characters are not permitted: ^ = \
The search distinguishes between upper and lower case!
Enter the characters correctly.
If you only know part of the name or the patient ID, you can
also use the character * as wildcard.
Page E.35, Wildcards for patient name and ID

0.0

D.236

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Select Any from the dropdown list if you do not want the sex
to be considered for the search.
Select the Sex from the dropdown list.

Examination details

D.2

Enter the study date or a time range.


D.2

When you select an item from the dropdown list the corresponding study date range is automatically entered.

Enter the study ID.


Select a modality from dropdown list.
The items of this list are configurable.
Page D.244, Configuring Patient Search

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.237

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Study details

Patient Browser

D.2

Enter the study details or select them from the dropdown


lists.
The items of the dropdown list for the Referring Physician
are configurable.
Page E.42, Defining entries in the selection list
Series details

D.2

Enter the series details or select a body part and a performing physician from the dropdown list.
If you only use series details the search may be retarded.
The items of the dropdown lists are configurable.
Page D.244, Configuring Patient Search
Page E.42, Defining entries in the selection list

0.0

D.238

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Start Search

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.2

D.2

After having entered patient, study or series details you can


start the search.
D.2
Click on the Search button to start the search.
The Search button changes to Stop Search which you can
use for aborting the query at any time (e.g. when the required
data have already been found).

Search result

D.2

All patients and studies found are displayed in the information


area.
D.2
Click a study if you want to have the corresponding series
displayed.
The series are displayed in the series details list.

D.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.239

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Patient Browser

D.2

N OT E
If the Patient ID is not unique, studies may be listed which
do not belong to the patient selected and displayed in the
information area.
D.2

Image List

D.2

With Image List you obtain a list of the instances of a series, in


case you want to explicitly import special instances.
D.2
Select the study.
Click the Image List button.
A list of images is displayed.

D.2

0.0

D.240

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Search Selected

D.2

Search Selected is used when the Patient Browser or any


other syngo MR application is activated and patient, study,
series, or images have already been selected and you wish to
search further studies, series, or objects referring to the patient
previously selected.
D.2
Click on the Search Selected icon in the toolbar of the
Patient Browser.
Or

D.2

Call up Patient > Search Selected in the main menu.


The Search dialog window appears. The window is identical
with that of the standard search. In contrast to the standard
search you do not have to enter Patient Name, Patient ID, Date
of Birth and Sex. Data are entered automatically in the corresponding input fields.
D.2
Enter additional search criteria: examination, study and
series details.
D.2

Click the Search button.


The results are displayed in the result area.
Page D.239, Search result

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.241

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Patient Browser

Importing data

D.2

After you have found the required study, series, or images,


transfer them to your workstation for further processing.
D.2
Starting importing data

D.2

Select one or more patients, studies or series from the information or search output area of the Search dialog.
Or

D.2

Select the images from the Image Search Results dialog


window.
Click the Import button.
Or

D.2

In case you selected only one patient, study or series, double-click it.
The selected data are copied from the network node to your
workstation and displayed in the navigation and content area of
the Patient Browser.
D.2
If the selected objects exceed a certain limit a warning message appears.
Click the Import Stop key if you want to cancel the import.

0.0

D.242

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Checking data
transmission

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.2

Just as for archiving or exporting you can view import processes.


D.2
Call up Transfer > Local Job Status or Transfer > Network
Job Status.
Chapter J.6, Checking Data Transfer

Restarting search

D.2

D.2

Click Clear if you want all entries to be cleared, stop the current search and start a new one.
All input fields, the information area and the result output list are
cleared.
D.2

Closing Patient Search

D.2

You have two possibilities to close the Search window.

D.2

Click the Close button.

D.2

If you have triggered a patient search it is not canceled.


Search parameters and search results are not lost and are
available when the dialog window is called up the next time. If
you are in the process of importing data, importing continues
in the background.
Or
D.2

D.2

Click the Cancel button.


If you have triggered a patient search it is now canceled. If
you are in the process of importing data, importing continues
in the background.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.243

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Patient Browser

Configuring Patient Search

D.2

You can adapt the user interface of the Search dialog window
to your method of working. The dropdown lists of the search criteria Modality and Body Part are configurable.
D.2
Call up the Numaris 4 Configuration Panel by activating
Options > Configuration in the main menu.
D.2

Double-click the Patient Search icon.


The Query & Retrieve Configuration window appears.

D.2

0.0

D.244

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.2

D.2

Select or deselect the desired items by clicking or deselecting the corresponding check box.
Click OK to save the settings.
Or

D.2

D.2

Click Cancel to close the dialog without saving the settings.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.245

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Patient Browser

Calling up additional information


about a patient

D.2

If your hospital has an intranet, you can call up information


about a patient from other departments in your hospital using a
EPR Web browser for which syngo MR provides an interface.
This applies to data that has been entered in an HIS or similar
information system.
D.2
The additional information about the patient (e.g. concerning
allergies, implants, preliminary examinations) might bear relevance to the pending examination or evaluation of more recent
examination results.
D.2
Use the EPR Web browser (EPR = Electronic Patient Record)
to call up the data.
D.2
At any one time the EPR Web browser only displays the EPR
for one patient. You can view but not import the data of the
patient with the EPR Web browser.
The first time you launch the EPR Web browser you must log
on (see the operating instructions of your EPR Web browser).
The syngo MR interface must be individually adapted to the
EPR Web browser by your system administrator.

0.0

D.246

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Calling up the EPR Web


browser

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.2

D.2

To display the electronic report for a particular patient, select a


patient (or a study, series, instances) from the Patient Browser
or in another task card.
D.2
Call up Patient > Retrieve EPR in the main menu to display
the EPR Web browser.

Or
D.2

D.2

Click on Retrieve EPR in the toolbar.


The EPR Web browser starts up and the information available
for the selected patient is displayed.
D.2

If you click with the mouse outside the EPR Web browser, the
window is placed in the background.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.247

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Placing the EPR Web


browser in the
foreground

Patient Browser

You can call up the Web browser with the same patient data
again.
D.2

Call up Patient > Show EPR in the main menu.

Or

D.2

Click on Show EPR in the toolbar.


The EPR Web browser is again displayed with the same contents.
D.2

Closing the EPR Web


browser

Call up File > Close to close the EPR Web browser.


D.2

The EPR Web browser is closed.

D.2

D.2

0.0

D.248

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

D.3

Transferring Data to other


Applications

D.3

You have found the patient and examination data you require in
the Patient Browser window and would now like to make use
of this data in another application.
D.3
You would like to examine the patient again.
You would like to view and possibly review the patients
stored images.
You would like to process and evaluate images three-dimensionally for special diagnostic problems.
You would like to process patient and examination data in
other application programs that you have set.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.31

Transferring Data to other Applications

Patient Browser

Registering the patient again

D.3

Before you can examine a patient stored in the local database


or in one of the archive media again, you must register this
patient for a new examination.
D.3

D.3

Click on the required patient entry in the navigation or content area of the Patient Browser.
Or

D.3

Select one or more studies of the patient that you want to


perform or repeat.
Call up the patient registration with Patient > Register.
Or
D.3

D.3

Click on the icon button on the toolbar.


Or

D.3

D.3

Press the Patient Register key on the symbol keypad


(Num 0).
Or

D.3

Drag the selected data into the open Patient Registration


window (drag & drop).
In the Patient Registration window you can check the patient
data and correct it if necessary. You can add to the examination
data and register the patient whom you can then examine right
away.
Chapter E.3, Registering a Known Patient
D.3

0.0

D.32

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Transferring Data to other Applications

Viewing and processing images

D.3

With the Patient Browser you can transfer the images of one
or more patients from the local database to the Viewing task
card for viewing and editing.
D.3
Depending on which data level you are in, you can transfer the
following image material to the Viewing card:
D.3
All images of one or more patients
All images of one or more studies
All images of one or more series
One image or more than one image
For transferring images to the Viewing task card you can either
use the menu bar or the toolbar or you simply double-click the
images or drag & drop them onto the Viewing task card with
the mouse.
D.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.33

Transferring Data to other Applications

All images of a patient,


study or series

D.3

Patient Browser

Select the patient, study, or series in the navigation or content area of the Patient Browser.
Call up Patient > Load to Viewing or click on the button on
the toolbar to transfer the associated images to the Viewing
task card.
Or

D.3

Click the Viewing card to the top of the stack.


Then double-click on the required data object. Or select the
data using the keyboard and press the Return key.
Using multiple selection in the navigation or content area you
transfer the images of more than one patient, study, or series
to the Viewing task card.
Page D.210, Multiple selection

One or more than one


image of a patient

Click the Viewing card to the top of the stack.


D.3

Double-click on the data icon of the image that you want to


transfer in the content area of the Patient Browser. Or select
the image using the keyboard and press the Return key.
Or

D.3

Select more than one image in the content area and transfer
it to the Viewing card with Patient > Load to Viewing or the
Load to Viewing button on the toolbar.
Page D.210, Multiple selection

0.0

D.34

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Drag & drop

Transferring Data to other Applications

D.3

In addition to the methods described above you can also transfer images to the Viewing task card by drag & drop. In this way
you can determine in which segment the first of your selected
images is to be displayed.
D.3
Reduce and/or move the Patient Browser window so that
you can see the image area of the Viewing task card.
Drag the selected images to the desired segment on the
Viewing task card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.35

Transferring Data to other Applications

Patient Browser

If the task card is not in the foreground you can also drag the
images from the Browser onto the corresponding tab. The
task card moves into the foreground and the images are
loaded into the image area.
Closed after Loading

D.3

If you have selected the Closed after Loading setting in the


Options menu, the Patient Browser window is closed after
transfer of the images.
Call up Patient > Closed after Loading to activate this function.
If the option is not checked, the Patient Browser remains open
in the foreground even after you have loaded images into the
Viewing card. To process images you can always switch manually to the Viewing task card.
D.3
Click on the Close button in the top right corner of the
Patient Browser.
In the Viewing task card you can view and edit the transferred
images.
Part G
D.3

0.0

D.36

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Transferring Data to other Applications

Splitting mosaic images into single


images

D.3

Some postprocessing functions, e.g. 3D, cannot use mosaic


images. So in special cases it may be necessary to split them
up into single images again.
Page L.410, Loading mosaic images
D.3

Select Patient > Browser.


Splitting a mosaic image

D.3

Select one mosaic image from the Patient Browser.


Select Applications > Mosaic > Split to one Series.
The images of the selected mosaic image are saved in a new
series under the same study.
D.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.37

Transferring Data to other Applications

Splitting several mosaic


images

D.3

Patient Browser

Select two or more mosaic images or all mosaic images in


the Patient Browser.
Select Applications > Mosaic > Split to one Series.
The images of all selected mosaic images are saved in a new
series under the same study
D.3
Or

D.3

Select Applications > Mosaic > Split to one Series per


Mosaic.
A new series is created with the split images for each mosaic
image selected.
D.3

NOTE
Due to safety standards splitting of the images may take
some time. This process runs in the background and is
accomplished even if the current user logs off or if the user
changes.
D.3

0.0

D.38

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Canceling splitting of
mosaic images

Transferring Data to other Applications

Select Applications > Mosaic > Abort Splitting process....


D.3

D.3

NOTE
To cancel a running spiltting process when the user
changes is only possible if the different user disposes of the
corresponding access rights.
D.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.39

Transferring Data to other Applications

Processing images in 3D

Patient Browser

D.3

As the result of an examination you obtain images of a certain


volume which are stored in your local database. You can combine the two-dimensional slices of a suitable series to form a
three-dimensional representation of the region of interest and
you can process and evaluate it in the 3D task card.
D.3
Select a patient or one or more of his or her studies, series
or images (at least 4) in the navigation or content area of the
Patient Browser.

D.3

Call up Applications > 3D > MPR or click on the icon button


to start image processing as multiplanar reconstruction
(MPR).
Or

D.3

Call up Applications > 3D > MIP or click on the icon button


to start maximum intensity projection (MIP).
Or

D.3

Call up Applications > 3D > MinIP to start minimum intensity projection (MinIP).
Or

D.3

Call up Applications > 3D > SSD or click on the icon button


to start surface shaded display (SSD).
Or

D.3

Call up Applications > 3D > VRT to start the volume rendering technique as the image processing.

0.0

D.310

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Transferring Data to other Applications

If you have selected more than one suitable series or an especially large series, the Series List dialog box is displayed. As
soon as you have decided on a series there, you can perform
three-dimensional image processing on the 3D task card.
Chapter H.2, Transferring Images to 3D
D.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.311

Transferring Data to other Applications

Private applications

Patient Browser

D.3

Only research customers are allowed to use the selection of


syngo programmed user-defined applications in the Private
Applications menu.
D.3
D.3

0.0

D.312

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

D.4

Correcting Data

D.4

Every now and then it is necessary to correct patient data or to


add information about the study data, series and instances of a
patient.
D.4
You can use the Patient Browser to search for this patient in
the database and then call up a dialog box in which you can process the data.
D.4
The data of the Service Patient cannot be altered. The same
applies to data that have been imported via an HIS / RIS system or which are linked with such a system.
Whether and what changes can be made to data linked with
MPPS depends on the working status.
Page D.68, Procedure tracking with MPPS
History of changes

D.4

Every time you change the data of a patient or examination, this


is recorded in a history of changes on your system. The correction list is maintained for each object level. You can view the history of changes for an entry in the local database at any time
in order to see what changes have been made to it.
D.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.41

Correcting Data

Patient Browser

Correcting patient or examination


data

D.4

You can correct or add to the personal data of a patient or information about that patients studies in the local database.
D.4
If you want to change stored data or data from another workstation, you must first import it into the local database. However,
the original data remain unchanged.
Page D.231, Reading data from storing media
D.4
D.4

NOTE
As long as you have not generated all the Position Display
images of a patients examinations, you must not change
the respective patient and examination data.
D.4
Otherwise the reference of the scanned images gets lost
and it is not possible to use the Position Display in the
Viewing task card.
D.4

0.0

D.42

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Correcting Data

Close the patient in all task cards (Patient > Close Patient).
When Security is activated, you can correct data only if you
are authorized to do so.
Select the patient, study, series or images that you want to
correct in the navigation or content area of the Patient
Browser.
Call up Edit > Correct.
Or
D.4

D.4

Click on the icon button on the toolbar to open the Correct


dialog box.
You cannot correct data that was delete-protected with Edit >
Protect. You must first remove the delete protection with
Edit > Remove Protection.
Data that are used by other applications or are being processed on another console cannot be corrected, either. The
corresponding entries in the Correct dialog box are then
dimmed.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.43

Correcting Data

Patient Browser

0.0

D.44

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Correcting Data

Selected patient

D.4

Content display

D.4

On the title bar of the Correct window, you can see which
patient and data you have selected.
D.4

In the first line of the window of the header line, the number of
studies, series, and images which are selected for correction is
displayed.
D.4

Entering data

D.4

In the input and selection fields of the Correct window you can
see the information that has been stored for the selected patient
or selected study or series so far.
D.4

Correct or add to the selected data.


Depending on the data level in which you want to correct
data, some fields of the Correct window might be dimmed.
When you enter very long comments in the Comment input
field only the first part of the text is displayed in the Viewing
task depending on the selected layout. A third or fourth comment line is not displayed, either.
Multiple values are represented by an asterisk and cannot be
changed (except instance level).

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.45

Correcting Data

Updating a current
examination

Signing for changes

Patient Browser

D.4

If you have called up the Correct window from the examination


card, you can incorporate the changes in the current examination.
D.4

D.4

Select the checkbox Update data acquisition.

D.4

Enter your name under Modifiers name or select your


name from the selection list.
This will indicate who made the changes to the patient and
examination data for further reference. If your name is not yet in
the selection list, it will now be placed in the list automatically.D.4
If you do not specify a name, the name with which you logged
onto the system is taken as the modifier.
In case Security is activated this box displays your user name
and you cannot make any changes.

0.0

D.46

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Saving changes

Correcting Data

D.4

Click on OK to save the new data and place the changes in


the history of changes.
The system first checks whether the predefined data are correct
and the date of birth entered is consistent with the specified
age. After that, the changed data are accepted into the system.D.4
Or

D.4

Click on Cancel to reject the corrections. The data remain


unchanged and no entry is placed in the history of changes.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.47

Correcting Data

One patient stored in the


database twice

Patient Browser

D.4

A patient whose name was spelled incorrectly during an examination or who was once registered as an emergency patient is
stored in the database twice.
D.4
As soon as you save the corrected patient name, the dialog box
asks you whether you want to merge the examination data of
the two patient entries or not.
D.4

D.4

D.4

Click on OK to store all the selected data under the corrected


patient name.
Click on Cancel to cancel correction of the data.
No changes will be made.

D.4

0.0

D.48

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Changing external data

Correcting Data

D.4

If you change patient and examination data that you have previously imported into your local database (e.g. from another
archiving medium) or that was imported into your system (e.g.
via HIS/RIS), the Losing External References message box is
displayed.
D.4

Click on Continue to save the changed data in your local


database.
If you then transfer the corrected data back to its original location, it is stored in addition to the original data.
D.4
Or

D.4

Click on Cancel to cancel the process.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.49

Correcting Data

Patient Browser

Moving data

D.4

The images of a patient are grouped together by examination


and series into hierarchical groups. If you find that the structure
is not correct, you can regroup the examinations and series by
moving them.
D.4
If you move external data imported into your local database
and then transfer them back to their original location in a different combination, they will be stored in addition to the original data.
Page D.49, Changing external data
When Security is activated, you can rearrange data only if you
are authorized to do so.
D.4

C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Correcting/rearranging objects with
references.
D.4
Consequence: References may be lost.

D.4

Remedy: Rearrange the entire hierarchical group


containing all objects with references in order to maintain
the references.
D.4

0.0

D.410

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Restrictions

Correcting Data

D.4

The data of the Service Patient, the Quality Assurance Patient,


and the Test Patient cannot be moved. The same applies to
data imported via an HIS/RIS system or linked with such a system.
D.4
You can only group together examination data that were
acquired by the same examination method with the same
patient position.
D.4
You cannot move data that are already opened in another application (e.g. the Viewing card) or are delete-protected with
Edit > Protect.
D.4
You can only move studies into other studies or patient entries,
series into other series or studies, images into other series. D.4
For example, you can move images from one series into
another series or all images of one series into another study.
For example, you cannot move the images of a study into an
individual series of another study.

If you want to move linked external objects, select this function with multiple selection because otherwise the reference
to the unselected objects will be lost.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.411

Correcting Data

Drag & drop or cut


& paste

Patient Browser

D.4

You can move data either with the mouse (drag & drop) or using
the Edit menu (cut & paste).
D.4
If you accidentally cut and move data by drag & drop, you can
cancel the operation at any time with the Esc key.
Select the study or studies, series, images, or the one image
that you want to move.
Drag the selected data to the target position and release the
mouse button.
Or

D.4

D.4

Call up Edit > Cut or click on the icon button on the toolbar.
Click on the target position.

D.4

Call up Edit > Paste or click on the icon button on the toolbar.

The Rearrange dialog box will be displayed.

D.4

0.0

D.412

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Correcting Data

Just like when correcting patient and examination data, moving


data is also recorded in the history of changes.
Page D.414, Displaying a history of changes
D.4

Enter your name in the Rearrange dialog box or select it


from the selection list.
If you do not specify a name, the name with which you logged
onto the system is taken as the modifier.
In case Security is activated this box displays your user name
and you cannot make any changes.
D.4

Click on OK to confirm your entry.


The data are moved and the changes are recorded in the history of changes together with your name.
D.4
Or

D.4

D.4

Click on Cancel to cancel the move.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.413

Correcting Data

Patient Browser

Displaying a history of changes

D.4

The correction list is a sort of log of your local database that is


created separately for each data level. Here you can always see
what changes and additions have been made to the data of
patient and to the information about the patient's examinations.
D.4

When Security is activated, you can open the History dialog


only if you are authorized to do so.
Select the patient, study, series or image stored in the local
database whose history of changes you want to view.
Call up Edit > History to display the Correct & Rearrange
History window with a chronological list of changes.
Or
D.4

D.4

Click on the icon button on the toolbar.

In the Correct & Rearrange History window you cannot


make changes yourself. All entries are made by your system.

0.0

D.414

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Correcting Data

Depending on the data level of the selected data different information is listed in the Correct & Rearrange History window:D.4
Title
Here you can see the data record to which the logged
changes belong.
Attribute
This column lists the corrected entries.
Original Setting and Corrected Setting
These two columns show you the corrected entry before and
after the change.
Date & Time
This column of the table shows you the date and time of the
change.
Modifiers Name
In the last column in the table you can see who has made the
corrections.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.415

Correcting Data

Patient Browser

D.4

If an object has been moved, the entry is marked ">" under


Attribute in window Correct & Rearrange History.
Depending on how many levels have changed when you
change an object, up to four lines of texts can be inserted into
the table.

Click on OK to close the history display again.

0.0

D.416

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

D.5

Storing, Sending and


Filming Data

D.5

To backup data and to reduce the amount of data stored in the


local database you should store patient and examination data
at regular intervals. For storing you can equip your system with
a CD recorder, or connect the system to a central archive via
the network.
D.5
If your system is connected to the central data network of your
hospital, you can transfer the examination data via this network
to another location in your hospital organization. You can use
this facility, for example, if you want to have examination results
evaluated at another work station or store them centrally.
D.5
To process or otherwise use images with other applications,
you export them into the file system.
D.5
Finally you can use the Patient Browser to film images for documentation or reporting.
D.5
Select the required patient and examination data in the navigation area or content area of the Patient Browser window. After
that start storing, sending, or filming with the appropriate menu
item or by using the toolbar.
D.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.51

Storing, Sending and Filming Data

Patient Browser

Storing data on an external medium

D.5

Your system is equipped with a CD recorder for writing data to


CD. A CD drive is available for reading data.
D.5

Inserting CD

D.5

Press the eject button on the CD drive.


Place the CD-R into the drawer.
Press the eject button on the drive again.

Storing data on CD

D.5

Select the data that you want to archive in the navigation or


content area of the Patient Browser.
Call up Transfer > Export To....
Select the data medium you require in the Export To dialog
box.

D.5

Click on Export to save the data on the selected data


medium.

The actual procedure for storage to CD-R, recording a CD-R,


starts automatically or can be triggered manually.
Page J.210, Automatic start of the write operation
Page J.211, Starting writing manually
D.5

0.0

D.52

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Storing, Sending and Filming Data

Sending data via the network

D.5

If your system is connected to a network, you can send patient


and examination data to other workstations via the network with
the Send To... function.
Page J.33, Sending data
D.5
Select the patient, study, series or the images in the navigation area or content area.
Standard address

D.5

D.5

Press the Send To Node 1 key on the symbol keypad.

Or
D.5

Call up Transfer > Send To Node 1 or Transfer > Send To


Node 2 to send the data to one of the preconfigured
addresses in the network.
Or
D.5

D.5

Click on one of the two icon buttons on the toolbar.


The data are sent to the selected address.

D.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.53

Storing, Sending and Filming Data

Selecting a destination

D.5

Patient Browser

Call up Transfer > Send To....


Or

D.5

D.5

Click on the appropriate button on the toolbar instead.


Select the network address(es) you require in the Send To
dialog box.

D.5

Click on Send to send the selected data to the required


address(es).

0.0

D.54

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Storing, Sending and Filming Data

Printing patient data from data


media

D.5

If a printer is connected to your system and you have stored


your patient data on local media (e.g. CD-R), you can print out
the data directly from there.
D.5

Select a drive in the navigation area.


Select the patient data you want to print out.
Showing print preview

D.5

Printing out the data list

D.5

To show the data in the print preview, select Patient > Print
Preview.
To print out the data list, select Patient > Print List.
The content and date of creation of the list appears in the
header of the list of patients. For all other data levels the content of the information area is also printed out.
The list is always printed in English.

Changing printer settings

D.5

To change any printer settings, select Patient > Print... and


make your settings in the dialog box that opens.
Click OK to confirm your changes.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.55

Storing, Sending and Filming Data

Patient Browser

Exporting images to the file


system

D.5

If you want to process images with other programs, you can


export them to a defined directory on your system hard disk in
certain image formats (Export To Off-line).
Page J.42, Exporting images to the file system
D.5

Select the images for export.


Call up Transfer > Export to Off-line....
Select the required directory in the Export to Off-line dialog
box.
Select the required image format (DICOM, TIFF, bitmap, or
JPEG).
D.5

Click on OK to save the selected images as individual files.

0.0

D.56

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Storing, Sending and Filming Data

Filming

D.5

You can use the Patient Browser to send single images or all
images of one or more patients, studies or series to the Filming
task card.
D.5

Transferring images to
Filming

Select the data in the navigation or content area.


D.5

Call up Patient > Copy to Film Sheet or click on the icon


button.
Or

D.5

Press the Copy to Film Sheet key on the symbol keypad.

Or

D.5

Click the Filming card to the top of the stack and double-click
on the entries that you want to film in the Patient Browser.
Or

D.5

Drag the selection to the Filming task card with the mouse
(drag & drop).
Just like loading the images into the Viewing task card you can
determine in which segment of the film sheet the images are to
appear.
Page D.35, Drag & drop
D.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.57

Storing, Sending and Filming Data

Patient Browser

With one of the above commands, all the selected images are
transferred to the Filming task card. Depending on whether
Auto Expose has been activated there, the images are
exposed on film immediately, as soon as a film sheet is full, or
they are first collected in a film job.
Chapter O.2, Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
D.5

Film preview

D.5

Call up Patient > Film Preview to view a preview showing


how the images will be filmed or printed.
Or

D.5

D.5

Click on the Film Preview icon button on the toolbar.

0.0

D.58

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Exposing images on film

Storing, Sending and Filming Data

D.5

You can expose or print a patients images that you have collected in a film job from the Patient Browser. To do that you do
not have to switch to the Filming task card first.
D.5
Call up Patient > Expose Film Task to transfer all images in
the film job to the camera or printer.
Or

D.5

D.5

Click on the icon button on the toolbar.


If you have transferred more than one patients images to the
Filming task card so that more than one film job exists, a dialog box is displayed. In this dialog box you can select the film
job you wish to expose on film or print on paper.
Page O.211, Exposing current patient
You cannot expose multiframe images directly from the
Patient Browser. You must first load them into the Viewing
task card.
Page G.713, Filming/printing images

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.59

Storing, Sending and Filming Data

Film Task Status

D.5

Patient Browser

You can obtain an overview of all film jobs that have already
been sent to a camera or printer and, for example, change the
sequence in which they are to be processed.
Page O.53, Viewing and manipulating film jobs
D.5

Call up Patient > Film Task Status to display the Film Task
Status dialog box with a list of all pending film jobs.
Or
D.5

D.5

Click on the icon button on the toolbar.

0.0

D.510

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

D.6

Maintaining your Data

D.6

If you maintain your data collection regularly you can keep your
data management clear and access times to the databases
short. This is an important contribution to the efficiency of daily
examinations.
D.6
You can obtain information about the work status of patient
and examination data and can edit it. In this way you can
record the processing stage that a patients images are at.
You can mark important examination data so that you will find
it more easily later on.
You can delete patient or examination data that has already
been stored from the local database.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.61

Maintaining your Data

Patient Browser

Defining the work status

D.6

The work status indicates the processing stage of patient and


examination data. This status is indicated as an abbreviation in
every list entry in the content area. Except read and verified
all work states will be set by the system.
D.6
Via the work status, you can define, for example, preconditions for storing and sending data.
Chapter J.7, Configuring Data Transfer
When Security is activated, you can define the work status
only if you are authorized to do so.

Abbreviations
(e.g. com/p/a/s/e/r/h)

The abbreviation consists of seven parts:


D.6

D.6

com/p/a/s/e/r/H - the first part provides information about the


progress of the study and whether the results have been
checked by the physician:
The study has been completed (com/...).
The images have already been read (rea/...).
The images and examination data have already been verified (ver/...).
com/p/a/s/e/H - the second part states whether
all (P/..),
a part of (.../p/...), or
no (.../ /...)
images of this patient, study, or series have been printed or
exposed on film.

0.0

D.62

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Maintaining your Data

com/p/a/s/e/r/H the third component shows the following


status:
(.../A/...) Data have been archived completely
(.../AC/...) Data have been archived and committed
(.../AV/...) Data have been archived and checked
(.../A?/...) Archiving and checking data is pending
(.../Af/...) Archiving and checking data has failed
(.../a/...) Part of the data has been archived
(.../ /...) No data have been archived
com/p/a/s/e/r/H by the fourth component you can see with
which scope and status the images of the patient, examination, or series have been sent via the network:
(.../S/...) Data have been sent completely
(.../SC/...) Data have been sent and committed
(.../SV/...) Data have been sent and checked
(.../S?/...) Sending and checking data is pending
(.../Sf/...) Sending and checking data has failed
(.../s/...) Part of the data has been sent
(.../ /...) No data have been sent
com/p/a/s/e/r/H the fifth component states whether
all (E/...),
part (e/...) or
none (/...)
of the images of this patient, examination, or series have
been exported to data medium.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.63

Maintaining your Data

Patient Browser

r/com/p/a/s/e/sr/H the sixth part indicates whether


all (R/...),
a part of (r/...) or
no ( /...)
images of this patient, study, or series have been imported
into your local database via the network (received).
com/p/a/s/e/r/H the seventh part indicates whether
changes have been made to this record, i.e. whether a history of changes has been created (.../H)
or not (.../).
Note that capital or lower case letters indicate that all (capital
letter) or some (lower case letter) of the data have been processed.

0.0

D.64

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Maintaining your Data

Entering the work status

D.6

Most of the entries in the work status abbreviation are made


automatically as soon as a data record has been processed
(e.g. an image has been exposed on film).
D.6
As a user, you can enter the following work statuses for studies
and series in your local database:
D.6
com/... (completed) study has been completed
rea/... (read) the images have been reviewed by the physician
ver/... (verified) the images have been approved
The completed flag is set automatically.

D.6

Call up Edit > Set State and select the work status that you
want to assign.
Or
D.6

D.6

com

rea

ver

Click on the relevant icon button on the toolbar.


Please note that automatic data transfer might be triggered
by assigning the completed status. If automatic data transfer has been defined at image level, you must trigger data
transfer manually.
Page J.72, Automatic data transfer
Assignment of a work status is not possible in the Scheduler.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.65

Maintaining your Data

Patient Browser

Marking examination data

D.6

With the Patient Browser you can mark individual items of


patient or examination data in order to find them and process
them more quickly later on.
D.6
With the Filter menu you can search for marked data specifically.
Page D.211, Filtering data

Marking items

D.6

Select one or more patients, studies, series, or images in the


navigation area or content area.
Call up Edit > Mark in the main menu of the Patient
Browser to mark the selected patient and examination data.
Or

D.6

D.6

Open a popup menu in the navigation or content area with


the right mouse button (or Shift + F10) and select Mark.

Or

D.6

Press the Mark key on the symbol keypad (Num 3).

0.0

D.66

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Display of marked data

Maintaining your Data

D.6

You can recognize marked patient and examination data in the


content area by the list entry M in the Mark Status column.
This entry appears on the patient level only. It does not appear
on the study or series level.

Unmarking items

D.6

Select the data which you want to unmark in the navigation


or content area.
Call up Edit > Unmark.
Or

D.6

Remove the mark with Unmark in the popup menu (right


mouse button or Shift + F10).

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.67

Maintaining your Data

Patient Browser

Procedure tracking with MPPS

D.6

After completion of an examination and all associated evaluations, you can document the work you have done in a performance report. This report can then be used, for example, for
invoicing the costs.
D.6
Your system creates the performance report during patient registration. During examination and postprocessing of the examination results, the report is updated.
D.6

Editing the performance documentation

D.6

Before you conclude your work on the examination by archiving,


check and add missing entries to the performance report.
D.6
Select the patient, the examination, or one of the associated
series or images from the Patient Browser.
Call up Patient > Show MPPS.
Or
D.6

D.6

Click on the button on the toolbar.

The window Modality Performed Procedure Step is displayed.


D.6

0.0

D.68

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Maintaining your Data

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.69

Maintaining your Data

MPPS status

Patient Browser

D.6

As soon as you select a series the MPPS status in the field Status is displayed. It consists of three parts (e.g. "COMPLETED"/
"HIS"/"S"):
D.6

The first part provides information about the processing status:


D.6

"IN PROGRESS" if MPPS is currently being processed,


"COMPLETED" if MPPS is completed,
"DISCONTINUED" if MPPS has been canceled,
"OPEN" (at the Patient/Study level) if at least one MPPS
has the status IN PROGRESS,
"DONE" (at the Patient/Study level) if no MPPS has the status IN PROGRESS,
" ", if no MPPS exists.

0.0

D.610

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Maintaining your Data

The second part describes the location at which the working


step has been planned:
D.6

"HIS", if the planned working step has been assigned via the
HIS/RIS system,
"LOC" if the working step has been planned locally,
" ", if you are on the Patient/Study level.
The third part provides information about the work status in a
message to the HIS/RIS-System:
D.6

"s", if creation of the performance report has been successfully sent to the HIS/RIS system,
"S" if COMPLETED/DISCONTINUED has been successfully
sent to the HIS/RIS system,
" " if you are on the Patient/Study level.

Checking data

D.6

Check the entries for the patient and examination in the


areas PATIENT, STUDY, and MPPS.

Correct the data and enter a comment, if necessary.


You cannot make entries in all fields.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.611

Maintaining your Data

Patient Browser

Displaying actions, billing

D.6

In the lower part of the window Modality Performed Procedure Step, the examination data are listed on three subtask
cards ordered by different aspects. You can select them by
clicking on their tab.
D.6
Examination steps

D.6

D.6

Cost information

Click the Actions card into the foreground to display a list of


the examination steps performed.

D.6

D.6

Click on the Billing card for a cost-related statement of the


services rendered and the materials consumed (film sheets).

0.0

D.612

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Maintaining your Data

Sending and concluding a report

D.6

If all data in the performance report are entered correctly, you


can close the report and therefore also the examination. If further working steps are planned, you can save the report temporarily and conclude it later.
D.6
Depending on operational requirements, you can pass the
report on to the HIS/RIS system.
D.6
Saving

D.6

D.6

Click on the Save button to save your changes to the report.


The examination has not yet been concluded.
D.6

Or
Concluding

D.6

D.6

D.6

Click on the Completed button to conclude the report and


the examination.
A message indicating this is sent to the HIS/RIS system, if connected.
D.6
You cannot make any further changes to the performance
report.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.613

Maintaining your Data

Patient Browser

Or
Exiting as discontinued

D.6

D.6

D.6

Click on the Discontinued button if you do not want to continue examination.


The report is also concluded and a message indicating that is
sent to the HIS/RIS system, if connected.
D.6
You cannot make any further changes to the performance
report.
Or

Sending to the HIS/RIS

D.6

D.6

D.6

Click on the Send button to mark the report as "in progress"


and pass it on the HIS/RIS system.

0.0

D.614

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Maintaining your Data

Closing the performance report without


saving

D.6

The Modality Performed Procedure Step window is automatically closed if you conclude, save, or send a report. If you have
only opened the report to view it, close it without changes. D.6
D.6

Click on Close window to exit the dialog box.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.615

Maintaining your Data

Patient Browser

Deleting data

D.6

If an examination has been completed and all the examination


results and images have been reviewed and commented, you
can store the data and then delete it from the database.
D.6
When Security is activated, you can delete data only if you
are authorized to do so.
D.6

C AU T I O N
Source of danger: The flags A (Archive) and S (Send)
respectively only indicate the receipt of the images. They do
not indicate successful storage in the intended archive. D.6
Consequence: The data may be lost if it is deleted by the
sender e.g., by an auto delete mechanism and if it cannot
be stored by the receiver.
D.6
Remedy: Before deleting data from your local database
ensure that this data is safely stored in the intended archive.
Always use 'storage commitment' if supported by sender
and receiver of data.
D.6
Please note

D.6

Page J.12, CAUTION on Storage Commitment

D.6

0.0

D.616

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Maintaining your Data

Select the data that you want to delete in the navigation area
or content area.
Call up Edit > Delete in the main menu of the Patient
Browser or open a popup menu and select Delete there.
Or
D.6

D.6

Click on the button on the toolbar.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.617

Maintaining your Data

Patient Browser

A dialog box is displayed in which you can again confirm that


you really want to delete the data you have selected.
D.6

Confirm the question with Yes to delete the selected patient


and examination data.
You can turn this confirmation dialog box off in Browser Configuration. After that, unprotected data will always be deleted
immediately without confirmation.
Page D.72, General settings
If the data have been delete-protected expressly or because
of their work status, a dialog box to that effect appears.
Page D.619, Deleting data with missing work status

0.0

D.618

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Deleting data with


missing work status

Maintaining your Data

D.6

If you attempt to delete data for which the work status does not
allow deletion, a message box is displayed.
D.6

In this message box you can see why you cannot delete the
selected data. For example, because it is first necessary to perform a number of processing steps before it can be deleted. D.6
In the Browser Configuration you can define in which work
status you are allowed to delete data.
Page D.72, General settings

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.619

Maintaining your Data

Patient Browser

D.6

Click on Yes to delete the data record stated in the message


box despite the missing states.
Or

D.6

D.6

Click on Yes to All if you have selected more than one data
record for deletion and you want to delete all the records
regardless of their work status.
Or

D.6

Click on No in order not to delete the data record stated in


the message box.
Or

D.6

D.6

D.6

Click on Cancel to cancel deletion.

0.0

D.620

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Protecting data from


deletion

Maintaining your Data

D.6

You can protect patient and examination data from accidental


deletion.
D.6

Select the data that you want to protect against deletion in


the navigation or content area.
Call up Edit > Protect in the main menu of the Patient
Browser.
Or

D.6

Click on the icon button on the toolbar.


D.6

Or

D.6

Select Protect in the popup menu (right mouse button or


Shift + F10).
You can now no longer simply delete the selected data. Delete
protection always includes all lower data levels and the related
entries of the higher data levels. For example, if you protect a
study entry you can no longer delete the individual images of
that study nor the patient entry.
D.6
Data that you have assigned delete protection to, are protected from both moving and correction.
Page D.410, Moving data
Page D.42, Correcting patient or examination data

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.621

Maintaining your Data

Display of deleteprotected data

Patient Browser

D.6

Patient and examination data that are assigned delete protection can be identified by the list entry Prot in the Mark Status
column in the content area. This entry appears on the patient
level only. It does not appear on the study or series level.
D.6

Removing delete
protection

D.6

If you want to correct, move, or delete data without a message


box being displayed, you must remove the delete protection
again.
D.6

Call up Edit > Remove Protection in the main menu or


Remove Protection in the popup menu to remove the delete
protection.
Or

D.6

Click on the icon button in the toolbar.

0.0

D.622

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Clear Scheduler

Maintaining your Data

D.6

With Clear Scheduler you can determine which entries of the


Scheduler are to be deleted.
D.6
Call up Edit > Clear Scheduler in the menu of the Patient
Browser.
The dialog box Clear Scheduler is displayed.

D.6

Activate the relevant checkbox to select the entries to be


deleted:
all procedure steps already performed
all procedure steps not scheduled for your site
all procedure steps not scheduled for your modality
all procedure steps not scheduled for a given day

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.623

Maintaining your Data

Patient Browser

Confirm your selection with OK to save your settings and to


delete the relevant procedure steps.
The procedure steps including the corresponding actions are
deleted. The associated methods and patients are also deleted
unless further procedure steps exist.
D.6
Or
D.6

D.6

Click Cancel to dismiss the operation.


You can also have the scheduler cleared automatically after
an update via RIS, i.e., all Worklist items that are not sent by
the RIS will be removed from your Local Database.
Contact your service technician for the configuration of this
functionality.

0.0

D.624

Operator Manual

Configuring the Patient


Browser

CHAPTER

D.7

D.7

With the Browser Configuration dialog box you can adapt the
Patient Browser to your method of working.
D.7
You can change the following settings:

D.7

General settings such as the layout of the toolbar and the display of the work status.
The hierarchical view of the information levels (patient, study,
series, image) in the navigation and content area.
The display of the individual information levels (study, series,
image) in the content area.
Only research customers are allowed to use the selection of
syngo programmed user-defined applications in the Private
Applications menu.

D.7

Call up Options > Configure Browser... in the menu bar of


the Patient Browser.
The Browser Configuration window with the three tab cards
General, Tree View and Single View is displayed.
D.7
In the Basics part of this manual you can read how to call up
and exit configuration windows, save changes, or reset settings back to the as-delivered state.
Chapter A.3, Configuring the User Interface

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.71

Configuring the Patient Browser

General settings

Patient Browser

D.7

On the General tab card you can configure the toolbar of the
Patient Browser, define which work status is displayed for the
examination data, and set the influence of the work status on
delete permission.
D.7
Click the General tab card into the foreground to activate this
card.

0.0

D.72

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Configuring the Patient Browser

Toolbar

D.7

You can place buttons for the functions of the Patient Browser
that you require frequently on the toolbar and remove rarelyused functions.
D.7
In a later software version you can also configure functions of
other applications in the Patient Browser toolbar by using
the application selection list (dimmed in this version).

Select an action that you want to place as an icon button on


the toolbar from the Tool Pool.
D.7

Click on the down arrow to place the button on the toolbar.


Repeat this step until the toolbar contains all the buttons you
require.

If you want to remove an icon button from the toolbar, select


the corresponding action on the toolbar.
D.7

Click on the up arrow to remove the button from the toolbar.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.73

Configuring the Patient Browser

Patient Browser

Work status

D.7

In the middle part of the General tab card you can define which
work status is displayed in the content area for the examination
data and in which processing state data is released for deletion.D.7
Display of work status

D.7

Select the check box for a work status if you want this work
status to be displayed in the content area of the Patient
Browser.
You will find information about the work status on
Page D.62, Defining the work status
Delete authorization

D.7

Select the check box of a work status. Data without this status cannot be deleted without explicit confirmation in a message box.

0.0

D.74

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Configuring the Patient Browser

Delete confirmation

D.7

The default setting is to have your system display a confirmation


window before each deletion even if the data concerned have
already reached the work status required for deletion. This further reduces the risk of data being deleted accidentally. You can
activate and deactivate this confirmation in the configuration.
D.7

D.7

Click on the Confirm Deletion check box to have a confirmation box displayed every time before data is deleted.
A check mark in the check box shows that deletion confirmation
is activated.
D.7
Or

D.7

Deselect the check box to suppress the confirmation for


deletion.
D.7

C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Deletion confirmation deactivated.

D.7

Consequence: Loss of data possible.

D.7

Remedy: Do not deactivate deletion confirmation.

D.7

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.75

Configuring the Patient Browser

Patient Browser

Hierarchical view in the navigation


and content area

D.7

On the Tree View tab card you can define what information is
listed in the content area of the Patient Browser in the hierarchy levels (e.g. patient). You can also hide hierarchy levels in
the navigation and content areas. You can also configure the
icon display of series and images.
D.7

Click the Tree View tab card into the foreground.


Selecting a database

D.7

Select Scheduler to define the display of preregistered


patient data in the Patient Browser.
Or

D.7

Pick Database from the selection list of databases to configure the local database view.
The names and information that appear on the card Tree
View for the different data levels differ depending on the database that you have called up (e.g. Study in the local database
corresponds to Procedure in the scheduler).

0.0

D.76

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Selecting a data level

Configuring the Patient Browser

D.7

Select the hierarchy level Patient, Procedure or Procedure


Step in the scheduler.
Or

D.7

Select the hierarchy level Patient, Study, Series or Instance


in the local database
The Tree View tab card differs slightly depending on the hierarchy level selected. On the Series level the Modality selection list is also displayed. On the Instance level the selection
list Data Type appears instead.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.77

Configuring the Patient Browser

Example: Data level


Procedure Step /
Scheduler

Patient Browser

D.7

0.0

D.78

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Configuring the Patient Browser

Example: Data level Series/


Local database
D.7

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.79

Configuring the Patient Browser

Patient Browser

List entries

D.7

You can make the content area of the Patient Browser clearer
by having your own selection of information listed.
D.7

Adding list entries

D.7

In the Heading Pool select which entries you want to have


displayed in the content area.
Select the entries in the sequence in which you want to have
them displayed.

D.7

Click on the down arrow to place the entry in the Heading


Settings for the table in the content area.
Repeat this step until the table contains all the required
entries in the content area.
If an entry is dimmed in the Heading Pool it is already contained in the Heading Settings and vice versa.

0.0

D.710

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Modality-specific entries

Configuring the Patient Browser

D.7

In series (local database), the information displayed in the content area is modality dependent. Depending on the modality
you can also define specific entries in the content area.
D.7

Select a modality on the data level Series if you want to create list entries in the content area.
Or

D.7

Select Default to define the information to be displayed with


series of different modalities, or for which no modal-specific
settings can be made.

D.7

Transfer the required list entries from the Heading Pool to


the Heading Settings.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.711

Configuring the Patient Browser

Data type specific entries

D.7

Patient Browser

The list display of images in the content area depends on the


data type. You can select the list entries specifically for each
data type from the relevant Heading Pool.
D.7

Select a data type on the Instance data level if you want to


create list entries in the content area specifically for the
images of that data type.
Or

D.7

Select Default to define which information is to be displayed


in the content area for images of different data types, or for
which no data type specific settings can be made.
Transfer the required list entries from the Heading Pool to
the Heading Settings.

0.0

D.712

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Removing list entries

Configuring the Patient Browser

D.7

Select an entry in the Heading Settings if you want to


remove it from the table.

D.7

Click on the up arrow to remove the entry from the table in


the content area.

Hiding data levels

D.7

You can define which of the hierarchy levels, study, series, or


instance you want displayed in the navigation and content area.D.7
Click on the Hide check box to hide this data level.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.713

Configuring the Patient Browser

Patient Browser

List display / image stamp display

D.7

For display of series and images in the content area you can
choose between display as a list and display as image stamps.
You can label the image stamps with up to two entries. To
assign these entries proceed exactly as for definition of the list
entries in the content area.
Page D.710, List entries
D.7

Click on the Icon Configuration option button.


Select the entries in the Heading Pool with which you want
to label the entries for series and images and click on the
down arrow. The entries now appear in the Icon Labels box.

0.0

D.714

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Configuring the Patient Browser

Single View of the content area

D.7

In the card Single View, define to which hierarchy level data are
to be displayed if the navigation area is hidden. Each data entry
is displayed in exactly one line.
D.7
Click the Single View tab card into the foreground and select
the database you want to configure.
Page D.76, Selecting a database

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.715

Configuring the Patient Browser

Setting the data level

D.7

Patient Browser

In the single view, the content area always shows the same data
level.
D.7
Select the data level that you want to have displayed when
switching from the Tree View to the Single View in the content area.
It depends on the data level that you have set for the single view
of the content area what information can be displayed about the
list entries. For example, if you have set the Series level to be
displayed, you can have information from the levels patient,
study, and series displayed in the list of series.
D.7

Combining list entries

D.7

You can configure the single view of the content area in a similar
way as the hierarchical view of the navigation and content area.
Page D.76, Hierarchical view in the navigation and content
area
D.7
You can combine list entries of different information levels by
varying the data level for the pool in the Heading Pool from
which you then select the required entries.
D.7
Define the data level in the selection list from which you want
to take list entries for the content area in the Heading Pool.

0.0

D.716

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Configuring the Patient Browser

The Heading Pool now contains all the possible list entries
from the selected information level.
D.7

Click on a list entry in the Heading Pool and move it into the
Heading Settings with the arrow down key or remove a list
entry from the Heading Settings with the arrow up key.
Now select another Level, if necessary, to place list entries
of another data level from the Heading Pool into the Heading Settings.
For the Series data level, you can set up modality- or data
type-specific list entries for the content area.
Page D.711, Modality-specific entries
Page D.712, Data type specific entries

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.717

Configuring the Patient Browser

Configuring user-defined
applications

Patient Browser

D.7

Only research customers are allowed to use the selection of


syngo MR programmed user-defined applications in the Private Applications menu.
D.7

0.0

D.718

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

D.8

Reporting

D.8

Results of evaluation (images, plots, etc.) can be stored as


structured reports (SR) in DICOM format.
D.8

Purpose

D.8

To be able to edit and transmit the reports.


D.8

Content of the report

D.8

The following information can be recorded in a report:

D.8

Data of hospital or practice (name, address, ...)


Demographic patient data
Quantitative results of the examination
(wall motion scoring)
Qualitative results of the examination
Summary and conclusions consisting of
individual diagnoses, measured values, and medical codes
Recommendations for further diagnosis or therapy
Links to medical images or graphics
Links to curve plots
You are able to select, edit, and print reports on the Argus task
card or in the Patient Browser. Additionally, the Patient
Browser sends reports via the network.
D.8
D.8

N O TE
In this version of syngo MR, this functionality is only
available for Argus reporting.

D.8

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.81

Reporting

Identification of a report in
the Patient Browser
D.8

Patient Browser

Reports in the Patient Browser are stored on the same level as


the measurement or evaluation results.
D.8

Reports are identified in the Patient Browser as follows:

D.8

Report icon in the directory structure.


D.8

Report icon in the content area (report selected).


D.8

Report icon in the content area (study selected).

D.8

0.0

D.82

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Reporting

Basics

D.8

The reports are encoded according to the DICOM standard.


The DICOM standard provides predefined structures that limit
you in structuring reports. It is therefore quite unlike writing a
report in a regular text editor.
D.8
The predefined report structure has the following advantages: D.8
Each item of information is classified and integrated to a hierarchical structure.
The DICOM structure facilitates subsequent evaluation of
the data from the report.
Use of the standard enables communication with the DICOM
world. Sharing data is easy. Reports from other systems and
applications can be displayed and evaluated in syngo MR.
Similarly, reports from syngo MR can be used on other systems.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.83

Reporting

Patient Browser

Layout
Content items

D.8

D.8

Each item of information in a report is a "content item"

D.8

A content item comprises a "name" and a "value".

D.8

The name is always a code.

D.8

There are various types of values:


D.8
Free text
Code
Numeric value with unit
Person's name, date, time
Reference to a DICOM object (image, diagram, or unformatted text)
Relationship between
content items

D.8

Unless content items are suitably linked, they are of little use.
For this reason a DICOM report provides information items in a
hierarchical structure.
D.8
The "document title" item is at the top of the hierarchy. Below it,
the remaining items of information can be placed in different
relationships to each other in a complex tree structure.
D.8
For example, the following relationships between content items
of a report are possible:
D.8
Configuration within the hierarchy
Property of a higher-level information item
Conclusions from higher-level information items
Reference for a higher-level information item

0.0

D.84

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Codes in general

Reporting

D.8

The codes for report contents are frequently automatically


assigned by the system. Usually they cannot be changed by the
user.
D.8
It is only possible to set or define new diagnostic codes for a single report.
Page D.815, Setting diagnostic codes
D.8

Diagnostic codes

D.8

Coded texts are usually integrated into reports to facilitate


searches and evaluations. These are obtained from special dictionaries of encode scheme designators.
D.8
A DICOM code entry consists of three parts:
code value,
e.g. N11.1
code scheme designator,
e.g. I9 or UCUM
code meaning,
e.g. chronic obstructive pyelonephritis

D.8

syngo MR allows you to select a standard code scheme designator for reporting/diagnostics or for defining your own code
scheme designator.
D.8

Examples of diagnostic encoding scheme designators:

D.8

SNOMED ("SNM3" and "SRT")


ACR Index for Radiological Diagnosis ("ACR")
ICD9 and ICD10 ("I9" and "I10")
ICD9-CM and ICD10-PCS ("I9C" and "I10P")

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.85

Reporting

Patient Browser

Creating a report

D.8

Reports can be created from the Argus task card. They are
stored in the local database.
D.8
Medical images are linked to the report as references.

D.8

For more information about creating reports in Argus, refer to


the Argus Operator Manual.
Page 67, Creating a report
D.8

0.0

D.86

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Reporting

Editing a report

D.8

As soon as data acquisition in Argus has been completed, you


can edit a report at any time.
D.8
In the report displayed, you can:

D.8

set the completion status


set the verification status
record the report author
create or edit diagnostics and comments
enter the diagnostic code
delete parts of the report

The edited report can be stored. The changes in the current


report may either be stored in the same report or in a new report
depending on the completion status set.
D.8
D.8

N OT E
Regularly save changes to a report during editing. Make
sure that you have saved your changes before you log off.
The dialog box will be closed and unsaved changes will be
lost.
D.8

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.87

Reporting

Patient Browser

Opening a report

D.8

Open the report in the Patient Browser.

D.8

Select the report in the Patient Browser


Select Applications > Report Open from the main menu.
Or

D.8

Double-click the report in the Patient Browser


The Report Editor window opens:

D.8

Legend

D.8

(1) Data from the patient ID


(2) Report header:
Report author
(3) Information units:
Individual diagnoses and diagnostic code
(4) Toolbar of the window.

0.0

D.88

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Reporting

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.89

Reporting

Patient Browser

Navigating in the report

D.8

Since the report is one long document without running page


numbers, it includes a navigation function allowing you to go
directly to one of the main sections of the report. You can also
return directly to the beginning from anywhere in the report.
D.8

Going directly to
information items

D.8

The line below the report heading lists the information items it
contains. The names of the items listed are directly linked to the
information item in the report.
D.8

Click the name of an information item, e.g. Ventricular Function Analysis.


The report display jumps to that item.
D.8

Alternatively, you can go to a position in the report (information item) by scrolling via the scroll bar or by paging via the
keyboard.

0.0

D.810

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Returning to the beginning


of the report
D.8

Reporting

A link takes you from the part of the report displayed directly
back to the beginning of the report.
D.8

This link takes the form of an arrow above a large information


item. It is linked directly with the beginning of the report.
D.8
Click this arrow.
The report display now jumps back to the beginning.

D.8

Alternatively, you can return to the beginning of the report by


scrolling via the scroll bar or paging via the keyboard.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.811

Reporting

Patient Browser

Editing a report
The opened report is automatically displayed in edit mode.

D.8

In the report displayed, you can:

D.8

Setting the completion


status

D.8

D.8

set the completion status


set the verification status
record the report author
create or edit diagnostics and comments
enter the diagnostic code
delete parts of the report

By selecting a Completion Status you can indicate the


progress of the report. The following statuses are available: D.8
Completed
Partial

Set the status in the Completion Status selection list.

0.0

D.812

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Reporting

D.8

N OT E
Once a report has been assigned the Complete status, it
has to be saved as a new report. It is no longer possible to
save changes to the existing report.
D.8

D.8

Setting the verification


status

D.8

The verification status is set in the same way as the completion


flag. The following options are available:
D.8
Unverified
Verified

Set the status in the Verification Status selection list.


D.8

N OT E
The verification status is for internal information only. It is
not of legal consequence.
D.8

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.813

Reporting

Recording the report


author's name

Patient Browser

The author has to be entered in the Report created by field. D.8


D.8

Enter your name in the Report created by field.

Making and editing


diagnostics and commentsD.8

Some parts of the report contain input fields for recording additional comments.
D.8
Empty text input fields are not displayed in full. Instead, a plus
sign is shown in front of the name of the input field. To display
the input field, you only need to click the plus switch.
Click the relevant comment field in the selected part of the
report.

Enter a new comment or overwrite the existing comment.

0.0

D.814

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Setting diagnostic
codes

Reporting

D.8

The diagnostic codes are organized in coding schemes in the


DICOM format. syngo MR does not provide predefined
schemes. The diagnostic encoding scheme must therefore be
entered and managed in the Configuration by the diagnosing
physician or the hospital.
Page D.836, Create and edit diagnostic encoding schemesD.8
In addition to entering schemes with various diagnostic codes,
you are able to predefine a general scheme for reporting in the
Configuration. For this reason you only need to pick the code
from a selection in the report.
D.8
D.8

N OT E
A diagnostic encoding scheme must be preset in the report
configuration before a report is edited for the first time. This
enables you to define the appropriate code either by
selecting it or entering it manually.
Page D.836, Create and edit diagnostic encoding
schemes
D.8

Select the diagnostic code from the Conclusion list.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.815

Reporting

Patient Browser

The diagnostic code is now displayed in the selection list. The


abbreviation for the scheme is shown at the right end of the list. D.8

If a diagnostic code does not include the scheme set, enter the
code manually in the Add Codes line.
D.8
Select the empty item from the Conclusion selection list.

Enter the diagnostic code and the description of the code


into the two fields of the Add Codes line.

0.0

D.816

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Reporting

D.8

N OT E
When the report is saved, the manually entered diagnostic
code is assigned to the code scheme that you preset in the
Configuration. The code can now be edited again in the
configuration.
D.8

D.8

Enlarged display of
images and tables

The default display shows images and tables with reduced size. D.8
D.8

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.817

Reporting

Patient Browser

A dialog box is provided for viewing the contents of the report in


their original size.
D.8
Click this button.
A dialog box opens showing the image or the table in its original
D.8
size.

0.0

D.818

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Delete parts of the report

Reporting

D.8

You can delete unnecessary parts of the report at any time.


Based on the hierarchical structure of the information items not
only the main information item is deleted but all dependent
lower-level items as well. Lower-level information items are
indented to the right in the report.
D.8
Before deleting, you have to first select the information item in
the report.
D.8
It is not possible to select more than one item.
Click the tab of the information item to be deleted.
Or

D.8

Click images, diagrams, or tables.


Or

D.8

Click the minus sign of a text field.


The item is shown with a blue border. An X appears in the upper
left edge of the marker.
D.8

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.819

Reporting

Patient Browser

You can undo the selection by clicking it again or by clicking


another item. Example:

Click the X above the selected part.


Or

D.8

Press the Del key on your keyboard.


The content of the information item and all lower-level information items are deleted from the report.
D.8

You can undo the deletion with the Reset button.

0.0

D.820

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

All changes in the


report are undone

Reporting

D.8

You can undo all changes made in the report since it was last
saved.
D.8

Click the Reset button.


The entries and changes made in the report are undone.

D.8

You can only undo all changes at once; it is not possible to


undo changes step-by-step.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.821

Reporting

Patient Browser

Saving a report

D.8

You can save changes in a report at any time. However, the way
the report is saved depends on its completion status. In case of
a partial completion status, changes are saved in the current
report.
D.8
However you had set the completion status to Completed or
Verified the last time you saved, a new version of the report will
automatically be stored with the new version number.
D.8
Additionally, a new version of the report is created, if the report
in the database is marked with one of the following flags:
D.8

Printed
Archived
Archived + Verified
Archived + Committed
Sent
Sent + Committed
Exported
Received

The existing report is not changed if one of these flags is set.


After you have made your changes, you can save the report.
D.8

Click the Save button.

0.0

D.822

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Reporting

The images contained in the report are not saved. Instead,


references to the DICOM images are saved.
D.8

N OT E
Save the changed report before printing it out. If you
subsequently close the print preview without saving it in edit
mode, all changes to the report are lost.
D.8

D.8

Closing the edit window

D.8

Click the Close button.


Or

D.8

Click the X icon in the top right corner of the window.


The Report - Editor window is closed; display of the entire
report is ended as well. Unsaved changes to the report are lost. D.8

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.823

Reporting

Patient Browser

Printing a report

D.8

Before you print a report, you can look at the contents of the
report again in the print preview.
D.8
If you want to make changes to the report, you can go back to
the edit window from the print preview at any time.
Page D.826, Close the print preview
D.8

Opening the print preview

D.8

The print preview is opened from the edit window.

D.8

D.8

N OT E
Print mode is only available to users who have activated a
print privilege for the report in their user account.
D.8
If you do not have a print privilege, the Print Mode button is
deactivated.
D.8

Click the Print Mode button in the edit window.


The current report is displayed in the print preview mode. You
cannot edit the report in this mode.
D.8

0.0

D.824

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Reporting

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.825

Reporting

Patient Browser

Close the print preview

D.8

There are two ways of closing the print preview:

D.8

Switch back to edit mode to continue editing the report.


Close the window and with it the entire report.
Switching to edit mode

D.8

If you do not want to print out the report or want to make


changes to the report before printing, you can return to the edit
mode from the print mode.
D.8

Click the Edit Mode button in the print preview.


In the dialog box, the report is now displayed again in the edit
mode.
D.8

0.0

D.826

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Closing the window

Reporting

D.8

Click the Close button.


Or

D.8

Click the X icon in the top right corner of the window.


The print preview is closed, which also closes the display of the
entire report. Unsaved changes to the report are lost.
D.8

Starting to print

D.8

You can only start printing a report from the print preview (print
mode).
D.8
Click the Print button.
A print dialog box opens. You can make the necessary print settings here.
D.8

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.827

Reporting

Patient Browser

D.8

Set the required printer.


Define the print range.
Set the number of copies you require.
Click the Print button to start printing.
With the Cancel button, you can reject the settings and close
the dialog box.

0.0

D.828

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Reporting

Sending a report

D.8

If your system is connected to a network, you can send reports


of a patient to other workstations via the network with the function Send To....
Page J.33, Sending data
D.8
Reports are sent in "Secondary Capture" DICOM format. You
will find more detailed information in the DICOM conformance
statement.
D.8

N OT E
Referenced images are not automatically sent with the
report. They must be sent separately.

D.8

D.8

N OT E
After a report has been sent, any subsequent changes to it
can only be saved as a new report. It is no longer possible
to save changes to the sent report.
D.8

Select the report in the Patient Browser

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.829

Reporting

Standard address

Patient Browser

D.8

Press the Send to node 1 key on the symbol keypad.

Or

D.8

Select Transfer > Send to node 1 or Transfer > Send to


node 2.
The data are sent to one of the preconfigured addresses in the
network.
D.8
Or
D.8

D.8

Click one of the two buttons on the toolbar.


The report is sent to the selected address.
D.8

Selecting a destination

D.8

Select Transfer > Send....


Or

D.8

Click the appropriate button on the tool bar.


The Send To dialog box opens.

D.8

Select the network address(es) here.


D.8

Click Send to send the report to the address(es).

0.0

D.830

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Reporting

Configuration settings for the report

D.8

You can make various settings for the report in a configuration


dialog box.
D.8
Use the two subtask cards in the configuration dialog box where
you can enter presets for creating reports.
D.8
General settings
for setting the report language and for inserting your own
logo in the report.
Encode scheme designators
for creating diagnostic encoding catalogs that can then be
set in the report.

Proposal for various configuration settings:

D.8

Open the configuration dialog box


Enter general settings
Create and edit diagnostic encoding schemes
Save and close the configuration settings

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.831

Reporting

Patient Browser

Opening a configuration

D.8

You can select the configuration of the reports from the Applications menu in the Patient Browser.
D.8
Select Applications > Report Tools > Configuration from
the main menu of the Patient Browser.
The Report Configuration dialog box opens:

D.8

0.0

D.832

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Reporting

Enter general settings

D.8

The general settings include the report language and the


optional insertion of your own logo into the report.
D.8

Setting the report


language

D.8

You are able to predefine the language used in the report on the
General Settings subtask card. This configuration setting
applies to all subsequent new reports.
D.8

Click the General Settings subtask card into the foreground,


if necessary.
You can now predefine the language used for the report via a
selection list.
D.8
Select the language from the Report Language selection
list.

D.8

N OT E
The language set only applies to the reports and may differ
from the language set on the system.
D.8

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.833

Reporting

Installing a user logo

Patient Browser

D.8

You can insert your own user logo into the report from the CDROM or diskette drive of your station.
D.8
Before the system can use your logo, the following requirements have to be met:
D.8
the logo has to be stored in GIF format.
the name of the logo has to be Logo.gif.
To install the logo, proceed as follows:

D.8

Save the logo on a suitable data medium (CD or diskette).


Insert this data medium into the appropriate drive on your
station.

Now click on either the Install Logo from CD or Install Logo


from Floppy button, depending on the data medium used.

0.0

D.834

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Reporting

The logo is now imported and will be used in all reports stored
after successful completion of the automatic installation.
D.8
If installation is successful, this message is displayed:

D.8

If installation was not successful, a message to this effect will


appear.
D.8

If necessary, save the settings prior to performing additional


changes.
Page D.842, Save and close configuration settings

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.835

Reporting

Patient Browser

Create and edit diagnostic encoding


schemes

D.8

You can set the encoding scheme designators in the reports in


the Report - Configuration dialog box via the Coding
Schemes subtask card. You can also set up complete encoding
schemes with the relevant diagnostic codes.
D.8
Click the Coding Schemes subtask card on the Report Configuration dialog box into foreground.

0.0

D.836

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Reporting

Configuration options:

D.8

Predefining the encoding scheme


Changing or creating a new diagnostic code
Creating a new encoding scheme
Predefining the encoding
scheme

D.8

As a rule, predefine an encoding scheme in the configuration


before editing a report in the Patient Browser for the first time.
Otherwise, it is not possible to assign a diagnostic code in the
report.
D.8
The first time configuration is called, no encoding schemes are
defined:
D.8

Select the required catalog from the Coding Schemes


selection list.
The coding schemes ICD-9 and ICD-10 empty (without
codes) are already created on your system by default.

You can create further encoding schemes as required.


Page D.841, Creating a new encoding scheme

D.8

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.837

Reporting

Changing or creating a
new diagnostic code

Patient Browser

D.8

A code catalog may contain different diagnostic codes. This


enables you to select the diagnostic codes quickly in the report.
Page D.815, Setting diagnostic codes
D.8
Select the required code scheme.
Click the Edit Codes button.
The text editor for the codes of the active encoding scheme
D.8
opens:

This dialog box provides you with explanations and an example


for editing diagnostic codes. Lines preceded by "#" are comment lines.
D.8

0.0

D.838

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Reporting

In all other lines, you can define the codes you require, one
code per line. Example of code entry:
D.8
N11.1:chronic obstructive pyelonephritis

D.8

The complete code consists of the code value (N11.1) followed


by a colon and a short description of the code (chronic
obstructive pyelonephritis).
D.8
Enter the required code line by line.
You also define how the diagnostic code should appear in the
D.8
report. The following display formats are possible:
D.8

Display format

Identifier

Code value and code description, e.g.


N11.1:chronic obstructive pyelonephritis

Code value only, e.g.


N11.1

Code description only, e.g.


chronic obstructive pyelonephritis

The identifier for the display format is changed in the line DisplayFormat =.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.839

Reporting

Patient Browser

Example: Entering a diagnostic code and a display identifier:D.8

To activate the settings made in the text editor, you have to save
them in the text editor (not to be confused with the Report
Configuration dialog box).
D.8
Open File > Save in the text editor.
After that, you can close the text editor.

D.8

Click the X icon in the top right corner of the window.

0.0

D.840

Operator Manual

Patient Browser

Creating a new encoding


scheme

Reporting

D.8
D.8

Click the Add Scheme button.


These additional edit boxes are displayed:

D.8

Enter a name for the encoding scheme in the Scheme field.


Enter a name for the version number in the Version field.
Enter a short description for the encoding scheme in the
Description field.
Now you can define further codes in a new encoding scheme,
as required.
D.8
Click the Add Codes button.
Enter the code in the text editor of the new scheme.
Page D.838, Changing or creating a new diagnostic code

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

D.841

Reporting

Patient Browser

Save and close configuration settings

D.8

Save the configuration setting made in the reports, if you want


to apply them later.
D.8
Click the Save button.
The settings are saved and the Report Configuration dialog
box remains open.
D.8

You may then close the Report Configuration dialog box.

D.8

Click the Close button.


If you close the dialog box without saving first, you will lose all
changes made in the dialog box.

0.0

D.842

Operator Manual

PART

Patient Registration

E.0

E.1 Introduction
Calling up Patient Registration ....................................... E.13
The Patient Registration window ................................... E.14

E.2 Registering a New Patient


Entries in the PATIENT area .......................................... E.23
Entering personal details of a new patient ................. E.23
Entering additional information .................................. E.26
Displaying detailed information .................................. E.28
Entering admission data .............................................. E.211
Entering examination data ........................................... E.212
Entering one study ................................................... E.212
Entering the patient position .................................... E.215
Administration numbers and comment .................... E.216
Entering institution data ............................................... E.217
Completing data entry .................................................. E.218
Assigning Patient Group .......................................... E.219
Registering a patient for the examination ................ E.220
Preregistering a patient ........................................... E.224
Cancelling patient registration ................................. E.225

E.3 Registering a Known Patient


Performing an HIS/RIS query ........................................ E.32
Automatic query ......................................................... E.32
Manual query ............................................................. E.32
Searching in the Patient Registration window ................ E.34
Entering the patient name/ID ..................................... E.34
Starting a search ....................................................... E.36
Cancelling a search ................................................... E.36
Search list .................................................................. E.37
0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E1

Contents

Patient Registration

Accepting patient data................................................ E.38


Searching in the Patient Browser ................................. E.310
Completing your entries ............................................... E.313
Searching and registering in the HIS/RIS system ........ E.315
Calling up a patient worklist query ........................... E.316
Search list of the worklist query ............................... E.319
Accepting patient data.............................................. E.320

E.4 Configuring Patient Registration


Defining entries in the selection list ................................ E.42
Possible selection lists ............................................... E.43
Creating entries .......................................................... E.43
Default entries ............................................................ E.44
Configuring the patient search ....................................... E.45
Databases .................................................................. E.46
Limiting the number of patients found ........................ E.47
Display of the search list ............................................ E.48
Configuring the HIS/RIS system ..................................... E.49
Display expiry date of license................................... E.410
Settings for worklist update ...................................... E.411
Settings for patient RIS query .................................. E.413

0.0

E2

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

E.1

Introduction

E.1

Before you can examine a patient with your system, you must
register him or her.
E.1
Registration means that you give your system all the information about a patient that it requires for an examination.
E.1
Depending on how registrations are organized in your hospital
and how much time you have for registration, you can choose
between different patient registration procedures.
E.1

Registration

E.1

However, if you want to register a patient for an examination,


then you first enter his or her patient data or call it up from the
database and then examine the patient.
E.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.11

Introduction

Preregistration

Patient Registration

E.1

If you want to prepare the system to examine a patient at a later


point in time, then you can preregister the patient.
For example, you can enter the data in the morning for all the
patients to be examined during the day. When you want to begin
an examination, simply call up this data and edit it, if necessary.
This saves time during the examinations.
E.1

HIS/RIS query

E.1

If your system is linked to, and licensed and registered for an


HIS/RIS system (hospital and radiology information system),
you can call up data for the patient to be examined.
E.1

Security - Privileges

E.1

InvokeRegistration allows to open the registration form and


perform registration.
E.1

0.0

E.12

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Introduction

Calling up Patient Registration

E.1

When Security is activated, you can register a patient only if you


are authorized to do so.
E.1
You can call up patient registration both in the Patient menu,
and by using icon buttons on various task cards and from the
Patient Browser. You can choose between emergency registration and normal registration.
E.1
Patient menu

E.1

E.1

Buttons

Call up Patient > Register....


The Patient Registration window is then displayed.

E.1

Or

E.1

E.1

E.1

Click on the icon button on the task cards or on the toolbar of


the Patient Browser.
Or

Symbol keypad

E.1

E.1

E.1

Press the Patient Register key on the symbol keypad.


E.1

NOTE
The button Patient Browser may not function if a dialog box
is open and active.
E.1
Click on the image area to deactivate the dialog box, or
close the dialog box.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.13

Introduction

Patient Registration

The Patient Registration window

E.1

The Patient Registration window is subdivided into four areas


into which you can enter the following data:
E.1
(1) Personal data of the patient (PATIENT)
(2) Referral data (HOSPITAL)
(3) Study-specific data (PROCEDURE)
(4) Institution data (INSTITUTION)

0.0

E.14

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Personal data of
the patient

Introduction

E.1

In the PATIENT area, you can enter all the personal details and
any additional information about the patient.
E.1
.

NOTE
Patient name, patient ID, date of birth and sex
are used for unique identification of a patient in the
databases or storage media.

E.1

E.1

Referral data

E.1

In the HOSPITAL area, you can enter the referring physician,


the preliminary diagnosis, preliminary admission ID, and the
hospital ward in which the patient is located.
E.1

Study-specific data

E.1

In the PROCEDURE area, you can enter information about the


planned examination, e.g. the patient position and the examination to be conducted.
E.1

Institution data

E.1

In the input fields of the INSTITUTION area, you can register


the name of your hospital or practice and the names of your
examinations personnel.
E.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.15

Introduction

Patient Registration

0.0

E.16

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

E.2

Registering a New Patient

E.2

Your system does not yet contain data for a patient who has not
yet been examined in your hospital or practice.
Information on new patients must therefore be entered prior to
the examination.
E.2

Registration

E.2

If you enter the patients data and want to examine the patient
immediately then you must fill in at least those input fields
whose names are displayed bold.
E.2

Preregistration

E.2

If you only want to preregister the patient for an examination at


a later point in time, data about his or her sex, name, patient ID,
and date of birth are sufficient.
E.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.21

Registering a New Patient

Patient Registration

Information for new patients is entered in the blank Patient


Registration window.
E.2
Call up the Patient Registration window.
Page E.13, Calling up Patient Registration
If you call up patient registration from the Patient Browser
make sure that you have not selected a patient or study there.

The input fields preconfigured by Siemens Service are shown


above. You can add further input fields to this configuration, e.g.
for example, a second operator.
Page A.44, Local service
E.2

0.0

E.22

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a New Patient

Entries in the PATIENT area

E.2

After you have called up patient registration, the cursor is in the


input field for patient name in the PATIENT area.
E.2
The Exam and Preregister buttons remain deactivated until
you have entered all the information required to register or preregister a patient.
E.2

Entering personal details of a new patient

E.2

Personal patient data include name, patient number, age, and


sex. This data uniquely identifies the patient in your databases.
E.2
E.2

Enter the patients last name, first name and, depending on


the configuration of your system, any title or suffix, if applicable.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.23

Registering a New Patient

Patient Registration

Enter a patient ID and depending on the configuration of


your system any other numbers.
If you do not enter a patient ID, your system will automatically
generate an ID based on the date, time, abbreviation for daylight-saving or standard time, and the identification number of
your system (unique worldwide).
E.2
Enter the patients date of birth.
The input format for the date of birth depends on the regional
settings of your operating system. The valid input format is
displayed in the status line.
You may separate day, month, year with -, . or / or a blank.
You may enter the month numerically or as a three-letter
abbreviation.
You may enter the year with four or two digits.
Examples: Mar/21/55 or 3-21-1955 or 21 03 55.
Enter the year of birth with four digits for patients over
100 years old. Only dates of birth after 18.11.1858 are processed correctly.

Enter the sex of the patient.

0.0

E.24

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a New Patient

Your system has already calculated the age of the patient from
the date of birth you entered above.
E.2
Check the age shown. If it is incorrect you must correct the
date of birth.
If you do not know the date of birth you can enter the estimated age here. The system then calculates a date of birth
from the current date. In the selection field next to it you can
enter whether the age is in years, months or days (for example for infants).
E.2

NOTE
Check once more that the patient name, patient number,
date of birth, and sex are correct to avoid confusion with
other patients.
E.2

Enter the height of the patient.

Enter the weight of the patient.


The units will depend on the regional settings of your system.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.25

Registering a New Patient

Patient Registration

Entering additional information

E.2

The planning and further procedure of an examination can


sometimes be simplified if you enter additional information
about the patient.
E.2

Enter any additional information about the patient, e.g. prior


examinations, in the field Additional info.
If the comment extends over more than three lines, a scroll
bar appears on the right-hand border of the input field. You
can use it to scroll through the input field.

Calling up an overview

E.2

For a better overview, you can check the text you have entered
again in a larger format.
E.2
Click on the button Blow up in the field Additional info.

0.0

E.26

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a New Patient

In the window Full Additional Patient Information, you can


read the text that you entered in the field Additional info.
When a patient is registered for the first time, this window
cannot be opened. Only when these dates are called up later,
this overview can also be displayed.
Click on Close to close the window again.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.27

Registering a New Patient

Patient Registration

Displaying detailed information

E.2

Depending on the modality, it may be necessary to display additional patient data and information.
E.2
Click on the button Details....
The window Additional Patient Attributes is displayed.

E.2

0.0

E.28

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a New Patient

E.2

When a patient is registered for the first time, this window


cannot be opened. Only when these dates are called up later,
the Additional Patient Attributes can also be displayed.
This field informs you whether your patient suffers from any
allergies, e.g. caused by medication.
Here you are informed about any allergies that patient might
have to contrast agents.
If a contrast agent has to be administered, the contrast agent
to be used is entered in this field.
This field informs you of any medication that has to be administered to the patient before start of the examination.
This field tells you if special arrangements have to be made
for your patient, e.g. whether he or she requires a wheelchair
or the services of an interpreter.
This field gives you information about the general state of
health of your patient (e.g. reduced vision or loss of orientation).

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.29

Registering a New Patient

Patient Registration

The field Smoking status tells you whether your patient is a


smoker or not.
This field tells you if a female patient is pregnant or not.
Under Last menstrual date you can see the date of the last
menstrual cycle of your patient.
In the field Additional patient history you will find information about the previous history of the patient.
Like in the field Additional info, here you can enter several
lines of text in the Additional patient history area and have
an overview displayed.
Page E.26, Entering additional information

0.0

E.210

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a New Patient

Entering admission data

E.2

In the HOSPITAL area you can enter information about admission of the patient to your practice.
E.2

Enter the name of the physician (e.g. family doctor) who referred the patient or select one from the selection list.

Enter the name of the physician who requested admission of


the patient within the hospital or select one from the selection
list.

Enter a preliminary patient number.


In Registration Configuration you can define the entries in
these selection lists.
Page E.42, Defining entries in the selection list

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.211

Registering a New Patient

Patient Registration

Entering examination data

E.2

Information about the examination to be conducted can be


entered in the PROCEDURE area.
E.2

Entering one study

E.2

In the Study input field, select the examination region and


examination that you want to perform. These data are transferred to the parameter card Program where you then immediately see the standard program for the selected examination. E.2

0.0

E.212

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a New Patient

Enter the first few letters of the required study.


The study list opens up and the first study which matches your
entry is highlighted and placed in the input field.
E.2

If you click on a study in this list it is placed in the input field


immediately.
It then also appears in the field Requested procedure(s)
immediately.
E.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.213

Registering a New Patient

Patient Registration

Or

E.2

Scroll through the study list with the scroll bar until you find
the required region of the body.
Click on the + symbol in front of this entry to display all the
studies grouped together for this region.
The + symbol becomes a - symbol.
Click on the - symbol to hide the studies again.
Click on the study you require in the selection list.
It then appears in the Study input field.

E.2

0.0

E.214

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a New Patient

Entering the patient position

E.2

After you have entered the requested examination, you enter


the position that the patient is to adopt during the examination.E.2
In the Exam task card you can change the patient position
again.

Select the patient position for the first study in the selection
list. The patient position is defined as direction - position.
E.2

Direction:

E.2

Head First
The patient is lying with his or her head toward the examination unit.
Feet First
The patient is lying with his or her feet toward the examination unit.
E.2

Position:

E.2

Left Lateral
The patient is lying on the left-hand side.
Right Lateral
The patient is lying on the right-hand side.
Supine
The patient is lying on his/her back.
Prone
The patient is lying on his/her stomach.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.215

Registering a New Patient

Patient Registration

Administration numbers and comment

E.2

If you have compiled a study list, the following data refer to all
studies in the list.
E.2

Configuration-dependent input and output field for the access


number of the study assigned by the RIS (radiological information system).
E.2

Enter the internal administration number of the study here or


accept the preset number if already entered by your system.

Enter a comment for the study.

0.0

E.216

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a New Patient

Entering institution data

E.2

In the INSTITUTION area, you enter the information about the


examining institution and the examination personnel. This information can be helpful if the examination results are passed on
to a different organization for reporting.
E.2

Enter the name of the hospital or practice or select it from the


selection list.

Enter the name of the examining physician or physicians or


select them from the selection list.

Enter the name of the operator or operators or select them


from the selection list.
In Registration Configuration you can define the entries in
these selection lists.
Page E.42, Defining entries in the selection list

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.217

Registering a New Patient

Patient Registration

Completing data entry

E.2

After you have entered all the necessary patient data in the
Patient Registration window, you can assign a certain patient
group to the patient data, register the patient for the ensuing
examination or preregister him or her for examination later on.E.2
E.2

C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Registering a patient twice.

E.2

Consequence: Incorrect diagnosis possible.

E.2

Remedy: Make sure that you do not register the patient


twice. Always check whether the entry already exists. E.2

0.0

E.218

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a New Patient

Assigning Patient Group

E.2

Before you preregister or register a patient, you can assign a


certain patient group to the patient data, provided that you are
entitled to do so.
E.2
This assignment limits access to the patient images.

E.2

Click on the Patient Group button to assign a patient group.


E.2

The dialog box Select Default Patient Groups appears.

E.2

Select the protections to be applied and click on OK.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.219

Registering a New Patient

Patient Registration

Registering a patient for the examination

E.2

If you want to examine the patient directly afterwards, register


the patient now. The ensuing examination is conducted with the
data that you have entered.
E.2
Registration

E.2

E.2

Click on the Exam button.


Depending on the configuration of your system, a dialog box
appears in which you must confirm the patient position, weight,
and, if necessary, the date of birth of the patient.
E.2
The dialog box Registration Confirmation is displayed.

E.2

Check your entries, especially patient weight, which is used


for the SAR calculation.
Confirm the information with Confirm.

0.0

E.220

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a New Patient

Or

E.2

If this data is incorrect, click on Cancel. You will return to the


Patient Registration window.
Patient already known to
the system

E.2

E.2

When you have confirmed the patient data the system checks
whether a patient with this personal data has already been preregistered or is stored in the local database. If so, the Patient
not unique dialog box is displayed.
E.2

Select the patient entry and confirm by clicking on the Exam


button.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.221

Registering a New Patient

Patient Registration

Or

E.2

Click on Cancel to cancel registration in order to change the


patient data.
Checking the weight

E.2

During registration the system checks whether the relationship


between age and weight is realistic. If the system detects any
inconsistencies, a warning window such as the following is displayed.
E.2

Click on Yes if you want to correct your entries.


You will then return to the dialog box Patient Registration.

E.2

0.0

E.222

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a New Patient

Or

E.2

Click on No if you wish to register and examine the patient


with these settings.
E.2

WA R N I N G
If you register and examine the patient with the weight you
have entered, SAR limit values may be exceeded.
E.2

Depending on your configuration the system checks during registration whether the relation between the age and the weight is
plausible. If the system finds a mismatch, registration is canceled. You then return to the Patient Registration window and
you can correct your entries.
E.2
After successful completion of all checks, the following message appears in the footer of the Patient Registration window:E.2
Transferring patient to examination.

E.2

The patient is now registered for the examination.


The Patient Registration window is closed and you return to
the Exam task card.
E.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.223

Registering a New Patient

Patient Registration

Preregistering a patient

E.2

You can preregister the patient with the data entered if you want
to conduct the examination later on. When you start the
examination you then call up the data entered and therefore
save time during routine examinations.
Page E.31, Registering a Known Patient
E.2
Preregistration

E.2

E.2

Click on the Preregister button.


The system checks whether the patient has already been preregistered or is already stored in the database. If necessary the
Patient not unique dialog box is displayed.
Page E.221, Patient already known to the system
E.2

Next, the following message appears in the footer of the Patient


Registration window:
Patient successfully preregistered.
E.2
The patient is put in the scheduler. The input fields of the
Patient Registration window are now empty again. You can
enter the data of the next patient.
E.2

The data of a patient may appear twice in the scheduler if the


patient has been preregistered at two consoles, simultaneously. In that case, delete one of the entries.
Page D.616, Deleting data

0.0

E.224

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a New Patient

Cancelling patient registration

E.2

You can cancel entering patient data any time. All data that are
entered in the Patient Registration window are lost.
E.2

E.2

Click on the Cancel button.


The Patient Registration window is closed and you return to
the application from which you called up patient registration. E.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.225

Registering a New Patient

Patient Registration

0.0

E.226

Operator Manual

Registering a Known
Patient

CHAPTER

E.3

E.3

A patient who is preregistered or has already been examined in


your hospital or practice is known to your system.
E.3
If you want to register a known patient for an examination you
do not need to enter the patients data again. You can search for
the patient in the databases and place the stored information in
the Patient Registration window, saving time during registration.
E.3

HIS/RIS-query

E.3

If the data of the patient has already been entered via an HIS/
RIS system, you can call up that data from the hospital network
and place it in the scheduler. The patient is then preregistered.
E.3

Preregistered patient

E.3

If the patient is preregistered you call up the data entered previously and add to it, if necessary. After that you register the
patient for examination.
E.3

Patient already examined

E.3

You can use the personal data from the database for a patient
who has already been examined. Check the data, correct it, if
necessary, and enter the new examination data. Next, register
the patient for the ensuing examination or preregister the
patient if you want to examine him or her later.
E.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.31

Registering a Known Patient

Patient Registration

Performing an HIS/RIS query

E.3

With an HIS/RIS query, the patient data entered in the hospital


network is updated at specific intervals.
E.3

Automatic query

E.3

Depending on the configuration, your system either queries


data intended for your workstation, or data from the HIS/RIS
system intended for other workstations with the same modality.
E.3

This process is triggered automatically at specific intervals if


you activate it in the configuration window of Patient Registration.
Page D.24, Updating the scheduler
Page E.411, Automatic update
E.3

Manual query

E.3

You can also query the HIS/RIS system manually at any time.E.3
Before you start looking through the patient data in the databases, make sure that the scheduler contains all the patient
data required for the examination.
Call up View > Update Worklist in the Patient Browser or
double-click on the Scheduler symbol.
Page D.24, Updating the scheduler

0.0

E.32

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Defining the worklist


time range

Registering a Known Patient

E.3

If configured, the window Worklist Time Range appears when


you make a manual HIS/RIS query. In it you can define the start
and end time of the patient data entered in the HIS/RIS system
for your query.
E.3
You can delimit the worklist range to a period of interest to you,
for example, to all the patient data entered that day.
E.3

Enter the start and end point (date and time) of your worklist
query.
Click on Get Worklist to call up the updated worklist for the
defined period.
Page E.37, Search list
Or

E.3

Click on Cancel to close the Worklist Time Range window


without updating the worklist.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.33

Registering a Known Patient

Patient Registration

Searching in the Patient


Registration window

E.3

You can search for patient data in the databases from the
Patient Registration window and then use the data for registration.
E.3

Entering the patient name/ID

E.3

Call up the Patient Registration window.


If you call up registration from the Patient Browser, make
sure that no patient or study is currently selected there to
ensure that the registration dialog opens empty.

Enter the data known to you in the fields Last name and
Patient ID.
Page E.23, Entries in the PATIENT area
It does not matter whether your entries contain upper or lower
case letters.

0.0

E.34

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Wildcards for patient


name and ID

Registering a Known Patient

E.3

If you know only part of the name or part of the ID of the patient
you are looking for, you can also use an asterisk * as a wildcard.
E.3
A wildcard stands for any number of characters (letters and/or
numbers).
E.3
You can use up to two asterisks * as wildcards in the input
field, before and/or after the known part of the name or ID.
If you leave one or more fields empty, the search is performed
as if you had entered a *.
If you enter first and last names of a patient for the search,
you must separate them by a "*".

Example of a patient
name

E.3

If you enter Mill*, the names Miller and Mill, but not Hamilton will be found.
E.3

Example of a patient ID

E.3

If you enter *sy*, the patient IDs GO18ENSY39987 and


SYHODSON40425 will be found.
E.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.35

Registering a Known Patient

Patient Registration

Starting a search

E.3

You can start the search once you have entered the patients
name and/or the patient ID.
E.3

E.3

Click on Search.
The Search button will turn into the Abort button.

E.3

The databases of your system are now searched for the patient
with the name and/or ID entered.
E.3
In Registration Configuration you can define which databases (e.g. local database, archive) are to be searched.
Page E.45, Configuring the patient search

Cancelling a search

E.3

You can cancel a search at any time, for example, if you have
made a mistake entering the name.
E.3
E.3

Click on Abort.
The search is canceled and you return to the Patient Registration window. No data will be transferred. The Abort button will
turn into the Search button.
E.3

0.0

E.36

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a Known Patient

Search list

E.3

Patients found in the databases are listed in the Patient Search


window. The hit list is displayed as soon as more than one
patient is found.
E.3

In Registration Configuration you can set which patient


data are to be displayed in the Patient Search window.
Page E.45, Configuring the patient search
Status bar

E.3

The status bar shows the progression of the search in the


Patient Search window. The following information is displayed:E.3
which database is being searched,
to what extent this database has already been searched
(in %),
how many patients have already been found.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.37

Registering a Known Patient

Patient Registration

Accepting patient data

E.3

The search for further patients in the databases continues, even


after the first patient has been found. As soon as a second
patient has been found, your system will display the Patient
Search window with the hit list.
E.3

One patient found

E.3

If only one patient has been found at the end of the search, his
or her personal data are automatically placed in the Patient
Registration window.
E.3
For a preregistered patient, all data previously entered are
transferred to the Patient Registration window.
E.3

More than one patient


found

E.3

If more than one patient is found, select the patient you require
from the search list and transfer that patients data.
E.3
Select the patient in the search list and click on OK.
Or

E.3

Double-click on the required patient.


The personal data of the selected patient (for preregistered
patients, all data entered previously) are placed in the Patient
Registration window.
E.3
The Patient Search window is closed.

E.3

0.0

E.38

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a Known Patient

NOTE
If the patient found was examined using the previous
Numaris software, not all the registration information will be
displayed in the Patient Registration window
(e.g. Request ID, Referring Physician, 1.Performing
Physician).
E.3

Patient not found

E.3

If the hit list does not contain the required patient or if no patient
has been found, you may have incorrectly entered the name or
patient number, or the data of the patient may be stored in a
database that you have not searched.
E.3
Click on Cancel if the patient you require is not displayed in
the hit list.
The Patient Search window will close and you will return to the
Patient Registration window again.
E.3
Repeat your search with changed entries and/or extend the
search to further databases.
In Registration Configuration you can define which databases to include in the search.
Page E.45, Configuring the patient search

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.39

Registering a Known Patient

Patient Registration

Searching in the Patient Browser

E.3

You can also use the Patient Browser to search for a patient in
the scheduler, local database, and archive. The patients data
can then be transferred to the Patient Registration window.
You can simplify your search by filtering and sorting the patient
data.
Page D.26, Scrolling through and selecting patient data
Page D.246, Calling up additional information about a
patient
E.3

First select the database from which you want to transfer the
patient data.
Search and select the required patient in the navigation area
or in the content area of the Patient Browser.
Or

E.3

Select the study or studies of the patient that you want to perform or repeat.
Or

E.3

Select the series of the patient that you want to perform or


repeat.

0.0

E.310

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Transferring data to
registration

Registering a Known Patient

E.3

Call up the Patient Registration window by clicking on


Patient > Register....
Or

E.3

E.3

Click on the icon button in the toolbar.


Or

E.3

Drag the selected data into the Patient Registration window


(drag & drop).

Registering a patient
directly

E.3

You can also register a preregistered patient for the examination directly if all the data required for the examination have
been entered.
E.3
Double-click on the procedure or the procedure step in the
scheduler.
You can select procedure steps of different procedures by
pressing the Ctrl or the Shift button.
The data are directly transferred to the examination card.
E.3

Once all the data required for registration have been entered,
and depending on the configuration, the window Registration
Confirmation appears in which you must confirm entries such
as patient name or date of birth, etc.
E.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.311

Registering a Known Patient

Patient Registration

Click on Confirm if all entries are correct.


The window Patient Registration closes and the examination
card is displayed.
E.3
Or
Click on Register if you want to change the patient data.
The Patient Registration window appears in which you can
make any necessary changes.
Page E.313, Completing your entries
E.3
If not all of the fields required for registration are completed,
the window Patient Registration is called up automatically.
Click on Cancel to close the window Registration Confirmation automatically without registering the patient.

0.0

E.312

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a Known Patient

Completing your entries

E.3

After you have transferred the patient data you searched for into
the Patient Registration window, check that it is correct and if
necessary add the missing data before registering the patient.
Page E.211, Entering admission data
Page E.212, Entering examination data
Page E.217, Entering institution data
E.3

Depending on the configuration of your system, it may only be


possible to correct HIS/RIS data partially.
Registering

E.3

E.3

Click on Exam if you want to examine the next patient.


The patient will be registered for the examination.

E.3

The examination data will be transferred to the Examination


task card and you can begin the examination.
E.3

Or
Preregister

E.3

E.3

E.3

Click on Preregister to preregister the patient.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.313

Registering a Known Patient

Corrected patient data

E.3

Patient Registration

If you have transferred the patient from the local database and
made corrections to that patients personal data in the Patient
Registration window, this message box appears.
E.3

Do not forget to correct the patient data in the original record


later on.
Page D.42, Correcting patient or examination data

0.0

E.314

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a Known Patient

Searching and registering in the


HIS/RIS system

E.3

If you cannot find a particular patient in the databases although


he or she has been entered in the HIS/RIS system, you can
search through the entire HIS/RIS system with a worklist
query.
E.3
If configured, you can also use this method to access patient
data intended for other workstations and modalities.
E.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.315

Registering a Known Patient

Patient Registration

Calling up a patient worklist query

E.3

The patient worklist query allows you to search the whole HIS/
RIS system for patient data. The search is performed according
to the following entries:
E.3

First and last name, title


Patient ID
Referring Physician
Ward
Accession Number
Request ID
Scheduled physician

As empty fields are treated like "wildcards", you should complete at least one of the fields so that the search result is better manageable.
You will find information about "wildcards" for a patient search
on
Page E.35, Wildcards for patient name and ID
You cannot use a patient ID entered automatically as a
search term.

0.0

E.316

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Starting a search

Registering a Known Patient

E.3

Call up View > Patientbased Worklist in the menu of the


Patient Browser.
The dialog Patient Worklist Query appears.

E.3

Enter search criteria. You may also use wildcards.


Page E.35, Wildcards for patient name and ID

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.317

Registering a Known Patient

Patient Registration

Click on Get Worklist.


The Get Worklist button turns into the Cancel button.

E.3

The HIS/RIS system is now searched for patients with the


entered data.
Canceling a search

E.3

E.3

You can cancel a search at any time, e.g. if you have made a
mistake entering the name.
E.3
In that case, click on Cancel.
The search is canceled without any data being transferred.

E.3

0.0

E.318

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Registering a Known Patient

Search list of the worklist query

E.3

The patient data found in the HIS/RIS system are listed in the
window Results of the Patient Based Worklist Query. The
search list is also displayed if only one patient has been found.E.3

All the data found for a particular patient is automatically preregistered in the Scheduler for the intended modality.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.319

Registering a Known Patient

Patient Registration

Accepting patient data

E.3

Select a patient from the search list.


Click on OK.
Or

E.3

Double-click on a patient entry.


You can close the Results of Patient Based Worklist Query
window with Cancel.
The data of the selected patient is transferred to the Patient
E.3
Registration window.
If the fields in the Patient Registration window contain the
data of another patient, they are overwritten by the data of the
new patient.
Patient not found

E.3

If you have not found the patient you are looking for, correct your
entries, if necessary, and start the search again.
E.3

0.0

E.320

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

E.4

Configuring Patient
Registration

E.4

Patient registration can be customized according to your individual examination registration.


E.4

You can change the following default settings:

E.4

The entries in the selection lists of the Patient Registration


window.
Selection of the databases you want to search when using
the search function, the search procedure, and display of the
search results.
Worklist settings, if an HIS/RIS system is connected.

Call up the Numaris/4-Configuration Panel


(Options > Configuration... in the main menu).
Call up the configuration window for patient registration.
The Basics section of this manual describes how to call up
and exit configuration windows, save changes, or reset settings back to the as-delivered state.
Chapter A.3, Configuring the User Interface
The Registration Configuration window with the Entering
Data, Searching, and HIS/RIS tab cards is displayed.
E.4

The card HIS/RIS is only displayed if your system is connected to the HIS/RIS system and configured and licensed
accordingly.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.41

Configuring Patient Registration

Patient Registration

Defining entries in the selection list

E.4

You create selection lists in the Entering Data tab card. You
can access these entries during patient registration. In this way,
you save time during data entry and avoid typing errors.
E.4
Click the Entering Data tab card into the foreground.

0.0

E.42

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Configuring Patient Registration

Possible selection lists

E.4

You can change and add to the selection lists for the following
input fields if these fields are shown on the Patient Registration window:
E.4

Referring physician
Admitting diagnosis
Name of the institution
Name of the performing physician
Name of the operator

Creating entries

E.4

Each selection list can contain up to 50 entries.

E.4

Under Entry, select which selection list you want to edit.


Enter new entries in the text input field and correct or delete
the existing entries.
Make sure that the entries required most often are as near to
the top of the dropdown list as possible.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.43

Configuring Patient Registration

Patient Registration

Default entries

E.4

For each selection list you can define whether and which
entries are preselected in an input field when you call up patient
registration.
E.4
Choose one of these three options:
No default
When you call up the patient registration the input field is
empty.
Use first entry as default
When you call up the patient registration the first entry from
the selection list is already in the input field.
Keep selection from previous (pre-)registration as
default
When you call up the patient registration the entry you
selected for the last patient you (pre-) registered is already in
the input field.

0.0

E.44

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Configuring Patient Registration

Configuring the patient search

E.4

The Searching tab card lets you define which databases are to
be searched during a patient search, after how many hits the
search is terminated, and what information the search list is to
contain.
E.4
Click the Searching tab card into the foreground.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.45

Configuring Patient Registration

Patient Registration

Databases

E.4

During a patient search the following databases can be


searched.
E.4

Scheduler
(contains all preregistered patients)
Local database
(contains all patients who have been examined in the past
and whose data have not yet been archived)
Local archive
(contains all patients stored on the data media currently
inserted)

Select the databases that you want to search during the


patient search.
It is not possible to exclude the scheduler from the search.

0.0

E.46

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Configuring Patient Registration

Limiting the number of patients found

E.4

You can have the search stopped once a certain number of


patients has been found.
E.4
Enter the number of hits at which you want the patient search
to be abandoned.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.47

Configuring Patient Registration

Patient Registration

Display of the search list

E.4

Here you can select which data of the patients found will be
listed in the Patient Search window and how the data should
be displayed.
You can have the following information displayed:
E.4
Personal data
You can have some or all of the information entered in the
PATIENT area displayed in the search list.
Admission data
Information about the referring physician and ward from area
HOSPITAL.
Information about hospital/practice
The name of the hospital/practice that you have entered in
area INSTITUTION.
Location
The network node where the data of the patient displayed in
the search list are stored.

Enter in which column of the search list you want to have this
information displayed.

Enter the column width (number of characters).

Click on the information that you want to display.

0.0

E.48

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Configuring Patient Registration

Configuring the HIS/RIS system

E.4

If your system is connected to an HIS/RIS system (hospital or


radiology information system), you can also select the HIS/RIS
card.
E.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.49

Configuring Patient Registration

Display expiry date of license

Patient Registration

E.4

The use of the worklist for the management of your patients is


subject to a restricted license which you must renew in good
time before the expiry date.
E.4
E.4

Click on the control box if you want a message to appear as


of 30 days before expiry of the license for the use of the
worklist.

0.0

E.410

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Configuring Patient Registration

Settings for worklist update

E.4

You can regularly update the scheduler with new patient data by
calling up the menu entry View > Update Worklist or by double-clicking on the Scheduler symbol.
E.4

Search area

E.4

E.4

Generally, your system only queries the patient data intended


for your workstation, but you can also call up data intended for
other workstations of the same modality in the HIS/RIS system.
E.4
Click on the option field Local site to query all the data
intended for your workstation.
Or

E.4

Click on the option field Modality of type... if configured.


The system queries all the patient data of your institute
intended for all the workstations of the modality in question.
E.4

Automatic update

E.4

This process is triggered automatically at regular intervals if you


activate it.
E.4
Click on the check box to have your system initiate an HIS/
RIS query at regular intervals.
Page E.12, HIS/RIS query
Page D.24, Updating the scheduler
If your system is equipped with a main and a satellite console
you should start the HIS/RIS query from only one console.
This console must be connected directly to the hospital network.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.411

Configuring Patient Registration

Time range

E.4

Patient Registration

If you query the HIS/RIS system manually you can limit the
extent of the worklist to a defined time range.
Page E.33, Defining the worklist time range
E.4

Click on the control box to enable time range configuration


for manual update.

0.0

E.412

Operator Manual

Patient Registration

Configuring Patient Registration

Settings for patient RIS query

E.4

You can additionally update the scheduler with new patient data
by a patient based query in the Patient Registration window.E.4
Search area

E.4

E.4

Besides patient data intended for your workstation you can also
call up data that are intended for other workstations of the same
modality in the HIS/RIS system.
E.4
Click on the option field Whole RIS to query all the data of
the RIS system.
Or

E.4

Click on the option field Local site to query all the data
intended for your workstation.
Or

E.4

Click on the option field Modality of type..., if configured.


The system queries all the patient data of your institute
intended for all the workstations of the modality in question.
E.4

Time range

E.4

You can limit the extent of the worklist to a defined time range.E.4
Click on the control box to narrow down the worklist, for
example, to the patient entries for the current day only.
E.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

E.413

Configuring Patient Registration

Patient Registration

0.0

E.414

Operator Manual

PART

Examination

F.0

F.1 Introduction to the MR Examination


Layout of the Exam task card .........................................F.12
Procedure for routine scanning .......................................F.14
Important terms ...............................................................F.16

F.2 Loading the Scan Program


Checking the region and examination .............................F.22
Selecting a scan program ...............................................F.24
Selecting a scan program on the
Program parameter card ............................................F.25
Selecting a scan program in the Exam Explorer ........F.26
Transferring a scan program to the program control ......F.27
Transferring a routine scan program ..........................F.27
Transferring individual program instructions .............F.210
Adding further program instructions or
scan programs ..........................................................F.212

F.3 Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images


Measuring reference images ..........................................F.32
Using reconstructed images as reference images ..........F.34
Loading images into the image area ..........................F.35
Display of loaded reference images ...........................F.38
Defining the scroll order ............................................F.313
Scrolling within image segments ..............................F.318
Editing reference images ..............................................F.322
Selecting images explicitly and implicitly ..................F.322
Changing window values ..........................................F.324
Enlarging, reducing, and panning
reference images ......................................................F.326
Flipping and rotating images ....................................F.330
Showing/hiding image text ........................................F.332
0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F1

Contents

Examination

Pixel coordinates, distances, and angles ................. F.334


Removing images from the image area ................... F.337
Repeating scans (Phoenix) ...................................... F.337
Table position and reference images ........................... F.338
Scanning at a table position ..................................... F.340
Scans with patient table movement ......................... F.341
Scan program with multiple localizers ...................... F.343
Saving, exporting, and transferring images .................. F.346
Saving images and GSP images ............................. F.348
Transferring images to other task cards................... F.351
Filming, sending, and exporting images................... F.352

F.4 Positioning Slices


Preparing for positioning ................................................ F.42
Graphic objects .............................................................. F.45
Slices and slice groups .............................................. F.46
Slabs and slab groups................................................ F.48
Saturation regions .................................................... F.410
Navigator Objects..................................................... F.415
Display of graphic objects in the
reference images ..................................................... F.417
Graphic slice positioning (GSP) ................................... F.430
Displaying orientation aids ....................................... F.431
Selecting graphic objects ......................................... F.439
Moving objects ......................................................... F.442
Rotating objects ....................................................... F.449
Adding slice and slab groups ................................... F.458
Adding saturation regions ........................................ F.466
Changing graphic slice parameters.......................... F.469
Deleting graphic objects ........................................... F.485

0.0

F2

Operator Manual

Examination

Contents

Transferring the position of reference images ..........F.486


Nearest .....................................................................F.488
Applying slice settings ..............................................F.489

F.5 Adjusting Measurement Parameters


Overview of parameter cards ..........................................F.53
Routine parameter card ..............................................F.55
Contrast parameter card ...........................................F.511
Resolution parameter card .......................................F.517
Geometry parameter card ........................................F.523
System parameter card ............................................F.534
Physio parameter card .............................................F.540
Angio parameter card ...............................................F.546
BOLD parameter card ..............................................F.551
Diff parameter card ...................................................F.554
Perf parameter card ..................................................F.556
Inline parameter card ................................................F.558
Sequence parameter card ........................................F.564
Working in the parameter card stack ............................F.569
Protocol info line .......................................................F.569
Changing parameter values and
observing value ranges ............................................F.571
Displaying and editing parameter groups .................F.574
Adding or deleting graphic objects ...........................F.576
Adjusting the orientation and position
of graphic objects .....................................................F.577
Keyboard operation ..................................................F.582
Accepting measurement parameter settings ................F.584
Copying measurement parameters ...............................F.585
Saving the Job List........................................................F.591
Saving a single scan protocol .......................................F.592
0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F3

Contents

Examination

F.6 Performing a routine examination


Displaying the job list in the program control .................. F.64
Scan procedure for a routine examination ................... F.610
Running complete protocols..................................... F.611
Completing and running a protocol
with a construction worker icon ................................ F.612
Playing back patient instructions manually .............. F.616
Closing a routine examination .................................. F.618
Starting a protocol manually ......................................... F.621
Starting a protocol manually - single scan ............... F.622
Starting a protocol manually - multiple scans........... F.624
Interrupting scanning .................................................... F.629
Repeating scans ........................................................... F.634
Defining a new center position ................................. F.636
Scanning an open protocol more than once ............ F.637
Processing the job list while scans are
being performed ........................................................... F.639
Completing protocols ............................................... F.639
Applying parameter settings..................................... F.643
Inconsistencies in parameter settings ...................... F.649
Inserting new program instructions .......................... F.653
Generating a protocol from acquired
images (Phoenix) ..................................................... F.658
Changing scan sequence......................................... F.660
Deleting program instructions .................................. F.663
Changing protocol properties ................................... F.665
Saving a job list as a new program .............................. F.666
Numbering of reconstructed images ............................ F.667

0.0

F4

Operator Manual

Examination

Contents

Resolving conflicts and inconsistencies ........................F.672


Inconsistent coil configuration ..................................F.672
Inconsistencies resulting from a
changed table position ..............................................F.675

F.7 Using a contrast agent


Actual procedure agent ...................................................F.72
Documenting the use of Contrast Agent .........................F.75
Documenting the use of contrast agent
in the examination pause ............................................F.75
Documenting the use of contrast agent
without a pause ..........................................................F.77
Specifying contrast agent details ................................F.79
Resetting the contrast agent icon .............................F.712
Editing the contrast agent catalog ............................F.713
Inserting and planning contrast agent pauses ..............F.715

F.8 Positioning the Patient Table


Calling up table positioning .........................................F.82
Current table position .................................................F.83
Moving the table by a certain distance .......................F.84
Moving the table into the isocenter .............................F.85
Moving the table almost completely
out of the magnet ........................................................F.85
Canceling a table movement ......................................F.86
Canceling table STOP ................................................F.86
Switching magnet opening lighting on/off ...................F.87
Switching magnet opening ventilation on/off ..............F.88
Closing the examination .............................................F.89

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F5

Contents

Examination

F.9 Working with instruction areas


Editing a body region instruction range .......................... F.93
Changing the body region range marker.................... F.93
Deleting the body region range marker ...................... F.94
Editing a work step in the instruction area ...................... F.95
Adding a work step to range marker .......................... F.96
Editing a new work step ............................................. F.97
Response to a missing work step .............................. F.99
Canceling a procedure step ..................................... F.910
Completing a procedure step ................................... F.911
Deleting the procedure step range marker............... F.912
Editing an image comment ........................................... F.913
Entering an image comment .................................... F.914
Inserting a new image comment .............................. F.915
Changing the image comment ................................. F.916
Deleting an image comment .................................... F.917

F.10 Inline Display


Starting Inline Display ................................................... F.102
Changing the Inline Display ..................................... F.106
Setting the size of the Inline Display ........................ F.107
Image display ............................................................... F.109
Modifying image display ............................................. F.1011
Image windowing ................................................... F.1012
Zooming and panning an image............................. F.1014
Hiding image text ................................................... F.1015
Removing an image ............................................... F.1015
Saving images ............................................................ F.1016
Automatic image storage ....................................... F.1016
Manual image storage............................................ F.1018
0.0

F6

Operator Manual

Examination

Contents

Copying the image position .........................................F.1019


Selective image display (BOLD) .................................F.1021
Interactive scanning in real-time mode (optional) .......F.1022
Inline Display for CARE Bolus scans ..........................F.1025
Starting multiple breath-hold scans .............................F.1026
Display of the spectroscopy time signal ......................F.1030
Ending Inline Display ..................................................F.1031
Tips on optimum performance with
real-time scans............................................................F.1033

F.11 Patient instructions


Playing back an existing voice output ...........................F.113
Playing back patient instructions manually ...............F.115
Automatic playback of a voice output .......................F.117
Setting playback of voice outputs .............................F.118
Recording and editing voice outputs ...........................F.1113
Recording a new voice output ................................F.1115
Changing a voice output .........................................F.1121
Reordering voice outputs ........................................F.1123
Deleting user-defined voice outputs .......................F.1124
Configuring voice output .............................................F.1129

F.12 Protocol and Pause Properties


Editing protocol properties ............................................F.122
Entering a protocol name .........................................F.124
Defining start options ................................................F.125
Setting automatic saving and loading .....................F.1210
Setting a copy reference .........................................F.1214

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F7

Contents

Examination

Displaying upgrade info.......................................... F.1216


Applying or rejecting the changed
protocol properties ................................................. F.1218
Editing pause properties ............................................. F.1219
Entering the pause name and comment ................ F.1221
Planning contrast agent administration .................. F.1223
Applying or rejecting modified
pause properties .................................................... F.1227

F.13 Printing protocols


Printing ......................................................................... F.132
Opening the print dialog box .................................... F.132
Setting the printer ..................................................... F.134
Setting the print range .............................................. F.135
Print preview of protocols ......................................... F.138
Starting to print ....................................................... F.1312
Exporting data into a file ............................................. F.1313

F.14 SAR and Stimulation Monitoring


Operating modes .......................................................... F.142
Automatic SAR monitoring ........................................... F.146
Display of the necessary registration ....................... F.147
Calculated SAR higher than the limit value ............ F.1410
Switching modes .................................................... F.1414
SAR message on other task cards......................... F.1419
Displaying SAR information ........................................ F.1420
Displaying predicted SAR values ........................... F.1422
Displaying the SAR status...................................... F.1425
Querying SAR-relevant patient data ...................... F.1426
Displaying information about the protocol .............. F.1428
Displaying current SAR values............................... F.1429
0.0

F8

Operator Manual

Examination

Contents

Automatic stimulation monitoring ................................F.1431


Stimulation threshold exceeded .............................F.1432
Stimulation limit reached ........................................F.1434
Stimulation message on other task cards ...............F.1438
Information for stimulation monitoring .........................F.1440
The SAFE subtask card ..........................................F.1440
The dB/dt subtask card ...........................................F.1442

F.15 Physiologically Controlled Scans


Preparing a physiologically controlled scan ..................F.153
Monitoring signals on the physiological display ............F.155
Setting parameters......................................................F.1513
Setting ECG triggering ............................................F.1515
Setting pulse triggering ...........................................F.1525
Setting respiratory triggering ..................................F.1526
Setting an external trigger signal ............................F.1530
Setting retrospective gating ....................................F.1531
Starting the scan .........................................................F.1534

F.16 Managing scan programs


Calling up the Exam Explorer .......................................F.163
Layout of the Exam Explorer .........................................F.165
Navigation and content area .....................................F.165
Data levels ................................................................F.166
Tool bar ....................................................................F.169
Displaying unlicensed scan programs ........................F.1610
Finding a scan program ..............................................F.1612
Searching for a name .............................................F.1614

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F9

Contents

Examination

Processing entries ...................................................... F.1618


Moving entries ........................................................ F.1619
Copying, cutting, and pasting entries ..................... F.1621
Deleting entries ...................................................... F.1624
Renaming and annotating entries .......................... F.1625
Editing properties of scan programs ...................... F.1628
Creating a new examination region ............................ F.1631
Assigning an examination region to a
body region ............................................................ F.1632
Creating a new examination ....................................... F.1637
Creating a new program ............................................. F.1638
Inserting program instructions .................................... F.1639
Finding a protocol................................................... F.1640
Viewing protocol parameters.................................. F.1644
Inserting a protocol................................................. F.1645
New protocol from a sequence
Creating.................................................................. F.1646
Creating a new protocol from a series
or image (Phoenix) ................................................. F.1650
Inserting a scan pause ........................................... F.1653
Editing protocol parameters ....................................... F.1655
Changing parameter settings ................................. F.1656
Changing a coil configuration ................................. F.1657
Applying or rejecting changes ................................ F.1659
Editing protocol and pause properties ........................ F.1660
Saving scan programs ................................................ F.1661
Saving the scan program under a new name ........ F.1661
Saving a scan program under the same name ...... F.1665
Transferring a scan program to the
program control .......................................................... F.1666
0.0

F10

Operator Manual

Examination

Contents

Updating filming study layouts ....................................F.1668


Importing/exporting examination
database objects .........................................................F.1670
Importing objects ....................................................F.1671
Exporting objects ....................................................F.1678
Printing protocols ........................................................F.1681
Exam Explorer Closing ...............................................F.1682

F.17 Maestro Layout and Movie Display (Option)


Maestro layout ..............................................................F.172
Selecting the Maestro layout and
loading series ...........................................................F.174
Transferring series from stamp segments
into image segments ................................................F.175
Repeating scanning of a series ................................F.176
Saving, filming, exporting, and transferring
series for postprocessing ..........................................F.176
Navigating in the stamp segments ...........................F.177
Changing the arrangement of series ......................F.1710
Movie display ..............................................................F.1713
Groups within a series ............................................F.1714
Starting the movie display ......................................F.1715
Controlling movie display ........................................F.1717
Controlling movie display using the
dialog box ...............................................................F.1720
Configuring movie display ......................................F.1732

F.18 Breast Biopsy


Loading and selecting images ......................................F.187
Search for original images ........................................F.187
Changing the image display .....................................F.189

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F11

Contents

Examination

Setting markers to calculate the biopsy channel ........ F.1812


Setting a reference marker..................................... F.1813
Setting a lesion marker .......................................... F.1816
Entering a lesion name .......................................... F.1818
Calculating the biopsy channel ................................... F.1819
Creating the worksheet .......................................... F.1823
Performing a biopsy
examination ................................................................ F.1828
Checking the marker position................................. F.1828
Biopsy examination for multilesions ........................... F.1829

F.19 Automatic Position Suggestion


Basics....................................................................... F.192
Requirements ........................................................... F.193
Display in the Program Control ................................ F.194
Examination with AutoAlign .......................................... F.195
Measuring an AutoAlign Scout ................................. F.195
Adjusting the following protocols .............................. F.198
Closing the AutoAlign examination ........................ F.1910
Deactivating AutoAlign ............................................... F.1911
Checking the patient's age ......................................... F.1913
Patient too young ................................................... F.1913
Unsuitable patient positioning ................................ F.1916
Canceling an AutoAlign scan ..................................... F.1917
Repeating the AutoAlign Scout .................................. F.1919
Editing an AutoAlign scan program ............................ F.1921
Inserting programs and protocols........................... F.1921
Setting copy references ......................................... F.1922
Creating a protocol from a series or
image (Phoenix) ..................................................... F.1923
0.0

F12

Operator Manual

Examination

Contents

Creating new AutoAlign programs ..............................F.1926


Creating your own AutoAlign head
program in the Exam Explorer ................................F.1926
Exporting executed programs to the
Exam Explorer ........................................................F.1927
Planning with atlas images .....................................F.1928

F.20 Quality Measurement


Performing Quality Measurements ...............................F.202

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F13

Contents

Examination

0.0

F14

Operator Manual

Introduction to the
MR Examination

CHAPTER

F.1

F.1

After you register a patient, you'll make the necessary preparations in the examination room.
F.1

Preparations in the
examination room

F.1

Position the patient in the orientation entered during patient registration. Observe the information regarding patient safety provided in the System Manual. Position the coil(s) and connect
the coil cables to the connectors on the patient table. Mark the
center of the region to be examined with the laser light localizer
and move the patient into the magnet isocenter.
see System Manual
F.1

Working at the console

F.1

Next, start scanning from the console in the control room. For
this purpose, use the Exam task card. This card enables you to
select, control, and monitor examination procedures.
F.1
You are able to observe the patient through the window in the
control room during the examination. Use the intercom system
on the intercom console to listen or give instructions to the
patient.
F.1

Subsequent chapters take you through an MR examination step


by step. You will find detailed descriptions on how to perform
special scans, organize and manage scan programs, and monitor thresholds relevant to the health of the patient.
F.1

The following pages provide an overview of the Exam task


card, the scanning procedure, as well as important terms.
F.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.11

Introduction to the MR Examination

Examination

Layout of the Exam task card

F.1

The Exam task card is displayed in foreground as soon as you


register a patient for an examination.
F.1
(1)

(2)

(5)

(3)

(4)
(6)

(7)

0.0

F.12

Operator Manual

Examination

Introduction to the MR Examination

This task card includes the following elements and areas:

F.1

(1) Menu bar


(2) Image area
The reference images used to position graphic scan
objects (slices, slabs) are displayed.
(3) Info line
Information regarding the current patient and the open protocol is displayed.
(4) Program control
After loading, the program control contains a list of the protocols to be processed (job list). It also includes buttons for
controlling the program sequence.
(5) Parameter cards
The Program parameter card is used to select a scan
program or protocol. You may use the other cards to adapt
the parameters for the current examination.
(6) Tool bar
The buttons on the tool bar are used to open dialog boxes
for editing and controlling the measurement.
(7) Status bar
The status bar displays system error and status messages.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.13

Introduction to the MR Examination

Examination

Procedure for routine scanning


Selecting and transferring
a program
(Chapter F.2)

F.1

Select a scan program or protocol on the Program parameter


card and transfer it to the program control.

F.1

Acquiring reference images


(Chapter F.3)

Scanning reference images is the first program step, and usually starts automatically. The acquired reference images are
displayed in the image area.

F.1

Preparing a protocol
(Chapter F.4, F.5)

As the next step you prepare the next protocol in the program
control. You graphically position the slices or slabs to be
acquired on the reference images. Use the parameter cards to
check or change the measurement parameters of the protocol.

F.1

Start the protocol.


Running a protocol
(Chapter F.6)

F.1

During the scan you may prepare the next protocol, e.g., by
positioning the slices and adjusting the measurement parameters. Alternatively, you may view the images acquired by the
previous protocol.
F.1

Save and send images


(Chapter F.3)

You may save, export or transfer images to other task cards


from the Exam task card.
F.1

0.0

F.14

Operator Manual

Examination

Introduction to the MR Examination

You are able to interrupt a protocol in progress, repeat scans,


change the sequence of the program steps, and insert pauses
(e.g. for contrast agent administration).
F.1

Use the Inline Display or movie display to check the acquired


images.
F.1
For physiologically triggered scans, you may use the Physiological Display dialog box to monitor the physiological signals
and parameters.
F.1
During scanning, the system automatically monitors the SAR
and dB/dt load on the patient (RF exposure and time-varying
magnetic fields).
F.1
Use the Exam Explorer to organize examinations, scan programs, and protocols.
F.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.15

Introduction to the MR Examination

Important terms

Examination

F.1

It is very important to be familiar with the following terms associated with the examination procedure.
F.1

Sequence

F.1

A Sequence is the chronological sequence of RF pulses and


gradient pulses for excitation of the volume to be scanned, for
signal generation, and for position encoding. Each sequence
requires a repeat time TR optimized for contrast.
F.1
Your MR system is equipped with a large number of sequences,
allowing you to use different MR imaging techniques.
F.1

Scan protocol

F.1

A Scan protocol (Protocol) is a sequence containing a full set


of optimized parameters.
F.1

Scan pause

F.1

Scan pauses (Pauses) are planned interruptions in an examination procedure, e.g. for contrast agent administration.
F.1

Program instructions

F.1

Scan protocols and scan pauses are known collectively as Program instructions.
F.1

0.0

F.16

Operator Manual

Examination

Scan program

Introduction to the MR Examination

F.1

A Scan program (Program) contains a list of program instructions suitable for clarifying diagnostic problems in a specific
region of the body.
F.1
For greater clarity, the numerous scan programs are assigned
to specific examinations and regions.
F.1

Examination

F.1

An Examination contains all scan programs for an anatomical


region that are required to obtain diagnostically useful information.
F.1

Examination region

F.1

Examinations for a specific region of the body are grouped


together in an Examination region (Region).
F.1

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.17

Introduction to the MR Examination

Examination

0.0

F.18

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

F.2

Loading the Scan


Program

F.2

After the preparations in the examination room, check the information you entered for the examination and region during
patient registration.
F.2
Select the scan program required for your examination and load
it into the program control.
Page F.14, Procedure for routine scanning
F.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.21

Loading the Scan Program

Examination

Checking the region and


examination

F.2

When you select the Exam task card, the Programs parameter
card is in the foreground. The region and examination selected
during patient registration are entered here.
F.2

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

(5)

(6)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Region
Available examinations for the selected region
Selected scan program
List of all available scan programs for the selected examination
(5) Program instructions for the selected scan program
(6) Sum of scan times of the individual protocols in the
selected scan program

0.0

F.22

Operator Manual

Examination

Changing the region

Loading the Scan Program

F.2

Select a different examination region from the Region selection list, if required.
The Region properties dialog box allows you to view the
properties of the selected region (e.g. the short description or
assignment to a body region). Select Properties from the
context menu.

Changing the
examination

F.2

An examination limits the region to be examined to a specific


organ or part of the body.
F.2
As soon as you select an examination region, the Exams selection list contains the examinations available for this region. F.2

Select a different examination, if necessary.


The properties of the selected examination (e.g. the short
description) may be viewed in the Tree object properties
dialog box. Select Properties from the context menu.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.23

Loading the Scan Program

Examination

Selecting a scan program

F.2

After you have selected an examination, Programs will display


the scan programs that are available for this examination.
F.2
The first scan program is preselected in this list. The content of
this scan program (i.e. the sequence of program instructions
(scan protocols and scan pauses)) is displayed in the righthand window of the parameter card.
F.2

(1)
(2)

(3)

(1) Overview measurement Localizer


(2) Scan protocol
(3) Scan pause (in this case, for contrast agent administration)

0.0

F.24

Operator Manual

Examination

Loading the Scan Program

Selecting a scan program on the Program


parameter card

F.2

If the preset scan program is not suitable for your diagnostic


requirements, you may select one of the other scan programs
offered on the Programs parameter card.
F.2
Select the scan program you want to use for your examination by clicking on it in the list.
The right-hand window of the parameter card shows the program instructions of the newly selected scan program.
F.2

The Tree object properties dialog box provides further information about the selected scan program (short description,
time of last change, etc.). Select Properties from the context
menu.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.25

Loading the Scan Program

Examination

Selecting a scan program in the Exam


Explorer

F.2

Switch to the Exam Explorer if you are unable to find a particular examination or scan program on the Programs parameter
card. All examinations and scan programs are clearly listed
there, and you can also access the Siemens tree, if necessary.
Page F.161, Managing scan programs
F.2
Select Explorer from the context menu.
The Exam Explorer dialog box is displayed. You may now
search for the appropriate scan program in the Exam Explorer
and then transfer it to the program control.
Page F.1612, Finding a scan program
Page F.1666, Transferring a scan program to the program
control
F.2
You may close the Exam Explorer when you are finished using
it.
F.2
To do this, select Object > Close in the Exam Explorer.
F.2

N OT E
Make sure that no program instruction is selected on the
Programs parameter card. Otherwise the context menu will
not contain the Explorer item.
F.2

0.0

F.26

Operator Manual

Examination

Loading the Scan Program

Transferring a scan program to the


program control

F.2

Before scanning you have to transfer a scan program from the


Programs parameter card (or from the Exam Explorer, see
Page F.26) to the program control.
F.2

Transferring a routine scan program

F.2

In routine scans you will usually transfer a complete scan program.


F.2

Select the scan program.


Page F.24, Selecting a scan program

F.2

Click the << button on the Programs parameter card.


Or

F.2

Select Queue > Append from the main menu.


Or

F.2

Select Append from the context menu.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.27

Loading the Scan Program

Examination

Or

F.2

Click the required program and drag & drop it in the program
control.

The steps of the selected scan program will be transferred to


the program control. This program will start automatically if it
contains a Localizer with no additional start instructions.
F.2

0.0

F.28

Operator Manual

Examination

Loading the Scan Program

The program control displays a sequence of program instructions with their expected scan time and the processing status of
the protocols.
Page F.61, Performing a routine examination
F.2

(1)
(2)
(3)

(5)

(4)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

"Localizer" (overview measurement)


Scan protocol
Icons identifying the start options of a protocol
Scan pause (in this case, for contrast agent administration)
Scan time of a protocol

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.29

Loading the Scan Program

Examination

Transferring individual program instructions

F.2

You may also transfer individual protocols from one or more


scan programs. This allows you to adapt the sequence of the
current examination to your individual diagnostic problem.
F.2

Select the scan program that you want to transfer.


You may also select more than one program instruction in one
step.
Page A.217, Selecting several objects
Click the << button on the Programs parameter card.
Or

F.2

Select Queue > Append from the main menu.


Or

F.2

Select Append from the context menu.


Or

F.2

Drag & drop your selection in the program control.


The selected program instructions are transferred to the proF.2
gram control.

0.0

F.210

Operator Manual

Examination

Viewing protocol
parameters

Loading the Scan Program

F.2

If you are not sure which scan protocol to transfer, you may view
the measurement parameter settings first.
F.2
Select a protocol from the Programs parameter card.
Select Edit > View Protocol from the main menu.
Or

F.2

Select View protocol from the context menu.


Or

F.2

Double-click the protocol entry.


The Protocol view dialog box opens.

F.2

In the Protocol view, you may view (but not change) the measurement parameters of the protocol on the parameter cards.
Protocol or pause
properties

F.2

The Protocol step properties dialog box provides information


about the start options of a protocol, about copy references,
and about automatic forwarding of images. The Pause step
properties dialog box provides information about a scan pause
(e.g. for administering a contrast agent).
F.2
Select a protocol or pause from the Programs parameter
card.
Select Properties from the context menu.
Either the Protocol step properties or the Pause step properties dialog box will be displayed.
F.2

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.211

Loading the Scan Program

Examination

Adding further program instructions or scan


programs

F.2

The program control includes a list of the transferred program


instructions. You may add additional program instructions or
scan programs to this list.
F.2

Select additional program instructions or another scan program from the Programs parameter card (or in the Exam
Explorer, see Page F.26).
Click the << button on the Programs parameter card.
Or

F.2

Select Queue > Append from the main menu.


Or

F.2

Select Append from the context menu.


Or

F.2

Drag & drop your selection into the program control.


The new scan program or the new program instruction are
F.2
appended to the existing program instructions.

0.0

F.212

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

F.3

Measuring, Editing, and


Managing Ref. Images

F.3

Most measurement programs will prompt you to perform a


localizer measurement first. The reference images generated
using the localizer are used to position slices or define the field
of view (FOV) for subsequent scans.
Page F.14, Procedure for routine scanning
F.3
Instead of the localizer images, you may also use other patient
images acquired during the current exam as reference
images.
F.3
You may view reference images in the image segments,
improve image display, and select the images best suited for
slice positioning.
F.3
The image segments of the Exam task card may be used for
other purposes besides graphic slice positioning. For example,
they allow you to view, evaluate, and edit the acquired images.
You can export images directly from the Exam task card to
other task cards for postprocessing, export images, or save
them in the Patient Browser.
F.3
F.3

N OT E
To perform the examination, you need to have full access
rights.
F.3
Please refer to the information in
Part B, Security Package

F.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.31

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

Measuring reference images

F.3

The localizer starts automatically as the first program instruction after you load a scan program into the program control. F.3
While scanning is in progress, the localizer protocol has a white
background in the program control.
F.3

The status bar successively displays the processes in


progress:
F.3
Adjustment (coil)...
Adjustment of the system to the parameters and coils
according to the program instruction.
Preparing...
Measuring...
Scan in progress. The remaining scan time of the protocol is
displayed in countdown mode.
The series icon is displayed as soon as scanning and image
calculation have been completed.
F.3

Or

These series symbols indicated that the images of one or


several series are not fully available.

0.0

F.32

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

These reference images are displayed in the image area of the


Exam task card once the localizer measurement and image
calculation have been completed.
F.3

The reference images show the organ or part of the body to be


examined, usually in the three main orientations (sagittal, transverse, and coronal).
F.3
The next program instruction (e.g. t1_se_sag) is normally
incomplete and is opened for graphic slice positioning.
F.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.33

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

Using reconstructed images as


reference images

F.3

If you have already performed scans and reconstructed series


as part of your examination, you may use images from these
series for graphic slice positioning as well.
F.3

Requirements

F.3

These images have to meet the following criteria:

F.3

The images are part of the current examination of the current


patient.
The images are part of the same series block.
Page F.339, Series block
The series were measured using the same table position.
The images have NOT been filtered (remapped) using the
FOV compensation filter.
Page P.168, Filter  Routine, Resolution Common
The following images cannot be loaded into the image segments:
F.3
Mosaic images
Secondary capture images
e.g. alpha images of the BOLD evaluation
Page L.41, Alpha image
Curved cuts of the 3D evaluation
Page H.47, Generating curved slices

0.0

F.34

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Loading images into the image area

F.3

You can use either the program control or the Patient Browser
to load images and series into the image area of the Exam task
card.
F.3

Loading a series from


the program control

F.3

You can also load images or series from the program control,
even though the underlying protocol has not been fully processed at this point in time.
Page F.67, Symbols of series in program instructions
Select a protocol in the program control that has been processed either in part or in full.
Select Queue > Load Series from the main menu.
Or

F.3

Select Load series from the context menu.


Or

F.3

Double-click the series icon.


Page F.67, Symbols of series in program instructions
Or

F.3

Drag & drop the series into the image area.


The series is loaded into the image area of the Exam task
card.
F.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.35

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

If the protocol generates several result series, a dialog box


allows you to select the series to be transferred.
F.3

(1)

(2)

(1) Dialog window with full series description.


Series are fully computed.
(2) Dialog window without serial number.
Computation of series is not yet completed when opening
the selection window. Immediately after completion of
reconstruction, the serial numbers are shown when the
selection window is opened again.
Click the series so that you can load its images.

0.0

F.36

Operator Manual

Examination

Load from the Patient


Browser as follows

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

F.3

You can use the Patient Browser to load images for graphic
slice positioning. Images already loaded into the image area will
be ignored during this process.
F.3
Open the Patient Browser.
Select the images or series in the Patient Browser.
Page D.26, Scrolling through and selecting patient data
Drag & drop the images or series into one of the image segments.
Or (if only one image or series has been selected)

F.3

Double-click the selected image or series.


Images with different
table positions

F.3

Each time you load series or images with a different table position, the currently loaded images are cleared from the image
area.
Page F.338, Table position and reference images
F.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.37

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

Display of loaded reference images

F.3

You can choose between different layouts to display the loaded


images.
F.3

Three-segment layout

F.3

Select a three-segment layout if you want to display three reference images side by side.
F.3
Select View > 3 Segments from the main menu.

Two-segment layout

F.3

Select a two-segment layout if you want to display two reference


images side by side. The reference images are displayed larger
than in the three-segment layout.
F.3
Select View > 2 Segments from the main menu.

e.g. Tra

e.g. Sag

0.0

F.38

Operator Manual

Examination

Maestro layout
(optional)

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

F.3

Select the Maestro layout for improved management and evaluation of cardiac series. The acquired series are displayed in
stamp segments below the three image segments.
Page F.172, Maestro layout
F.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.39

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Distributing images
across segments

The following rules apply:


F.3

Examination

F.3

If the image area is empty, the loaded images will be distributed across the image area so that every segment displays
at least one image.
If only one series has been loaded into the empty image
area, the images of this series will be distributed across the
available segments (2 or 3).
If multiple series have been loaded, one image representing
a series will be displayed in each segment.
If all the image segments are filled, the remaining series will
be loaded in the background. You can bring these series to
foreground by scrolling with Series-/Series+.
Page F.318, Scrolling within image segments

Representative image

F.3

The image in the center of the anatomy is used as the representative image for a series with different slice positions.
F.3
If all images in a series use the same slice position, the first
image of the current sequence is used as the representative
image.
Page F.313, Defining the scroll order
F.3

0.0

F.310

Operator Manual

Examination

Example 1

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

F.3

All three image segments are empty. A localizer with one sagittal, two coronal, and three transverse overview images has just
been completed.
F.3
The images are distributed across the image segments as follows:
F.3

The series is duplicated twice and displayed in all three segments. The left segment shows the sagittal image, the center
segment shows the first coronal image, and the right segment
shows the first transverse image.
F.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.311

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Example 2

F.3

Examination

All three image segments are empty. Two series of the current
series block are dragged & dropped from the Patient Browser
to the center segment.
F.3
The images are distributed across the image segments as follows:
F.3

The first series is loaded into the target segment (center segment), the second series is loaded into the right segment. The
second series is duplicated and displayed in the left segment.
The system automatically searches for another suitable image
in the second series to be used as the representative image for
the first segment.
F.3

0.0

F.312

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Defining the scroll order

F.3

There is a difference between scrolling within a series and


scrolling between series.
F.3
If multiple series are loaded into an image segment, you can
scroll between series. The order of the series is defined by the
series number. This number depends on the date and time of
reconstruction. The order of the series cannot be modified. F.3
However, you can define the order of the images within a series.
You can select from various default sort options in the menu.
You can also define your own sort schemes for the order of
images.
F.3
The sort scheme also determines the order of the images during movie display.
Page F.1713, Movie display
F.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.313

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Sort criteria

F.3

Examination

The following sort criteria are available:

F.3

F.3

Abbreviation

Example

MO

Sorting according to the main orientation sag - cor - tra

SP

Sorting according to the main orientation tra - cor - sag


Sorting by association with a 3D group and by the SliceShift value

TT

Sorting according to trigger time

TA

Sorting according to acquisition time

TE

Sorting according to echo time

TD

Sorting according to time after delay (perfusion or diffusion time)

BV

Sorting according to b-value

NR

Sorting according to image numbers

--

Sorting according to load order


This criterion does not allow any sub-criteria.
F.3

Defining your own sort


scheme

F.3

You can define up to three levels for sorting images within a


series. You define a sort criterion for each of the three levels. F.3
Select Scroll > Display Order > User Defined.
The Image Display Order dialog box opens.

F.3

0.0

F.314

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Select the sort criterion for the first sort level from the Image
sorted by selection list.
Select the sort criterion for the second sort level from the
then by selection list.
Select the sort criterion for the third sort level from the then
by selection list.
The sort criterion of the second level is used if the sort criterion
values of the first level are identical.
F.3
The sort criterion of the third level is used if the sort criterion values of the first and second levels are identical.
F.3

Select a different sort criterion for each sorting level. Exception: If you select the Load Order criterion for the first level,
the then by fields will be grayed out. You cannot define additional sort criteria.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.315

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

You can cancel the definition of the sort scheme and close the
dialog box.
F.3
Click Cancel.
The previous setting is still applied to the order of the images
within the series.
F.3

You can apply the new sort scheme and close the dialog box.F.3
Click OK.

Using a Siemens sort


scheme

F.3

You may select from five different Siemens sort schemes for the
order of images within a series.
F.3
F.3

Name

Sort scheme

Application

Anatomical

SPTTTANR

Standard sort scheme


Localizer, anatomical examinations,
multi-slice/multi-phase scans (grouped according to phases),
multi-slice realtime scans

Triggered

MOTTTDSP

Multi-slice/single-phase scans or multi-slice/multi-phase scans


(if a slice package is viewed anatomically at defined trigger
times)
Perfusion and diffusion multi-slice scans

Chronological

MOTASPNR

Sorting by time of acquisition (TA), images with the same TA are


sorted by SP, images with the same TA and SP are sorted by NR.

as Numbered

NRSP

Sorting according to image numbers (NR)


Images with the same NR are sorted by SP.

as Loaded

Sorting by load order

0.0

F.316

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Select a sort scheme from the menu under Scroll > Display
Order > .......
F.3

The Anatomical sort scheme is selected by default. This is


the optimal scheme for most applications.
The sort scheme selected is applied until you select another
scheme.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.317

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Scrolling within image segments

Examination

F.3

After loading images into the image area, you can scroll the
images within an image segment. This helps you select the
images most suitable for slice positioning.
F.3

Setting the input focus

F.3

The Input Focus indicates the active segment of the image


area. It is highlighted by a dashed blue border. Actions triggered
via the keyboard (e.g., scrolling using the Image+/Image- keys)
are always performed in the active segment.
F.3

Input focus

0.0

F.318

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

You can shift the input focus to another image segment by


pressing the Left or Right cursor keys or by clicking inside the
other segment.
F.3

Keyboard focus

F.3

The keyboard focus has to be on the image area if you want to


use the keyboard for scrolling.
Page A.29, Setting the keyboard focus
F.3
Keep pressing the Tab key until a thin white border appears
around the image area, or click inside the segment you want
to scroll.

Scrolling between
images

F.3

There are different ways of scrolling between images within a


series.
F.3
Select Scroll > Image Next or Image Previous.
Or

F.3

Press the Image+ or Image- keys on the symbol keypad of


the keyboard.
Or

F.3

Scroll the image stack using the dog ears.

When you reach the last image of the series, Image+ scrolls
to the first image of the series. Image- scrolls to the first
image to the last image of the series.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.319

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Parallel scrolling

F.3

Examination

To compare images of two or three series, scroll in parallel


through images in these series.
F.3
Explicitly select the image segments you want to scroll in
parallel.
Page F.322, Explicit selection
Use the symbol keys or the menu commands to scroll
between images.
It is also possible to scroll in parallel using the dog ears.
If the series do not contain the same number of images, parallel-scrolling stops at the end of the shorter series. Scrolling continues up to the end of the longer series. If you continue scrolling, parallel-scrolling will start over with the first image of the
series.
F.3

During parallel-scrolling, system performance depends on


the number of images and series and may be affected by processes running in background.

0.0

F.320

Operator Manual

Examination

Scrolling to the next/


previous series

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

There are various ways of scrolling between series.


F.3

F.3

Select Scroll > Series Next or Series Previous from the


main menu when starting applications and functions.
Or

F.3

Press the Series+ or Series- keys on the symbol keypad of


the keyboard.
When you reach the last series of an examination, Series+
scrolls to the first series of the examination (accordingly,
Series- scrolls from the first series to the last series of the
examination).

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.321

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

Editing reference images

F.3

You can edit reference images as follows:

F.3

Set brightness and contrast


Zoom and reduce images and pan image content
Fit to segment size
Flip and rotate
Display pixel coordinates, measure distances and angles
Showing/hiding image text

Selecting images explicitly and implicitly

F.3

You select images explicitly or implicitly before editing them


using the various functions.
Page G.332, Selecting images
F.3

Explicit selection

F.3

Objects selected explicitly can be identified by their solid blue


border.
F.3
Press and hold the Ctrl key while left-clicking an image.
The image is selected explicitly.

F.3

You can select multiple images explicitly.

F.3

Press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking multiple images.

0.0

F.322

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

You can also select a range explicitly.

F.3

Press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking the first image
within the range. Press and hold the Shift key as well. Click
the last image within the range.
You can select multiple series explicitly.

F.3

Start by selecting one image per series explicitly.


Select Edit > Select Series from the main menu or Select
Series from the context menu.
You can cancel an explicit selection by left-clicking inside a
segment. The segment is now selected implicitly.

Implicit selection

F.3

Objects selected implicitly can be identified by their dashed


blue border (input focus).
F.3
The segment selected implicitly receives the function call from
the menu.
F.3
If you open a context menu within a segment, the segment is
automatically selected implicitly. This does not apply if the segment is part of a multiple selection.
F.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.323

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

Changing window values

F.3

Windowing changes the grayscale values, the brightness, and


the contrast of the reference images.
F.3

Windowing using the


mouse

F.3

Position the mouse pointer in the segment you want to window.


Press and hold the center mouse button while dragging the
mouse.

Center +
Width(contrast)

Width+
Center (brightness)

Release the mouse button once the window values are set to
your requirements.

0.0

F.324

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Or

F.3

Window by using these symbol keys on the symbol keypad


of your keyboard.

These symbol keys are mainly for fine adjustment. You may
use the mouse for fast windowing.
F.3

Applying window values


to the series

F.3

You can automatically apply the new window values of an


image to all images in the respective series using the menu. F.3
Activate the Windowing On Series option under Image
Tools.
This setting remains active even after the system is rebooted.
F.3

Auto windowing

F.3

This function allows you to set the contrast and brightness of


the reference images automatically.
F.3
Double-click an image segment with the center mouse button.
Or

F.3

Select Image Tools > Auto Windowing from the main


menu.
Or

F.3

Press this key on the symbol keypad.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.325

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

Enlarging, reducing, and panning reference


images

F.3

You may want to reduce images for a better overview. You may
want to enlarge images for a better view of details. After enlarging images, it is often helpful to pan them to move the relevant
structure into the center of the screen.
F.3

Zooming with the mouse

F.3

You can enlarge, reduce or pan images using the mouse. This
requires you to switch the functionality of the left mouse button
from "Select" to "Enlarge/Reduce/Pan".
F.3

Select Image Tools > Zoom/Pan.


Or

F.3

Select Zoom/Pan from the context menu.


Or

F.3

Click this button on the Position Toolbar.


Page F.44, Position toolbar
Position the mouse pointer in the outer area of the image.
The mouse pointer changes shape.

F.3

0.0

F.326

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

To enlarge the image, press and hold the left mouse button
and drag the mouse pointer upward.
To reduce the image, press and hold the left mouse button
and drag the mouse pointer downward.
Panning with the mouse

F.3

Next, you can use to the mouse to pan the enlarged or reduced
image section in the image segment.
F.3
Position the mouse pointer in the inner area of the image.
The mouse pointer changes shape.

F.3

To pan the image contents, press and hold the left mouse
button and drag the mouse upward, downward, to the right,
or to the left.

Zooming

Moving

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.327

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Applying zooming/panning
to the series
F.3

Examination

You can change the menu settings so that the changes to the
visible image section are automatically applied to all images in
the series.
F.3
Activate the Zoom/Pan On Series option under Image
Tools.
This setting remains active even after the system is rebooted.
F.3

Fit image to segment

F.3

You can automatically enlarge/reduce an image for optimal fit of


the image contents within the segment.
F.3
Select an image.
Select Image Tools > Fit to Segment to enlarge/reduce an
image to fit the segment size.
Or

F.3

Double-click the image with the left mouse button.

Segment size

0.0

F.328

Operator Manual

Examination

Fit to segment height

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

F.3

Use the Fit to Segment Height function to fit the height of the
reference image precisely to the height of the segment.
F.3
Select an image.
Select Image Tools > Fit to Segment Height.

Fit to
segment height

In the two-segment layout, the Fit to Segment and Fit to


Segment Height functions have the same effect.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.329

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

Flipping and rotating images

F.3

You can flip images in the image segments horizontally and vertically and rotate them clockwise by 90.
F.3
These functions are mainly used for improved viewing of breast
biopsy images.
Page F.181, Breast Biopsy
F.3

Flipping images
horizontally and
vertically

Horizontal flipping swaps the top and bottom of the image. The
axis of rotation is horizontal.
F.3
F.3

Vertical flipping swaps the left and right side of the image. The
axis of rotation is vertical.
F.3

Place the input focus on the image you want to flip.


To flip multiple images, select the images explicitly.
Select Image Tools > Flip Horizontally.
Or

F.3

Select Image Tools > Flip Vertically.

0.0

F.330

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Flipping horizontally

Flipping vertically

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.331

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Rotating images
about 90

Examination

You are able to rotate images clockwise about 90.


F.3

F.3

Place the input focus on the image you want to rotate.


To rotate multiple images, select the images explicitly.
Select Image Tools > Rotate 90.

Rotating about 90
degrees

Showing/hiding image text

F.3

By default, image text is displayed in the image segments.


When you edit images (e.g. windowing) the image text is frequently hidden for the time being.
F.3
You can manually disable image text if necessary.

F.3

0.0

F.332

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Select View > Image Text ON from the main menu.


Or

F.3

Click this button on the Position Toolbar.


Page F.44, Position toolbar

(1)

(3)

(4)

(2)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Patient data (name, series image number, date)


Compression, trigger time, and protocol name
Phase-encoding direction and scale
Image data (FOV, slice orientation, table position, slice
position)

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.333

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

Pixel coordinates, distances, and angles

F.3

You can display the position of the mouse pointer within the
image as coordinates in the patient coordinate system.
F.3
Select Image Tools > Modify Graphics.
The functionality of the mouse is switched from Zoom/Pan to
F.3
Modify Graphics.
Position the mouse pointer on the region of interest in the
image.
Press and hold the left mouse button.
The coordinates in the patient coordinate system are displayed
without sign.
F.3
The coordinates of the table position are shown in the second
line if the image was not acquired using the original table position of the series block, but after a relative table movement. F.3
Press and hold the left mouse button while moving the
mouse pointer.
The new coordinates for the image position are displayed.

F.3

0.0

F.334

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring the distance


between two points

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

F.3

In Modify Graphics mode, you can measure the relative distance between two image positions.
F.3

Select Image Tools > Modify Graphics.


Press and hold the left mouse button.
Select the first position for the distance measurement while
keeping the mouse button pressed.
Press the Shift key and drag the mouse.
This starts the distance measurement. You can release the
Shift key as soon as the distance line is displayed.
F.3
Drag the mouse pointer to the second position in the image.
The distance to the first point is displayed below the coordiF.3
nates.
The coordinates and the distance disappear when you release
the mouse button.
F.3
The Viewing task card also allows you to measure distances
and save or film the distance line with the measured distance.
Page G.518, Drawing a distance line, measuring the distance

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.335

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Measuring angles

F.3

Examination

After the distance measurement, you can select a third image


position and determine the angle between the third, first, and
second point.
F.3
Select Image Tools > Modify Graphics.
Measure the distance between two points.
Continue pressing the left mouse button and temporarily add
the Ctrl key while selecting a third image position.
The first and third points will be connected. The angle is displayed below the coordinates and the distance.
F.3
The coordinates, distance, and angle disappear when you
release the mouse button.
F.3

The Viewing task card also allows you to measure distances


and save or film the distance line with the measured distance.
Page G.527, Measuring an angle

0.0

F.336

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Removing images from the image area

F.3

You can clear the images from all segments if you no longer
need the reference images loaded in the image area.
F.3

Select Edit > Clear All Segments.


The images are removed. The image area is empty.

F.3

It is also possible to remove all images of one or more selected


series from the image area.
F.3
Select the series explicitly.
Page F.322, Explicit selection
Select Edit > Clear Document(s).

Repeating scans (Phoenix)

F.3

You can view and evaluate the measured images in the image
segments.
F.3
You can repeat the complete scan of a protocol if, for example,
the result images for a breath-hold scan are of poor quality. F.3
Select the poor quality image.
Select Append To Queue from the context menu.
Or

F.3

Drag & drop the image into the job list.


A copy of the protocol is generated and converted into an executable program instruction.
F.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.337

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

Table position and reference


images

F.3

In most cases, reference images are scanned with the patient


table in a certain position. This position is used for all protocols
of the scan program.
F.3
In some cases, the area of examination may be so large that
you have to move the patient table and run protocols at different
table positions.
F.3
It is important to know the relation between the table positions
of the reference images and the protocol parameters for positioning the scan region.
Page P.181, Position of the scan region
F.3

0.0

F.338

Operator Manual

Examination

Series block

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

F.3

You can view and evaluate several series acquired at various


table positions. In this case, they have to be grouped in a series
block.
F.3
A series block groups all series with positioning data based on
the same defined original table position. The series block
remains valid in case of automatic table movement.
F.3
A new series block begins when you:

F.3

register a new patient


Page E.21, Registering a New Patient
reset the table position to zero
Page F.636, Defining a new center position
move the tabletop to the home position
see System Manual
change the patient positioning
see System Manual
set a new mark with the light localizer
see System Manual
You can end a series block explicitly.

F.3

Select Patient > Close Patient.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.339

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Scanning at a table position

Examination

F.3

At the beginning of an examination, you mark the center of the


examination region at the patient using the light localizer. Then
you move this marked position into the center of the magnet
(center position).
F.3

Setting the origin

F.3

The light localizer is used to define a zero point (original table


position) to which all subsequent scans will refer.
F.3

Localizer measurement

F.3

The image area is still empty. The localizer measurement is


started from the original table position. The reference images
are displayed in the image area after scanning and reconstruction are completed.
F.3

Transferring the table


position of the localizer

F.3

Open the next protocol and plan the slices to be scanned on the
reference images.
F.3
This protocol will be scanned at the same table position as the
reference images.
F.3

Protocol with undefined


table position

F.3

Protocols are scanned at the current table position if no reference images are displayed or you have cleared the reference
images from the image area at the time of scan preparation. F.3
This usually corresponds to the position of the light localizer
marking (original table position). In this case, the protocol does
not have a defined table position. The localizer is a typical protocol using an undefined table position.
F.3

0.0

F.340

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Scans with patient table movement

F.3

You can set the offset of the patient table using the table position of the reference images or the Position of the scan reg.
protocol parameter on the System Common parameter card.
F.3

Transferring the table


position of a normal
protocol

Instead of the localizer images, you load a different series


already measured into the image area.
F.3
F.3

Open the next protocol and plan the slices to be scanned on


these images. The next protocol is run at the same table position as the images loaded in the image area.
F.3
The patient table will automatically move to this table position if
it is different from the original table position.
F.3
F.3

NOTE
The table position of the reference images overwrites the
table position parameters of the open protocol.
F.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.341

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Defining the table position


using protocol parameters F.3

Examination

The image area is empty, e.g., because you have cleared the
reference images from the segments. A protocol is opened. F.3
Enter a patient table offset on the System Miscellaneous
parameter card.
Page P.181, Position of the scan region
The protocol now has a defined table position. As soon as you
start running a protocol, the patient table will move to the new
position.
F.3

F.3

N OT E
If protocols have been scanned at various table positions
within a series block, only one automatic adjustment will be
performed for each table position.
F.3
The adjustment results are stored and reused if additional
scans are performed at the known table position.
F.3

0.0

F.342

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Scan program with multiple localizers

F.3

In some angiography examinations, the examination are is so


large that multiple localizers have to be acquired at different
positions. The subsequent protocols are run using the different
table positions of the localizers.
F.3

Example: Scan program


with two localizers and two
angio protocols
F.3

After transferring the scan program from the Program parameter card to the program control, the first localizer is scanned
automatically at the original table position.
F.3

Once the first localizer is completed, the corresponding reference images are displayed in the image area. The patient table
will automatically move to the preset table position of the second localizer.
F.3
The second localizer starts automatically at this position. After
scanning, the series icon will indicate that reference images
have been reconstructed for this localizer as well.
F.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.343

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

However, they will not be loaded into the image area.

F.3

The images of the first localizer are still displayed in the image
area.
F.3

Position the slices for the first angio protocol on these localizer images.
Start scanning the first angio protocol.
The patient table will move back to the position of the first localizer (original table position). The first angio protocol will be
scanned at this position.
F.3
Load the reference images of the second localizer into the
image area while the first angio protocol is running.

0.0

F.344

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Open the second angio protocol and plan this protocol on the
images of the second localizer.
Start the second angio protocol.

The patient table will move to the second table position. The
second angio protocol will be scanned at the second table position.
F.3
Scanning will finish after all images have been reconstructed.F.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.345

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

Saving, exporting, and transferring


images

F.3

You may save, export or transfer images to other task cards


from the Exam task card.
F.3
The image segments on the Exam task card may contain normal acquisition images or GSP images (reference images with
drawn-in graphic objects).
F.3

F.3

NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are irretrievably
lost.
F.3
Always check for unsaved data and save any data you want
to keep before logging off.
F.3

0.0

F.346

Operator Manual

Examination

Rules for saving,


exporting, and filming

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

The following rules apply to GSP images:


F.3

F.3

GSP graphics (slices, blocks, saturation regions, navigators)


are stored with the GSP images.
GSP graphics are saved in the non-selected version (without
handles), with shadow lines and monochromatic.
Distance lines, angles, etc. are not saved.
GSP graphics on GSP images can no longer be edited on
the Viewing task card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.347

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

Saving images and GSP images

F.3

The Exam task card allows you to group a number of series and
save them in one new series. These series must be part of the
same series block and acquired at the same table position.
F.3

Select the series or images explicitly.


Select Patient > Save As.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

F.3

A name for the new series is suggested. You can modify the
suggested name.
F.3
Select the Save images in new series option.
Modify the new series name if necessary.
Click OK.

0.0

F.348

Operator Manual

Examination

Appending images to
an existing series

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

You can append individual GSP images to an existing series. F.3


F.3

Select the GSP images explicitly.


Select Patient > Save As.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.

F.3

Select the Append images to series option.

In the list, select the series to which the GSP images should
be appended.
Click OK.

The new images of the series have image numbers 5000 and
up. This usually allows you to distinguish between old and
new images within the series.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.349

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Appending an image
to a reference series

F.3

Examination

You can append the GSP image with the input focus to the existing reference series in one step.
F.3
Make sure the input focus is on the correct segment.
Select Patient > Copy Selection.
The selected GSP image will be appended to the existing reference series.
F.3

0.0

F.350

Operator Manual

Examination

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Transferring images to other task cards

F.3

You can directly transfer images and series from the Exam task
card to another opened task card for postprocessing.
F.3
This helps you save time, for example, when loading images
into a postprocessing application.
F.3

Make sure that the tab of the respective task card is visible.
Explicitly select the images or series on the Exam task card.
Drag & drop your selection onto the tab.
The selected images will be transferred to the task card. The
Exam task card will remain in the foreground.
F.3

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.351

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Examination

Filming, sending, and exporting images


Detailed information about filming is available in
Part O

F.3

F.3

Detailed information about data exchange via the network or


Windows XP is available in
Chapter J.3
F.3

Copying images to
the film sheet

F.3

You can copy images directly from the Exam task card to the
virtual film sheet when editing or evaluation has been completed.
F.3

Select the images or series explicitly.


Select Patient > Copy to Film Sheet.
Or

F.3

Press this key on the symbol keypad of your keyboard.


If you have not explicitly selected an image, the image from
the segment with the input focus is copied to the film sheet.

0.0

F.352

Operator Manual

Examination

Sending images

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

F.3

If your system is connected to a hospital computer network


(HIS/RIS), you can send images to other network addresses
directly from the Exam task card.
F.3

Select the series explicitly.


Select Transfer > Send to.
Or

F.3

Press the Send to Node 1 key on the symbol keypad.

Exporting images

F.3

You can save images on your hard disk as single files.

F.3

Select the series explicitly.


Select Transfer > Export to file system.
The Export to File System dialog box opens.

F.3

Enter the path C:\TEMP and click OK.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.353

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Checking data transfer

F.3

Examination

You can check and control processing of export and network


jobs.
F.3

Select Transfer > Organize Local Jobs or Transfer > Organize Network Jobs.
Or

F.3

Press the Ctrl + L or Ctrl + N key combination.


Or

F.3

Click the corresponding icon on the status bar.


A dialog box for checking and controlling jobs is displayed.
Page J.63, Viewing and checking the transfer jobs

F.3

0.0

F.354

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

F.4

Positioning Slices

F.4

After you have scanned and loaded reference images and optimized their display according to your diagnostic question, you
are able to use them for defining the position, scope, and orientation of the region to be examined.
Page F.14, Procedure for routine scanning
F.4
Depending on the protocol, the system will scan slices or slabs
for subsequent reconstruction.
F.4
You can plan saturation regions to avoid motion artifacts.

F.4

A number of special protocols - based on navigator sequences


- contain additional navigator objects.
F.4
These graphic objects are displayed in the reference images as
soon as you open a protocol.
F.4
The graphic objects of the protocol usually need to be adapted
to the anatomy of your patient. The mouse and the graphic slice
positioning tools allow you to perform tasks quickly and easily.F.4
If these positioning tools are not accurate enough, you may set
the parameters of the graphic objects on the Geometry parameter card.
Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.41

Positioning Slices

Examination

Preparing for positioning

F.4

After completing the localizer, the next protocol automatically


opens, allowing you to position the slices to be scanned.
F.4

Opening a protocol

F.4

If you want to adjust the slices of a subsequent protocol, open


the protocol manually.
F.4
Double-click a protocol in the program control.
Or

F.4

Select a protocol in the program control.


Click the Open button or select Open from the context menu.
The program entry will be moved to the right in the job list. The
protocol opens and its parameters are displayed on the paramF.4
eter card.
Each program instruction in the part of the job list that has not
run yet can be opened for execution.
Page F.640, Opening the next protocol for editing

completed scan
current scan
opened protocol

0.0

F.42

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Various information about the open protocol is displayed below


the image area.
F.4

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Scan time
PAT Acceleration factor
Voxel size (rounded up to the next 1/10 mm)
Relative signal-to-noise ratio
Sequence type

If you keep the mouse pointer near the voxel size display, a
tool tip will be displayed stating the exact voxel size.
The graphic objects of the protocol (slices, slabs, navigators,
and saturation regions) are displayed in the reference images
in the image area.
F.4

Canceling slice
positioning

F.4

You can cancel processing of the opened protocol and restore


it to its original status.
F.4

Click the Cancel button on the program control.


All objects you have added or changed will be removed from the
reference images. The reference images are still displayed in
the image segments.
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.43

Positioning Slices

Position toolbar

Examination

F.4

Use the Position Toolbar to graphically position the objects to


be scanned.
F.4

Click on the Position Toolbar button on the tool bar of the


Exam card.
Or

F.4

Go to the main menu and select View > Position Toolbar.


Or

F.4

Select Position Toolbar from the context menu.


The Position Toolbar is displayed:

F.4

0.0

F.44

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Graphic objects

F.4

Various graphic objects are displayed in the reference images,


depending on the sequence preset in the protocol.
F.4
Slice groups (for 2D scans)
Page F.46
3D/Slabs (for 3D scans)
Page F.48
Saturation regions (possible for both 2D and 3D scans)
Page F.410
Navigator objects (for Navigator sequences)
Page F.415
Spectroscopy volume element
(e.g. for SVS protocols)
Spectroscopy CSI slice
(e.g. for CSI protocols)
Protocols and objects of spectroscopy are explained in a separate manual.
see MR Spectroscopy Operator Manual

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.45

Positioning Slices

Examination

Slices and slice groups

F.4

In 2D scanning, you use slice groups to define the extent, position, and orientation of the examination area to be scanned.
Slice groups are composed of individual slices used for subsequent reconstruction of one or more tomographic images.
F.4
Slices always belong to a slice group. During graphic slice positioning you have to select an entire slice group. You are not able
to select individual slices. The only exception is a slice group
that consists of one slice only.
F.4
All slices of a group are located in parallel, have the same slice
thickness, slice distance and field of view (FoV) as well as the
same phase-oversampling factor (for reducing artifacts).
F.4

Slice thickness
Slice distance

Phase FOV
Read FOV

0.0

F.46

Operator Manual

Examination

Field of view (FOV)

Positioning Slices

F.4

The field of view of a slice group is defined by its length and


width. The length and width corresponds to the read-out and
phase-encoding directions in the magnetic field.
Page F.477, Changing the field of view (FOV) via the mouse
F.4

Slice thickness and slice


distance

F.4

The distance between the slices of a slice group is expressed


as a percentage of the slice thickness. In other words, as soon
as you change the slice thickness of a group, the absolute slice
distance changes as well.
F.4
100%
The slice distance is equal to the slice thickness.
0%
The slices are contiguous.
< 0%
The slices overlap.
-100%
The slices overlap fully

Factor > 0

Factor 0

Factor < 0

Factor -1

Page P.15, Dist. factor  Routine, Geometry Common


Page F.473, Increasing the distance between slices/slabs
Page F.471, Increasing the number of slices/slabs
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.47

Positioning Slices

Examination

Slabs and slab groups

F.4

For 3D scans, phase-encoding is applied to the spins in the


slice-selection direction. This allows you to measure entire volume ranges. In graphic slice positioning, these volume ranges
are defined as 3D slabs.
F.4
Slabs are made up of contiguous slices (that is, slices without
any overlap or distance between them). The thickness of a slab
is the product of the effective slice thickness and the number of
slices.
F.4

Effective slice thickness

Slab thickness
Read FOV
Phase FOV

0.0

F.48

Operator Manual

Examination

Slab groups

Positioning Slices

F.4

Similar to slices, 3D slabs are combined into slab groups.

F.4

A slab group consists of several parallel 3D slabs that have the


same thickness and distance between them.
F.4
The slab distance is a percentage of the slab thickness:

F.4

> 0%
There is a distance between the slabs of a group.
0%
The slabs of the group are contiguous (without any distance
between them).
< 0%
The slabs of the group overlap.
Similar to a slice group, a 3D slab group may only be positioned
as a unit.
F.4
Page F.473, Increasing the distance between slices/slabs
Page F.472
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.49

Positioning Slices

Examination

Saturation regions

F.4

A saturation region (sat for short) is a volume where the MR signal is suppressed by an RF saturation pulse.
F.4

Standard saturation
regions

F.4

You are able to freely-define the position, orientation, and slice


thickness for standard saturation regions. Several saturation
regions can be planned in a single protocol. Their orientation,
position, and thickness is freely-selectable. Standard saturation
regions are not associated with a slice or slab group.
F.4

0.0

F.410

Operator Manual

Examination

Parallel saturation
regions

Positioning Slices

F.4

Parallel saturation regions may be positioned in pairs or individually (positive or negative sat). They are associated with and
parallel to a slice or slab group. The distance from the saturation region to the outermost slice is set via a protocol parameter.
Page P.119
F.4
If you translate, rotate, or change the particular slice or slab
group, the two saturation regions are adjusted accordingly. F.4

(1) Positive parallel sat


(2) Negative parallel sat
(3) Paired parallel saturation regions

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.411

Positioning Slices

Examination

The names of the parallel saturation regions are derived from


the preferred direction (orientation) of the slice/slab groups and
may be selected accordingly in the Geometry parameter task
card.
Page F.529, Parameter card Geometry Saturator
F.4
F.4

Orientation of the slice group

Negative parallel sat

Positive parallel sat

Sagittal preferred

Parallel R (right)

Parallel L (left)

Coronal preferred

Parallel A (anterior)

Parallel P (posterior)

Parallel F (feet)

Parallel H (head)

Transverse preferred

0.0

F.412

Operator Manual

Examination

Tracking sat regions

Positioning Slices

F.4

You are able to plan tracking sat regions only for certain protocols. These protocols use sequences for sequential multi-slice
scans and scan one slice group or slab group only.
F.4
A tracking sat region is associated with and parallel to the slices
of a slice or slab group. It may be positioned on either side of
the slice or slab group.
F.4
The tracking sat region passes through the slice/slab group in
either the ascending or descending direction. To avoid shifting
the slice into a region that is already saturated, the sequential
direction is always away from the sat band. For example, for
transverse slices with the sat band above the slice, the excitation order (series) must be descending. Remember that DICOM
defines 'ascending' as moving from foot to head. The name of
the sat depends on the preferred direction of the slice/3D slab
group. Suitable sats may be selected from the list on the Geometry parameter task card.
Page F.529, Parameter card Geometry Saturator
F.4
F.4

Orientation of the slice group

Order of RF excitation

Sat name

Sagittal preferred

Ascending

Tracking R -> L

Sagittal preferred

Descending

Tracking L -> R

Coronal preferred

Ascending

Tracking A -> P

Coronal preferred

Descending

Tracking P -> A

Transverse preferred

Ascending

Tracking F -> H

Transverse preferred

Descending

Tracking H -> F

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.413

Positioning Slices

Examination

During scanning, the saturation region tracks the most recently


scanned slice. The distance between the sat and this particular
slice is the same as at the beginning of the scan (distance to the
first slice of the slice or slab group).
F.4
With transverse images, an ascending saturation region is
located below and a descending saturation region is located
above the slice group.
F.4

(1) Tracking Sat F -> H


(2) Tracking H -> F
(3) Normal vector
The thickness and distance of a tracking saturation region
may be set on the Geometry parameter task card only.
Page F.529, Parameter card Geometry Saturator

0.0

F.414

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Navigator Objects

F.4

Navigator objects are used in special navigator sequences,


e.g., to record the movement of the diaphragm and uptake of
contrast media, and to trigger the signal that starts the scan. F.4
There are two types of navigator objects:

F.4

Navigator cuboid
finite cuboid volume
Navigator pen
infinitely long "pen"
Parameter of navigator
objects

F.4

Navigator pen

Navigator cuboid

(1) Basic vector 1 (normal direction)


(2) Basic vector 2 (phase-encoding direction)
(3) Extent in the readout direction (navigator direction)

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.415

Positioning Slices

Examination

The base area of navigator objects is defined by the extent in


the direction of base vector 1 and base vector 2.
F.4
Unlike navigator cuboids, navigator pens have an infinite extent
in the navigator direction.
F.4
A two-dimensional excitation profile may be defined within the
base area. This excitation profile is defined by the sequence.
Depending on the application, it may have a rectangular, trapezoidal, or elliptical contour.
F.4
Navigator objects may be freely-positioned and oriented. It is
not possible to add new navigator objects with the mouse. They
may be added only on the Geometry/Navigator parameter
task card.
F.4

0.0

F.416

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Display of graphic objects in the reference


images

F.4

As soon as you have scanned or loaded reference images, the


graphic display shows the intersection or projection of your
planned slices or slabs together with the reference images. F.4
The display used for these objects shows you their position and
orientation with respect to the reference images.
F.4

Intersecting or
projection areas

If a graphic object intersects the reference image at an angle


30, the lines or areas of this intersection are displayed.
F.4
F.4

Example:
Sagittal slices in a transverse image.

F.4

When graphic objects intersect the reference images at a shallow angle (30),they are projected onto the reference image.
In this case, a projection area is displayed instead of intersecting lines.
F.4
In a graphic object located parallel to the reference image, the
projection area corresponds exactly to the dimensions of the
field of view (FoV).
F.4
Example:
Sagittal slices in a sagittal image.

F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.417

Positioning Slices

Examination

Upon request, Siemens Service will modify the default for the
limit angle (30). For CSI slices, the default for the limit angle
is 45.
If several graphic objects intersect the image at a shallow angle
and one of these objects is selected, only the projection area of
the selected object is displayed.
F.4

The projection area will not be displayed, if several graphic


objects intersect the image at a shallow angle and none of the
objects is selected.
F.4

0.0

F.418

Operator Manual

Examination

Angle of intersection

Reference
image

Perpendicular intersection

Positioning Slices

F.4

The display of intersection and projection lines in reference


images shows you whether a graphic object is located in perpendicular, single-oblique, or double-oblique orientation to the
reference image.
F.4

Reference
image

Single-oblique intersection

Reference
image

Double-oblique intersection

F.4

NOTE
Intersections shown as a continuous or dashed line provide
information only about the position of the intersection
with respect to the reference image.
F.4
The display does not provide information regarding the
position of the planned slice or slab to standard
anatomical views, since oblique or double-oblique
intersections may be used as reference images as well. F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.419

Positioning Slices

Single-oblique
intersection

Examination

F.4

With single oblique intersections, one side of the field of view


(FOV) is located in parallel with the intersecting line. The projection area shows a double border for this purpose. An arrow
indicates the phase-encoding direction of the currently projected intersection area.
F.4

Single-oblique slice group


intersecting the reference
image

Single-oblique slice group


that does not intersect the
reference image

0.0

F.420

Operator Manual

Examination

Double-oblique
intersections

Positioning Slices

F.4

With double oblique intersections, neither of the two sides of the


field of view (FOV) of the slice group is parallel with the common
line of intersection with the reference image. Accordingly, two
side areas are displayed on the projection area, providing a
spatial impression. The arrows indicate the phase-encoding
direction.
F.4

Shift slice group without


Phase oversampling

Shift slice group with


Phase oversampling

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.421

Positioning Slices

Partial views with oblique


intersections

Examination

F.4

With oblique intersections, not all intersections of a slice or slab


group will be intersecting the reference image. Some slices may
be completely in front of or behind the reference image. As a
result, they are not drawn as a line of intersection.
F.4
The bar in the reference image shows you the number of slices
planned that do not intersect the reference image.
F.4

Oblique slice group in the


coronal reference image

Oblique slice group in the


transverse reference image

Box mode

Package mode

0.0

F.422

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Partial view of an oblique slice group in the transverse reference image

If you have magnified a reference image and shifted the image


content in the image segment, you may not be able to see the
planned graphic object in the reference image.
F.4
Reduce the reference image to its original size again.
Or

F.4

Select the invisible slice/slab group on the Routine/


Geometry parameter card.
Select Fit to Image or Perpendicular from the Protocol
menu or the context menu to move the center of the slice
group to the plane of the reference image.
This function allows you to change the position of the slice/
slab group.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.423

Positioning Slices

Display in line or
box mode

Examination

F.4

The intersection of a slice through a reference image can be


displayed either as a line (line mode) or as a rectangle (box
mode).
F.4

Box mode

Line mode

Oblique and perpendicular intersection in the coronal reference


image

Oblique and perpendicular intersection in the transverse reference


image

0.0

F.424

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

The box mode shows the actual intersection surface and therefore the anatomical region covered by the slice.
F.4
In line mode you are able to see the center line of an intersection area.
F.4

Click the appropriate button on the tool bar.


Or

F.4

Select View > Display > Line mode ON /Off from the menu.
Line mode is activated.
F.4

Select View > Graphics > Line mode ON / OFF again from
the menu.
The Box mode is activated.
F.4

Display in
Package mode

F.4

In package mode you are able to hide the individual lines of


intersection of the slice/slab groups. Only the outline of the
intersection area of the entire group and its thickness are visible.
F.4
Select package mode if your slice group contains a large number of individual slices to make your display clearer.
F.4
Select View > Display > Package mode ON/OFF or click
on-screen.
Package mode is activated. The dashed center lines show the
thickness of the individual slices or individual 3D slab.
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.425

Positioning Slices

Examination

Box mode

Package mode

Slice or slab groups are automatically displayed in package


mode if the elements of the group overlap or are very close
together (depending on the zoom setting (factor) of the reference image).

0.0

F.426

Operator Manual

Examination

Display of saturation
regions

Positioning Slices

F.4

Saturation regions that intersect the reference image are displayed as cross-hatched bars.
F.4
Saturation regions that are perpendicular to the reference
image have a continuous border. Oblique saturation regions
have a dashed line border.
F.4

Oblique and perpendicular


saturation region in the
sagittal reference image

As you select a saturation region, the bar is highlighted. The


center (pivot) and the handles are displayed.
F.4
A saturation region running parallel to the reference image
completely covers the reference image with its cross-hatched
shading if the region includes the image plane of the reference
image.
F.4
It is not possible to project saturation regions onto reference
images.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.427

Positioning Slices

Display of navigator
objects

Examination

F.4

Non-selected navigator objects are displayed in turquoise in the


reference images.
F.4
Non-selected navigator pens are displayed in blue.
F.4

As soon as you select a navigator cuboid or navigator pen, it is


displayed in yellow and the handles appear.
F.4

The navigator objects are always shown with projection lines.


This gives you a spatial impression of the position and extent of
the navigator object.
F.4

If the navigator does not have a common intersection with


the reference image, the project lines will be shown as
dashed lines.

If the navigator does have a common intersection with the


reference image, the project lines will be shown as continuous lines. The intersection area, in this case, is shown as
dashed lines.

0.0

F.428

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

The arrow next to the navigator object shows the direction of


base vector 2 and the navigation direction.
F.4
The arrow may be displayed in four different ways to distinguish
between four different situations.
F.4
(1) The arrow points in the direction of the base vector 2
(phase-encoding direction). The navigator orientation
passes into the image plane.
(2) The arrow points in the direction of the base vector 2
(phase-encoding direction). The navigator orientation runs
out of the image plane.
(3) The arrow with two lines points in the navigator direction.
The direction of base vector 2 is not displayed, since the
angle between the reference image and the direction of the
base vector 2 is between 45 and 90.
(4) Two arrows are visible. The arrow points in the direction of
the base vector 2 (phase-encoding direction). The arrow
with two lines points in the navigator direction.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.429

Positioning Slices

Examination

Graphic slice positioning (GSP)

F.4

You can translate or rotate the graphic objects in the reference


images (slices, slabs, saturation regions, navigators). You can
also delete this object, add new objects, or change the parameters of the objects.
F.4
To this end, you are using the Position Toolbar or the mouse.F.4
You may also use the parameter cards to manipulate graphic
objects as described. In this case, you adjust the parameters
numerically and work mainly in the Geometry parameter card.
Page F.524, Geometry Common parameter card (2D)
F.4

0.0

F.430

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Displaying orientation aids

F.4

The buttons on the Position Toolbar and the menu commands


display additional orientation aids in the reference images. This
facilitates processing graphic objects.
F.4

Changing phase oversampling


Page F.432, Display of phase oversampling
F.4

Reference lines on/off


Page F.434, Reference image position lines
F.4

Coil positions on/off


Page F.434, Coil elements
F.4

Adjust volume on/off


Page F.437, Adjustment volume
F.4

Image text on/off


Page F.332, Showing/hiding image text
F.4

Hide/Show slice oversampling.


Page F.433, Display of slice oversampling
F.4

Show/hide projection display (menu)


Page F.436, Projection display
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.431

Positioning Slices

Examination

Display of phase
oversampling
F.4

Phase oversampling is recommended to prevent aliasing artifacts. The field of view (FoV) is symmetrically expanded in the
phase-encoding direction on both sides of the initial FoV.
F.4
This addition to the FoV is not visible in the final images The
phase-oversampled area is displayed as dashed lines in the reference image.
F.4

Box mode

15%

100%

Phase-encoding direction

Package mode

15%

15%

100%

15%

Phase-encoding direction

The percentage given refers to the field of view (FOV) in the


phase-encoding direction. For example, 30% phase oversampling would increase the field of view (FOV) by 15% on both
sides. The scan time is also prolonged by 30%.
F.4

You may change the phase oversampling via the mouse.


Page F.480, Changing phase oversampling via the mouseF.4

0.0

F.432

Operator Manual

Examination

Display of slice
oversampling

Positioning Slices

F.4

Slice oversampling is suitable for 3D scans only. Slice oversampling defines an area of a slice protruding on both sides (of a 3D
slab). This additional area is excited during the scan.
F.4

Box mode: Slice oversampling

Box mode: Slice and phase oversampling

25 %

100 %
25 %

Phase-encoding direction

Phase-encoding direction

To improve the display of objects, deactivate the display of slice


oversampling.
F.4
Click this button.
Or

F.4

Select View > Graphics > Hide Slice Oversampling via


the main menu.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.433

Positioning Slices

Reference image position


lines

Examination

F.4

The position lines of the reference image make it easier for you
to orient the images in space and plan the slices correctly for
subsequent scans.
F.4

Click the button to activate display of the position lines.


Or

F.4

Select View > Reference Lines ON.


The menu item is now shown with a check mark.

Coil elements

F.4

F.4

The currently connected coils and individual coil elements may


be displayed for support during the examination. This facilitates
your selecting the correct coil elements for the region of the
body to be examined.
F.4
Only coils with a known table position may be displayed. These
are either coils with fixed table positions or coils whose position
was determined dynamically via application adjustment.
F.4

0.0

F.434

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Open the protocol.


The coil elements that are connected and can be displayed are
shown.
F.4
Click this button.
Or

F.4

Select the View > Coil Positions On.


The menu item is now shown with a check mark.

F.4

Coil elements are only displayed preferably on sagittal or


coronal reference images.
The coil elements are displayed symbolically as thin bars. The
length of the bar corresponds to the length (sensitive region) of
the coil element.
F.4
Coil elements selected for the examination are identified by
solid white bars. Coil elements not selected for the examination
are displayed as bars edged in red.
F.4

You can select and deselect coil elements both via the mouse
in the image segment or on the System parameter card.
Page F.535, Parameter card System-Coils

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.435

Positioning Slices

Projection display

Examination

F.4

Normally, the projection display of slices/slabs is active only


when the angle between the graphic object and the reference
image is less than 30.
F.4
However, you may change this threshold.

F.4

Select View > Graphics > Projection On from the main


menu.
The menu item is now shown with a check mark.

F.4

The objects are displayed as a projection on the reference


images.
F.4

0.0

F.436

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjustment volume

Positioning Slices

F.4

In some cases it may be useful to display the adjustment volume in the reference images.
F.4

Click the button to activate display of the adjustment volume.


Or

F.4

Select Adjust Volume On/Off.


The adjustment volume is marked green in the reference
images and allows for editing.
Page C.28, Editing the adjustment volume graphically
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.437

Positioning Slices

Shadow lines

Examination

F.4

To improve the display of graphic objects (GSP Graphic Slice


Positioning objects) in light images, you can include shadow
lines in the intersection and projection areas.
F.4
Select View > Graphics > Shadow On.
The menu item is marked with a check mark.

F.4

Shadow On/Off

Whenever you save or copy reference images containing


graphic objects to a film sheet, the shadow lines will always
be included and displayed. It does not matter whether the
Shadow On option is activated or deactivated.

0.0

F.438

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Selecting graphic objects

F.4

Before you can edit a graphic object in one of the reference


images you must first select it.
F.4
You can select objects in one of two ways:

F.4

Explicit selection
Implicit selection
("Implicit selection by direct manipulation")

Explicit selection

F.4

Select an object by clicking an intersection or projection line.


Or

F.4

Select an object from the Slice Group, Slab Group, or Navigator list on the Geometry or Routine parameter card.
The graphic object is now highlighted. The handles are displayed.
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.439

Positioning Slices

Examination

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(1) Extent handles


(e.g. for changing slice thickness;
not for projection areas)
(2) FOV handles or phase oversampling handles
(enlarge scan range)
(3) Pivot handle
(move)
You can now explicitly deselect objects again:

F.4

Select Edit > Deselect All from the main menu.


Or

F.4

Select another graphic object.

0.0

F.440

Operator Manual

Examination

Implicit selection

Positioning Slices

F.4

Move the mouse cursor over one of the graphic objects.


The mouse cursor changes shape allowing you to move or
rotate the graphic object with the mouse.
F.4
You may now directly move or rotate the graphic via the
mouse without having to click it.
As soon as you edit a graphic object, it is implicitly selected. Its
settings are displayed on the parameter cards.
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.441

Positioning Slices

Examination

Moving objects

F.4

Slice groups, slab groups, saturation regions, or navigator


objects planned in a protocol usually need to be moved to fit the
anatomy of the patient.
F.4
There are various ways of moving objects:
Panning with the mouse
Moving via menu commands
Positioning to the millimeter on the Geometry parameter
card
Page F.579, Entering the slice position with millimeter
precision

F.4

0.0

F.442

Operator Manual

Examination

Moving via the mouse

Positioning Slices

F.4

Select a graphic object.


The pivot handle is displayed in the center of the object displayed.
F.4
Place the mouse cursor on the pivot handle, hold the left
mouse button down, and move the object to the required
position.
If the pivot handle of an object is no longer visible in the reference images:
F.4
Press the Shift key on your keyboard and hold the key down.
Place the mouse pointer on the intersection or position line
of a graphic object.
Move the region while holding the left mouse button down.
To move graphic objects in the projection display, click on the
contour line and move the object while keeping the mouse
button pressed.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.443

Positioning Slices

Examination

Panning with the mouse

The display of the repositioned object is updated on all reference images.


F.4

Parallel tracking saturation regions may be moved only


together with slices or slabs assigned to them.

0.0

F.444

Operator Manual

Examination

Moving a slice group


by half a slice distance

Positioning Slices

F.4

You can move slice groups by half the distance between slices
in the positive or negative slice-selection direction.
F.4
This greatly simplifies the task of positioning a second scan to
fill the gaps between the slices of the first scan. This is particularly helpful when the number of slices in one scan does not suffice to provide for a contiguous anatomic coverage of a specific
volume (e.g., some breath-hold exams).
F.4

Select Protocol > Gap Filling + or Protocol > Gap Filling .


Or

F.4

Press the short cut Ctrl + 6 (Gap Filling +) or Strg + 5 (Gap


Filling -).

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.445

Positioning Slices

Moving the slice group


as a whole

Examination

F.4

Unlike with the Gap filling function, you are able to move a slice
group by the thickness of the entire group in one step. This function is especially suitable for multiple breath-hold scans.
F.4

Select Protocol > Stack + or Protocol > Stack .


Or

F.4

Press the short cut Ctrl + 4 (Stack +) or Ctrl + 3 (Stack -).

Stack+

If the slice group contains only one slice, it will be moved


across its slice thickness in or against the slice-selection
direction.

0.0

F.446

Operator Manual

Examination

Moving centers into the


reference image plane

Positioning Slices

F.4

You are able to move the centers of slice/slab groups and navigator objects precisely into the reference plane (image plane of
the reference image).
F.4

Place the input focus on the reference image to be used as


the reference plane.
The image will have a bright border.
F.4

Select Protocol > Shift to Image.


Or

F.4

Place the mouse cursor on the reference image, right-click,


and select Shift to Image from the context menu.
The centers of all graphic objects (except saturation regions)
will be moved into the reference plane.
F.4
Graphic objects (except for saturation regions) whose centers
lie outside the visible area of the reference image are moved
towards the center of this image.
F.4
It is not possible to move slice groups, slab groups, and saturation regions that are parallel with the reference image to the
reference image plane in this manner.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.447

Positioning Slices

Examination

Example: The center of a slice group is moved into the image


area of the reference image by selecting Shift to Image.
F.4

Shift to Image

0.0

F.448

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Rotating objects

F.4

You can rotate graphic objects to fit them to an anatomical


structure.
F.4
There are various ways of rotating objects:
Rotating using the mouse
Rotating using menu commands
Orientation to the degree set on the Geometry parameter
card
Page F.577, Setting the slice orientation at a precise
angle

Rotating using
the mouse

F.4

Select the graphic object explicitly.


F.4

Click on the selected object with the left mouse button and
rotate it about its center.
The rotational axis is now perpendicular to the reference image.F.4

Rotating

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.449

Positioning Slices

Examination

Or

F.4

Move the pointer over the object.


The pointer changes shape when placed over the delimitation
F.4
lines.
Hold the left mouse button down and rotate the object about
its center.

Rotating a navigator
cuboid

F.4

Place the mouse cursor on one of the contour lines of the


navigator cuboid. Do not use the handle.
The mouse pointer changes shape. S.3

F.4

Press the left mouse button and drag it in the desired direction of rotation.

Rotating a regular
saturation region and
navigator pen

Regular saturation regions and navigator pens are rotated similar to slice and slab groups.
F.4
F.4

The center (pivot) always appears at the position clicked with


the mouse. This point is the center of rotation.
F.4
You can move the center of rotation by clicking another position
in the Sat region.
F.4
Parallel and tracking saturation regions may be rotated only
with the slices or slabs assigned to them.

0.0

F.450

Operator Manual

Examination

Combining rotate and


shift functions

Positioning Slices

You may rotate and move objects in one step.


F.4

F.4

Hold the Shift key down to move the objects.


Release the Shift key to rotate it.
Press the Shift key again to shift the object again.

Rotating Objects in the


Plane

F.4

You can rotate slice and 3D block groups in the plane. These
objects must be projection areas (flat section with reference
image).
F.4

Press the Ctrl key and move the cursor over the object.
The pointer changes shape when placed over the delimitation
lines.
F.4
Hold the left mouse button down, press the Ctrl key, and
rotate the object about its center.
The rotational axis runs through the center of the graphic object
and is perpendicular to the object.
F.4

Rotating in the plane

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.451

Positioning Slices

Rotation of oblique
intersections

Examination

F.4

When you rotate slices the center of which is not in the plane of
rotation (intersections inclined in one or two axes), the center of
the slice moves as you rotate the slice.
F.4

Swapping the phase


direction

The main orientation of the object may change as it is rotated.F.4


F.4

If the object has a rectangular FOV, you may find that the intersection lines in the result display are noticeably longer or
shorter than originally, because of the realigned phase-encoding direction of the FoV.
F.4
Example:
A mostly transverse slice group becomes a mostly coronal slice
group.
F.4

Rotating

After the rotation, check the phase-encoding direction and


swap it if necessary.
F.4

0.0

F.452

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Explicitly select a slice/slab group or a navigator object.


Select Protocol > Swap Phase from the main menu or
Swap Phase from the context menu.
The field of view of the selected object is rotated about 90. The
phase-encoding and readout directions are swapped.
F.4

Swapping phases

It is not possible to apply this method to saturation regions.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.453

Positioning Slices

Tilt a slice group by 90

Examination

F.4

When you tilt a slice group by 90, the intersection line appears
rotated counterclockwise by 90.
F.4

Select the saturation group.


Select Protocol > Turn Group.
The center of the slice group remains unchanged.

F.4

Tilting a group

0.0

F.454

Operator Manual

Examination

Aligning graphic objects


perpendicularly

Positioning Slices

F.4

You may change oblique intersections of the graphic object to


align them perpendicularly to the reference image.
F.4
Select a reference image.
Select a graphic object that obliquely intersects the reference
image.
Select Protocol > Perpendicular.
Or

F.4

Select Perpendicular from the context menu.


Or

F.4

Press the short cut Ctrl + 1.


The selected slice or slab group will be aligned perpendicularly
to the reference image. Its center will then be moved into the
reference image plane.
F.4

Aligning perpendicularly

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.455

Positioning Slices

Examination

If a navigator intersects the reference image at an angle 45,


the navigator direction will be aligned perpendicular to the
image.
If a navigator intersects the reference image at an angle 45,
the navigator direction will be aligned in the image plane.
If no object is selected, Perpendicular will be applied to all
oblique slice and slab groups. Oblique saturation regions or
navigators are not aligned.

0.0

F.456

Operator Manual

Examination

Making slices mutually


orthogonal

Positioning Slices

F.4

You can align a slice group orthogonally to another planned


slice group.
F.4
Select the slice group you want to align.
Select Protocol > Orthogonal.
Or

F.4

Press the short cut Ctrl + 2.


The center of the aligned slice will be in the plane of the reference slice.
F.4

Orthogonal

The Perpendicular function is used to align objects to the reference image plane. The Orthogonal function is used to
align the selected slice to the reference slice.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.457

Positioning Slices

Examination

Adding slice and slab groups

F.4

If the slice or slab groups shown in the reference images are not
suitable to your diagnostic question, other groups may be
added.
F.4
The number of slice or slab groups that you can add depends
on the protocol selected.
Page F.571, Soft limits and extended limits
F.4
The order in which new slices or slabs are drawn and edited
does not affect the order of scanning or numbering reconstructed images.
Page F.667, Numbering of reconstructed images
F.4

There are various ways of adding new slice groups:

F.4

Freely-selectable slice positioning via the mouse


Positioning new slices in the center of the image segment
Positioning a new slices using an orientation line
Adding new slices in the 3-point mode

0.0

F.458

Operator Manual

Examination

Rules for adding

Positioning Slices

F.4

No slice group was selected before adding:

F.4

The new slice group contains one slice.


The center of this slice is in the reference image plane.
Another slice group was selected before adding:

F.4

The new slice group inherits the properties of the selected


group (number of slices, distance factor, swap, phase oversampling and slice oversampling).
The new slice group has the same orientation as the reference slice group and is moved in the slice-selection direction
(normal direction) parallel to the thickness of the entire group
(Stack+).

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.459

Positioning Slices

Freely positioning
slice groups

Examination

F.4

Use the mouse to move new slice or slab groups into any position in the reference image.
F.4

Click the Create Slice(Slab) Group button.


The mouse pointer changes shape.
F.4

Click the position in the reference image where you want to


insert a new slice group.
The center of the slice or slab group will appear in the image
plane of the reference image.
F.4

Create slice (slab)


group

Hold the mouse button down and rotate/move the new slice or
slab group with the mouse. direction. Click the image again to
create the next slice/3D slab group.
F.4

0.0

F.460

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning graphic
objects in the center
of the image segment

Positioning Slices

F.4

You are able to insert new objects in the center of the selected
image segment. The center of the newly created slice or slab
group is positioned precisely in the image plane of the reference
image.
F.4

Select Protocol > Add Slice(Slab) Group.


If an existing group is selected, the new slice group will be
shifted parallel and contiguous to the selected group.
F.4

Use orientation lines


to position slice
groups

F.4

You may also position a new slice/slab group along an orientation line. To this end, draw the line into the reference image
using the mouse. The slice/slab group is then positioned along
the line and is located perpendicularly to the reference image.
The center of the new slice/slab group is in the plane of the reference image and positioned exactly between the start and end
point of the orientation line.
F.4

Place the mouse cursor on the starting point of the line.


Keep the left mouse button pressed and drag the mouse cursor to the point where you want to position the new slice/slab
group.
The orientation line is drawn in.

F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.461

Positioning Slices

Examination

You can change the direction and length of the line, as long as
you hold the mouse button down.
F.4
Release the mouse button.
The new slice/slab group is displayed.

Exiting "Create Slice (Slab)


Group" mode
F.4

F.4

Select another mode from the tool bar.


Or

F.4

Select another mode from the main menu, for example,


Image Tools > Modify Graphics.
Or

F.4

Select another mode from the context menu, for example,


Zoom/Pan On.

If you reach the maximum number of slice(slab) groups, the


Create Slice(Slab) Group mode will be automatically ended.

0.0

F.462

Operator Manual

Examination

Adding a slice/slab
group in 3 point mode

Positioning Slices

F.4

This mode allows you to use random reference images to determine 3 points that define a plane. You are now adding a new
slice or slab group. The center slice or slab of this group passes
exactly through this plane. You can also align an existing slice
or slab group to this plane.
F.4
When selecting the 3 points, you may scroll through the reference images or load new ones.
F.4
Ensure that no graphic objects are selected. Select Edit >
Deselect All.
If you want to change an existing slice or slab group, verify
that it is not selected.
Click the Create Slice (Slab) Group (3 point) button to activate this mode.
The mouse pointer changes shape.
F.4

Click three positions successively in one or more reference


images.
After each mouse click, a mark appears at the position you
selected.
F.4
As long as the third mark is not positioned, you may move the
corner marks by dragging them with the mouse. Click on them
again for removal.
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.463

Positioning Slices

Examination

Example: Localization of the right coronary artery

F.4

(1) Define the first point


(2) Define the second point
(3) Define the third point,
the new slab is displayed

0.0

F.464

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

After you have defined the position of the third point, the new
slice or slab group will appear in the reference images and/or
the previously selected slice will be aligned with the 3 points. F.4
If you have created a new group, it will be selected automatically. You can orient it by specifying 3 points.
You can add additional groups in three-point mode as follows. F.4
Deselect the last group you created.
Click three positions successively in one or more reference
images.
Finally, press the Esc key to deactivate Create Slice (Slab)
Group (3 points) mode.
Or

F.4

Select Modify Graphics mode on the tool bar.


Or

F.4

Switch to another mode (using the tool bar, main menu, or


context menu).

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.465

Positioning Slices

Examination

Adding saturation regions

F.4

You may add further regular saturation regions in a protocol just


like slice or slab groups.
F.4
Parallel and tracking saturation regions may only be added on
the Geometry parameter card. They cannot be added via
graphic slice positioning.
Page F.529, Parameter card Geometry Saturator
F.4

Creating a regular
saturation region in the
center of the image
segment

Select a reference image.


Select Protocol > Add Sat to position a regular saturation
region in the center of the image.
F.4

The new saturation region appears perpendicular to the reference image with a vertical intersection area.
F.4

0.0

F.466

Operator Manual

Examination

Regular saturation region


Positioning freely

Positioning Slices

Select a reference image.


F.4

Select Image Tools > Create Sat.


Or

F.4

Click the Create Sat toolbar to activate this mode.


The mouse pointer changes shape.
F.4

Click the position in the reference image where you want to


insert the new saturation region.
The saturation region is located perpendicularly to the reference image. The intersection runs in vertical direction. The
thickness of the region is calculated using standard protocol
parameters.
F.4

Create regular sat

You can change the positioning of the new saturation region by


dragging the mouse while holding the mouse button down. F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.467

Positioning Slices

Regular sat using an


orientation line

Examination

F.4

You may also place a regular saturation region along an orientation line. The saturation region is then located perpendicularly
to the reference image.
F.4
Position the mouse pointer at the starting point of the orientation line.
Hold the left mouse button down and drag the mouse cursor
in the direction you want to place the saturation region.
Release the mouse button.
The new saturation region is displayed.
F.4

Exiting the mode

F.4

You can exit Create Sat mode if you do not want to draw additional saturation regions.
F.4
Press the Esc key.
The mouse is now in the Modify Graphics mode.

F.4

Or

F.4

Switch to another mode (using the tool bar or context menu).

When you have reached the maximum number of sat regions


the Create Sat mode is automatically ended. The color of the
icon changes from yellow to blue.

0.0

F.468

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Changing graphic slice parameters

F.4

Use the mouse to change the following slice and slab groups
parameter settings as well as edit standard saturation regions: F.4
Slice thickness or slab thickness
Number of slices or slabs per group
Distance between slices or slabs within a group
Slice oversampling
As an alternative, you may change these parameters numerically on the Geometry card.
F.4
Page F.524, Geometry Common parameter card (2D)
Ensure that the mouse is in the Modify Graphics mode. If
necessary, press the Esc key to ensure that you are in that
mode.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.469

Positioning Slices

Examination

Click the Extent Thickness button.

Increasing the thickness


of the slices/slabs

Or

F.4

F.4

Select Image Tools > Extent Mode > Extent Thickness.


The mouse pointer changes shape.
F.4

Click the Extent handle, hold the mouse button down, and
drag the handle in the required direction.
To increase the thickness of the slices/slabs, drag the extent
handle away from the group.
F.4
To reduce the thickness of the slices/slabs, drag the extent handle toward the group.
F.4
The thickness will be displayed in millimeters on the reference
image as long as you keep the mouse button pressed.
F.4
Release the mouse button once the slices/slabs have the
required thickness.

Changing the slice thickness also changes the distance


between slices since the distance factor remains constant. F.4

0.0

F.470

Operator Manual

Examination

Increasing the number of


slices/slabs

Positioning Slices

F.4

Click the Extent Slices (3D-group) to switch to this mode.


Or

F.4

Select Image Tools > Extent Mode > Extent Slices


(slabs).
The mouse pointer changes shape near the pivot.
F.4

Click the Extent handle, hold the mouse button down, and
drag the handle in the required direction.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.471

Positioning Slices

Examination

Drag the extent handle (mark) away from the group to increase
the number of slices.
F.4
To decrease the number of slices drag the extent handle (mark)
toward the group.
F.4
The number of slices will be displayed on the reference image
as long as you hold the mouse button down.
F.4
Release the mouse button as soon as you have generated
the required number of slices or slabs.

The maximum possible number of slices is limited by other protocol parameters (for example, by TR). It is not possible to
exceed this limit by dragging the extent handles. The highlighted display indicates when you have reached the limit (thick
line).
F.4
F.4

0.0

F.472

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Click the Extent Distance button to switch to the appropriate


mode.

Increasing the distance


between slices/slabs
F.4

Or

F.4

Select Image Tools > Extent Mode > Extent Distance.


The mouse pointer changes shape.
F.4

Click the Extent handle, hold the mouse button down, and
drag the handle in the required Keep the mouse button
pressed.
Drag the extent handle away from the group to increase the distance between slices.
F.4
To reduce the distance between slices, drag the extent handle
toward the group.
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.473

Positioning Slices

Examination

The distance between slices will be displayed on the reference


image as long as you keep the mouse button pressed.
F.4
Release the mouse button, when the slices/slabs show the
required distance.

0.0

F.474

Operator Manual

Examination

Changing slice
oversampling

Positioning Slices

In 3D scans, you can change the slice oversampling.

F.4

F.4

Click the Extent Slice Oversampling button.


Or

F.4

Select Image Tools > Extent Mode > Extent Slice Oversampling.
The mouse pointer changes shape.
F.4

Click the Extent handle, hold the mouse button down, and
drag the handle in the required Keep the mouse button
pressed.
To increase the slice oversampling, drag the extent handle
away from the group.
F.4
To reduce the slice oversampling, drag the extent handle toward
the group.
F.4
Slice oversampling is displayed on the reference image as long
as you hold the mouse button down.
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.475

Positioning Slices

Examination

Release the mouse button as soon as slice oversampling


reaches the desired size.

To change the thickness of the slices/slabs, press the Alt key


to switch to the Extent Thickness mode. Release the Alt key
to return to the Extent Slice Oversampling mode again.

0.0

F.476

Operator Manual

Examination

Switching between the


slice number/ slice
distance/ and slice
thickness mode

Positioning Slices

F.4

Changing the slice distance is just as easy as changing the


slice thickness. Press the Alt key to switch to Extent slices
(slabs) change the number of planned slices, then return to the
Extent Thickness or Extent Distance mode (release the Alt
key again).
F.4

Changing the field of view


(FOV) via the mouse
F.4

Select the slice or slab group whose field of view (FoV) you
want to change.
Drag the FoV handle in the phase-encoding direction.
If you drag the FoV handle in the readout direction, the icon
(shown) will appear next to the mouse pointer.
F.4

If you drag the FOV handle in the phase-encoding direction, the


icon (shown) will appear next to the mouse pointer.
F.4

The dimensions of the current field of view (FoV) are displayed


on the reference image as long as you hold the mouse button
pressed.
F.4

Release the mouse button as soon as the field of view (FoV)


has the required size.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.477

Positioning Slices

Examination

Notes on enlarging the field of view (FOV)

F.4

You may continue enlarging the field of view in the phaseencoding direction until you obtain a square field of view.

You can only enlarge the field of view in the readout direction
as a function of the FOV aspect ratio. The ratio between the
length in the phase-encoding and readout direction remains
constant. If you enlarge the field of view in the readout direction, the field of view will be enlarged as well in the phaseencoding direction.

0.0

F.478

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Notes on reducing the field of view (FoV)

F.4

You may only reduce the field of view in the readout direction
in conjunction with the phase-encoding direction. The FOV is
also proportionally reduced in the phase-encoding direction
to maintain a constant FoV aspect ratio.

The FoV in the phase-encoding direction can be reduced


independently of the readout direction.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.479

Positioning Slices

Changing phase
oversampling via
the mouse

Examination

F.4

Click this button to begin processing the phase oversampling.


Or

F.4

Select Image Tools > Extent Mode > Extent Phase Oversampling On.
Select the slice or slab group whose phase oversampling
factor you want to change.
Drag the FoV handle in the phase-encoding direction.
The current value of the phase oversampling factor will be displayed on the reference image as long as you keep the mouse
button pressed.
F.4
Release the mouse button as soon as the phase oversampling has been enlarged/reduced as required.

0.0

F.480

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Changes in phase oversampling have a symmetric effect on


the slice or slab group. The size of the field of view (FoV) and
the center remain constant.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.481

Positioning Slices

Regular saturation
regions changing

Examination

F.4

You are able to move saturation regions, or change their orientation or thickness with the mouse. The procedure is the same
as for processing slice and slab groups.
F.4

Other saturation region parameters may be edited numerically


on the Geometry parameter card.
Page F.529, Parameter card Geometry Saturator
F.4

Parallel or tracking
saturation regions
changing

F.4

You can change the position and orientation of a parallel/tracking saturation region via the slice/slab group associated with
this slice group. The distance between slice/slab groups
remains constant.
Page F.442, Moving objects
F.4

Depending on the extent handle clicked, you are able to change


the Thickness of the sat region or the Distance to the slice/slab
group.
F.4

With parallel saturation regions, modifying the slice thickness


and the distance to the slice/slab group always affects both
saturation regions symmetrically.

0.0

F.482

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

(1) Handle for changing the sat thickness


(2) Handle for changing the distance from the slice/slab group
To change the thickness of the parallel saturation region:

F.4

Click the Extent handle facing away from the slice/slab


group, press the left mouse button, and drag it.
To change the distance of the parallel saturation region:

F.4

Click the Extent handle facing toward the slice/slab group,


press the left mouse button, and drag it.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.483

Positioning Slices

Switching between slice


thickness and position
editing

Examination

F.4

You are able to quickly and easily switch to position editing by


pressing the Shift key while changing the slice thickness of saturation regions. You can then move the selected standard saturation region before returning to Extent Thickness mode (by
releasing the Shift key again).
F.4

0.0

F.484

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Deleting graphic objects

F.4

You can delete or replace graphic objects that you no longer


need for measurements.
F.4

Deleting selected
objects

First select the slice object you want to delete.


F.4

Select Edit > Delete from the main menu or Delete from the
context menu.
Or

F.4

Click the Delete button or press the Del key.


The selected object is deleted. The next object is selected in
place of the deleted object.
F.4
The slice or slab group will not be deleted if the number of
slices/slabs is below the minimum number defined for the protocol. Instead, the number of slices/slabs is reduced to a minimum.
F.4

Deleting all objects

F.4

Select Delete All from the context menu.


All slice/slab groups and saturation regions of your protocol will
be deleted except for the minimum number of slice/slab groups
defined in the protocol. Parallel saturation regions are
retained.
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.485

Positioning Slices

Examination

Transferring the position of reference images

F.4

You can use the Copy Image Position function to temporarily


store the position and orientation of a reference image and copy
it to the selected slice of the open protocol.
F.4
Select the reference image in one of the image segments.
Select the slice.
Select ImageTools > Copy Image Position from the main
menu or Copy Image Position from the context menu.
The position and orientation are copied to the selected slice.

F.4

Copy image position

If no slice (slab) group is selected, the position and orientation


will be transferred to the first slice (slab) group of the protocol.

0.0

F.486

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

The position and orientation of the reference image is retained


in temporary storage and may be copied to other selected
slices as well.
F.4
Select the slice.
Select Image Tools > Paste Image Position.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.487

Positioning Slices

Examination

Nearest

F.4

The Nearest function selects the best possible reference


images for a region of interest.
F.4
As a first step, the center of the currently selected graphic
object is automatically moved into the plane of the previously
selected reference image. This shift is perpendicular to the
plane of the reference image. If the selected graphic object has
already been positioned at the location of interest, this position
is retained during the shift.
F.4
In addition, in the other two reference image segments, reference images are selected with planes nearest to the position of
the selected graphic object.
F.4

The primary application of the Nearest function is spectroscopy.


Procedure:

F.4

Select the required reference image in the loaded reference


image series.
Select the graphic object.
Select ImageTools > Copy Image Position if you want the
graphic object to have the same orientation as the reference
image.
Page F.486, Transferring the position of reference images
Select Scroll > Nearest.

0.0

F.488

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning Slices

Applying slice settings

F.4

After you have correctly positioned the graphic objects, you may
release the protocol for scanning.
F.4

Click the Apply button in the program control.


The graphic objects in the reference images are now removed.
However, the reference images are still displayed in the image
segments.
F.4
When you have finished graphic slice positioning and completed the protocol, it is loaded into the scan system and run in
the job list accordingly.
Page F.61, Performing a routine examination
F.4

The next, incomplete protocol of the program control will be


opened automatically. You can now position the slices for this
protocol and check the other parameter settings in the parameter card.
Page F.51, Adjusting Measurement Parameters
F.4

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.489

Positioning Slices

Examination

0.0

F.490

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

F.5

Adjusting Measurement
Parameters

F.5

Siemens Service has set up the routine scan programs on your


system to require minimal interactions on your part. Usually,
you need to change just a few parameters prior to scanning. F.5
The best time for you to adjust the measurement parameters of
your first protocol is directly after the graphic slice positioning
when your protocol is still open.
Page F.14, Procedure for routine scanning
F.5
The parameter cards of the Exam task card contain all measurement parameters of a protocol sorted by main topics.
F.5
During routine scan operations, it usually suffices to look at the
parameters of the Routine parameter card to change the field
of view (FoV) or other parameters that require frequent modification.
F.5
For more specialized diagnostic problems and special anatomical conditions, you can adjust additional measurement parameters in the Contrast, Resolution, and Geometry cards.
F.5
Depending on the sequence used for scanning, other application-specific parameter cards will be displayed.
F.5
An overview of the parameter cards and short descriptions of
the parameters are provided on the following pages.
F.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.51

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Next, the working procedure and input tools of the parameter


card stack are explained. Finally, you learn how to save your
parameter changes and copy them to other scan protocols. F.5
F.5

NOTE
Detailed descriptions of the individual measurement
parameters and notes on settings are provided in the
reference section.
Page P.11

F.5

F.5

NOTE
The parameter cards for spectroscopy scans are included
in the operator manual MR Spectroscopy operating
manual.
F.5

F.5

NOTE
This chapter also describes sequences and functions of
optional applications packages.
F.5

0.0

F.52

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Overview of parameter cards

F.5

The parameter card stack shows the measurement parameters


of the protocol currently open.
F.5
The measurement parameters are organized on cards by topics. The parameter cards are arranged in a stack from left to
right to provide easy access to the cards most frequently used
and processed.
F.5
Different measurement parameters are displayed on the individual cards depending on the sequence associated with the
current scan protocol.
F.5
The following pages discuss all parameters that can be displayed and edited for various examinations.
However, individual parameters may be missing on the
parameter cards depending on the sequence associated with
the open protocol.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.53

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Some measurement parameters are available for verification


and editing on several parameter cards. In other words, you will
find a parameter on all cards for which it is relevant.
F.5
The detailed descriptions of the measurement parameters in
the reference section also indicate the cards where the individual parameters are located.
Page P.11
F.5

Selecting a parameter
card for editing

F.5

The Routine parameter card is always on top of the stack when


you open a scan protocol.
F.5
Click the tab of another parameter card to place it on top.

0.0

F.54

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Routine parameter card

F.5

The Routine parameter card includes all parameters of your


scan protocols. You are able to check as well as modify them
during scan preparations.
F.5
The Routine parameter card shows different parameters
depending on whether your protocol uses 2D or 3D scans.
F.5

Routine parameter
card (2D)

F.5

(1) Parameters that may be different for each slice group


(2) Parameters that apply to all slice groups

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.55

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Routine parameter
card (3D)

Examination

F.5

(1) Parameters that may be different for each slab group


(2) Parameters that apply to all slices/slabs

0.0

F.56

Operator Manual

Examination

Parameters for image


resolution and contrast

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

FoV read
Field of view in readout direction,
Page P.148
FoV phase
Field of view in phase-encoding direction,
Page P.149
TR
Repetition time, interval between two consecutive excitations, Page P.137
TE
Echo time, time between RF pulse and measured echo,
Page P.138
Averages
Number of scans, repetitions to improve the signal-to-noise
ratio, Page P.140
Filter
Filters selected, Page P.168

Parameters for monitoring


the excitation sequence F.5

Concatenations
Distribution of the slices to be measured across a given number of scans to avoid cross-talk, Page P.134

Coils

Coil elements
Coils to be used for this protocol,
Page P.185

F.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.57

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Slice parameters for


for 2D scanning

F.5

Examination

Slice group
Number of the slice group currently displayed,
Page F.576, Adding or deleting graphic objects
and Page P.13
Slices
Number of slices in this group, Page P.14
Dist. factor
Distance between the slices of the group as a percentage of
the slice thickness, Page P.15
Slice thickness
Slice thickness (in mm), Page P.16
Position
Position of the slice group in the patient coordinate system,
Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.111
Orientation
Orientation of the slice group in the patient coordinate system,
Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.18
Phase enc. dir.
Phase-encoding direction, specified in the main orientations
of the patient coordinate system, the angle of slice rotation
can also be set in a lower-level dialog box,
Page P.113
Phase oversampling
Extent of the field of view in the phase-encoding direction to
avoid aliasing artifacts, Page P.114

0.0

F.58

Operator Manual

Examination

Slab parameters for 3D


scans

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

Slab group
Number of the slab group currently displayed,
Page F.576, Adding or deleting graphic objects
and Page P.13
Slabs
Number of slabs in this slab group,
Page P.14
Dist. factor
Distance between slabs as a percentage of the slab thickness, Page P.15
Slice thickness
Thickness of the individual slices of the slabs,
Page P.16
Slices per slab
Number of slices per slab,
Page P.17
Position
Position of the slab group in the patient coordinate system,
Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.111
Orientation
Orientation of the slab group in the patient coordinate system, Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.18

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.59

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Phase enc. dir.


Phase-encoding direction, specified in the main orientations
of the patient coordinate system, the angle of slice rotation
can also be set in a lower-level dialog box,
Page P.113
Phase oversampling
Extent of the field of view in the phase-encoding direction to
avoid aliasing artifacts,
Page P.114
Slice oversampling
Extent of the field of view in the slice selection direction to
avoid aliasing artifacts,
Page P.116

0.0

F.510

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Contrast parameter card

F.5

The Contrast parameter card displays all the settings for


changing the contrast in the images. Among other factors,
image contrast is critical for correct diagnosis.
F.5
Depending on your diagnostic task, you can acquire images
with different weightings by setting parameters on the Contrast
card. Images with T1 and proton density weighting display anatomical structures especially well. T2 weighting, on the other
hand, is more suitable to detect pathological changes.
F.5
Additional effects can be obtained by spin preparation. Using
preceding RF pulses, contrast can be enhanced or signals can
be suppressed completely.
F.5

Contrast parameter card

F.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.511

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

T1, T2, and proton


density contrast

F.5

Examination

To determine the T1, T2, or proton density weighting for spin


echo sequences, set the parameters TR (repetition time) and
TE (echo time).
F.5
The values recommended for spin echo sequences are as follows:
F.5
Short TR and short TE produces T1 contrast.
Long TR and long TE produces T2 contrast.
Long TR and short TE produces proton density contrast.
F.5

TR
Repetition time, interval between two consecutive excitations,
Page P.137
TE
Echo time, time between RF pulse and measured echo
Page F.574, Displaying and editing parameter groups
and Page P.138
Flip angle
Flip angle of rotational axis of spins,
Page P.140

0.0

F.512

Operator Manual

Examination

Settings for spin


preparation

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

The actual scan should be preceded by an RF pulse (spin preparation) when you want to change the contrast or suppress certain signals (for example, for an inversion recovery sequence).F.5
Magn. preparation
Magnetization preparation for inversion recovery (IR) and
saturation recovery (SR) sequences,
Page P.141
TI
Inversion time,
Page P.139

Increasing signals

F.5

Averages
Number of scans, repetitions to improve the signal-to-noise
ratio,
Page P.140
Restore Magn.
Signal raising with T2 weighting by acceleration relaxation of
the longitudinal magnetization,
Page P.146

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.513

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Suppressing
signals

F.5

Examination

The MR signal comprises the sum of signals from water and fat
protons. This may result in chemical shift artifacts. Motion artifacts may be enhanced, and contrast may degrade.
F.5
Signal suppression may be used to decrease these effects.

F.5

Fat suppression
Suppression of the fat signal,
Page P.143
FatSat mode
Degree of fat suppression,
Page P.144
Water suppression
Suppression of the water signal,
Page P.145
MTC
Presaturation due to magnetization transfer,
Page P.146
For some types of sequences, the Geometry Saturation
parameter card contains the Saturation mode parameter. If
you select the Quick option for this parameter, the options for
fat and water saturation change to Q-fat sat. and Q-water
sat.

0.0

F.514

Operator Manual

Examination

Magnitude, phase, and


real images

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

The Contrast card lets you select the image types for reconstruction:
F.5
F.5

Magnitude
images

Show the intensity of the MR signal

Phase images

Show the phase angle of the spins

Real images

Show the signed amplitude of the longitudinal


magnetization after an inversion pulse
F.5

N OT E
Reconstruction of image types is not possible in every
protocol and every sequence.

F.5

F.5

Reconstruction
Selection of reconstruction mode and image type or types,
Page P.142

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.515

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Parameters for dynamic


scanning

F.5

Examination

TD
Pause (for example, for breath-holding commands)
Page F.574, Displaying and editing parameter groups
and Page P.139
Infinite measurement
The number of scans for realtime sequences is set to the
maximum value,
Page P.177
Measurements
Number of measurements for dynamic scanning,
Page P.177
Pause after meas.
Pause between individual measurements,
Page P.178
Delay in TR
Time between consecutive scans for all ep2d sequences,
Page P.179
Multiple series
The images of each measurement are stored as a separate
series,
Page P.180

0.0

F.516

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Resolution parameter card

F.5

The image resolution lets you determine the size and the level
of detail shown by the images calculated from raw data. The
higher the image resolution, the longer the acquisition time. F.5
The Resolution parameter card consists of two subcards:

F.5

Common
All parameters affecting image resolution are located on the
Resolution Common parameter card.
The Resolution Common parameter card differs for 2D and
3D measurements.
iPAT
The parameters for the PAT reconstruction method to
shorten the scan time are located on the Resolution iPAT
(PAT = parallel acquisition technique) parameter card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.517

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Resolution Common
parameter card (2D)

F.5

Resolution Common
parameter card (3D)

F.5

Examination

0.0

F.518

Operator Manual

Examination

Image resolution for


for 2D scanning

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

FoV read
Field of view in readout direction,
Page P.147
FoV phase
Field of view in phase-encoding direction,
Page P.147
Slice thickness
Slice thickness (in mm),
Page P.16
Base resolution
Number of readout steps,
Page P.150
Phase resolution
Ratio of readout to phase-encoding steps,
Page P.151
Phase partial Fourier
Asymmetric scanning of raw data space in phase-encoding
direction to reduce scanning time,
Page P.156

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.519

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Image resolution for


3D scanning

F.5

Examination

FoV read
Field of view in readout direction, Page P.147
FoV phase
Field of view in phase-encoding direction, Page P.147
Slice thickness
Individual slice thickness for all slabs (partitions),
Page P.16
Base resolution
Number of readout steps, Page P.150
Phase resolution
Ratio of readout to phase-encoding steps,
Page P.151
Slice resolution
Resolution ratio in slice selection direction,
Page P.154
Phase partial Fourier
Asymmetric scanning of raw data space in phase-encoding
direction to reduce scanning time,
Page P.156
Slice partial Fourier
Asymmetric scanning of raw data space in slice selection
direction to reduce scanning time,
Page P.157

Filter

F.5

Interpolation

F.5

Filter
Selection of filter,
Page P.168
Interpolation
Increasing the image matrix to double the size,
Page P.153

0.0

F.520

Operator Manual

Examination

Resolution iPAT
parameter card

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

F.5

iPAT mode
Selection of PAT reconstruction mode,
Page P.158
Accel. factor PE
Acceleration factor in phase-encoding direction,
Page P.160

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.521

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Max. recomm. factor PE


read-only parameter in Online-Editor,
Page P.160
Ref. lines PE
Number of reference lines in the phase-encoding direction,
Page P.161
Accel. factor 3D
Acceleration factor in slice selection direction,
Page P.162
Max. recomm. factor 3D
read-only parameter in Online-Editor,
Page P.163
Ref. lines 3D
Number of reference lines in the slice selection direction,
Page P.164
Matrix coil mode
Setting the modes for the Matrix coil elements,
Page P.165

0.0

F.522

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Geometry parameter card

F.5

In routine examination mode, the position and orientation of


slice and slab groups is planned graphically using the toolbar
for graphic slice positioning and the mouse.
F.5
Use the Geometry parameter card if these tools are not sufficient for special diagnostic problems. This card also allows you
to define the parameters for checking the excitation sequence,
make settings for the saturation techniques, and position navigators.
F.5
The Geometry card consists of three subcards:

F.5

Common
This card contains all parameters for positioning and
expanding the slices or slabs to be scanned. This parameter
card differs for 2D and 3D measurements.
Saturation
This card displays the parameters relevant to the inclusion of
regional or fat/water saturation.
Navigator
This card displays the parameters for navigator objects. It is
only used for special navigator sequences.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.523

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Geometry Common
parameter card (2D)

F.5

Geometry Common
parameter card (3D)

F.5

Examination

0.0

F.524

Operator Manual

Examination

Slice parameters for 2D


scanning

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

Slice group
Number of the slice group currently displayed,
Page F.576, Adding or deleting graphic objects
and Page P.13
Slices
Number of slices in this group,
Page P.14
Dist. factor
Distance between the slices of the group as a percentage of
the slice thickness,
Page P.15
Position
Position of the slice group in the patient coordinate system,
Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.111
Orientation
Orientation of the slice group in the patient coordinate system, Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.18
Phase enc. dir.
Phase-encoding direction, specified in the main orientations
of the patient coordinate system, the angle of slice rotation
can also be set in a lower-level dialog box,
Page P.113
Phase oversampling
Extent of the field of view in the phase-encoding direction to
avoid aliasing artifacts,
Page P.114

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.525

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Parameters for extending


the measurement range

F.5

Examination

FoV read
Field of view in readout direction, Page P.147
FoV phase
Field of view in phase-encoding direction, Page P.147
Slice thickness
Thickness of the individual slices (2D) or thickness of the
individual slices of the slabs (3D),
Page P.16
TR
Repetition time, interval between two consecutive excitations,
Page P.137

Parameters for controlling


the excitation sequence F.5

Multi-slice mode
Sequential (slice by slice) or interleaved (row by row) scanning method,
Page P.131
Series
Excitation sequence of slices,
Page P.133
Concatenations
Distribution of the slices to be measured across a given number of scans to avoid cross-talk,
Page P.134

0.0

F.526

Operator Manual

Examination

Slab parameters for


3D scanning

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

Slab group
Number of the slab group currently displayed,
Page F.576, Adding or deleting graphic objects
and Page P.13
Slabs
Number of slabs in this slab group,
Page P.14
Dist. factor
Distance between slabs as a percentage of the slab thickness, Page P.15
Position
Position of the slab group in the patient coordinate system,
Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.111
Orientation
Orientation of the slab group in the patient coordinate system, Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.18

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.527

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

Examination

Phase enc. dir.


Phase-encoding direction, specified in the main orientations
of the patient coordinate system, the angle of slice rotation
can also be set in a lower-level dialog box,
Page P.113
Phase oversampling
Extent of the field of view in the phase-encoding direction to
avoid aliasing artifacts,
Page P.114
Slice oversampling
Extent of the field of view in the slice selection direction to
avoid aliasing artifacts,
Page P.116
Slices per slab
Number of slices per slab,
Page P.17

0.0

F.528

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Parameter card
Geometry Saturator

F.5

Saturation mode

F.5

Saturation mode
Saturation pulses before each scan or only as often as necessary.
The Quick saturation mode is available for some sequences.
This mode ensures a shorter scan time and is used both for
fat and water saturation, as well as for single and parallel saturation regions.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.529

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Signal suppression
fat/water

F.5

Examination

Fat sat. mode


Degree of fat suppression, Page P.144
Fat suppr.
Suppression of the fat signal, Page P.143
Water suppr.
Suppression of the water signal, Page P.145
Restore Magn.
Signal raising with T2 weighting by acceleration relaxation of
the longitudinal magnetization, Page P.146

Saturation regions

F.5

Saturation regions are areas the signal of which is saturated by


special RF pulses to avoid motion artifacts.
F.5
Sat. region
Number of the saturation slice displayed,
Page F.576, Adding or deleting graphic objects
Thickness
Thickness of this saturation slice, Page P.118
Position
Position of this saturation slice in the patient coordinate system, Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects and Page P.118
Orientation
Orientation of this saturation slice in the patient coordinate
system, Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of graphic objects and Page P.118

0.0

F.530

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Special Sat
Selection of a parallel or tracking saturation region,
Page P.119
If you have selected the Quick saturation mode, a Quick
option is available for all parallel saturation regions (for example, Q Parallel H). Tracking saturation regions cannot be
planned in Quick mode.
Gap
Distance between parallel or tracking saturation slice and
slice group,
Page P.119
Thickness
Thickness of the parallel or tracking saturation slice,
Page P.119

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.531

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Parameter card
Geometry-Navigator

Examination

F.5

0.0

F.532

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Navigator
Type of navigator object currently displayed,
Page P.121
Position
Position of the navigator object in the patient coordinate system,
Page P.122
Orientation
Orientation of the navigator object in the patient coordinate
system,
Page P.122
Rotation
Angle by which the navigator object is rotated in the slice
plane defined by the orientation,
Page P.123
Base size phase
Extent of the navigator object in the phase-encoding direction, Page P.123
Base size read
Extent of the navigator object in the readout direction,
Page P.123
Thickness
Thickness of the navigator slice,
Page P.123

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.533

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

System parameter card

F.5

The System card is divided into four subcards:

F.5

Coils
This subcard shows the stylized patient and the positions of
the coils connected. The area above the patient displays the
coils with positions not (yet) known, the area underneath the
patient displays the coils with known positions. These coil
elements are shown in the GSP as well.
Miscellaneous
This subcard is used to define the position of the scan
region. You may perform the scan using the current table
position or define a different position.
The selection lists for image numbering allow you to define
the order in which the reconstructed images are numbered.
Adjustments and Transmitter/Receiver
These two parameter cards contain the settings for system
adjustment. These cards are normally not used during routine operation. The adjustment settings should be changed
only under special circumstances by highly experienced
users.
Chapter C.2, Adjusting the System

0.0

F.534

Operator Manual

Examination

Parameter card
System-Coils

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

All coil elements connected are displayed on the parameter


card. They can be selected by the user for the respective
scan.
Several fully identical coils (e.g. Body Array coils) may be
connected to the system. The coils are uniquely identified
and differentiated by the software. The user is able to differentiate the coil elements via the tool tip displayed. The coil
name, coil element name, and the plug number are displayed.
The coil elements are shown as buttons and do not overlap.
Up to 64 coil elements may be shown.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.535

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

The stylized patient shows the patient positioning; the body


coil shows the table position relative to the patient.
The following dependencies exist between the coil elements
selected and the iPAT acceleration factors (Accel. factor PE,
Accel. factor 3D):
Page P.187
Please refer to the System Manual for a detailed description of
the coils including their use.
F.5
F.5

NOTE
Coil selection is linked to the position of the scan region.
Therefore, the coil selection of the protocols already
processed and completed is automatically applied when
opening consecutive protocols sharing the same position of
the scan region.
F.5

You can deactivate automatic coil selection. This is done by


selecting Queue > Automatic Coil select.
F.5

NOTE
When you copy using copy reference, the target protocol
inherits the coil configuration of the source protocol. The
new coil configuration is stored at the corresponding
position of the scan region.
F.5

0.0

F.536

Operator Manual

Examination

Parameter card
System Miscellaneous

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

F.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.537

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Parameters for positioning


the scan region
F.5

Examination

Save uncombined
Saves array images uncombined. Two series are created:
one containing the uncombined images of the individual coil
elements and one containing the combined images (original
images).
Page P.182
Scan at current LP.
The protocol is run using the current table position,
Page P.182
If you click the control box, the following two fields Position
of the Scan region M. and Scan reg. Storage are not visible.
Scan region position
Setting the position of the scan region,
Page P.183
Scan region memory
Selecting a scan region position from the positions of the current series block,
Page P.184
F.5

N OT E
The patient table is moved to adjust the position of the scan
region. Depending on the patient positioning, the table will
move toward the magnet or out of the magnet by the
distance specified.
F.5

0.0

F.538

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Parameters for image


numbering
F.5

MSMA (Multi Slice Multi Angle) lets you define the order for
numbering the scanned images with regard to their slice orientation (primary order).
Page P.135
Use the Sagittal, Coronal and Transversals selection lists
to define whether the scanned images are numbered
according to ascending or descending slice positions (secondary order).
Page P.135
F.5

NOTE
The settings for image numbering are linked to the position
of the scan region.
The image numbering settings of previously processed and
completed protocols are therefore automatically applied
when opening consecutive protocols that have the same
position of scan region.
F.5

Matrix coil mode

F.5

Setting the modes for the Matrix coil elements


Page P.165

F.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.539

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Physio parameter card

F.5

The Physio card is divided into three subcards:

F.5

Signal 1
The Physio Signal 1 parameter card lets you set the parameters for the 1st physiological signal.
For a detailed description of the Physio Signal 1 parameter
card, please refer to chapter "Scans using physiological triggering", Page F.151
Cardio
The Physio Cardiac parameter card lets you set the parameters for cardiac examinations.
PACE (Prospective Acquisition CorrEction)
The Physio PACE parameter card lets you set the parameters for suppression of respiratory artifacts.

0.0

F.540

Operator Manual

Examination

Parameter card
Physio-Cardiac

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

Cardiological sequences are used to examine and display cardiac functions. The resulting image data can be evaluated using
the Argus task card.
F.5

The Cardiac parameter card is available only if the current


scan protocol is based on a sequence supporting cardiological measurements.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.541

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Tagging
Show orientation lines, Page P.1123
Distance
Distance between orientation lines, Page P.1124
Angle
Angle of orientation lines, Page P.1124
Magn. preparation
Magnetization preparation for inversion recovery (IR) and
saturation recovery (SR) sequences,
Page P.141
Fat suppression
Suppression of the fat signal,
Page P.143
Dark blood
Blood appears dark, Page P.1123
TI
Inversion time, Page P.139
FoV read
Field of view in readout direction, Page P.147
FoV phase
Field of view in phase-encoding direction, Page P.147
Phase resolution
Ratio of readout to phase-encoding steps,
Page P.151

0.0

F.542

Operator Manual

Examination

Parameter card
Physio-PACE

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

The PACE parameter card allows you to set parameters for suppression of respiratory artifacts.
F.5

Resp. control
Mode for compensating for the effects of breathing,
Page P.124
Scout mode
Preparation phase where only the navigator signal is measured, Page P.126
Scout duration
Length of the preparation phase, Page P.126
Scout TR
TR of the navigator pulse, Page P.126

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.543

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Acceptance window
Permitted deviation from the tolerance center,
Page P.127
Position Accept Window
Position Accept Window,
Page P.128
Accept. position (green)
Centering position of the acceptance window,
Page P.128
Accept. position
Centering position of the acceptance window on triggering,
Page P.128
Search window
Size of the search window,
Page P.129
Search position (red)
Centering position of the search window,
Page P.129
Store profile images
Stores the navigator signal time curve as an image,
Page P.129
Tracking factor
Connection between the movement of the diaphragm and
the anatomy to be scanned,
Page P.130
Chronological Position
Time when the navigator was used,
Page P.130

0.0

F.544

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

RF Pulse Type
Radio frequency pulse type, Page P.197
Trigger pulse
Trigger pulse, Page P.1137
Slices / respiratory cycle
Slices per respiratory cycle, Page P.1140
Cardiac trigger / repiratory cycle
Cardiac trigger per respiratory cycle, Page P.1140
Concatenations
Distribution of the slices to be measured across a given number of scans to avoid cross-talk, Page P.134

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.545

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Angio parameter card

F.5

The Angio parameter card is available only if the sequence


used as a basis for the current scan protocol supports one of
the following examinations:
F.5

Time-of-flight angiography
Contrast-enhanced angiography
Phase contrast angiography (2D and 3D)
Flow quantification

The Angio parameter card is divided into two subcards:

F.5

Angio Common
Includes the parameters specific to one of the examinations
mentioned above.
Angio Inline
Includes the parameters for dynamic image evaluation for
angiography examinations.
Page F.558

0.0

F.546

Operator Manual

Examination

Angio Common
parameter card for
time-of-flight
angiography

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

In time-of-flight angiography sequences, unsaturated spins flow


into the slice or volume to generate especially high signal intensity.
F.5
F.5

The Angio Common parameter card allows you to individually


adjust specific parameters for magnitude angiography examinations.
F.5

Flip angle
Flip angle of rotational axis of spins, Page P.140
Inflow
Inflow speed of blood, which defines the shape of the TONE
excitation pulse, Page P.1102
Flow direction
Direction of blood flow, Page P.1102
MTC
Presaturation due to magnetization transfer,
Page P.146

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.547

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Angio Common parameter


card for contrast-enhanced
angiography
F.5

Examination

Contrast-enhanced angiography takes advantage of the fact


that contrast agent (gadolinium compounds) shortens T1 in the
blood.
F.5
The Angio Common parameter card allows you to individually
adjust specific parameters for contrast-enhanced angiography
examinations.
F.5

Flip angle
Flip angle of rotational axis of spins, Page P.140
3D centr. reordering
Center of raw data space is measured as quickly as possible,
Page P.1103
Time to Center
Time until k space center is reached, Page P.1103

0.0

F.548

Operator Manual

Examination

Angio Common parameter


card for phase contrast
angiography and flow
quantification
F.5

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

2D phase contrast angiography is used to display vessels


within large scan volumes.
F.5
The intensity of each pixel is a measure of the velocity component at that location. Since only moving spins contribute to the
signal, very thick slices can be displayed as well. The result is
a projection image of all vessels in the excited slice volume. F.5
To display special projections of vessel sections, 3D phase
contrast angiography allows you to process the entire data
volume measured using the MIP technique.
Page H.51, Maximum and Minimum Intensity Projection F.5
The MR flow quantification technique allows for non-invasive
examination and evaluation of blood flow.
F.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.549

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Flow mode
Flow-encoding mode, Page P.1104
Encodings
Number of flow sensitivities to be set (flow velocity encoding),
Page P.1105
Velocity enc.
Definition of flow sensitivities in cm/s,
Page P.1105
Direction
Flow-sensitive axis, Page P.1105
Rephased images
Magnitude image (flow-rephased), Page P.1106
Magnitude images
Magnitude images (either per flow direction or per flow sensitivity), Page P.1106
Magnitude sum
Magnitude sum image, Page P.1106
Phase images
Phase images (either per flow direction or per flow sensitivity), Page P.1106

0.0

F.550

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

BOLD parameter card

F.5

The BOLD abbreviation stands for Blood Oxygenation Level


Dependent Contrast.
F.5
BOLD imaging displays the change in the oxygenation state of
blood. Generally, T2*-weighted EPI sequences are used for this
purpose.
F.5
While the patient is performing certain actions, e.g. finger
movements, images of the brain are acquired during rest as
well as active periods. Statistical analysis of these images (ttest) provides a parameter map that allows you to locate neurally active regions on the basis of intensity.
F.5
The BOLD parameter card is available only if the current protocol is based on a sequence supporting BOLD imaging.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.551

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

t-Test
Enabling or disabling t-test evaluation,
Page P.1120
Threshold
Threshold value for calculating overlaid images,
Page P.1121
Window
t-Test calculation range,
Page P.1121
Dynamic t-cards
Switching on/off storage of generated t-card,
Page P.1120
Starting ignore meas
Number of initial scans excluded from the evaluation,
Page P.1116
Paradigm size
Number of entries in the paradigm table,
Page P.1121
Paradigm table
Table of individual BOLD scans indicating stimulation,
Page P.1122

0.0

F.552

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Motion correction
Activates or deactivates motion correction,
Page P.1117
Interpolation
Interpolation method used for motion correction,
Page P.1118
Spatial filter
Activates or deactivates the Gaussian filter,
Page P.1119
Filter setting
Window width of the Gaussian filter,
Page P.1119
Infinite measurement
The number of scans for realtime sequences is set to the
maximum value, Page P.177
Measurements
Number of measurements,
Page P.177
Pause after meas.
Pause between individual measurements,
Page P.178
Delay in TR
Time between consecutive scans for all ep2d sequences,
Page P.179
Multiple series
The images of each measurement are stored as a separate
series, Page P.180

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.553

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Diff parameter card

Examination

F.5

The diffusion of water molecules along a field gradient reduces


the MR signal. Signal loss is not as pronounced in areas where
the water molecules are not able to diffuse as quickly. Diffusion-weighted scans are based on such diffusion-dependent
differences in signal intensity.
F.5
The Diff parameter card allows you to set the parameters specific to diffusion-weighted scanning.
F.5
The Diff parameter card is available only if the current scan
protocol is based on a sequence supporting diffusionweighted measurements.

0.0

F.554

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Diffusion mode
Diffusion-sensitive direction, Page P.1107
Diff. weightings
Number of diffusion weightings, Page P.1108
b-value
Value for diffusion weighting, Page P.1109
Diff. weighted images
Reconstruct original images with diffusion weighting,
Page P.1109
Trace weighted images
Isotropically diffusion-weighted images, i.e. images are averaged in all spatial directions,
Page P.1110
Average ADC maps
Gray-scale values of images show diffusion coefficients
averaged over different directions, Page P.1110
Individual ADC maps
Gray-scale values of images show diffusion coefficients
along a gradient axis, Page P.1111
Noise level
Threshold value of the pixel intensity for calculating ADC
maps, Page P.1111
Diffusion moment (psif sequence only)
Measurement for the strength of diffusion weighting,
Page P.1111
Diff. directions
Number of diffusion-encoding directions
Can be selected only in MDDW mode, otherwise predefined
by the diffusion mode parameter,
Page P.1112

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.555

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Perf parameter card

Examination

F.5

One method of MR perfusion imaging is to determine the signal


change in images as a function of time while injecting intravenous contrast agent. Generally, T2*-weighted EPI sequences
with a gadolinium contrast agent are used for this purpose.
F.5

The Perf parameter card is available only if the current scan


protocol is based on a sequence supporting perfusion measurements.

0.0

F.556

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Global Bolus Plot (GBP)


Calculation of global time/intensity curve, Page P.1114
Percentage of Baseline at Peak map (PBP)
Calculation of signal change compared to the baseline,
Page P.1114
Time To Peak map (TTP)
Calculation of time-to-peak image, Page P.1113
Original images
Save original images, Page P.1113
Starting ignore meas
Number of initial scans excluded from the evaluation,
Page P.1116
Measurements
Number of measurements for dynamic scanning,
Page P.177

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.557

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Inline parameter card

F.5

The Inline parameter card is divided into two subcards:

F.5

Common
Breast
Parameter card
Inline-Common

F.5

The Inline Common parameter card allows you to set parameters for dynamic image evaluation.
F.5
In case of scan protocols for angiography examinations, the
Inline parameter card is displayed as Angio Inline subcard.
In case of scan protocols for BOLD scans, diffusion-weighted
scans, or perfusion scans, the Inline parameter card is not
part of the parameter card stack.

0.0

F.558

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Subtract
Activates or deactivates subtraction,
Page P.1125
Saving images
Saving result images of subtraction,
Page P.1126
Autoscaling
Automatic scaling of result images of subtraction,
Page P.1126
Scaling factor
Entering a scaling factor for the result images of subtraction,
Page P.1127
Offset
Entering an offset value for the result images of subtraction,
Page P.1127
Subtrahend
Defines the series to be subtracted,
Page P.1128
Measurements
Number of measurements for dynamic scanning,
Page P.177

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.559

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Std-Dev-Sag
Calculation of standard deviation result images in the sagittal
direction, Page P.1129
Std-Dev-Cor
Calculation of standard deviation result images in the coronal direction, Page P.1129
Std-Dev-Tra
Calculation of standard deviation result images in the transverse direction, Page P.1130
Std-Dev-Time
Calculation of standard deviation result images in chronological sequence, Page P.1130
MIP-Sag
Calculation of MIP images in the sagittal direction,
Page P.1131
MIP-Cor
Calculation of MIP images in the coronal direction,
Page P.1131
MIP-Tra
Calculation of MIP images in the transverse direction,
Page P.1132
MIP-Time
Calculation of MIP images in chronological sequence
(with Inline-Common cannot be activated if MIP-Time is
already activated on the Inline-Breast parameter card),
Page P.1132
Save original images
Saves original images, Page P.1133

0.0

F.560

Operator Manual

Examination

Parameter card
Inline-Breast

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

The Inline-Breast parameter card allows you to set parameters


for Soft Tissue Evaluation.
F.5
For protocols for Soft Tissue Evaluation, the Inline parameter card is shown as a sub-card Inline-Common. However,
MIP time is available on this sub-card only if it has not been
activated on the subcard Inline-Breast.

Wash - In
Switching on or off calculation of the signal change in the
starting range of the dynamic measurement series,
Page P.1114
Color table
Color palettes to color-code the parameter cards,
Page P.1115

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.561

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

First measurement
First measurement used for the wash-in or wash-out calculation,
Page P.1115
Last measurement
Last measurement used for the wash-in or wash-out calculation,
Page P.1115
Highest value
Defines whether the value of the last measurement or the
highest value between the first and last measurement will be
used for calculation of the wash-in parameter image,
Page P.1115
Wash - Out
Parameter for signal change in the end range of the dynamic
measurement series,
Page P.1116
TTP
Display of the time to signal peak for each voxel,
Page P.1113

0.0

F.562

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

PEI
Positive enhancement integral, area under a signal intensity
- time curve,
Page P.1116
MIP-Time
MIP images, highest pixel value along the time axis,
Page P.1132
Measurements
Number of measurements for dynamic scanning,
Page P.177
Pause after meas.
Pause between individual measurements,
Page P.178

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.563

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Sequence parameter card

F.5

Your system includes a number of different sequence types:

F.5

Gradient echo sequences (GRE, FLASH, Turboflash, True


FISP, MEDIC, PSIF, CISS, DESS)
Spin echo sequences (se)
Turbo spin echo sequences (tse)
HASTE sequences
Single-shot EPI sequences
The Sequence parameter card groups all parameters specific
to a given sequence type. Therefore, the display and input fields
available vary depending on the sequence type selected. The
parameter card is divided into the Part 1 and Part 2 subcards.F.5
The sequence used as a basis for the current protocol is indicated in the right half of the info line above the parameter card
stack.
F.5

A tool tip including the name and type of sequence used will
be displayed if you hold the mouse pointer over the sequence
name.

0.0

F.564

Operator Manual

Examination

Parameter card
Sequence Part 1

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

Introduction
Initial knocking signal of the gradient coil,
Page P.188
Dimension
Setting for 2D or 3D scanning, Page P.189
Elliptical scanning
Elliptical k space scanning, Page P.189
Phase stabilization
Prevents phase errors and improves image quality,
Page P.190
Compensate T2 decay
Prevents negative effects of T2 decay,
Page P.190

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.565

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Averaging mode
Method for averaging multiple scans,
Page P.191
Multi-slice mode
Scanning method for multislice acquisition: sequential (slice
by slice) or interleaved (row by row),
Page P.131
Sorting
Acquisition sequence for lines of raw data, Page P.191
Asymmetric echo
Defines whether echo asymmetry is permitted in readout
direction, Page P.192
Contrasts
Number of contrasts, Page P.192
Bandwidth
Readout bandwidth for contrasts, Page P.193
Flow comp.
Flow compensation of moving spins in readout and/or slice
selection direction, Page F.574, Displaying and editing
parameter groups and Page P.194
Allowed delay
Maximum delay until the start of the next scan,
Page P.193
Manual echo spacing
Allows you to define echo spacing, Page P.195
Echo spacing
Distance between echoes in the pulse train, Page P.195

0.0

F.566

Operator Manual

Examination

Parameter card
Sequence Part 2

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

Turbo factor
Number of echoes per RF excitation for turbo spin echo
sequences, Page P.196
EPI factor
Number of refocused gradient echoes per RF excitation,
Page P.196
Segments
Number of lines of a raw data matrix acquired during one TR,
Page P.196
Combined echoes
Combination of echoes with different T2 weighting for an
image, Page P.197

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.567

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

RF Pulse Type
Radio frequency pulse type, Page P.197
Gradient mode
Gradient performance used, Page P.198
Excitation
Mode for radio frequency pulse, Page P.1100
RF spoiling
Spoiler RF pulse for destroying phase coherence of gradient
echo sequences, Page P.1100

0.0

F.568

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Working in the parameter card


stack

F.5

The input and orientation tools on and above the parameter


cards help you to quickly and easily adapt a scan protocol.
F.5

Protocol info line

F.5

After opening a scan protocol, the following information is displayed in the protocol info line (directly above the parameter
card stack).
F.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.569

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

(1) Total scan time of protocol,


using current parameter settings
(2) PAT acceleration factor,
(Is shown when supported by the iPAT sequence):
When PAT is activated, the product of the two acceleration
factors PE and 3D is displayed; when PAT is deactivated,
OFF is shown. If one or both factors exceed the max. recommended acceleration as provided by the system, the
PAT acceleration factor is shown in the protocol info line as
a button with red labeling. When you click the button, the
Tim Assistant dialog is shown and resets acceleration factors PE and 3D to the max. recommended acceleration.
(3) Voxel size,
using current parameter settings
(4) Relative signal-to-noise ratio (SNR),
SNR using current parameter settings relative to the SNR
when opening the protocol.
This allows you to monitor if and to what extent your parameter changes have improved or degraded the signal-tonoise ratio.
(5) Sequence type

0.0

F.570

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Changing parameter values and observing


value ranges

F.5

Scan settings can be changed in the parameter card stack by


clicking options, selecting options from a list, or changing values using spin boxes.
F.5
However, certain values and settings cannot be freely defined
or combined. The value ranges of some parameters are limited
by the technical capabilities of your scan system. Certain
parameters depend on other measurement parameters. In this
case, changing one parameter value will require that other measurement parameters be changed as well. The scan system
informs you of these limitations.
F.5

Soft limits and extended


limits

F.5

For parameter values that may be modified using spin boxes,


the acceptable value range is displayed as a bar. When you
click or modify a parameter value, the bar appears at the bottom
of the parameter card.
F.5

(1) Soft limits


(2) Extended limits
Within the so-called Soft Limits (green bar), you can freely set
parameter values without affecting other parameters.
F.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.571

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Within the so-called Extended Limits (red bar), you are still
able to change parameter values. However, changes within
extended limits require that you adjust other measurement
parameters as well.
F.5
If you exceed the Soft Limits, the Scan Assistant dialog box
will open.
F.5

It informs you about the necessary adjustments to other measurement parameters and allows you to decide how to proceed:
F.5

Click the OK button or press the Return key to confirm your


parameter change and the adjustments to other measurement parameters.
Click the Undo button or press the Esc key to cancel your
parameter change.

0.0

F.572

Operator Manual

Examination

Restrictions when
selecting options

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

Subsequent changes may be necessary also when checking or


selecting options from lists.
F.5

In selection lists, these entries can be identified by pointed


brackets.
F.5

Checkboxes requiring other parameter changes when selected


are highlighted in red.
F.5

On the +/ buttons, the "+" and "" signs are displayed in red.F.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.573

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Displaying and editing parameter groups

F.5

Certain parameters on the cards are grouped in sets. These


parameter groups are indicated by blue brackets.
F.5

This example shows the parameter settings for a slice group. F.5
Expand the selection list of the Slice group field.
You can see how many slice groups are contained in the scan
protocol.
F.5
Select another slice group to display the corresponding slice
parameters.
You can change the parameters of the second group.

F.5

0.0

F.574

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Other input or output fields allow you to access parameter


sets.
F.5

In this example, the open scan protocol has several echo


F.5
times.
F.5

Click the arrow buttons in the lower left corner to scroll the
echo times for the protocol.
The echo time currently displayed is indicated by square brackets.
F.5
Click the arrow buttons of the spin box to change the value of
the echo time currently displayed.

Press the Return key or switch to another input field to confirm your parameter change.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.575

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Adding or deleting graphic objects

F.5

You usually use the graphic method to plan regions or volumes


that will be excited when a protocol is run. You do this using the
mouse and the graphic slice positioning tool bar. You are able
to move, add, or delete slice or slab groups or saturation
regions within the reference images.
F.5
Alternatively, you can use the parameter card stack to plan new
objects or delete objects no longer needed.
F.5

New group or region

F.5

Click the Plus button next to the selection list.


The new slice/slab group or saturation region is added to the
selected reference image. It is slightly offset compared to the
existing outermost object to avoid overlap.
F.5
Move the new group or region to the desired position and
adjust the orientation as required.
You can either use the mouse for graphical editing within the reference image or the Position and Orientation dialog boxes to
work with maximum precision.
F.5

0.0

F.576

Operator Manual

Examination

Deleting a group
or region

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

Select the slice/slab group or saturation region you want to


delete from the selection lists.
Click the Minus button to remove the group from the scan
protocol.
Or

F.5

Select Delete from the context menu for graphic slice positioning.

Adjusting the orientation and position of


graphic objects

F.5

Similar to adding and deleting objects, you will normally position


objects graphically in the reference images using the mouse. F.5
Alternatively, you can use the parameter cards to position
objects with more precision.
F.5
Setting the slice
orientation at a
precise angle

F.5

Select the slice/slab group or saturation region for which you


want to change the orientation.
Next, select one of the three main orientations from the Orientation selection list.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.577

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Or

F.5

Open the Orientation dialog box by clicking the button next


to the selection list.

Select the tilt direction (single slice) and enter a flip angle.
Page P.18
Enter a flip angle for the direction of the third orientation
plane if you want to generate a double-oblique slice.
Close the dialog box to confirm your settings.

0.0

F.578

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Entering the slice position


with millimeter precision F.5
Select the slice/slab group or saturation region for which you
want to change the parameters.
Next, select Isocenter from the Position list to position the
slice/slab group or saturation region in the magnet isocenter.
Or

F.5

Click the button next to the selection list to display the Position dialog box.

Under Position mode, select the mode you want to use.


Depending on the position mode selected, the Position dialog
box offers different options.
F.5
F.5

NOTE
During volume positioning (e.g., VOI, adjustment volume),
you always work in L-P-H mode.
The Position mode selection list is not available.
F.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.579

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

In both modes, you proceed by defining the shift of the center


of the object from the magnet isocenter.
F.5
L-P-H
This mode allows you to enter the shift based on the patient
coordinate system.
L - to the left (negative value for shift to the right)
P - to posterior (negative value for shift to anterior)
H - in direction of the head (negative value for shift in direction of the feet)
Offcenter shift
This mode allows you to enter the shift in the gradient directions:
Phase - in phase-encoding direction
Read - in readout direction
Shift - in slice selection direction

0.0

F.580

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

C AU T I O N
When exchanging image data generated with the Numaris
predecessor software, please note the following: syngo MR
and Numaris use different patient coordinate systems. As
a result, the slice position and orientation may have different
signs.
F.5

The selected position mode is maintained after the current


positioning. When you open the Position dialog box the next
time (even from another protocol), the position mode previously selected is still applied.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.581

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Keyboard operation

F.5

You can use both the mouse and the keyboard to select parameter cards from the stack or select and edit parameters.
F.5

The table below lists all actions in the parameter card stack that
may be performed via the keyboard as well.
F.5
F.5

Action

Keyboard operation

Go to the next parameter card

Ctrl + right arrow

Go to the previous parameter card

Ctrl + left arrow

Go to the next parameter sub-card

Ctrl + Shift + right arrow

Go to the previous sub-card

Ctrl + Shift + left arrow

Go to the next parameter

Tab

Go to the previous parameter

Shift + Tab

Increase numerical value

Up arrow

Decrease numerical value

Down arrow

Accept numerical value

Enter or continue to next parameter (Tab)

Scroll to next parameter in the parameter set

Up arrow or right arrow

Scroll to previous parameter in the parameter set

Down arrow or left arrow

Scroll to first parameter in the parameter set

Home

Scroll to last parameter in the parameter set

End

Activate/deactivate checkbox

Enter or space bar

Expand/collapse selection list

Enter

Select entry from selection list

Up/down/right/left arrow
or Home - to first entry
or End - to last entry

Apply entry from selection list

Return or Esc or continue to next parameter (Tab)

0.0

F.582

Operator Manual

Examination

Action
Select button (e.g., for coil selection)
Toggle checkbox or disable button selection

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Keyboard operation
Enter or space bar
Press Esc key while at same time pressing
Return or Space bar

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.583

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Accepting measurement parameter


settings

F.5

After adapting the measurement parameters of the open protocol to your requirements, save the new settings and close the
protocol.
F.5

F.5

Click the Apply button to accept your changes.


Or

F.5

Select Edit > Apply from the main menu or Apply from the
context menu of the program control (right mouse button).
When protocol reaches the top of the job list, it is loaded into the
scan system. Depending on the start mode selected, the system starts scanning automatically or waits for your start command.
F.5

0.0

F.584

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Copying measurement
parameters

F.5

After adjusting measurement parameters, you can apply them


to other protocols not currently open.
F.5
You can copy the settings and values of entire parameter
groups from one protocol to another. This saves time during
parameter entry and completion of the protocols.
F.5

Open the protocol to which you want to apply the parameters


of another protocol.
Page F.42, Opening a protocol
Select the protocol containing the parameters you wish to
copy (single click in the program control).
Select Queue > Copy Parameter from the main menu or
Copy Parameter from the context menu.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.585

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

The Copy Parameter Groups dialog box is displayed.

F.5

Select a parameter group and click OK to copy the corresponding settings.


The selected parameters are applied to the open scan protocol.
F.5

Parameter groups

F.5

The following table lists the parameters of the different parameter groups.
F.5
Please note that some parameters are assigned to several
parameter groups.

0.0

F.586

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.5

Parameter group

Parameters

Center of slice/
slab groups & sat. regions

Coil elements
Position, orientation of slices or slabs
Position, orientation, thickness of the saturation regions
Inplane rotation angle of slice groups
Position, orientation, rotation, and thickness of the navigators
Extent of navigators in the phase-encoding and read-out direction

Center of slice/
slab groups & sat. regions with
plane rotation

Coil elements
Position, orientation, and rotation of slices or slabs
Position, orientation, thickness of the saturation regions
Inplane rotation angle of slice groups
Position, orientation, rotation, and thickness of the navigators
Extent of navigators in the phase-encoding and read-out direction

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.587

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Parameter group

Examination

Parameters

Measurement parameters

Coil elements
Phase FOV
Read FOV
Slice thickness
Base resolution
Phase resolution
Phase oversampling
Slices per slab
Slice resolution
Slice oversampling
Number of slice/slab groups
Number of slices (or slabs) per slice group
(or slab group)
Position, orientation, distance factor, phase-encoding direction
of the slice/slab groups
Inplane rotation angle of slice groups
Number of sat. regions
Position, orientation, thickness of the saturation regions
Special sats (parallel or tracking saturation regions)
including thickness and distance (gap)
Saturation mode
VOI (for spectroscopy scans)
Interpolation resolution (for CSI protocols)
Position, orientation, rotation, and thickness of the navigators
Extent of navigators in the phase-encoding and read-out direction

Slices

Coil elements
Slice thickness
Slices per slab
Number of slice/slab groups
Number of slices (or slabs) per slice group
(or slab group)
Position, orientation, distance factor of the slice/slab groups
Inplane rotation angle of slice groups
Position, orientation, rotation, and thickness of the navigators
Extent of navigators in the phase-encoding and read-out direction

0.0

F.588

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Parameter group

Parameters

Saturation

Number of sat. regions


Position, orientation, thickness of the saturation regions
Special sats (parallel or tracking saturation regions)
including thickness and distance (gap)
Saturation mode

Slices & sat. regions

Coil elements
Slice thickness
Slices per slab
Number of slice/slab groups
Number of slices (or slabs) per slice group
(or slab group)
Position, orientation, distance factor of the slice/slab groups
Inplane rotation angle of slice groups
Number of sat. regions
Position, orientation, thickness of the saturation regions
Special sats (parallel or tracking saturation regions)
including thickness and distance (gap)
Saturation mode
Position, orientation, rotation, and thickness of the navigators
Extent of navigators in the phase-encoding and read-out direction

Adjustment volume

Shim mode
Position, orientation, extent of the adjustment volume

Everything

All parameter settings including sequence

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.589

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Inconsistencies

F.5

Examination

In case of inconsistencies between the parameter settings of


the source and target protocol, the Please Confirm message
window is displayed.
F.5
This message window appears in the following cases:

F.5

At least one parameter of the group to be copied cannot be


copied or not copied completely.
And/or

F.5

At least one additional parameter has to be adapted to allow


copying of the parameters of the selected group (e.g., number of links).
Click OK to accept the new settings and correct inconsistencies.
Or

F.5

Click Cancel to discard the settings.


Enter the measurement parameters manually.

0.0

F.590

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Saving the Job List

F.5

You can save a scan program in the joblist under a new program
name after adapting its protocols. This allows you to reuse protocols adapted during the examination for subsequent examinations.
F.5

Select Queue > Save As Program from the main menu or


Save As Program from the context menu of the program
control (right mouse button).
The Exam Explorer is opened and displays the Save Program
As [Customer Tree] dialog box. You can enter a name for the
new scan program and assign it to an examination region and
examination.
Page F.1661, Saving the scan program under a new nameF.5

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.591

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

Saving a single scan protocol

F.5

Instead of the entire job list, you can also save individual protocols in the job list. This involves transferring the protocol to the
Exam Explorer.
F.5
Call up the Exam Explorer.
Page F.163, Calling up the Exam Explorer
In its navigation area, open the data level for the scan program where you want to save the protocol.
Page F.1612, Finding a scan program
You can only save the protocol in a scan program of the customer level (USER).
Click the required protocol in the job list of the Exam task
card.

0.0

F.592

Operator Manual

Examination

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Keeping the left mouse button pressed, drag-and-drop the


selected scan protocol into the content area of the Exam
Explorer.

Select Object > Save from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or

F.5

Click this button on the tool bar.


The protocol transferred to the Exam Explorer is saved with
F.5
the corresponding program.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.593

Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Examination

0.0

F.594

Operator Manual

Performing a routine
examination

CHAPTER

F.6

F.6

After completion of exam-related preparations, you acquired a


localizer and graphically planned the slice or slab groups for the
examination in the reference images. Any necessary changes
to measurement parameters have been made.
Page F.14, Procedure for routine scanning
F.6

Routine scan
procedure

F.6

Once you have finished adapting the parameters of the first protocol, apply the new settings.
F.6
The protocol is closed and the system automatically starts running this protocol. Once this protocol has been completed, the
system automatically starts running the next protocol unless it
is marked by an icon as not ready for measurement.
F.6

Utilizing scan times

F.6

Protocols usually take some time to run. This time can be used
to prepare the following protocols or for postprocessing tasks.F.6
After the initial scans have started, you can edit the portion of
the job list not yet measured using the program control. You can
complete the parameters of pending protocols and plan the
examination sequence.
Page F.639, Processing the job list while scans are being
performed
F.6
You can also use the time to view, evaluate, comment, or film
images of a series that has already run.
Part G, Part H, Part O
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.61

Performing a routine examination

Stopping an examination

F.6

Examination

If the measurement procedure is interrupted (e.g., by patient


movement) or you determine that all necessary images have
been scanned, you can interrupt scanning at any time.
F.6
This does not affect the remaining program sequence.
F.6

Repeating scans

F.6

Protocols that have been interrupted can be repeated at any


time. You decide whether to repeat the most recent protocol
only or a complete section of the job list.
F.6

Starting scans manually

F.6

Breath-hold scans to prevent motion artifacts are started manually. The protocol is automatically loaded into the scan system
but does not start until you manually give the command.
F.6
For kinematic examinations, you can run protocols any number
of times. In this case, start a protocol manually and run it as
many times as required to complete all necessary scans.
F.6

Contrast agent
examinations

F.6

For examinations using contrast agent, the scan program


includes pauses to administer the contrast agent.
Page F.71, Using a contrast agent
F.6
Alternatively, you can perform contrast agent examinations
using multiple scans.
Page F.624, Starting a protocol manually - multiple scans
F.6

0.0

F.62

Operator Manual

Examination

Scans with patient


instructions

Performing a routine examination

F.6

Before and after scans, you can automatically add patient


instructions in different languages via protocols or manually
play back voice-overs.
Chapter F.11, Patient instructions
F.6

Automatic position
suggestion

F.6

If you have a license for AutoAlign, the system performs slice


positioning for head examinations, automatically and reproducibly, independent of the positioning of the patient's head.
Page F.191, Automatic Position Suggestion
F.6

Jobs

F.6

If you have the necessary license and your system is connected


to a hospital information system (HIS), you can receive jobs for
your MR system from the HIS via the network. When you register a patient, a reference to the job is created in the form of
steps that appear as a range marker in the job list. All services
rendered are automatically entered in the job. The information
for the procedure step is now available for further processing
within the hospital.
Page D.68, Editing the performance documentation
F.6

Conflict management

F.6

Before and during a scan, inconsistencies may occur between


the scan program and the actual settings at the system (e.g.,
the coils actually connected do not match the coil configuration
on the System Coils parameter card). The system detects
inconsistencies and helps you to eliminate them by displaying
messages.
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.63

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Displaying the job list in the


program control

F.6

The program control allows you to trace and modify the course
of an examination including all scans.
F.6
The program instructions are color-coded depending on the
processing status:
F.6
Executed protocols have a dark-gray background
Protocols that are currently running are shown with a white
background
Opened protocols are marked with bars in light gray that are
pushed to the right
Protocols that are pending are shown against a light gray
background

completed protocol
Series
icon
current scan
open scan
pending protocols

0.0

F.64

Operator Manual

Examination

Tooltip

Performing a routine examination

F.6

If you position and hold the mouse pointer over the name of a
program instruction, a tool tip displays the following information:
F.6
The full name of the program instruction.
A short comment if entered in the properties dialog box.

Icons to identify the


protocols

F.6

Icons before or after the protocol names identify additional


properties of the program instructions.
F.6

A protocol marked with a construction worker icon cannot be


automatically started at this processing state because the
parameters are still incomplete.
F.6
The incomplete data usually relates to the positioning of the
slices to be measured. All other data are typically predefined by
the scan program.
Page F.41, Positioning Slices
F.6
A protocol identified by a flagman needs to be started manually.
This is required e.g. for breath-hold scans.
Page F.61, Performing a routine examination
F.6

A protocol identified by a flagman with several flags can be


started and measured several times in a row. This is required
e.g. for kinematic examinations.
Page F.61, Performing a routine examination
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.65

Performing a routine examination

Examination

This symbol identifies protocols involving automatic image


postprocessing following the measurement, e.g. adding or subtracting series.
F.6

If you have planned a contrast agent pause for your scan program, the subsequent scans will be marked with a syringe icon
indicating contrast agent scans.
Page F.61, Performing a routine examination
F.6

On a protocol with this icon, patient instructions are automatically played before and/or after scanning.
F.6
F.6

If you insert a protocol in the job list that is marked as including


automatic patient instructions although it does not have voice
output, the program is identified with an icon by the program
control following the appropriate message.
Page F.655, Program instruction with a patient instruction F.6
A protocol that is the target of a copy reference for which the
copy reference exists is marked with this icon. The number next
to the icon indicates the source of the copy reference.
F.6

0.0

F.66

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Copy references crossed out in red are not valid. Invalid copy
references occur when parameters change or when there are
parameter conflicts between the source and target protocol.
They cannot be included in a scan.
F.6

When you load a scan program into the job list for the first time,
the estimated scan time is displayed in addition to all program
instructions. Protocols displaying scan times are pending.
The scan time displayed next to a multiple-loading protocol indicates the duration of a single repetition.
The scan time is also shown in the Exam Explorer and the protocol overview.
Symbols of series in
program instructions

F.6

Once program instructions are processed and the images have


been calculated, the series icon is displayed to the right of the
protocol name in the program control. The symbol shows the
status or event of the program instruction to be processed:
Start of scan.
First images of the first series have been reconstructed.
During the scan, only one series was generated; the images of
this series were fully reconstructed.
Several series were generated during the scan; only part of the
images are fully reconstructed.
Several series were generated during the scan; all series are
fully reconstructed.
Page F.35, Loading a series from the program control

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.67

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Protocols that have been canceled or skipped are identified by


a lightning icon to the left of the protocol name in the program
control.
Page F.61, Performing a routine examination

Information in the
status bar

The status bar shows information while a scan is in progress. F.6


F.6

Information about the current status of the program control is


shown in the left section (e.g. that the patient has not yet
been positioned, program instructions have not yet been
inserted, or the program control is waiting for input/actions).
Results and error messages are shown in the middle section.

Scan is aborted due


to a system error

F.6

If a system error occurs during a scan, the scan will be aborted


automatically and marked as such.
F.6

Indicates that image calculation has been canceled.


F.6

Indicates that calculation has been canceled by the scanner.

F.6

0.0

F.68

Operator Manual

Examination

Range markers

Performing a routine examination

F.6

Within the job list, range markers provide information about different properties that are valid across multiple protocols.
F.6
These range markers indicate whether (and which) image comments have been entered for the scanned images.
Page F.913, Editing an image comment
F.6

This range marker indicates the body region examined.


Page F.93, Editing a body region instruction range
F.6

This range marker indicates that a job exists for the examination.
Page F.95, Editing a work step in the instruction area
F.6

The range marker for a step can have one of the following
modes:
F.6
The step has been completed.
F.6

The examinations of a step have been canceled.

F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.69

Performing a routine examination

F.6

Examination

Scan procedure for a routine


examination

F.6

After graphic slice positioning in the reference images and


checking the routine measurement parameters of your first protocol, you can apply the settings.
Page F.584, Accepting measurement parameter settings F.6
For the most part, routine examinations run automatically.

F.6

0.0

F.610

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Running complete protocols

F.6

After completing the graphic slice positioning for the first protocol, you close the protocol. It is loaded into the scan system.
Scanning will start automatically.
F.6
While the scan is in progress, the protocol is displayed with a
white background in the job list. The remaining scan time is indicated in the status bar.
F.6
The images of the protocol are reconstructed immediately while
scanning is in progress. After image reconstruction has been
completed, the series icon is displayed.
F.6
If the next protocol has executable status (no construction
worker icon), it will start immediately following the first protocol.F.6

Series
icon
current scan

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.611

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Completing and running a protocol with a


construction worker icon

F.6

A protocol cannot be started automatically unless the slice positions have been adjusted in the reference images.
F.6
These protocols are marked by a construction worker icon in
the job list.
F.6
Incomplete protocols ready to be run are opened automatically.
F.6
Position the slices or slabs.
Make necessary parameter changes on the cards of the
parameter card stack.
Click the Apply button.
The protocol is closed and the scan is started.

F.6

0.0

F.612

Operator Manual

Examination

Setting a protocol to
executable without
checking

Performing a routine examination

You can mark a scan protocol identified by a construction


worker icon as executable without checking it.
F.6

F.6

Select the protocol from the job list.


Right-click and select the Complete option from the context
menu. A checkmark appears next to the menu item.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.613

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Or

F.6

Select Edit > Properties from the main menu or Properties


from the context menu.
Or

F.6

Press the Alt + Return keys on your keyboard.


The Protocol step properties dialog box opens.

F.6

Go to the Execution subtask card.

0.0

F.614

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Select the Start measurement without further preparation checkbox.


Click OK.

The protocol is set to executable and the construction worker


icon is removed. The protocol may now be started.
F.6
You can also use this method to manually reset scan protocols
with executable parameters to not executable. Deselect the
checkbox. The protocol will stop when it is ready to run.
F.6
F.6

NOTE
If you set a protocol to executable without checking to start
the protocol immediately, the table immediately moves to
the table position entered in the protocol if it does not match
the table position currently set.
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.615

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Playing back patient instructions manually

F.6

If you want to play back breathing or other patient instructions


in the examination room, you can use the voice outputs. They
are available in various languages.
F.6

Playing back an existing


voice output

F.6

Select Queue > Voice Output > Play... from the main menu
or Voice Output from the context menu in the outer area of
the program control.
The Voice Output dialog box opens.

F.6

F.6

0.0

F.616

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Select the language from the selection list.


Select the required patient instruction.
Click the Play back button.
The selected voice output will be played back.

F.6

Recording patient
instructions

F.6

If the list of voice outputs does not contain the patient instruction you require, you can record it.
Page F.1121, Changing a voice output
F.6
Voice outputs can be recorded or edited only if no patient is currently registered.
F.6
If you have already registered the patient to be examined,
close the examination again if necessary.
Page F.620, Closing a patient

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.617

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Closing a routine examination

F.6

An examination is complete after all program instructions in the


program control have been processed and all images have
been reconstructed.
F.6

All protocols
completed

All program instructions are now marked with the series icon. F.6
F.6

Series
icon

You can close the examination after determining that you do not
have to perform additional scans or repeat protocols.
F.6

0.0

F.618

Operator Manual

Examination

Moving the table out


of the magnet

Performing a routine examination

The patient table is moved completely out of the magnet bore.F.6


F.6

Use the Table Positioning dialog box or move the patient table
using the buttons on the control unit near the magnet bore.
Chapter F.8, Positioning the Patient Table and System
Manual
F.6

Closing the examination

F.6

The current examination is complete once you have moved the


patient table into the HOME position, i.e., completely out of the
magnet.
F.6
You can now return the patient to the ward.
Subsequently, you can register a new patient.
F.6

Job
completing

F.6

After all scans of the examination and all planned postprocessing steps have been completed, and the series have been
transferred to the film sheet or printed, you can complete the
procedure step.
Page F.620, Closing a patient
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.619

Performing a routine examination

Closing a patient

F.6

Examination

If you release the last patient at the end of the working day,
reset the program control to its original state.
F.6
Select Patient > Close Patient from the main menu.
Or

F.6

Right-click the name of the patient in the program control and


select Close Patient from the context menu.
The job list is removed from the program control. All functions
of the program control are disabled.
F.6

If you need to correct the data of a registered patient during


an examination, you have to remove the patient from the job
list first by selecting Close Patient.

0.0

F.620

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Starting a protocol manually

F.6

Some protocols should be started manually, e.g. protocols


requiring breath-hold commands. It is helpful to have the scan
system stop after the adjustments and wait for a manual start
command.
F.6

Protocols that have to be started manually are marked by a flagman icon in the job list.
F.6

Flagman
The start mode of a protocol (manual or automatic) can be set
using the Execution subtask card in the Protocol step properties dialog box.
F.6

N OT E
You always start multiple breath-hold scans from the Inline
Display.
Page F.1026, Starting multiple breath-hold scans F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.621

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Starting a protocol manually - single scan

F.6

Manual protocols can be started and run only once or several


times in a row.
F.6
A protocol that you want to start manually and run once is automatically loaded into the scan system. After completion of
adjustment, the program control waits for your start commandF.6
The Exam paused dialog box is displayed.

F.6

F.6

0.0

F.622

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Give the breath-hold instructions. Subsequently, start the measurement via Continue or the F12 key. The system does not
have to load parameters or perform adjustments. This saves
time and reduces patient stress.
F.6
You can give breath-hold instructions automatically before or
after the scan.
Page F.129, Playing back voice output

Starting the
measurement

F.6

Click the Continue button to start scanning immediately and


close the Exam paused dialog box.
Or

F.6

Click the Close button to close the Exam paused dialog box.
And

F.6

Click the Continue button in the program control or select


Continue from the context menu.
As an alternative, you can start the measurement via the F12
key.
Canceling the
measurement

F.6

Click the Skip button to close the Exam paused dialog box.
The loaded protocol is not run and the next program instruction is initiated.
The protocol is marked "canceled."
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.623

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Starting a protocol manually - multiple scans

F.6

Some protocols have to be started manually several times (e.g.


a contrast agent, breath-hold examination of the liver). A series
of the region of interest is acquired at regular intervals to document the progress of contrast agent uptake. The protocol is
repeated using the breath-hold technique until all necessary
data have been acquired.
F.6
The Exam paused dialog box opens as soon as the program
control comes across this protocol while the program instructions are running.
F.6

Another application for multiple scanning includes kinematic


examinations (e.g. when examining a joint).

0.0

F.624

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Starting the protocol

F.6

Click the Continue button to start the first scan.


The protocol starts.

F.6

As an alternative, you can start the measurement via the F12


key.

Icon for multiple


loading/starting

The Exam paused dialog box closes and reopens once the
system is ready for the next scan.
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.625

Performing a routine examination

Starting the next scan

F.6

Examination

The protocol parameters and slice position may not be modified


during the pause.
F.6
Next, click the Continue button again in the Exam pause
dialog box to run the protocol a second time.
The same scan protocol as before is added to the job list and
measured a second time.
F.6
As an alternative, you can start the measurement via the F12
key.

Completed protocol

Next running protocol

Protocols that have already run are numbered and appear in


front of the multiple protocol. This shows you the sequence of
scans.
F.6

0.0

F.626

Operator Manual

Examination

Timing scans with


countdown

Performing a routine examination

F.6

Contrast-enhanced examinations often require a precisely


timed sequence of scans, especially following contrast agent
administration.
F.6

Three fields are available to help you time the required


sequence of successive scans:
F.6
The countdown input field helps you plan the start of the
next scan.
The break time display field indicates the time since the end
of the previous scan.
The time elapsed since the start of the first scan of the current multiple scan is displayed in the total time display field.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.627

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Enter the length of the pause in seconds in the Countdown


field.

Click the Start button.


The Start button will change to Hold and the length of the
pause is counted down.
F.6
The total time elapsed since the pause dialog box was opened
is counted as well and displayed in the break time display
field.
F.6
After the pause, the countdown field continues to count the
time and displays it as a negative number.
Clicking the Hold button interrupts the timer in the countdown
field or stops it after the pause. This allows you to reenter a
pause time.
F.6
Interrupting the countdown does not interrupt the break time
and total time.

0.0

F.628

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Interrupting scanning

F.6

Sometimes it is necessary to stop a scan, e.g. if the patient


moves.
F.6
F.6

Click the Stop button in the program control.


Or

F.6

Select Queue > Stop from the main menu.


Or

F.6

Right-click the outer area of the program control and select


Stop Running Step from the context menu.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.629

Performing a routine examination

Or

Examination

F.6

Press the F3 key on your keyboard.


The scan stops immediately. The protocol is stopped and
F.6
marked with a cancellation icon (lightning).

Cancellation icon

You can also interrupt a scan in the examination room by


using the STOP button on the control unit near the magnet
bore.
see System Manual

0.0

F.630

Operator Manual

Examination

Scan is aborted due to a


system error

Performing a routine examination

F.6

If a system error occurs during a scan, the scan will be aborted


automatically and marked as such.
F.6
The icons on the left are displayed on the status bar.
Page F.68, Scan is aborted due to a system error

F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.631

Performing a routine examination

Stopping one scan and


starting the next

F.6

Examination

You may stop a scan in progress and immediately start the next
scan. This is used, e.g. during contrast agent uptake to subsequently start a high-resolution protocol.
F.6
You can monitor the contrast agent uptake with the first localizer. As soon as it becomes visible in the image, you can start
the next high-resolution sequence for imaging.
F.6

Use the Stop button or the menu items to stop the scan in
progress.
F.6

Click the Continue button to start the next scan.


Or

F.6

Select Queue > Continue from the main menu.


Or

F.6

Press the Shift + F3 keys on your keyboard.


Or

F.6

Select Continue Execution from the context menu in the


(left-hand) outer margin of the Program Control.
You can also continue scanning by using the START button at
the magnet bore in the examination room.
Refer to the System Manual

0.0

F.632

Operator Manual

Examination

Skipping a program
instruction

Performing a routine examination

F.6

You may skip a program instruction in the job list that has not
yet run and is open for editing.
F.6
Click the Skip button.
Or

F.6

Select Skip Next Step from the context menu in the left margin of the program control.
The skipped program instruction is marked with a canceled icon
(lightning) and has a dark gray background.
F.6
You can now resume the examination with the next program
instruction.
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.633

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Repeating scans

F.6

You may repeat individual as well as entire sections of previously processed program instructions.
F.6
In some cases (e.g., if you need to reposition the patient), it may
be necessary to scan the entire job list again.
F.6

Repeating a canceled
protocol

It is possible to repeat a canceled protocol.


F.6

F.6

Select the canceled protocol from the job list.


Select Queue > Rerun from the main menu.
Or

F.6

Select Rerun from the context menu.


The protocol is automatically started and processed again.
F.6

Repeating previously
processed protocols

Select the protocol you would like to repeat.


F.6

Select Add from the context menu (right mouse button).


Or

F.6

Select Queue > Add.


The selected program instruction will be copied and appended
to the end of the job list.
F.6

0.0

F.634

Operator Manual

Examination

Repeating multiple
program instructions

Performing a routine examination

F.6

Similarly, you may rerun several program instructions up to the


protocol you have just stopped.
F.6
Select the program instruction from which you want to repeat
all subsequent protocols.
Select Queue > Rerun from the main menu or Rerun from
the context menu.
The selected protocol will be automatically started and all subsequent, previously processed program instructions will be
repeated.
F.6
If you skipped the selected protocol the first time, it may still
have the status incomplete. This protocol is automatically
opened for completion.

Repeat entire queue

F.6

If you interrupted an examination, for example, because of a


serious error, you can reset the job list and start the examination again.
(Example: you notice that the patient was not positioned optimally on the patient table and you want to reposition the
patient).
F.6
Select the first program instruction.
Select Queue > Rerun from the main menu or Rerun from
the context menu.
All protocols previously processed will be run again.

F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.635

Performing a routine examination

Defining a new center position

Examination

F.6

Resetting the table position to zero allows you to start a new


series block. The current table position is now defined as the
center position.
F.6

Setting the table


position to zero

Select Patient > Reset Table Position from the main menu.
F.6

Or

F.6

Place the mouse pointer on the patient name in the program


control and select Reset Table Position from the context
menu (right mouse button).
All planning images in the graphic segments and all series symbols in the program control are removed from protocols that
have already run.
F.6
All protocols ready for measurement are reset to incomplete if
indicated as such in the property dialog box. They must be
planned again.
F.6
The job list in the program control is now ready for scanning
again.
F.6

0.0

F.636

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Scanning an open protocol more than once

F.6

For examinations with scans that differ only slightly in their protocol parameters (e.g. for cardiac and angio applications), you
may perform the scans with an open protocol.
F.6
When you repeatedly scan an open protocol, it is not necessary to close protocols following each parameter change with
Apply and then reopen the job list again.
Change your parameters as required.
Select Queue > Scan Opened Protocol from the main
menu or Scan Opened Step from the context menu in the
left (outer) margin of the program control.
Or

F.6

Click the Scan button in the Program Control.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.637

Performing a routine examination

Examination

A copy of the open protocol is generated and inserted in the job


list below the open protocol.
F.6

The protocol is complete and ready to run immediately. The


protocol will be performed as soon as it reaches its turn in the
job list.
F.6
You may repeat this process as often as necessary.

0.0

F.638

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Processing the job list while scans


are being performed

F.6

Scanning individual protocols usually takes some time. You can


reduce the duration of the overall examination by effectively
using the scan time for postprocessing and preparing the scan
sequence. This eliminates unnecessary stress from the patient.
F.6

Completing protocols

F.6

While the first protocols are in progress, you may check and
complete the parameter settings of subsequent protocols. This
allows you to avoid unnecessary pauses between individual
scans.
F.6

Opening a protocol

F.6

Double-click a protocol in the section of the job list that is still


pending.
Or

F.6

Select the protocol and click the Open button.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.639

Performing a routine examination

Examination

The protocol opens. Its measurement parameters are displayed


in the parameter card stack. You may add to these parameters
or modify them, if necessary.
F.6
Then click the Apply button.
The protocol closes. It is now complete and executable.
F.6

Opening the next


protocol for editing

F.6

Even if a protocol is open, you can open and edit an additional


program instruction from the part of the job list that is still pending. Any changes you have made have to be saved first.
F.6
Double-click another protocol in the section of the job list that
still needs to be executed.
Or

F.6

Select the protocol and click the Open button.


The already opened protocol is closed, and the Apply
Changes dialog box appears (even if you have not made any
changes).
F.6

0.0

F.640

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Select the Make Protocol Complete option to "complete"


the program instruction.
If this option is activated, you must open the protocol again
before scanning and switch it to complete.

Click Yes to accept the changed parameter settings of the


protocol last opened.
The program instruction is now ready to run.

F.6

Or

F.6

Click No to reject the parameter changes.


Or

F.6

Click Cancel to continue editing the last protocol to be


opened.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.641

Performing a routine examination

Viewing parameters of
protocols previously run

F.6

Examination

You may also view the parameters of protocols that have been
run already. This enables you to compare the parameters of
previous protocols with the program instructions to be run. F.6
Double-click a previously scanned protocol.
Or

F.6

Select a previously scanned protocol by clicking it.


Select Edit > View Protocol from the main menu or View
Protocol from the context menu (right mouse button).
The Step Protocol number - Protocol name (read-only) window opens. The parameters may be viewed but not changed. F.6
Move the window across the screen so that the parameter
card stack is visible. This enables you to compare the measurement parameters of a previously scanned protocol with
those of a protocol still to be performed.

0.0

F.642

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Applying parameter settings

F.6

To apply the parameter settings of one protocol to another protocol, copy the parameter settings or set a copy reference.
F.6

Copying parameters
from a protocol

F.6

First open the (target) protocol into which you want to copy
the parameters (double-click).
Select the (source) protocol from which you wish to transfer
the settings (single-click).
Select Queue > Copy Parameter from the main menu or
Copy Parameter from the context menu.
In the Copy Parameter Groups dialog box, select the
parameter group with the settings you want to copy.
Page F.585, Copying measurement parameters
It does not matter if the source protocol is positioned behind
the target protocol in the job list.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.643

Performing a routine examination

Copying parameters from


an image in the GSP
segment

F.6

Examination

You may also select a GSP segment for copying parameter settings, if the GSP segment contains an image, the protocol of
which is still pending in the job list.
F.6
First open the (target) protocol into which you want to copy
the parameters (double-click).
Place the mouse pointer on the GSP segment containing the
image.
Select Copy Parameter from the context menu in this segment.
In the Copy Parameter Groups dialog box, select the
parameter group with the settings you want to copy.
Page F.585, Copying measurement parameters

Parameter conflicts may occur on copying parameters settings.


A message box will indicate the conflict.
Page F.649, Inconsistencies in parameter settings
F.6

0.0

F.644

Operator Manual

Examination

Setting a copy reference

Performing a routine examination

F.6

Copy references provide another way of transferring parameter


settings from one protocol to another. This simplifies manual
copying of parameter settings.
F.6
Select a pending target protocol from the section of the job
list.
Select Edit > Properties from the main menu or Properties
from the context menu.
Or

F.6

Press the Alt + Return keys on your keyboard.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.645

Performing a routine examination

Examination

The Protocol step properties dialog box opens.

F.6

Go to the Copy References subtask card.

Check the Copy reference is active checkbox.


Once the copy reference has been activated, the Source protocol step and Copy parameter group lists are available. F.6
In the Source protocol step list, select the protocol with the
parameter settings you want to copy.

0.0

F.646

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

This list contains all the protocols located in front of the


selected protocol in the scan program that are not the target of
a copy reference.
F.6

In the Copy parameter group list, select the parameters to


be copied from the source to the target protocol.
Only parameter groups may be copied with a copy reference,
not single parameters.
Page F.585, Copying measurement parameters
F.6
Click OK to close the Protocol step properties dialog box.
The target protocol is now marked by a reference icon in the job
list.
F.6

Reference symbol
The number next to the reference symbol identifies the source
protocol with the settings to be copied.
F.6
You cannot see which parameter group has been applied. To
view this information you need to reopen the properties window.
Parameter conflicts may occur when setting copy references. A
message box will indicate the conflict.
Page F.649, Inconsistencies in parameter settings
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.647

Performing a routine examination

Updating a copy
reference

F.6

Examination

If a target protocol has a copy reference, the referenced parameter settings are copied and updated from the source protocol
to the selected program instruction.
F.6
Select the target protocol with a reference icon.
Select Queue > Update Copy Reference from the main
menu or Update Copy Reference from the context menu.
The copy reference will be updated and used in the scanning
process.
F.6

Parameter conflicts may occur when you update parameter settings from a source to a target protocol. A message box will indicate the conflict.
Page F.649, Inconsistencies in parameter settings
F.6

0.0

F.648

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Inconsistencies in parameter settings

F.6

The Confirm Parameter Changes message box will be displayed in case of inconsistencies between the source and target protocol for the parameter settings, that is, parameter settings are not valid or executable.
F.6

The message box displayed includes proposals for resolving


the conflict.
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.649

Performing a routine examination

Parameter change by
copying

Examination

F.6
F.6

Click OK.
The new settings are applied. This resolves the inconsistency.F.6
Or

F.6

Click Cancel.
The new settings are not applied.
F.6

Parameter change
by copy reference

Click OK.
F.6

The suggestion is applied and a valid copy reference is set.

Or

F.6

Click Cancel.
The new settings are not applied. The copy reference has been
F.6
recorded by the system, however, it is not valid.

0.0

F.650

Operator Manual

Examination

Copy reference for


multiple target protocols

Performing a routine examination

F.6

Updating copy references may cause multiple conflicts when


several target protocols are updated.
F.6
The message box Confirm Parameter Changes appears.

F.6

F.6

Applying all parameter


changes

Select the Confirm checkbox and click OK.


F.6

The parameters are copied to all target protocols.

F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.651

Performing a routine examination

Not applying parameter


changes

F.6

Examination

You have a choice to not involve certain target protocols in the


suggested parameter change.
F.6
Use the <Back and Next> buttons to switch between target
protocols.
If the Confirm checkbox is not selected, the suggested
change will not be applied even if you close the window with
OK.

Making a source protocol


complete

F.6

Select the Make Protocols Complete checkbox and click


OK.
The source protocol is set to complete.

F.6

0.0

F.652

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Inserting new program instructions

F.6

You can add further program instructions in the job list in addition to the given scan program.
F.6

Inserting a new protocol

F.6

Click the Program parameter card to move it into foreground.


Select the required protocol.
Click the << button on the Program parameter card to
append the selected protocol to the end of the job list.
Or

F.6

Select Queue > Append from the main menu.


Or

F.6

Select Append from the context menu.


Or

F.6

Call up the Exam Explorer.


Page F.163, Calling up the Exam Explorer
Select a protocol in the Exam Explorer.
Select Tools > Append To Queue.
Or

F.6

Select Append To Queue from the context menu.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.653

Performing a routine examination

Examination

The selected protocol is appended to the end of the job list.

F.6

You may now position the protocol at the required location


among the pending protocols.
Page F.660, Changing scan sequence
F.6

Or

F.6

Press the mouse button and drag the required protocol from
the Program parameter card or the Exam Explorer to the
job list (drag & drop).
Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer is at the
correct position.
If you drag the protocol into the empty part of the program
control, the program instruction will be placed at the end of
the job list.

0.0

F.654

Operator Manual

Examination

Program instruction with a


patient instruction
F.6

Performing a routine examination

For example, you have selected a protocol with voice output or


included patient instructions for automatic playback via the protocol properties.
Page F.129, Playing back voice output
F.6
When you insert the protocol into the job list the system checks
whether the voice outputs are available in the set language.
F.6

If the voice outputs are available, the protocol is marked with a


loudspeaker icon in the job list.
F.6
Or

F.6

A message box opens if the voice outputs are not available. The
protocol is then marked with a crossed out loudspeaker icon in
the job list.
F.6
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.655

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Click OK and announce your instructions over the intercom


system.

There are also other ways to respond to the message:

F.6

You can set another language.


Page F.118, Setting playback of voice outputs
You can record the voice output in the set language.
Page F.1121, Changing a voice output
If you close the message box without switching languages or
recording a new patient instruction, a message box will
appear when you start the affected protocol. You will be
prompted to remove the missing voice outputs from the protocol and speak the instructions through the intercom.

0.0

F.656

Operator Manual

Examination

Inserting a new pause

Performing a routine examination

F.6

Select Queue > New Pause from the main menu or New
Pause from the context menu in the outer margin of the Program Control.
The Pause step properties dialog box is displayed.

F.6

Enter a Name and, if necessary, a Description in the input


fields.
Click OK.
The new pause is appended to the end of the job list. You can
now move the pause to the correct position.
Page F.660, Changing scan sequence
F.6
If you want the pause to be a contrast agent pause, you can
define contrast agent administration on the Contrast agent
subtask card.
Page F.715, Inserting and planning contrast agent pauses

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.657

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Generating a protocol from acquired images


(Phoenix)

F.6

You may reconstruct a new protocol from acquired series or single images and add it to the job list. For this purpose, you may
select images from different sources (stamp segments, large
segments, or Patient Browser).
F.6
Select a series or image from the stamp segments of the
Maestro layout, from the large image segments, or from the
Patient Browser.
F.6

NOTE
For images ore series scanned with a different software
version, or generated at another Magnetom, the protocols
used for this purpose have to be converted.
Page F.659, Reconstructed protocol by conversion F.6

Press the mouse button and drag your selection into the program control (drag & drop).
Or

F.6

Select Append To Queue from the context menu in one of


the large image segments.

0.0

F.658

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

A protocol is generated from the series or image and contains


all measurement parameters used to acquire the image. The
reconstructed protocol is appended to the end of the job list. F.6
You may now position the protocol at the required location
among the pending protocols.
Page F.660, Changing scan sequence
F.6

Reconstructed protocol
by conversion

F.6

If images or series have not be scanned with the same software


version or originate from different MAGNETOM types, the
underlying protocols have to be converted to adapt the reconstructed protocols to your type of MAGNETOM system.
F.6
In this case, selection is not possible in the stamp segments
of the Maestro Layout or in the large image segments.
Therefore select a series or image in the Patient Browser.
Drag&drop the image/series into the job list with the left
mouse button held down. Also press the Shift key after you
start dragging.
If conversion fails, an error message appears.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.659

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Changing scan sequence

F.6

If the sequence of the routine scan program is not suitable for


the current examination, you can modify the sequence while it
is running.
F.6
Of course, you can only change the lower part of the job list that
is still pending.
F.6

Moving a program
instruction

Select the protocol or scan pause that you want to move.


F.6

Select Queue > Move Up or Move Down from the main


menu or Move Up or Move Down from the context menu.
Or

F.6

Use the shortcuts Alt + and Alt + .


You may also move a program instruction via drag & drop.
Page A.26, Drag & drop
F.6

Select the program instruction that you want to move.


Press the left mouse button and drag it to its new position in
the job list.

0.0

F.660

Operator Manual

Examination

Cutting/copying and
pasting a program
instruction

Performing a routine examination

Select a program instruction.


F.6

Select Edit > Copy from the main menu or Copy from the
context menu to copy the entry.
Or

F.6

Select Edit > Cut from the main menu or Cut from the context menu to cut the entry.
Or

F.6

Use the shortcuts Ctrl + C (copy) or Ctrl + X (cut).


The selected entry is copied or cut to the clipboard.

F.6

Select the program instruction, in front of the position where


you want to insert the cut protocol.
Select Edit > Paste from the main menu or Paste from the
context menu.
Or

F.6

Use the shortcut Ctrl + V.


If no program instruction was selected before pasting it, the
cut protocol or the cut pause will be appended to the end of
the job list.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.661

Performing a routine examination

Examination

You may copy a program instruction via drag & drop.


Page A.26, Drag & drop

F.6

Click the program instruction you want to copy.


Keep both the Ctrl key and the left mouse button pressed
and drag it to the desired position in the job list.
Copying via drag & drop does not work with open program
instructions.

0.0

F.662

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Deleting program instructions

F.6

You may remove individual program instructions from the job


list.
F.6

Deleting a program
instruction

F.6

Select the program instruction that you want to remove from


the job list.
Select Edit > Delete from the main menu or Delete from the
context menu.
Or

F.6

Use the Del. key on the keyboard.


Or

F.6

Click the wastepaper basket.

You may also remove a program instruction easily via


drag & drop.
Page A.26, Drag & drop
F.6
Select the program instruction that you want to remove from
the job list.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag it to the wastepaper basket on the bottom left next to the job list.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.663

Performing a routine examination

Deleting a complete
program instruction list

F.6

Examination

Select Queue > Clear All from the main menu or Clear All
from the context menu.
All program instructions are deleted from the job list.

F.6

This menu item is not available when a scan is in progress.

0.0

F.664

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Changing protocol properties

F.6

You can adjust the properties of the pending protocols and


pauses during an examination.
F.6
Examples of protocol properties:

F.6

Automatic loading of a measured series into the image area


or other task cards
Setting automatic voice outputs
Changing the protocol's start type
Changing the name of the protocol
Already opened protocols can also be changed. However, it
is not possible to adjust the voice output for these protocols.
Select the protocol from the job list.
Select Edit > Properties... from the main menu.
Or

F.6

Select Properties... from the context menu.


The Protocol step properties dialog box opens.

F.6

Click the relevant subtask card into foreground.


Change the properties of the protocol.
A detailed description of the properties of protocols and pauses
is available in a separate chapter.
Chapter F.12, Protocol and Pause Properties
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.665

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Saving a job list as a new program

F.6

If you want to save a modified scan program for subsequent


examinations, you can save it as a new program.
F.6
Select Queue > Save As Program from the main menu or
Save As Program from the context menu of the program
control (right mouse button).
The Exam Explorer is opened and displays the Save Program
As [Customer Tree] dialog box. Assign your modified scan
program to an examination region as well as an examination
and enter a name for the scan program.
Page F.1661, Saving the scan program under a new nameF.6

0.0

F.666

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Numbering of reconstructed
images

F.6

Numbering is determined by the orientation and position of the


images. It is independent of the slice positioning, excitation
sequence, and number of concatenations in multi-slice scans.
F.6

Numbering rules

F.6

The following rules apply:

F.6

(1) Primary order


Scanned images are divided into sagittal, coronal, and
transverse groups according to their main orientation.
(2) Secondary order
Within these groups, the slices are numbered according to
their position in ascending or descending order.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.667

Performing a routine examination

Examination

You can define the primary order (for example, cor - tra - sag
as one of six possible combinations) and the secondary order
(ascending or descending) when you adapt the protocol
parameters.
The images are numbered by default in the primary order
sag - cor - tra and in the secondary order R >> L, A >> P,
F >> H.

F.6

NOTE
The settings for image numbering are linked to the position
of the scan region.
The image numbering settings of previously processed and
completed protocols are automatically applied when
opening consecutive protocols that have the same position
of scan region.
F.6

0.0

F.668

Operator Manual

Examination

Example

Performing a routine examination

F.6

You are planning a scan with 3 slice groups. You can move or
rotate the slice groups without changing the numbers of the
slice groups.
F.6

The number of the selected slice group is displayed on the


Geometry parameter card under Slice group.
In the display, slice group 1 is moved up:

F.6

After the scan, you may view the numbering of the reconstructed images in the Position Display of the Viewing task
card, in the image area of the Viewing task card, or in the
Patient Browser.
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.669

Performing a routine examination

Examination

In the Position Display you can see the position and numbers
(right side) of the reconstructed images.
F.6

(4)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Assignment of lower-case letters to series names


Name of the new position display series
Number of images on the reference image
Image numbers

0.0

F.670

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

NOTE
If you have configured the position display not to label all
cut, lines, overlapping cut lines can cause incorrect
assignment, between cut lines and invisible image numbers
may lead to an incorrect allocation of cut lines and invisible
image numbers. To be on the safe side in such cases, select
the settings for the cut line labeling in the position overview
so that all cut lines and image numbers are displayed. F.6
Page G.616, Configuring the display of the cut lines

F.6

The display of images in the Patient Browser is defined by the


sort criterion. If you select the criterion Instance Number on
the series level, the images will be displayed in the order of their
slice position.
F.6
You can uniquely assign the images in the Patient Browser to
the images in the Position Display using the images numbers
displayed in both cases.
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.671

Performing a routine examination

Resolving conflicts and


inconsistencies

Examination

F.6

Before or during the examination, inconsistencies can occur


between the data in the currently loaded scan program and the
actual settings in the scan system.
F.6

Inconsistent coil configuration

F.6

The protocol requires coils different from the ones plugged into
the patient table. A message box will appear if one or more coils
is not connected.
F.6

0.0

F.672

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Click OK.
Open the scan protocol (double-click).
Since the required coils are not plugged in for this protocol, the
system automatically adjusts the coil configuration.
F.6
The message box Confirm Parameter Changes appears.

F.6

Confirm your changes with OK.


Connect the missing coils to the patient table.
Go to the System-Coils card in the parameter card stack
and click it into foreground.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.673

Performing a routine examination

Examination

Coils with a
undefined
position

Coils with
a defined
position

Select the coils for scanning.


Click this button in the program control to confirm your settings.
The protocol is closed and you may start the measurement.

F.6

0.0

F.674

Operator Manual

Examination

Performing a routine examination

Inconsistencies resulting from a changed


table position

F.6

Sometimes it is necessary to move the patient table prior to a


scan, e.g. to administer contrast agent to the patient.
F.6
Use the Table Positioning dialog box to control the table movement from the control room. Or, you may move the table by
using the keys on the operating panel next to the magnet bore.
Chapter F.8, Positioning the Patient Table and System
Manual
F.6
At the start a scan the system automatically checks whether the
information about the table position in the subsequent protocols
matches the current table position.
F.6
If it does not, a warning appears indicating that the table will
move. If you answer the dialog box with Yes, the table moves to
the position entered in the protocol and scanning starts.
F.6
F.6

NOTE
However, do not move the table completely out of the
magnet (not into the HOME position!).
Otherwise the examination is considered completed.

F.6

You will not be able to perform any more scans, and you will
have to start the entire examination again from the
beginning (patient registration, overview scan, position
slices... etc.).
F.6

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.675

Performing a routine examination

Examination

0.0

F.676

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

F.7

Using a contrast agent

F.7

Contrast agents may be required for a variety of MR examinations. Paramagnetic contrast agents (usually Gd compounds)
enhance the signal of many pathological structures.
F.7
If you want to run a protocol with contrast agent, use a scan program that already contains pauses for administering contrast
agent.
Page F.24, Selecting a scan program
F.7

All protocols after this pause are marked with a syringe icon in
the job list.
F.7
If no contrast agent pauses are planned in a scan program, you
can insert them into the job list while the examination is in
progress. Or, you may utilize other unrelated pauses in the
examination sequence to administer contrast agent to the
patient and to document it accordingly.
F.7

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.71

Using a contrast agent

Examination

Actual procedure agent

F.7

This is the usual procedure for examinations using contrast


agent:
F.7
Perform a native scan.
Stop the examination before the first contrast agent protocol.
Check whether the contrast agent protocol has a "complete"
status (no construction worker icon).
Please observe the following when applying dynamic contrast
agents:
F.7

Document the contrast agent administered in the Exam


Paused dialog box
Page F.75, Documenting the use of contrast agent in the
examination pause,
Apply contrast agent
Page F.77, Documenting the use of contrast agent without a pause,
New pause or in Pause step properties
Page F.715, Inserting and planning contrast agent
pauses.
Move the patient table out of the magnet using the tabletop
control.

0.0

F.72

Operator Manual

Examination

Using a contrast agent

You can also use the injector to administer the injection in the
magnet.
F.7
F.7

N OT E
Move the table out of the magnet
(but not into the HOME position).
Otherwise the examination is considered completed.

F.7

You are not able to perform additional scans, and you will
have to start the entire examination again from the
beginning (patient registration, overview scan, position
slices... etc.).
F.7

Administer the contrast agent.


After injecting the contrast agent move the table back into the
magnet isocenter.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.73

Using a contrast agent

Examination

Start the first contrast agent protocol during the exam pause,
e.g. via Continue or the F12 key.
All program instructions after the pause will be marked as contrast agent scans via a syringe icon to the left of the protocol
name.
F.7
The syringe icon will be displayed next to the patient's name
above the Program Control.
F.7

Following the contrast agent uptake, reset the contrast agent


icon.
Page F.712, Resetting the contrast agent icon
The subsequent protocols are no longer identified with the contrast agent icon.
F.7

0.0

F.74

Operator Manual

Examination

Using a contrast agent

Documenting the use of Contrast


Agent

F.7

There are various ways of documenting the use of contrast


agent. While you are able to identify an exam as a contrast
agent exam, you are also able to enter data about the type and
quantity of contrast agent.
F.7

Documenting the use of contrast agent in the


examination pause

F.7

If your scan program includes a contrast agent pause, the


examination will stop at the pause. The Exam Paused dialog
box is displayed.
F.7

Select the Contrast agent applied checkbox.


If you want to document further details of the use of contrast
agent for subsequent invoicing (type and quantity), click the
syringe icon to select a substance from the contrast agent
catalog.
Page F.79, Specifying contrast agent details

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.75

Using a contrast agent

Examination

Click Close to close the dialog box.


Administer the contrast agent to the patient and start the
scan with Continue in the program control.
Or

F.7

Administer the contrast agent to the patient.


Click Continue in the Exam Paused dialog box to close the
window and start scanning immediately.
As an alternative, you can start the measurement via the F12
key.
The system checks whether the patient table is being moved
automatically before the next protocol starts. If it is, a warning
indicates table movement and the possible danger to the
patient.
F.7

Click Yes.
The table is moved. The table is moved to the position entered
and scanning is started.
F.7

0.0

F.76

Operator Manual

Examination

Using a contrast agent

Documenting the use of contrast agent


without a pause

F.7

You may also perform a contrast agent examination, even if the


selected program does not include contrast agent pauses.
Instead of a pause, you may use a break in the measurement,
e.g. while you check and complete the parameters of the next
protocol.
F.7
Administer the contrast agent to the patient, document it in the
Apply Contrast Agent dialog box, and continue with the examination.
F.7

Select Job list > Contrast agent from the main menu.
Or

F.7

Click the syringe icon located in the upper left next to the job
list.
Or

F.7

Select Contrast Agent from the context menu in the lefthand (outer) margin of the program control.
The Apply Contrast Agent dialog box is displayed.

F.7

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.77

Using a contrast agent

Examination

Select the Patient has contrast agent checkbox.


Contrast agent
administration

F.7

The input fields for volume and contrast agent names are activated.
F.7
Enter the name and quantity of the contrast agent administered.
Or

F.7

Click the Catalog button.


The following dialog box lets you select the required contrast
agent from the contrast agent catalog.
Page F.79, Specifying contrast agent details.
F.7
Click OK.
Scanning continues.

F.7

To document a scan as a contrast agent scan, it is not mandatory to specify the name and quantity of the contrast agent.
Contrast agent administration is identified by the image text.

0.0

F.78

Operator Manual

Examination

Using a contrast agent

Specifying contrast agent details

F.7

Click the syringe icon in the Exam Paused dialog box.


Or

F.7

Click the syringe icon located in the upper left next to the job
list.
The Apply Contrast Agent dialog box is displayed.

F.7

The syringe icon is shown as depressed in both the Exam


Paused dialog box and the program control next to the job
list.
Select the Patient has contrast agent checkbox.

Click the Catalog button in the Apply Contrast Agent dialog


box.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.79

Using a contrast agent

Examination

The Contrast Agent Catalog dialog box is displayed.

Selecting a contrast agent F.7

F.7

Select a contrast agent from the contrast agent catalog.


Click OK.
The Contrast agent catalog closes. The program returns to
the Apply Contrast Agent dialog box. The selected contrast
agent is displayed in the Contrast agent selection window.
F.7

Click OK.

0.0

F.710

Operator Manual

Examination

Using a contrast agent

The Apply Contrast Agent dialog box closes. Information


about the contrast agent is transferred to the Exam Paused
dialog box, if you called the contrast agent dialog box from the
pause.
F.7
The syringe icon becomes active again and you may start scanning by clicking the Continue button.
F.7

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.711

Using a contrast agent

Examination

Resetting the contrast agent icon

F.7

If you notice that the contrast agent no longer affects the image
contrast during scanning, you may remove the syringe icon for
all subsequent scans.
F.7

Select Job list > Contrast Agent from the main menu or
Contrast Agent from the context menu in the left (outer)
margin of the program control.
Or

F.7

Click the syringe icon located in the upper left next to the job
list.
The Apply Contrast Agent dialog box is displayed.

F.7

Deselect the Patient has contrast agent checkbox.


Or

F.7

The Exam Paused dialog box opens again if an additional contrast agent pause is planned as the next step in the job list. F.7
Deselect the Contrast agent administration checkbox.
Subsequent scans are now no longer marked as contrast agent
F.7
scans.

0.0

F.712

Operator Manual

Examination

Using a contrast agent

Editing the contrast agent catalog

F.7

To make your work easier, you can enter all substances used
as contrast agents in scans in the catalog. You can also add or
remove contrast media during an examination.
F.7

Inserting a contrast agent


into the catalog

F.7

If the contrast agent you want to administer is not already in the


catalog, add it in the Contrast agent catalog dialog box.
Page F.79, Specifying contrast agent details
F.7

Click the Insert Agent button.


A new line is inserted into the catalog.

F.7

Enter a name for the contrast agent, the code value, the
active component, concentration, dilution and, possibly, a
comment.
You need the code if you want to document the contrast agent
used via the HIS (hospital information system) The data are
entered as consumed materials.
Page F.91, Job
Click the Apply button.
The newly entered contrast agent is now included in the catalog.
F.7
The Contrast Agent Catalog dialog box remains open.

F.7

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.713

Using a contrast agent

Deleting a contrast agent


from the catalog

Examination

F.7

If the catalog still contains a contrast agent no longer used by


you, you may delete it at this time.
F.7

Select the substance you want to remove.


Click the Delete agent button.
The selected substance is deleted from the catalog.

F.7

The Contrast Agent Catalog dialog box remains open.

F.7

0.0

F.714

Operator Manual

Examination

Using a contrast agent

Inserting and planning contrast


agent pauses

F.7

If your scan program does not include contrast agent pauses,


you may insert them during an examination. If your program
already contains a contrast agent pause, you can document
contrast agent administration here while the first protocols are
running.
F.7

Inserting a new contrast


agent pause

Select Job list > New Pause from the main menu.
F.7

Or

F.7

Select New Pause from the context menu in the (left-hand)


outer margin of the program control.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.715

Using a contrast agent

Examination

The Pause step properties - Standard - Pause dialog box is


displayed.
F.7

Click the Contrast agent card into foreground.


F.7

0.0

F.716

Operator Manual

Examination

Existing contrast agent


pause

Using a contrast agent

F.7

Contrast agent administration is also documented in the properties window for contrast agent pauses already positioned in
the job list.
F.7
Select the pause from the section of the job list that still
needs to be run.
Select Edit > Properties from the main menu.
Or

F.7

Select Properties from the context menu of the Program


Control.
The Pause step properties - Standard - Pause dialog box is
displayed.
F.7
Click the Contrast agent card into foreground.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.717

Using a contrast agent

Planning contrast agent


administration

Examination

F.7
F.7

Select the Contrast agent administration checkbox.


The Contrast agent selection field and the Catalog button
become active.
F.7

Select the contrast agent you want to administer from the list.
Or

F.7

Click the Catalog... button and select the contrast agent in


the Contrast agent catalog dialog box.
Page F.79, Specifying contrast agent details

0.0

F.718

Operator Manual

Examination

Using a contrast agent

Confirm your entry with OK.


If you have inserted a new pause, the contrast agent pause will
be appended to end of the job list.
F.7
You can now move the contrast agent pause to the correct position in the job list.
Page F.660, Changing scan sequence
F.7

Scanning stops as soon as the pause reaches the top of the job
list. The Exam Paused dialog box is displayed.
F.7
Administer the contrast agent and start the contrast agent
scan with Continue.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.719

Using a contrast agent

Examination

0.0

F.720

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

F.8

Positioning the Patient


Table

F.8

You will have to move the patient table at various points during
the examination to, for example, administer contrast agent. F.8
You can control the patient table movement by using either the
control panel next to the magnet bore or the software at the console in the control room.
F.8

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.81

Positioning the Patient Table

Examination

Calling up table positioning

F.8

Click the Table Positioning button on the tool bar of the


Exam task card.
Or

F.8

Select View > Table Positioning... from the main menu.


The Table Positioning dialog box opens.

F.8

The current table position is displayed, and you can control various horizontal movements of the patient table.
F.8

0.0

F.82

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning the Patient Table

NOTE
When performing table movements at the console, ensure
that the table is not simultaneously moved via the operating
panel at the magnet bore.
F.8

F.8

Current table position


The current, relative table position is displayed here.

F.8

F.8

The relative table position is the distance between the magnet


isocenter and the slice marked using the light localizer.
F.8

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.83

Positioning the Patient Table

Examination

Moving the table by a certain distance

F.8

You may position the patient table with millimeter precision in


the Table Positioning dialog box.
F.8

Enter the distance you want to move the patient table in the
Move table by field.

Then click this button to move the patient table into the magnet (i.e. toward the isocenter) by the specified distance.
Or

F.8

Click this button to move the patient table out of the magnet
by the specified distance.

F.8

NOTE
The Current position and Move table by displays (as well
as the buttons for moving the patient table by a certain
distance) are only available if you have the corresponding
license.
F.8

0.0

F.84

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning the Patient Table

Moving the table into the isocenter

F.8

Click the Move to Center button to move the patient table


precisely into the isocenter.
The isocenter is usually the point that you marked with the light
localizer during the preparation for the examination.
F.8
If you have not marked a point, the table position of the last scan
is considered the center. If you have not performed a scan yet,
the table will move to the scan level of the head coil when you
click the Move to Center button (default setting).
F.8

Moving the table almost completely out of the


magnet

F.8

Click this button to move the patient table almost completely


out of the magnet.
You will move the table to this position, e.g., for contrast administration. The information regarding the position of the scan
center does not change.
F.8

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.85

Positioning the Patient Table

Examination

Canceling a table movement

F.8

Click this button if you want to cancel a table movement.


The patient table will stop at the point it has already reached in
movement.
F.8

Canceling table STOP

F.8

As soon as you press the STOP button on the intercom system


or the console (e.g. in an emergency), the table will stop moving. The buttons for table positioning are also disabled.
F.8
Before you can resume table positioning, you have to first cancel the table STOP.
F.8
Click the Cancelling table stop button.

0.0

F.86

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning the Patient Table

Switching magnet opening lighting on/off

F.8

Some examinations require you to set or switch the tunnel lighting on/off.
F.8
Click this button to switch on the magnet opening lighting, if
it is off.
Click the Lighting of magnet opening button several times
in quick succession to set the intensity of the lighting (3 levels: low, medium, high).
The current setting for magnetic opening lighting is shown to the
right of the button.
F.8
You may set the magnetic opening lighting to three different
brightness levels. The more times you click the button, the
brighter the lighting. Once maximum brightness has been
reached, clicking the button again will dim the lighting.
F.8
To switch the magnet opening lighting off, first set the lighting
to the lowest brightness level.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.87

Positioning the Patient Table

Examination

Switching magnet opening ventilation on/off

F.8

You can adjust the ventilation of the magnet opening from the
console in the control room.
F.8
Click the Ventilation of magnet opening button to switch on
the ventilation in the magnet opening, if it is off.
Click the Ventilation of magnet opening button several
times in quick succession to adjust the ventilation (3 levels:
low, medium, high).
The current setting for tunnel ventilation is shown to the right of
the button.
F.8
To switch the magnet opening ventilation off, first set the ventilation to the lowest level.

0.0

F.88

Operator Manual

Examination

Positioning the Patient Table

Closing the examination

F.8

Click the Move to Home button to move the patient table


completely out of the magnet.
F.8

NOTE
Never move the patient table into the HOME position if you
want to resume the examination afterward.
F.8
Clicking the Move to HOME button always terminates the
current examination.
F.8
The system assumes that you now want to register and
examine the next patient.
F.8
All reference images are removed from the image area.

F.8

F.8

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.89

Positioning the Patient Table

Examination

0.0

F.810

Operator Manual

Working with instruction


areas

CHAPTER

F.9

F.9

Instruction areas are used to define the common properties of


different program instructions in the job list. The instructions
have to be grouped by range markers.
F.9

There are different types of instruction areas:

F.9

Job
Body region
Image comment

Job

F.9

With the necessary license and connection to a hospital information system (HIS), you can access the HIS via the network
to receive jobs for your MR system in the form of work steps. A
job reference is created in the job list during patient registration.
All acquired series and contrast agent administrations will be
automatically entered in the job. You are also able to enter
results series (e.g. from post-processing) or consumables on
your own. The procedure step information is now available for
further processing within the hospital.
Page D.68, Editing the performance documentation
F.9

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.91

Working with instruction areas

Body region

F.9

Examination

The body region to be examined is defined by selecting the


scan program during patient registration. The body region set in
the Program Control can be useful when sorting images later
(e.g. on another image archiving system).
F.9

Image comment

F.9

Instruction areas also include the display of image comments to


be saved with scanned images in the image database. They are
also marked in the program control using range markers.
F.9

0.0

F.92

Operator Manual

Examination

Working with instruction areas

Editing a body region instruction


range

F.9

When you select your scan program, the first range marker for
the body region is defined automatically.
F.9

Changing the body region range marker

F.9

If you decide to examine another body region during the examination, you may change the region setting.
F.9
Select Queue > Change Body Part Examined in the main
menu.
Or

F.9

Select Change Body Part Examined from the pop-up menu


in the program control (right mouse button).
The Body Part Examined dialog box opens.

F.9

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.93

Working with instruction areas

Examination

Select a body region from the selection list.

Click the OK button.


A new range marker is inserted with the new body region.

F.9

If you position the mouse pointer over the range instruction, the
new scan region of the program instructions will be displayed as
a tool tip.
F.9

Deleting the body region range marker

F.9

Select the range marker of the body region you want to


delete.
Select Delete from the context menu of the program control.
The body region is no longer entered in the images.

F.9

0.0

F.94

Operator Manual

Examination

Working with instruction areas

Editing a work step in the


instruction area

F.9

As soon as a patient is registered, a range marker is automatically generated for the work step determined. The step causes
all scans and material consumed (e.g. contrast agent administration) belonging to the examination to be available for further
editing within a license-dependent hospital information system.
F.9

Hovering the mouse pointer over the procedure step displays


the starting time of the scan and information about the procedure step in a tooltip.
F.9

If you have to repeat scans or insert new protocols, they will


be assigned to the existing work step.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.95

Working with instruction areas

Examination

Adding a work step to range marker

F.9

If you need an additional work step during the examination,


insert it using the program control.
F.9

Select Queue > Change Work Step from the main menu.
Or

F.9

Select Change Procedure Step from the pop-up menu of


the Program Control.
The Change Procedure Step dialog box is displayed.

F.9

F.9

The dialog box contains a list of predefined work steps. You can
apply one of the work steps offered or create a new one.
F.9

0.0

F.96

Operator Manual

Examination

Working with instruction areas

Select the Create a new Procedure Step option.


Click the OK button.

A new range marker is inserted in the job list.

F.9

If a program instruction was selected, the range marker


above the program instruction will be inserted into the job list.
If you have not selected a program instruction, the range
marker will be appended to the end of the job list.
This option creates a new work step in the patient database.

F.9

This work step records subsequent examination steps for billing


purposes.
F.9
The range marker of the previous work step is retained and
indicates the processing status.

Editing a new work step

F.9

You may define the newly created work step from the program
control.
F.9
Select the newly inserted range marker.
Select Properties from the context menu.
The Executed Work Steps dialog box is displayed.

F.9

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.97

Working with instruction areas

Examination

Enter a designation in the Description field for billing purposes.


Record all services to be included for billing.
Page D.68, Editing the performance documentation

0.0

F.98

Operator Manual

Examination

Working with instruction areas

Response to a missing work step

F.9

A message box will appear when you start a protocol, if no procedure step exists or if the procedure step has already been
completed. It indicates that the following scans will not be
recorded in a job for billing.
F.9

Click Yes if you want to start scanning.


Or

F.9

Click No if you want to create a work step.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.99

Working with instruction areas

Examination

Canceling a procedure step

F.9

If you are unable to perform an examination as initially planned,


just cancel the procedure step.
F.9

Select the range marker and Cancel from the pop-up menu
of the Program Control.
Or

F.9

Select the range marker and Properties from the pop-up


menu.
The Executed Procedure Steps dialog box then opens.

F.9

Click the Cancel button.


The work step icon is marked with a red cross.

F.9

Subsequent scans are no longer entered in the work step.

F.9

0.0

F.910

Operator Manual

Examination

Working with instruction areas

Completing a procedure step

F.9

You can complete the procedure step when the last scan of the
examination and all planned postprocessing operations have
been completed, and the series has been printed or transferred
to a film sheet.
F.9

Select the range marker and Complete from the pop-up


menu of the Program Control.
Or

F.9

Select the range marker and Properties from the pop-up


menu.
The Executed Procedure Steps dialog box then opens.

F.9

Click the Completed button.


The procedure step icon is marked with a green checkmark.

F.9

Image calculations still in progress are no longer recorded for


this work step.
F.9

If you unregister the patient being examined or register a new


patient, there will be no indication that the procedure step has
not been completed. However, you may complete it later via
the Patient Browser. This can be helpful if you want to enter
series of subsequent postprocessing steps (e.g. spectroscopy) in this procedure step.
Page D.68, Editing the performance documentation

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.911

Working with instruction areas

Examination

Deleting the procedure step range marker

F.9

You can delete a procedure step from the job list of the program
control.
F.9
Select the range marker you want to delete.
Select Delete from the context menu of the program control.
The work step is deleted but is retained in the patient database.

0.0

F.912

Operator Manual

Examination

Working with instruction areas

Editing an image comment

F.9

When registering of a patient, a range marker is automatically


generated for image comments. Initially it is empty. You are able
to enter an image comment for all protocols waiting to be processed, including the selected or open protocol. This comment
appears as an annotation in the center of the lower image margin of the series.
F.9
If you do not enter an image comment in the program control,
comments entered during patient registration will be inserted.
The image comment line remains empty if this activity does
not generate a comment. Special image calculation programs
(IDEA) can enter a comment as well.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.913

Working with instruction areas

Examination

Entering an image comment

F.9

If no image comment has been assigned, you may enter the


required image text.
F.9

Select Queue > Set Image Comment from the main menu.
Or

F.9

Select Set Image Comment from the pop-up menu in the


outer area of the program control.
Or

F.9

Select the icon for image comment and select Properties


from the context menu.
The Image Comment dialog box appears.

F.9

0.0

F.914

Operator Manual

Examination

Working with instruction areas

Type a comment in the input field.


Confirm your comment with OK.
The dialog box closes. All images to be acquired contain this
image comment.
F.9
Now position the mouse pointer over the image comment icon
to display the image text entered by you.
F.9

Inserting a new image comment

F.9

To assign a different image comment to subsequent program


instructions, proceed as follows:
F.9
F.9

Select the program instruction starting from which you want


to change the image comment.
Select Queue > Set Image Comment from the main menu.
Or

F.9

Select Set Image Comment from the pop-up menu in the


outer area of the program control.
The Image Comment dialog box appears.

F.9

Type the new text.


Click the OK button.
Another image comment icon is inserted in front of the program
instruction in the job list.
F.9

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.915

Working with instruction areas

Examination

Changing the image comment

F.9

You may change an existing comment for program instructions


that are still waiting to be processed.
F.9
Select the icon for image comment and select Properties
from the context menu.
The Image Comment dialog box appears.

F.9

Click the Delete button.


The input field for the image comment is cleared.

F.9

Enter a new text in the input field.


Or

F.9

Select the image comment in the input field and overwrite it.
Click the OK button.
The images acquired in subsequent protocols will include the
new image comment.
F.9
The current image comment will also be used if you repeat
protocols previously scanned with a different comment.

0.0

F.916

Operator Manual

Examination

Working with instruction areas

Deleting an image comment

F.9

An image comment can be deleted again if necessary.

F.9

Select the icon for the image comment with image text you
want to delete.
Select Delete from the context menu.
The image comment icon is removed from the job list of the program control.
F.9
Images acquired in subsequent protocols are assigned the previous image comment or stored without an image comment, if
none is available.
F.9

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.917

Working with instruction areas

Examination

0.0

F.918

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

F.10

Inline Display
You can use Inline Display for the following applications:

F.10

F.10

You are able to view the reconstructed images during scanning. This allows you to decide when to intervene in a scan
by checking the acquired images.
You can locate the required slice position and orientation of
a real-time protocol interactively using the space mouse.
Inline Display lets you trace contrast agent build-up in CARE
bolus scans before starting the high-resolution protocol.
You are able to trace the navigator signal (respiratory curve)
and start a multiple breath-hold scan.
You are able to monitor the MR spectrum and stop scanning
as soon as an adequate signal-to-noise ratio is attained.
You are able to filter the display of BOLD images to display
just the images of a certain slice.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.101

Inline Display

Examination

Starting Inline Display

F.10

You can start Inline Display manually or automatically. as well


as change the appearance and size of the Inline Display.
F.10
The display includes only images that are loaded automatically from the image calculation. It is not possible to load,
manual images into the Inline Display and then to page back
to previously displayed images.
You may start the Inline Display only if you have full access
rights to the data of the patient being scanned. Please refer
to information in,
Chapter B.3, Information for Users

Starting Inline Display


manually

Select View > Inline Display from the main menu.


F.10

Or

F.10

Click this button on the tool bar of the Exam card.


The Inline Display is displayed. Two views are possible: with
"frame" or without "frame".
Page F.106, Changing the Inline Display
F.10

If Frame on is activated, the image segment is displayed with


the title bar and several function keys.
F.10
The title bar shows the number of the program step. You can
move this window to a new position.
F.10

0.0

F.102

Operator Manual

Examination

Inline Display

Inline Display with frame:

F.10

(1) Scale bar


(2) Imaging area
(3) Control area with buttons
(4) Store Images On/Off button
(5) Save button
(6) Display Pause button
(7) Stop & Continue button
(8) Copy Image Position button
(9) Display Filter On/Off button
(10) Scan Breathhold button

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.103

Inline Display

Starting Inline Display


automatically

Examination

F.10

The Inline Display is automatically opened when a protocol with


the property Auto open Inline Display is about to run in the job
list.
Page F.1213, Opening Inline Display automatically
F.10
The Inline Display appears either with or without a "border",
depending on whether Frame on is activated or not. Without a
border, the Inline Display appears in the position of the right
GSP segment.
Page F.106, Changing the Inline Display
F.10

Inline Display without frame:

F.10

If Zoom/Pan On is deactivated, you can move the


Inline Display freely.
Page F.1014, Zooming and panning an image
F.10

0.0

F.104

Operator Manual

Examination

Inline Display

The Inline Display is closed as soon as the Inline movie option


is enabled in the protocol properties, and the program step has
been completed.
Page F.1715, Starting the movie display
F.10

Changing the protocol parameters (e.g. increasing the number


of coils by propagation) may deactivate the Inline Display as
indicated by the + sign in the protocol info line.

F.10

Display of the current


protocol

F.10

The number of the protocol steps as well as the images displayed in the Inline Display, appear on the Inline Display title bar
and as a tool tip in the bottom left corner of the Inline Display
(drag & drop area).
F.10

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.105

Inline Display

Examination

Changing the Inline Display

F.10

The Inline Display may be displayed with or without a border,


i.e. title bar and switching area.
F.10

Deselect Frame On in the pop-up menu of the Inline Display.


The Inline Display is displayed without a title bar and switching
area. It takes the position of the right-hand GSP segment. F.10
If Zoom/Pan On is deactivated, you can move the
Inline Display freely.
Page F.1014, Zooming and panning an image
F.10

To display the title bar and functional area again.

F.10

Select Frame On from the context menu.

0.0

F.106

Operator Manual

Examination

Inline Display

Setting the size of the Inline Display

F.10

You can set the size of the Inline Display freely or select one of
three predefined sizes.
F.10

Setting the size freely

F.10

Place the mouse pointer on the edge of the Inline Display.


Drag the Inline Display to the required size holding the left
mouse button down.
Image display is temporarily stopped while you drag the Inline
Display.
F.10

Selecting a predefined
size

F.10

You are able to select the following predefined sizes for the
Inline Display:
F.10
Inline
The Inline Display has the size of a GSP segment in the
three-segment layout.
Large
The Inline Display is as high as the monitor. This setting is
useful for examinations with intervention.
Full screen
The Inline Display fills the entire monitor.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.107

Inline Display

Examination

Make sure Zoom/Pan On mode is switched off in the pop-up


menu.
Switch between the predefined sizes Inline and Large by
double-clicking on the Inline Display with the left mouse button.
Or

F.10

Set the required size with Set Size in the pop-up menu.

Exit Full screen size again by pressing the Esc key.

Switching to another
task card

F.10

Inline Display closes if you switch to another task card (e.g.


Viewing).
F.10
If you return to the Exam task card, the Inline Display will be
open again with the same settings as applicable for manual
starting. Only the last Frame On setting is retained.

0.0

F.108

Operator Manual

Examination

Inline Display

Image display

F.10

Inline display shows the images in sequence, similar to a fast


slide show.
F.10
How reconstructed images are displayed depends on the
sequence used and the protocol settings:
F.10
If image calculation provides images very quickly, it may not
be possible to display all the images. In this case, you will
only see the most up-to-date image.
If the slices are scanned with interleaving, the Inline Display
will initially remain empty. The images are reconstructed only
when the data have been acquired.
Click the Display Pause On button.
Or

F.10

Select Display Pause On from the context menu.


The presentation pauses at the image currently displayed.

F.10

It is not possible to pause the display if automatic image storage is deactivated.


Page F.1210, Setting automatic saving and loading

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.109

Inline Display

Restarting image
display

Examination

F.10

You are able to resume image display at any time. The image
displayed next is the last one reconstructed. Images that have
been reconstructed since the display has been paused are no
longer available for Inline Display.
F.10
Click the Display Pause On button.
Or

F.10

Select Display Pause On from the context menu.


Image display continues.

F.10

0.0

F.1010

Operator Manual

Examination

Inline Display

Modifying image display

F.10

The images are transferred from image calculation using standardized window values and aspect ratios.
F.10
You can modify this image display: You may window, zoom, and
pan the images during Inline Display.
F.10
F.10

NOTE
If displayed very quickly on the Inline Display, your changes
may not be visible due to windowing, zooming, or
panning.
F.10
In this case, pause the display.

F.10

NOTE
The changed settings for image display in the Inline Display
are not stored.
F.10

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1011

Inline Display

Examination

Image windowing

F.10

Windowing with the center mouse button, allows you to modify


the brightness and contrast of the displayed image.
F.10
Position the mouse pointer on the image displayed in the
Inline Display.
Press and hold the center mouse button while dragging the
mouse up/down or right/left.
Or

F.10

Window by using these symbol keys on the symbol keypad


of your keyboard.

Windowing images up
to the end of the series

F.10

Using the mouse, you are able to automatically apply the new
window values of an image to subsequent images in the
respective series.
F.10
Select Window OnSucceeding On from the context menu.

0.0

F.1012

Operator Manual

Examination

Automatic image
Windowing

Inline Display

You can also assign automatic window values to the image.


F.10

F.10

Double-click the image currently displayed with the center


mouse button.
Page G.42, Windowing images
Or
Press this key on the symbol keypad.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1013

Inline Display

Examination

Zooming and panning an image

F.10

The images shown in Inline Display are shown to fit the segment size. You can change this display.
F.10
Select Zoom/Pan On from the pop-up menu.
Position the mouse pointer in the outer area of the image.
Hold the left mouse button down and drag the mouse pointer
up to enlarge the image or down to reduce the image.
Position the mouse pointer in the inner area of the image.
To pan the image contents, press and hold the left mouse
button and drag the mouse upward, downward, to the right,
or to the left.

Zooming images up to
the end of the series

F.10

You can change the menu settings so that the changes to the
visible image section are automatically applied to all images in
the series.
F.10
Select Zoom/Pan On Series from the pop-up menu.

Resetting changes

F.10

You can undo the zooming/panning in the Inline Display.

F.10

Double-click the image with the left mouse button.


The images are again fitted to the segment size.

F.10

0.0

F.1014

Operator Manual

Examination

Inline Display

Hiding image text

F.10

You can hide image text for improved viewing of reconstructed


images.
F.10

Deselect Image Text On in the context menu.


Image text is hidden on the transferred images.
F.10

You can show image text in the transferred images again.

F.10

Select Image Text On from the context menu.


When you restart image display, all subsequent images will be
shown with (or without) image text.

F.10

Removing an image

F.10

For example, if you have interrupted a scan and the image displayed last remains in the image area.
F.10
Right-click the Inline Display.
Select Clear Segment from the context menu.
The image currently displayed will be cleared from the image
area.
F.10

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1015

Inline Display

Examination

Saving images

F.10

The calculated images in Inline Display are usually automatically stored in the Patient Browser.
F.10
In some cases you may deactivate automatic storage and manually store single images from the Inline Display.
F.10

Automatic image storage

F.10

For each protocol, the system defines whether automatic


images storage may be switched off or not.
F.10
If automatic image storage is switched off, the images will be
deleted after initial display in the Inline Display.
F.10
For protocols involving offline image calculation (e.g. spectroscopy), automatic image storage is not possible.
F.10
For real-time scans, on the other hand, it makes sense to switch
off automatic image storage and just save single images manually.
F.10

0.0

F.1016

Operator Manual

Examination

Disabling automatic
image storage

Inline Display

F.10

You will disable automatic storage if the images are not necessary for diagnostic purposes (e.g., in case of real-time scans).
Page F.1210, Setting automatic saving and loading
F.10
Click the Store Images On/Off button.
Or

F.10

Deselect Auto store images in the context menu.


The images of your current scan are no longer stored. They are
only displayed in the Inline Display.
F.10
F.10

C AU T I O N
If you deactivate automatic storage, image data may be
lost!
F.10

Automatic image storage can be disabled for a current measurement only.


F.10

The Display Pause button is not available while automatic


image storage is disabled. In this case, you cannot pause
image display.
The Store Images On/Off button is disabled in case image
calculation is completed or the Auto store images option
cannot be deselected.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1017

Inline Display

Enabling automatic
image storage

Examination

F.10

If you require all images for diagnosis, you can enable automatic image storage.
F.10
Click the Store Images On/Off button in the Inline Display.
Or

F.10

Select Store Images On from the context menu.


When the Store Images On/Off button appears depressed,
images are automatically stored in the Patient Browser as they
are acquired.

F.10

Manual image storage

F.10

You can still store individual images manually when automatic


image storage is disabled.
F.10
Click the Save button.
The image currently displayed in the image area of the
Inline Display will be saved.
F.10
If the Inline Display does not contain an image, the Save button is not available.

0.0

F.1018

Operator Manual

Examination

Inline Display

Copying the image position

F.10

You are able to copy the slice position and orientation of the current image in Inline Display to the protocol opened in the program control.
F.10
This position and orientation are then transferred to the
selected graphic object of the opened protocol. If no graphic
object is selected, the position and orientation will be transferred to the first slice group of the protocol.
F.10
The slice position and orientation are also stored in a buffer.

F.10

If no protocol is open, the slice position and orientation will


remain in the buffer. You can transfer these settings to another
protocol later with Image Tools > Paste Image Position.
F.10

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1019

Inline Display

Copying the image


position via button

Examination

F.10

Click the Copy Image Position button.


Or

F.10

Select Copy Image Position from the context menu.


You may select Copy Image Position as many times as
required. The buffer contents will be overwritten.

Copying the image


position via drag & drop

The prerequisite for this step is an open protocol.

F.10

F.10

Place the mouse pointer on the bottom left corner of the


Inline Display (drag & drop area).
Drag & drop image position of the current image into the
GSP segment.
The current slice position and orientation will be copied to the
open protocol.
F.10

0.0

F.1020

Operator Manual

Examination

Inline Display

Selective image display (BOLD)

F.10

With respect to BOLD, it is sometimes useful to only display a


certain slice in the Inline Display (instead of having all images
displayed).
F.10
The slice is selected by image number.
Page F.667, Numbering of reconstructed images
F.10

Click the Display Filter button to enable image display


selection.
When the button is selected, a field is shown that lets you select
the slice to be displayed.
F.10
Enter the number of the slice to have the images displayed.
Use the arrow buttons to change the slice number during scanF.10
ning.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1021

Inline Display

Examination

Interactive scanning in real-time


mode (optional)

F.10

Your system contains various protocols that support real-time


mode similar to fluoroscopy.
F.10
When performing scans in this mode, you are able to use the
space mouse to continuously change slice position and orientation.
F.10
This allows you to interactively locate a slice of interest and
transfer its position and orientation to another (high-resolution)
scan protocol.
F.10
Interactive scans in real-time mode run as continuous loops.
After locating the desired slice position and orientation, you
may close the scan in the program control.
F.10

0.0

F.1022

Operator Manual

Examination

Interactive scanning
procedure

Inline Display

F.10

Select a real-time protocol from the program card.


Page F.24, Selecting a scan program
Transfer the protocol to the program control.
Page F.27, Transferring a scan program to the program
control
Set automatic opening of Inline Display in the protocol properties.
Page F.1210, Setting automatic saving and loading
Deselect the Auto store images option on the Auto load
subtask card in the protocol properties.
Prepare the protocol for scanning.
Page F.41, Positioning Slices,
Page F.51, Adjusting Measurement Parameters.
Click Apply in the program control to start the protocol.
View the first reconstructed images in the Inline Display.
The slice position and orientation specified here are the initial
values that you are changing interactively during scanning. F.10

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1023

Inline Display

Examination

Vary the slice position and orientation during scanning by


moving the space mouse.
Refer to the System Manual
The new slice position and orientation are already applied to the
following reconstructed images. Once a suitable slice is displayed, you may apply the image position.
F.10
Click the Copy Image Position button.
Page F.1019, Copying the image position
Click the Stop button in the program control.
Scanning stops.
F.10

As a next step, you prepare the high-resolution protocol. Copy


the slice position and orientation of the real-time protocol from
the buffer.
F.10
Select Image Tools > Paste Image Position.
Page F.486, Transferring the position of reference images

0.0

F.1024

Operator Manual

Examination

Inline Display

Inline Display for CARE Bolus


scans

F.10

The Inline Display allows you to check acquired images while


scanning is in progress. This is especially helpful in cases
where you may want to stop the current scan and continue with
the next scan, e.g. during contrast agent scans where you are
monitoring the uptake of contrast agent. As soon as the contrast agent becomes visible in the image, you may immediately
proceed to the next high-resolution sequence.
F.10

Place the keyboard focus (dashed border) on the Stop /


Continue button.
Page F.319, Keyboard focus
Press the spacebar or the Enter key.
Or

F.10

Click the Stop / Continue button in the Inline Display.


Or

F.10

Press the F12 key.


The scan in progress stops and the following scan starts immediately.
F.10
F.10

NOTE
Using the keyboard provides you with the advantage of
focussing on the Inline Display instead of the mouse
pointer.
F.10

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1025

Inline Display

Examination

Starting multiple breath-hold


scans

F.10

A multiple breath-hold protocol is started in the Inline Display


and run in several steps.
F.10
After positioning the slices in GSP, you can define the number
of breath-hold intervals by entering the Concatenations. The
acquisition time required for each breath-hold interval is displayed as a tool tip in the information line below the image area.F.10
Tool tip

After each breath-hold command, the image rows of the slices


belonging to one concatenation are measured.
Page P.131, Excitation sequence of slices
F.10
You are starting by scanning each concatenation (=breath-hold
interval) from the Inline Display. With navigator protocols, you
can also observe the respiratory movement of the diaphragm in
the Inline Display.
F.10

Prepare a navigator protocol for scanning. Select a mode for


Respiratory Control and include a preparation phase
(Scout mode).
Page P.121, Navigator  Geometry Navigator
Open the Inline Display.
Click Apply in the program control to start the protocol.

0.0

F.1026

Operator Manual

Examination

Inline Display

The position of the diaphragm (navigator signal) is displayed as


a function of time in the Inline Display.
F.10
F.10

Follow the respiratory curve on the Inline Display.


Apply the breath-hold command.
Click the Scan Breathhold button.
Scanning starts.

F.10

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1027

Inline Display

Examination

TIP
If the keyboard focus (dashed border) is on the Scan
Breathhold button, you may want to press the spacebar to
start scanning.
F.10

Navigator signals are not recorded during scanning. After the


slices of the first concatenation have been scanned, the navigator signal is scanned and displayed again.
F.10
The diaphragm position during the "first" scan is indicated by a
yellow line.
F.10
Apply the command to breathe again.
The patient should draw several normal breaths.

F.10

Apply the breath-hold command to scan the image lines of


the next concatenation and click the Scan Breathhold button again.
Or

F.10

Press the F12 key.

0.0

F.1028

Operator Manual

Examination

Inline Display

To stop the multiple breathhold scans.

F.10

Click the Stop button in the program control.


The results of all slices that have been scanned are stored. Partially scanned slices are lost.
F.10
F.10

NOTE
When you cancel a protocol with multiple Scans, all images
from the current scan are lost.
F.10

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1029

Inline Display

Examination

Display of the spectroscopy time


signal

F.10

You may use the Inline Display to track the MR spectrum while
a scan is in progress. The current and accumulated spectroscopy data are displayed as a vector graphic in the Inline Display
window.
F.10
F.10

For spectroscopy sequences, the Store Images On/Off button is not available, because it is not possible to deselect the
Auto store images option in the protocol properties.

0.0

F.1030

Operator Manual

Examination

Inline Display

Ending Inline Display

F.10

The Inline Display can be ended either manually or automatically.


F.10

Ending Inline Display


manually

F.10

When you close Inline Display, you are no longer able to view
reconstructed images or graphics of a scan (online or offline).F.10
Click the Close Window button in the top right corner of the
Inline Display.
Or

F.10

Click the Inline Display button again on the tool bar of the
Exam task card.
Or

F.10

Press Alt + F4 on your keyboard.


Or

F.10

Select Close Inline Display from the context menu.


The Inline Display is closed.

F.10

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1031

Inline Display

Ending Inline Display


automatically

Examination

F.10

In the pop-up menu, you can set that the Inline Display will
close automatically as soon as image calculation has been
completed.
F.10

Select Close after measurement from the pop-up menu.


The Inline Display closes as soon as the current image calculaF.10
tion has finished.
You can also deactivate this setting.

F.10

Deselect Close after measurement in the pop-up menu.

If reconstruction of a protocol has been completed with the


Inline movie option, the Inline Display automatically closes
and movie display starts.
The Inline Display is automatically cleared when protocol
reconstruction is complete and a new scan protocol has been
enabled.

0.0

F.1032

Operator Manual

Examination

Inline Display

Tips on optimum performance with


real-time scans

F.10

Check whether one or two receiver coils are connected.


Deactivate the image text display.
Switch off auto image storage.
The images from this scan are not stored in the Patient
Browser.
Finish all other processes, e.g. archiving and sending.
Optimize the protocol parameters, e.g., minimize TE and TR,
reduce phase-encoding steps, and deactivate fat saturation.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1033

Inline Display

Examination

0.0

F.1034

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

F.11

Patient instructions

F.11

Two essential factors in obtaining useful MR images are patient


communication and cooperation.
F.11
Patient information and instructions are given during an examination by means of manual or automatic voice outputs, e.g.
breathing control instructions.
F.11
Sample files for voice outputs are supplied in two languages
with your system. You may record additional voice outputs in
various languages. You can assign these voice recordings to a
protocol as a property. This allows you to automate communication with the patient. You are also able to play back these
voice outputs manually without reference to a scan.
F.11
Voice outputs are not suitable for patient instructions with
multiple scans, e.g. multi-breathhold BOLD.
Voice output

F.11

A single spoken instruction to the patient. Instructions are available in various languages.
F.11

Label

F.11

A unique name for each voice output. The label is displayed in


the selection list and is used to identify a voice output.
F.11

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.111

Patient instructions

Examination

Do not confuse voice outputs with music played to the patient.


The intercom has a separate input for connecting a CD player,
radio, etc.
F.11
F.11

N OT E
Never insert a commercial music CD into the CD drive of
the host computer. The copy protection on the CDs could
cause the system to crash and damage the drive.
F.11

When using automatic voice outputs to give instructions to the


patient, it is advisable not to play music at the same time.
F.11

0.0

F.112

Operator Manual

Examination

Patient instructions

Playing back an existing voice


output

F.11

For many examinations it is important to instruct the patient


before and/or after the scan (e.g. to breathe in and hold his
breath). Existing voice outputs may be played back manually or
automatically. You may also set the volume for the voice output
and play back the patient instructions either in the control room
or in both the control as well as the examination room.
Page F.1111, Changing the volume
Page F.1112, CV/CBT switch
F.11

Select Joblist > Voice Output > Play... or select Voice Output from the context menu of the program control.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.113

Patient instructions

Examination

The Voice Output dialog box opens.

F.11

F.11

Existing voice outputs are marked with a loudspeaker icon and


indicate the playback duration. The language of the label does
not correspond to the set language.
F.11
The dialog will open only if no scan is active.

0.0

F.114

Operator Manual

Examination

Patient instructions

Playing back patient instructions manually

F.11

Voice outputs are available in several languages. They can be


played back as often as necessary and at any time. This may
be helpful, e.g. to familiarize patients with the sound.
F.11
Patient instructions can be played back before and after but
not during a scan.
The language in the Voice Outputs dialog box is the default
setting. You may select a different language from the selection
list.
F.11

Select the language from the Language selection list.

Select the voice output, e.g. "Continue breathing", from the


Instruction selection list.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.115

Patient instructions

Examination

Click the Play button to play back the voice output.


The patient hears the instructions in the examination room via
headphones or loudspeakers.
F.11

Pausing a voice output

F.11

You can stop if you do not want to play back an entire voice output or have selected the wrong voice output.
F.11
Click the STOP button.
Playback of the voice output stops.

F.11

0.0

F.116

Operator Manual

Examination

Patient instructions

Automatic playback of a voice output

F.11

If you want to play back voice outputs automatically before and/


or after a scan, the required voice outputs have to be referenced
to the protocol.
F.11
The voice outputs are integrated

F.11

via the protocol properties during program set-up in the


Exam Explorer
Or

F.11

in the program control during the examination


Page F.129, Playing back voice output
When a protocol with reference voice output is ready to run or
if you have integrated patient instructions for automatic playback via the protocol properties, the voice output will be played
back automatically. If the referenced voice output does not
exist, a message box appears. In that case, acknowledge this
message box and give your instructions via the intercom system.
Page F.655, Program instruction with a patient instructionF.11

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.117

Patient instructions

Examination

Setting playback of voice outputs

F.11

You can adjust the voice outputs to the individual requirements


of a patient, i.e. by selecting the language and adjusting the volume.
F.11
If your system is not able to play back voice outputs, the Test
selection list and the Play button will not be active.

Select Patient > Voice Output Properties.


Or

F.11

Right-click the name of the patient in the program control and


select Voice Output Properties from the context menu.
The Voice Output Properties dialog box opens.

F.11

0.0

F.118

Operator Manual

Examination

Changing the language


for the current patient

Patient instructions

F.11

Voice outputs should be played back in a language the patient


can understand.
F.11

Select the language, e.g. English (United States), from the


Patient Primary Language selection list.
If the Set as Default checkbox is not clicked, the language
entered in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output dialog
box will be used again for the next patient.
F.11
You can only select from the languages that are available on
your system. It is not possible to add new languages.
F.11

N OT E
It is not possible to change the patient language once
scanning has started.

F.11

You may record voice outputs in other languages.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.119

Patient instructions

Changing the default


language setting

Examination

F.11

You can use the same newly selected language again for the
next patients.
F.11
Click the Set as Default checkbox to save the selected language as the default language.
The changed default language setting will become the default
in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output dialog box.
F.11

You can redefine the default language in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output dialog box.
Page F.1129, Configuring voice output
F.11

The default language for patient instructions does not have to


be the same as the language of the user interface.

0.0

F.1110

Operator Manual

Examination

Changing the volume

Patient instructions

F.11

The volume of voice outputs is also preset in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output configuration window. You may
change the volume set in the Voice Output Properties dialog
box.
F.11

Move the Volume slider to the right to increase the volume


for voice output, or to the left to decrease it.

Testing the voice output

F.11

After you have selected the language and set the volume, you
are able to select and play back a voice output for test purposes.
F.11

Select a voice output from the Test selection list.


Click the Play button.
The selected voice output will be played back.

F.11

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1111

Patient instructions

CV/CBT switch

Examination

F.11

Use the toggle switch on the intercom system to select whether


the patient instructions will be played back in the control room
only or in both the control as well as the examination room. F.11
Push the CV/CBT toggle switch on the intercom system
toward CBT.
The patient instructions will be played back in the control room
only.
F.11
This may be useful to test, for example, voice outputs right
after you have recorded them.
Or

F.11

Push the CV/CBT toggle switch on the intercom system


toward CV.
The patient instructions will be played back in the control as well
as the examination room.
F.11
The toggle switch must be set to CV during examinations.

0.0

F.1112

Operator Manual

Examination

Patient instructions

Recording and editing voice


outputs

F.11

Patient instructions may be recorded or edited only if no patient


is currently registered.
F.11
Select Patient > Close Patient from the main menu of the
Exam task card.
Or

F.11

Select the name of the patient in the program control with a


right-click and select Close Patient from the context menu.
Page F.620, Closing a patient
Select Joblist > Voice Outputs > Organize.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1113

Patient instructions

Examination

The Organize Voice Outputs dialog box opens.

F.11

(1) Default voice output (black)


(2) User-defined voice output (blue)

0.0

F.1114

Operator Manual

Examination

Patient instructions

Recording a new voice output

F.11

The files available on your system are shown with a loudspeaker icon in the Instruction selection list in the Organize
Voice Outputs dialog box. You may record additional instructions, if required.
F.11

Creating a voice output

F.11

To create a new voice output, you first have to create a label for
the instructions and then start recording.
F.11
Select the language for the new instructions in the Organize
Voice Outputs dialog box.
Click the New button in the Organize Voice Output dialog
box.
The Edit Label dialog box is displayed. The input field is empty.F.11

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1115

Patient instructions

Examination

Enter a name for the new voice output.


The name for the new label cannot be more than 31 characters long and must start with a letter
(a to z or A to Z). The following characters cannot be used: ?,
", *, |, :, \, /, >, <.
Confirm with the OK button.
The Edit Label dialog box closes and the newly created voice
output is appended to the end of the Label selection list in the
Organize Voice Outputs dialog box.
F.11
The label for the new voice output is now available in all languages and the voice output can be recorded in any other language necessary.

User-defined voice outputs are blue in the Label selection


list.

0.0

F.1116

Operator Manual

Examination

Recording a new voice


output

Patient instructions

F.11

To record a voice output you will need to use both the Record
Voice dialog box and your system's intercom.
F.11
Click the Record button in the Organize Voice Output dialog box.
The Record Voice dialog box opens.

F.11

The dialog box shows the language selected in Organize Voice


Output and the label of the voice output that is being recorded.F.11
If your MRC has a volume indicator, the dialog box will contain
an additional bar for monitoring the volume.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1117

Patient instructions

Examination

Press the Talk button on the intercom system and hold it


pressed.

Click the Record button in the Record Voice dialog box to


activate recording mode.
Speak the new instruction into the built-in microphone.
The duration is displayed during recording.

F.11

A voice output can be up to 30 seconds long.


F.11

N OT E
To ensure good recording quality, we recommend
maintaining a distance of 30 cm from the microphone and
speaking in a normal voice. You can also adjust the
recording volume with the Record Volume slider during
configuration. The volume slider in the exam room has no
effect on the recording volume.
F.11

Press the STOP button in the Record Voice dialog box to


stop recording.
Release the Talk button on the intercom.

0.0

F.1118

Operator Manual

Examination

Patient instructions

Click Close to close the dialog box.


The newly recorded voice output will now appear in the selection list of the Organize Voice Outputs dialog box with its playback time and the loudspeaker icon.
F.11

Proceed in this sequence to avoid unwanted noise at the


beginning and end of the recording.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1119

Patient instructions

Testing a new voice


output

Examination

F.11

You can play back the new patient instructions after recording
the voice output to test comprehensibility.
F.11
After the recording the Play button will be active.

F.11

Click the Play button.


The voice output is played back.

F.11

Voice outputs are played back through the loudspeakers or


headphones (set with the CBT/CV switch) both in the control
and the examination rooms, just as they would be during an
examination.
F.11
Click the STOP button to stop playback of the voice output.

0.0

F.1120

Operator Manual

Examination

Patient instructions

Changing a voice output

F.11

If an existing voice output does not meet your requirements, you


can record a new one in its place.
F.11

Editing a voice output

F.11

Select the instructions to be modified from the Labels selection list in the Organize Voice Outputs dialog box.

F.11

Click the Record button.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1121

Patient instructions

Examination

If you select existing instructions to record over, the Confirm


Recording message box appears.
F.11

Click the Yes button.


The Record Voice dialog box opens.

F.11

You can now record the patient instructions.


Page F.1117, Recording a new voice output

F.11

0.0

F.1122

Operator Manual

Examination

Patient instructions

Reordering voice outputs

F.11

Manual playback of patient instructions is much easier if the


instructions are already organized in the correct order. This
enables you to access voice outputs quickly and helps prevent
mistakes.
F.11

Select the voice output from the Instruction selection list in


the Organize Voice Outputs dialog box.
Click the Up button to move a selected voice output up in the
selection list.
Or

F.11

Click the Down button to move a selected voice output down


in the selection list.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1123

Patient instructions

Examination

Deleting user-defined voice outputs

F.11

When you no longer require a voice output, you can delete it.
However, remember that voice outputs may have been linked to
program instructions for automatic playback. If the deleted
voice output does not exist when a protocol is running, a message appears and you have to deliver the patient instructions
via the intercom system.
F.11
It is not possible to delete standard pre-installed voice outputs.

Deleting a voice output


from the current language F.11

In the Organize Voice Output dialog box, select the voice


output to be deleted from the Instruction selection list.

0.0

F.1124

Operator Manual

Examination

Patient instructions

Click the Delete button


The button is only active if a voice output exists for the
selected instruction, i.e. it is marked with a loudspeaker icon.
The Confirm Delete message box will appear.

F.11

Click the Yes button.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1125

Patient instructions

Examination

The loudspeaker icon in front of the label disappears and the


voice output is no longer available in the selected language.
Deleting voice outputs in the current language does not automatically delete them in other languages (if available).
F.11

0.0

F.1126

Operator Manual

Examination

Deleting a voice output


from all languages

Patient instructions

F.11
F.11

In the Organize voice output dialog box, select the voice


output to be deleted from the Instruction selection list.
Click the Delete button
The button is not active, if a default instruction is selected.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1127

Patient instructions

Examination

The Confirm Delete message box will appear.

F.11

Click the Yes button.


The voice output will be deleted from all languages and the
label will be removed from the selection list.
F.11

N OT E
The changes you make in the Organize Voice Outputs
dialog box are implemented immediately. It is not possible
to undo them.
F.11

0.0

F.1128

Operator Manual

Examination

Patient instructions

Configuring voice output

F.11

You can configure the voice output in the Voice Output Properties dialog box or in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output dialog box.
F.11
The settings in the Voice Output Properties dialog box only
apply to the current patient.
Page F.118, Setting playback of voice outputs
F.11
The settings in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output dialog box are global. These defaults will be used when all patients
are registered.
F.11
You are able to perform the following settings:

F.11

Preselection of patient language


Volume
Select Options > Configuration.
The NUMARIS/4 - Configuration Panel dialog box opens.

F.11

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1129

Patient instructions

Examination

Double-click the Examination icon.


The Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output box opens.

F.11

0.0

F.1130

Operator Manual

Examination

Selecting the patient


language

Patient instructions

F.11

Voice outputs should be played back in a language the patient


can understand. The language used by most patients should be
set as the default language of your system.
F.11

Select the language from the Patient Primary Language


selection list.
You can only select from the languages that are available on
your system. It is not possible to add new languages.
F.11

Setting the output


volume

You can set the volume for playback of voice outputs.

F.11

F.11

Move the Playback Volume slider to the right to increase the


volume for voice output playback, or to the left to decrease it.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1131

Patient instructions

Examination

Testing the selected voice


output
F.11

After you have selected the language and set the volume, you
are able to select and play back a voice output for test purposes.
F.11

Select a voice output from the Test selection list.


Then click the Play button.
The selected voice output will be played back.
F.11

Setting the recording


volume

F.11

You can set the volume for playback of the voice outputs you
have recorded.
F.11

Move the Record Volume slider to the right to increase the


volume for recording voice outputs, or to the left to decrease
it.

0.0

F.1132

Operator Manual

Examination

Closing the dialog box

Patient instructions

F.11

After you have entered your settings, you may save them.

F.11

Click the OK button.


All settings will be saved.

F.11

Or

F.11

Click Cancel.
The Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output box closes. All
settings remain unchanged.
F.11

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.1133

Patient instructions

Examination

0.0

F.1134

Operator Manual

CHAPTER

F.12

Protocol and Pause


Properties

F.12

The protocols and pauses are characterized by numerous properties.


F.12
These properties include, e.g. their name, comment, copy references, start properties, and automatic loading of scanned
images into other task cards.
F.12
You can change the properties of protocols and pauses to influence how an examination is performed and evaluated.
F.12
You can adjust the properties of the pending protocols and
pauses during an examination.
F.12

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.121

Protocol and Pause Properties

Examination

Editing protocol properties

F.12

The properties of a protocol is changed in the Protocol Step


Properties dialog box. You can call this dialog box from the
Exam Explorer or from the job list.
F.12

Calling from the Exam


Explorer

Select a protocol in the Exam Explorer.


F.12

Select Edit > Properties from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or

F.12

Select Properties from the context menu.


Or

F.12

Click this button on the tool bar.


Or

F.12

Press the shortcut Alt + Enter on your keyboard.


The Protocol step properties dialog box opens.

F.12

0.0

F.122

Operator Manual

Examination

Calling from the job list

Protocol and Pause Properties

F.12

Select the pending protocol from the job list.


Select Edit > Properties from the main menu.
Or

F.12

Select Properties from the context menu.


Or

F.12

Press the shortcut Alt + Enter on your keyboard.


The Protocol step properties dialog box opens.
F.12

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.123

Protocol and Pause Properties

Examination

Entering a protocol name

F.12

When you first open the Protocol step properties dialog box,
the Standard card is in the foreground. Enter a name and
description for the protocol on this card.
F.12
Give the protocol a unique name. The name of the protocol is
used as a series description for the images acquired with this
protocol and is shown, for example, in the Patient Browser. A
unique name should also clarify the function that the protocol
has in the scan program.
F.12

Enter a descriptive name for the protocol.

Add a description to the name, if necessary.


If you place the mouse pointer over a protocol entry in the
Exam Explorer or program control, a tool tip shows you the
name of the protocol and the respective comment.

0.0

F.124

Operator Manual

Examination

Protocol and Pause Properties

Defining start options

F.12

Before scanning, you normally have to position the graphic


objects defined in the protocol to make them match the anatomy of the patient. Only localizers and protocols not requiring
exact positioning can be started immediately (automatically). F.12
You can set the following start options on the Execution card: F.12
Starting a protocol without further preparation
Starting a protocol manually, once or several times
Automatically playing back a voice output before/after scanning
Go to the Execution subtask card.

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.125

Protocol and Pause Properties

Starting scanning with /


without preparation

F.12

Examination

You will normally check the parameters and slice positioning of


the protocol before each scan.
F.12
Deselect the Start measurement without further preparation checkbox.
The protocol will be marked with a construction worker icon.

F.12

A protocol marked with a construction worker icon has the


status "incomplete" and cannot be started automatically by
the system.

Localizers are normally started immediately without checking


the parameters and slice positioning.
F.12
Select the Start measurement without further preparation checkbox.
The construction worker icon is removed.

F.12

A protocol without a construction worker icon has the status


"complete" and is started automatically as soon as it reaches
its turn in the queue.

0.0

F.126

Operator Manual

Examination

Starting scanning
manually

Protocol and Pause Properties

F.12

A protocol run is performed in three steps. 1) adjustments are


performed, 2) data are acquired, and 3) the images are reconstructed either afterward or at the same time.
F.12
For some examinations (e.g. protocols with breath-hold commands), it is better to set manual starting. In this case, the system will pause following adjustment. You can then give the
breath-hold command and start the scan manually.
Page F.621, Starting a protocol manually
F.12

Check the Wait for user to start checkbox.


If you have recorded an appropriate voice output on your system, you can perform this type of examination without manual
starting.
Page F.129, Playing back voice output

0.0

syngo MR 2006T

F.127

Protocol and Pause Properties

Running a protocol once/


more than once
F.12

Examination

After you change the means of starting the protocol to manual,


you can also define whether to start the protocol once or several
times in succession.
F.12

Click the single measurement option.


Protocols set to run once only are marked in the scan program
with a "flagman with one flag" icon.
F.12

Multiple loading and starting of protocols is used, for example,


for examinations with contrast agent.
F.12
Click the multiple measurement option.
Protocols that can be loaded and run more than once are
marked in the scan program with a "flagman with several flags"
icon.
F.12
Prior to each new scan, a dialog box is displayed allowing you
to start the protocol.
F.12

0.0

F.128

Operator Manual

Examination

Playing back voice


output

Protocol and Pause Properties

F.12

Communicating with patients is an essential part of an examination. You need to tell the patient when scanning starts and
ends and give instructions such as breath-hold command